Relay method and relay device

A relay method, a relay device

0001This application is based on (1) application for patent 2011-093539 submitted in Japan, (2) application for patent 2011-102099, (3) application for patent 2011-118453, (4) application for patent 2011-140747, and (5) application for patent 2011-192123. For this reason, the contents of these applications are used.<br />Especially the present invention relates to the Puri coding method, the Precoding device, the transmission method, the sending set, receiving method, and receiving set which perform communication which used the multi-antenna.

0002Conventionally, there is a correspondence procedure called MIMO (Multiple-Input Multiple-Output) as a correspondence procedure using a multi-antenna. In the multi-antenna communication represented by MIMO, the send data of two or more series is modulated, respectively, and transmitting each abnormal-conditions signal simultaneously from a different antenna raises the transmission speed of data.

0003Drawing 28 shows an example of the composition of the transceiving equipment at the several 2 time of two transmitting antennas, two receiving antennas, and a transmitting abnormal-conditions signal (transmitting stream). In a sending set, interleave of the coded data is carried out, the data after interleave is modulated, frequency conversion etc. are performed, a transmitted signal is generated, and a transmitted signal is transmitted from an antenna. The method which an abnormal-conditions signal which is different from a transmitting antenna, respectively transmits to the same frequency at the same time at this time is a spatial multiplexing MIMO method.

0004At this time, the sending set possessing a different interleave pattern for every transmitting antenna is proposed with patent documents 1. That is, in the sending set of Drawing 28, two interleave (pia, pib) will have a mutually different interleave pattern. And in a receiving set, receiving quality will improve by repeating the detection method (MIMO detector in Drawing 28) using a soft value, and performing it as shown in nonpatent literature 1 and nonpatent literature 2.<br />By the way, the NLOS (non-line of sight) environment represented in a Rayleigh phasing environment and the LOS (line of sight) environment represented in a rice phasing environment exist as a model of the real propagation environment in wireless communications. The abnormal-conditions signal of a single is transmitted in a sending set, and the maximum ratio composition is performed to the signal received with a plurality of antennas in the receiving set, When performing recovery and decoding to the signal after the maximum ratio composition, good receiving quality can be obtained in the LOS environment and the environment where the rice factor which shows the size of a direct group's received power to the received power of a dispersion wave especially is large. However, for example, in a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method, if a rice factor becomes large, the problem that receiving quality deteriorates will occur. (Refer to nonpatent literature 3)<br />(A) of Drawing 29 and (B) are set by Rayleigh phasing environment, rice factor K= 3, and rice phasing environment of 10 or 16 dB, It is the data by which LDPC (low-densityparity-check) coding was carried out 2x2 (2 antenna transmission) An example of the simulation result of the BER (Bit Error Rate) characteristic (vertical axis: BER, horizontal-axis:SNR (signal-to-noise power ratio)) at the time of carrying out 2 antenna receiving spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission is shown. Max-log-APP (refer to nonpatent literature 1 and nonpatent literature 2) (APP:a posterior) to which (A) of Drawing 29 does not perform repetitive detection (B) of the BER characteristic of probability and Drawing 29 shows the BER characteristic of Max-log-APP (refer to nonpatent literature 1 and nonpatent literature 2) (five number of times of repetition) which performed repetitive detection. As shown in Drawing 29 (A) and (B), whether it does not perform or perform repetitive detection, if a rice factor becomes large, in a spatial multiplexing MIMO system, it can check that receiving quality deteriorates. This shows having a subject peculiar to a spatial multiplexing MIMO system which is not in the system which transmits the abnormal-conditions signal of the conventional single "receiving quality will deteriorate in a spatial multiplexing MIMO system if propagation environment becomes stable."

0005Broadcast and multicasting communication are services to the user within a prospect, and the electric wave propagation environment between the receiver and broadcasting station which a user possesses is the LOS environment in many cases. When a spatial multiplexing MIMO system with the above-mentioned subject is used for broadcast or multicasting communication, although the received field intensity of an electric wave is high, in a receiver, the phenomenon in which degradation of receiving quality cannot receive service may occur. That is, in order to use a spatial multiplexing MIMO system by broadcast or multicasting communication, in which [ of the NLOS environment and the LOS environment ] case, development of the MIMO transmission method with which a certain amount of receiving quality is obtained is desired.<br />Although how to choose from the feedback information from a communication partner the code book (Precoding procession) used for Precoding is described by nonpatent literature 8, As mentioned above, in the situation where the feedback information from a communication partner is not acquired, the method of performing Precoding is not indicated at all like broadcast or multicasting communication.

0006On the other hand, the method of changing a Precoding procession with time which can apply also when there is no feedback information is described by nonpatent literature 4. Although using a unitary matrix and changing a unitary matrix at random are described as a procession used for Precoding by this literature, About the application method for degradation of the receiving quality in the LOS environment shown above, it is not indicated at all and only changing at random is indicated. Although it is natural, no description about the Puri coding method for improving degradation of the receiving quality of the LOS environment and the constitution method of a Precoding procession is carried out.

<p num="0007"><patcit num="1"><text>International publication 2005th / No. 050885</text></patcit></p>

<p num="0008"><nplcit num="1"><text>"Achieving near-capacity on a multiple-antenna channel"IEEE Transaction on communications, vol.51, no.3, pp.389-399, March 2003.</text></nplcit><nplcit num="2"><text>"Performance analysis and design optimization of LDPC-coded MIMO OFDM systems"IEEE Trans. Signal Processing., vol.52, no.2, pp.348-361, Feb. 2004.</text></nplcit><nplcit num="3"><text>"BER performance evaluation in 2x2 MIMO spatial multiplexing systems under Rician fading channels,"IEICE Trans. Fundamentals, vol.E91-A, no.10, pp.2798-2807, Oct. 2008.</text></nplcit><nplcit num="4"><text>"Turbo space-time codes with time varying linear transformations, "IEEE Trans. Wireless communications, vol.6, no.2, pp.486-493, Feb. 2007.</text></nplcit><nplcit num="5"><text>"Likelihood function for QR-MLD suitable for soft-decision turbo decoding and its performance,"IEICE Trans. Commun., vol.E88-B, no.1, pp.47-57, Jan. 2004.</text></nplcit><nplcit num="6"><text>The "guidepost: [ to a Shannon limit ] "Parallel concatenated (Turbo) coding", "Turbo (iterative) decoding", and its circumference" Institute of Electronics, Information and Communication Engineers, Shingaku Giho IT98-51</text></nplcit><nplcit num="7"><text>"Advanced signal processing for PLCs : Wavelet-OFDM, "Proc. of IEEE International symposium on ISPLC 2008, pp.187-192, 2008.</text></nplcit><nplcit num="8"><text>D. J. Love, and R. W. heath, Jr., "Limited feedback unitary precoding for spatial multiplexing systems,"IEEE Trans. Inf.Theory, vol.51, no.8, pp.2967-2976, Aug. 2005.</text></nplcit><nplcit num="9"><text>DVB Document A122, Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for a second generation digital terrestrial television broadcasting syste,m (DVB-T2), June 2008.</text></nplcit><nplcit num="10"><text>L. Vangelista, N. Benvenuto, and S. Tomasin, "Key technologies for next-generation terrestrial digital television standard DVB-T2,"IEEE Commun. Magazine, vo.47,no.10, pp.146-153, Oct. 2009.</text></nplcit><nplcit num="11"><text>T. Ohgane, T. Nishimura, and Y. Ogawa, "Application of space division multiplexing and those performance in a MIMO channel,"IEICE Trans. Commun., vo.88-B, no.5,pp.1843-1851, May 2005.</text></nplcit><nplcit num="12"><text>R. *G.*Gallager and *"Low-densityparity-checkcodes" *IRE*Trans.*Inform.*Theory, *IT-8, *pp-21-28-1962.</text></nplcit><nplcit num="13"><text>D. *J.*C.*Mackay and *"Gooderror-correctingcodesbased*on*very*sparse*matrices" IEEETrans.Inform.Theory, *vol.45, *no.2, *pp399-431,*March1999.</text></nplcit><nplcit num="14"><text>ETSIEN*302*307, *"Secondgenerationframing*structure,channel*coding*and*modulation*systems*forbroadcasting,interactive* services, newsgathering*and*other*broadband*satelliteapplications, *"v.1.1.2, *June*2006.</text></nplcit><nplcit num="15"><text>Y.-L.*Ueng,*and*C.-C.*Cheng, * "a*fast-convergence*decodingmethod*and*memory-efficient*VLSIdecoderarchitecture*for*irregular*LDPC*codesin*the*IEEE*802.16 e*standards, "*IEEE*VTC-2007*Fall, pp.1255-1259.</text></nplcit></p>

<p num="0009">An object of the present invention is to provide the MIMO system which can improve the receiving quality in the LOS environment.</p>

<p num="0010">The Puri coding method which starts the present invention in order to solve this subject, From the signal based on the selected modulation method of the plurality denoted by the in-phase component and a rectangular ingredient, respectively, It is the Puri coding method which generates the Precoding(ed) signal of the plurality simultaneously transmitted to the same frequency band, It chooses, while changing one Precoding weight procession regularly out of a plurality of Precoding weight processions, A plurality of Precoding(ed) above-mentioned signals are generated by multiplying the Precoding weight procession chosen [ above-mentioned ] to the signal based on a plurality of above-mentioned selected modulation methods, The Puri coding method by which a plurality of above-mentioned Precoding weight processions are denoted using positive real number alpha and which are nine processions of a formula (339) - a formula (347) (it mentions below for details).</p><p num="0011">According to each mode of the above-mentioned present invention, the signal Precoding(ed) by one selected Precoding weight procession is transmitted and received, changing regularly out of a plurality of Precoding weight processions, Since the Precoding weight procession used for Precoding serves as either of a plurality of Precoding weight processions decided beforehand, according to the design of a plurality of Precoding weight processions, the receiving quality in the LOS environment is improvable.</p>

<p num="0012">Thus, since the Puri coding method, the Precoding device, the transmission method, the receiving method, sending set, and receiving set which improve degradation of the receiving quality in the LOS environment can be provided according to the present invention, It can foresee in broadcast or multicasting communication and can provide high service of quality to an inner user.</p>

0013<figref num="1">The example of the composition of the transceiving equipment in spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission systems</figref><figref num="2">An example of frame composition</figref><figref num="3">The example of the composition of the sending set at the time of the Precoding weight change method application</figref><figref num="4">The example of the composition of the sending set at the time of the Precoding weight change method application</figref><figref num="5">The example of frame composition</figref><figref num="6">The example of the Precoding weight change method</figref><figref num="7">The example of composition of a receiving set</figref><figref num="8">The example of composition of the signal processing part of a receiving set</figref><figref num="9">The example of composition of the signal processing part of a receiving set</figref><figref num="10">Decoding disposal method</figref><figref num="11">The example of a receiving state</figref><figref num="12">The example of the BER characteristic</figref><figref num="13">The example of the composition of the sending set at the time of the Precoding weight change method application</figref><figref num="14">The example of the composition of the sending set at the time of the Precoding weight change method application</figref><figref num="15">The example of frame composition</figref><figref num="16">The example of frame composition</figref><figref num="17">The example of frame composition</figref><figref num="18">The example of frame composition</figref><figref num="19">The example of frame composition</figref><figref num="20">The position of a receiving quality inferior point</figref><figref num="21">The position of a receiving quality inferior point</figref><figref num="22">An example of frame composition</figref><figref num="23">An example of frame composition</figref><figref num="24">An example of the mapping method</figref><figref num="25">An example of the mapping method</figref><figref num="26">The example of the composition of a dignity attachment synchronizer</figref><figref num="27">An example of how to rearrange a symbol</figref><figref num="28">The example of the composition of the transceiving equipment in spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission systems</figref><figref num="29">The example of the BER characteristic</figref><figref num="30">The example of a spatial multiplexing type 2 x2MIMO system model</figref><figref num="31">The position of a receiving inferior point</figref><figref num="32">The position of a receiving inferior point</figref><figref num="33">The position of a receiving inferior point</figref><figref num="34">The position of a receiving inferior point</figref><figref num="35">The position of a receiving inferior point</figref><figref num="36">The example of the characteristic of the shortest distance in the complex plane of a receiving inferior point</figref><figref num="37">The example of the characteristic of the shortest distance in the complex plane of a receiving inferior point</figref><figref num="38">The position of a receiving inferior point</figref><figref num="39">The position of a receiving inferior point</figref><figref num="40">An example of the composition of the sending set in Embodiment 7</figref><figref num="41">An example of the frame composition of the abnormal-conditions signal which a sending set transmits</figref><figref num="42">The position of a receiving inferior point</figref><figref num="43">The position of a receiving inferior point</figref><figref num="44">The position of a receiving inferior point</figref><figref num="45">The position of a receiving inferior point</figref><figref num="46">The position of a receiving inferior point</figref><figref num="47">An example of the frame composition in a time-frequency axis</figref><figref num="48">An example of the frame composition in a time-frequency axis</figref><figref num="49">Signal processing method</figref><figref num="50">Composition of an abnormal-conditions signal when space-time block numerals are used</figref><figref num="51">The detailed example of the frame composition in a time-frequency axis</figref><figref num="52">An example of the composition of a sending set</figref><figref num="53">An example of the composition of modulating signal generation part [ of Drawing 52 ] #1 - #M</figref><figref num="54">The figure showing the composition of the OFDM method related treating part (5207_1 and 5207_2) in Drawing 52</figref><figref num="55">The detailed example of the frame composition in a time-frequency axis</figref><figref num="56">An example of the composition of a receiving set</figref><figref num="57">The figure showing the composition of the OFDM method related treating part (5600_X, 5600_Y) in Drawing 56</figref><figref num="58">The detailed example of the frame composition in a time-frequency axis</figref><figref num="59">An example of a broadcasting system</figref><figref num="60">The position of a receiving inferior point</figref><figref num="61">The example of frame composition</figref><figref num="62">An example of the frame composition in a time-frequency axis</figref><figref num="63">An example of the composition of a sending set</figref><figref num="64">An example of the frame composition in a frequency-time-axis</figref><figref num="65">The example of frame composition</figref><figref num="66">An example of the configuration method of a symbol</figref><figref num="67">An example of the configuration method of a symbol</figref><figref num="68">An example of the configuration method of a symbol</figref><figref num="69">An example of frame composition</figref><figref num="70">Frame composition in a time-frequency axis</figref><figref num="71">An example of the frame composition in a time-frequency axis</figref><figref num="72">An example of the composition of a sending set</figref><figref num="73">An example of the composition of a receiving set</figref><figref num="74">An example of the composition of a receiving set</figref><figref num="75">An example of the composition of a receiving set</figref><figref num="76">An example of the frame composition in a frequency-time-axis</figref><figref num="77">An example of the frame composition in a frequency-time-axis</figref><figref num="78">The example of assignment of a Precoding procession</figref><figref num="79">The example of assignment of a Precoding procession</figref><figref num="80">The example of assignment of a Precoding procession</figref><figref num="81">An example of the composition of a signal processing part</figref><figref num="82">An example of the composition of a signal processing part</figref><figref num="83">An example of the composition of a sending set</figref><figref num="84">The whole system lineblock diagram for digital broadcasting</figref><figref num="85">The block diagram showing the example of composition of a receiver</figref><figref num="86">The figure showing the composition of multiplexing data</figref><figref num="87">The figure showing typically how each stream is multiplexed in multiplexing data</figref><figref num="88">The figure showing in more detail how a video stream is stored in a PES packet row</figref><figref num="89">The figure showing the structure of TS packet in multiplexing data, and a source packet</figref><figref num="90">The figure showing the data composition of PMT</figref><figref num="91">The figure showing the internal configuration of multiplexing data information</figref><figref num="92">The figure showing the internal configuration of stream attribute information</figref><figref num="93">Graphic display, the lineblock diagram of a speech output unit</figref><figref num="94">The example of signal point arrangement of 16QAM</figref><figref num="95">The example of signal point arrangement of QPSK</figref><figref num="96">The figure showing a baseband signal exchange part</figref><figref num="97">The figure showing the number of symbols, and the number of slots</figref><figref num="98">The figure showing the number of symbols, and the number of slots</figref><figref num="99">The figure showing frame composition</figref><figref num="100">The figure showing the number of slots</figref><figref num="101">The figure showing the number of slots</figref><figref num="102">The figure showing PLP in a time-frequency axis</figref><figref num="103">The figure showing the composition of PLP</figref><figref num="104">The figure showing PLP in a time-frequency axis</figref><figref num="105">The example which shows typically the absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio which the receiving set obtained</figref><figref num="106">An example with a preferred absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio which a receiving set obtains</figref><figref num="107">The example of the composition of the signal processing part relevant to a dignity attachment synchronizer</figref><figref num="108">The example of the composition of the signal processing part relevant to a dignity attachment synchronizer</figref><figref num="109">The example of the signal point arrangement in the case of 64QAM in an I-Q plane</figref><figref num="110">The figure showing the table about a Precoding procession</figref><figref num="111">The figure showing the table about a Precoding procession</figref><figref num="112">The example of the composition of the signal processing part relevant to a dignity attachment synchronizer</figref><figref num="113">The example of the composition of the signal processing part relevant to a dignity attachment synchronizer</figref><figref num="114">The figure showing the table about a Precoding procession</figref><figref num="115">The figure showing the table about a Precoding procession</figref><figref num="116">The example of the composition of the signal processing part relevant to a dignity attachment synchronizer</figref><figref num="117">The example of signal point arrangement</figref><figref num="118">The figure showing the relation of the position of a signal point</figref><figref num="119">The figure showing the composition of the dignity attachment synchronizer (Precoding part) circumference</figref><figref num="120">The example of signal point arrangement</figref><figref num="121">The figure showing the composition of the dignity attachment synchronizer (Precoding part) circumference</figref><figref num="122">The example of signal point arrangement</figref><figref num="123">The example of signal point arrangement</figref><figref num="124">The example of signal point arrangement</figref><figref num="125">The figure showing the composition of the dignity attachment synchronizer (Precoding part) circumference</figref><figref num="126">The example of signal point arrangement</figref><figref num="127">The figure showing the composition of the dignity attachment synchronizer (Precoding part) circumference</figref><figref num="128">The example of signal point arrangement</figref><figref num="129">The example of signal point arrangement</figref><figref num="130">The example of signal point arrangement</figref><figref num="131">The example of signal point arrangement</figref><figref num="132">The example of signal point arrangement</figref><figref num="133">An example of arrangement of a signal point</figref><figref num="134">An example of the composition of a signal generating part</figref><figref num="135">The in-phase component and the rectangular ingredient of a baseband signal</figref><figref num="136">An example of the composition of a signal generating part</figref><figref num="137">An example of the composition of a signal generating part</figref><figref num="138">The in-phase component and the rectangular ingredient of a baseband signal</figref><figref num="139">An example of the composition of a signal generating part</figref><figref num="140">An example of the composition of a signal generating part</figref><figref num="141">Appearance of a receiving system</figref><figref num="142">Composition of a receiving system</figref><figref num="143">Composition of a receiving system</figref><figref num="144">Composition of a receiving system</figref><figref num="145">Composition of television</figref><figref num="146">Composition of a receiving system</figref><figref num="147">(a) is a key map of the broadcast wave of ground digital broadcasting. (b) is a key map of the broadcast wave of BS broadcast.</figref><figref num="148">(a) is a key map of the received signal before filtering. (b) is a figure when the received signal of a frequency band with which the broadcasting station transmitted a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals using two or more antennas is removed.</figref><figref num="149">(a) is a key map of the received signal before frequency change. (b) is a figure when a broadcasting station carries out frequency conversion of the received signal of the frequency band which transmitted a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals using two or more antennas.</figref><figref num="150">(a) is a key map of the received signal before frequency change. (b) is a figure when a broadcasting station carries out frequency conversion of the received signal of the frequency band which transmitted a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals using two or more antennas.</figref><figref num="151">Frequency arrangement at the time of performing drawing in into the home at the time of carrying out, as shown in Drawing 149 by one.</figref><figref num="152">Frequency arrangement at the time of performing drawing in into the home at the time of carrying out, as shown in Drawing 150 by one.</figref><figref num="153">The example of arrangement of the relay device which (a) uses for joint reception in collective housing. The example of arrangement of the relay device which (b) uses for an individual residence. The example of arrangement of the relay device which (c) uses by a CATV entrepreneur.</figref><figref num="154">The key map of the data composition of the received television broadcasting.</figref><figref num="155">The example of composition of the relay device in a cable-TV-industry company</figref><figref num="156">The example of composition of a signal processing part</figref><figref num="157">The example of composition of the data generating part for distribution</figref><figref num="158">The example of the signal before combination</figref><figref num="159">The example of the signal after combination</figref><figref num="160">The example of composition of a television receiver</figref><figref num="161">The example of composition of the relay device in a cable-TV-industry company</figref><figref num="162">(a) is an example of multicasting communication. The example of the unicast communication in which (b) has feedback. The example of the unicast communication in which (c) does not have feedback</figref><figref num="163">The example of composition of a transmitter</figref><figref num="164">The example of composition of the receiver which has address feedback</figref><figref num="165">The example of frame composition of CSI</figref>

0014Hereinafter, an embodiment of the invention is described in detail with reference to drawings.<br />(Embodiment 1)<br />The transmission method of this embodiment, a sending set, a receiving method, and a receiving set are explained in detail.<br />Before giving this explanation, the outline of the transmission method in the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission systems which are formerly systems, and a decoding method is explained.<br />N_txN_rThe composition of a spatial multiplexing MIMO system is shown in Drawing 1. As for information vector z, coding and interleave are given. And it is vector [ of an after-coding bit ] u= (u) as an output of interleave._１--, u_NtIt is obtained. However, u_i=(u_i1--, u_iMIt carries out (M: the number of transmission bits per symbol). Transmitting vector s= (s)_１--, s_Nt）^TWhen it carries out, it is transmitted signal s from transmitting antenna #i._i=map(u_iIt is E{|s, when it expresses and transmitting energy is normalized._i｜^２It is expressed}=Es/Nt (E)._s: Total calories per channel. And it is a receiving vector y= (y)_１--, y_Nr）^TWhen it carries out, it is expressed like a formula (1).

0015<maths num="1"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0001.tif" /></maths>

0016At this time, it is H._NtNrA Is channel procession, n= (n)_１--, n_Nr）^TIt is a Is noise vector and is n._iIs the average value 0, distribution sigma^２It is a of i.i.d. complex Gaussian random noise. From the relation between the transmitting symbol introduced with a receiver, and a receiving symbol, the probability about a receiving vector can be given by multi-dimension Gaussian distribution like a formula (2).

0017<maths num="2"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0002.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0018Here, the receiver which performs repetitive decoding as shown in Drawing 1 which consists of an outer soft-in/soft-out decoder and MIMO detection is considered. The vector (L-value) of the logarithm likelihood ratio in Drawing 1 is expressed like formula (3)-(5).

0019<maths num="3"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0003.tif" /></maths>

0020<maths num="4"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0004.tif" /></maths>

0021<maths num="5"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0005.tif" /></maths>

0022&lt;A repetitive detection method&gt;<br />Here, it is N._txN_rRepetitive detection of the MIMO signal in a spatial multiplexing MIMO system is described.<br />u_mnA Logarithm of likelihood ratio is defined like a formula (6).

0023<maths num="6"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0006.tif" /></maths>

0024From Bayes' theorem, a formula (6) can be expressed like a formula (7).

0025<maths num="7"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0007.tif" /></maths>

0026However, U_{mn, ±1}={u|u_mn= It is referred to as ±1}. And lnsigmaa_j- max ln a_jIt comes out, and if approximated, a formula (7) can be approximated like a formula (8). The sign of upper "-" means approximation.

0027<maths num="8"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0008.tif" /></maths>

0028P in a formula (8) (u|u)_mnln P (u|u)_mnIt is expressed as follows.

0029<maths num="9"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0009.tif" /></maths>

0030<maths num="10"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0010.tif" /></maths>

0031<maths num="11"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0011.tif" /></maths>

0032By the way, the logarithmic probability of the formula which the formula (2) defined is expressed like a formula (12).

0033<maths num="12"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0012.tif" /></maths>

0034Therefore, subsequent L-value is expressed with MAP or APP (a posteriori probability) as follows from a formula (7) and (13).

0035<maths num="13"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0013.tif" /></maths>

0036Henceforth, it is called repetitive APP decoding. Subsequent L-value is expressed with the logarithm likelihood ratio (Max-Log APP) based on Max-Log approximation as follows from a formula (8) and (12).

0037<maths num="14"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0014.tif" /></maths>

0038<maths num="15"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0015.tif" /></maths>

0039Henceforth, it is called repetitive Max-log APP decoding. And the external information needed by the system of repetitive decoding can be searched for by subtracting a prior input from a formula (13) or (14).<br />&lt;System model&gt;<br />The basic composition of the system which leads to subsequent explanation is shown in Drawing 28. Here, it is considered as a 2x2 spatial-multiplexing MIMO system, and each has an outer encoder in streams A and B, Two outer encoders are taken as the encoder of the same LDPC code (although the composition which uses the encoder of an LDPC code as an outer encoder here is mentioned as an example and explained). The error correcting code which an outer encoder uses is not what was restricted to the LDPC code, and even if it uses other error correcting codes, such as turbo numerals, a convolutional code, and a LDPC convolutional code, it can be carried out similarly. Although the outer encoder has composition which it has for every transmitting antenna, it may not be what was restricted to this, and a transmitting antenna may be plurality, the number of outer encoders may be one, and it may have many outer encoders from the number of transmitting antennas. . And at streams A and B, he is Inta Riva (pi) to each._api_bIt is. Here, it is a modulation method 2^h- It is referred to as QAM (h bit will be transmitted as one symbol.).<br />In a receiver, repetitive detection (repetitive APP (or Max-log APP) decoding) of an above-mentioned MIMO signal shall be performed. And as decoding of an LDPC code, sum-product decoding shall be performed, for example.<br />Drawing 2 shows frame composition and has indicated the turn of the symbol after interleave. At this time, the following formulas are like (i)._a,j_a),(i_b,j_bIt shall express.

0040<maths num="16"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0016.tif" /></maths>

0041<maths num="17"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0017.tif" /></maths>

0042At this time, it is i._a,i_b: Turn of the symbol after interleave, j_a,j_b: The bit position (j) in a modulation method_a,j_b= 1, ..., h, pi_api_b: Inta Riva of streams A and B, omega^a_ia,jaomega^b_ib,jb: The turn of the data in front of the interleave of streams A and B is shown. However, in Drawing 2, it is i._a=i_bThe frame composition at the time of of is shown.<br />&lt;Repetitive decoding&gt;<br />Here, the algorithm of repetitive detection of sum-product decoding and the MIMO signal which are used by decoding of the LDPC code in a receiver is described in detail.

0043sum-product decoding<br />2 yuan MxN procession H={H_mnLet} be a check row sequence of the LDPC code made applicable to decoding. Subset [ of set [1, N] {1, 2, ..., N} = ] A (m) and B (n) are defined like a following formula.

0044<maths num="18"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0018.tif" /></maths>

0045<maths num="19"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0019.tif" /></maths>

0046At this time, A (m) means [ of check row sequence H / m line ] a set of the sequence index which is 1, and B (n) is [ of check row sequence H / n line ] a set of the line index which is 1. The algorithm of sum-product decoding is as follows.<br />1(initialization): [ Step Aand] H_mn= as opposed to all the groups (m, n) which fill 1 -- beforehand -- a value pair -- number ratio beta_mn= It is referred to as 0. Loop variable (number of times of repetition) l_sum= It is referred to as 1 and is l about the number of times of the loop maximum._sum,maxIt sets up.<br />2(line processing): [ Step Aand] It is H to the order of m=1, 2, ..., M._mn= using the following updating types to all the groups (m, n) which fill 1 -- the exterior -- a value pair -- number ratio alpha_mnIt updates.

0047<maths num="20"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0020.tif" /></maths>

0048<maths num="21"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0021.tif" /></maths>

0049<maths num="22"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0022.tif" /></maths>

0050At this time, f is a function of Gallager. And lambda_nA Seeking way is explained in detail henceforth.<br />3(sequence processing): [ Step Aand] It is H to the order of n=1, 2, ..., N._mn= using the following updating types to all the groups (m, n) which fill 1 -- the exterior -- a value pair -- number ratio beta_mnIt updates.

0051<maths num="23"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0023.tif" /></maths>

00524(calculation of a logarithm likelihood ratio): [ Step Aand] It is logarithm likelihood ratio L about n [1, N]._nIt asks as follows.

0053<maths num="24"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0024.tif" /></maths>

0054Step Aand5 (count of the number of times of repetition): It is l._sum&lt;l_sum,maxIt will be l if it becomes._sumIt increments and returns to step A and 2. l_sum=l_sum,maxA of case ends sum-product decoding of this time.<br /><br />The above is operation of one sum-product decoding. Then, repetitive detection of a MIMO signal is performed. Variable m, n, and alpha used by explanation of operation of above-mentioned sum-product decoding_mnbeta_mnlambda_n,L_nIt is m about a variable [ in / it is alike, it sets and / stream A ]._a,n_aalpha^a_manabeta^a_manalambda_na,L_naIt is m about the variable in stream B._b,n_balpha^b_mbnbbeta^b_mbnblambda_nb,L_nbIt shall come out and express.<br />&lt;Repetitive detection of a MIMO signal&gt;<br />lambda [ in / here / repetitive detection of a MIMO signal ]_nA Seeking way is explained in detail.

0055A following formula is materialized from a formula (1).

0056<maths num="25"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0025.tif" /></maths>

0057The following expressions of relations are materialized from the frame composition of Drawing 2 to formula (16) and (17).

0058<maths num="26"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0026.tif" /></maths>

0059<maths num="27"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0027.tif" /></maths>

0060At this time, it is n._a,n_bIt becomes [1, N]. lambda at the time of number of times k of repetition of repetitive detection henceforth of a MIMO signal_na,L_nalambda_nb,L_nbEach lambda_k,na,L_k,nalambda_k,nb,L_k,nbIt shall express.<br />Step Band1 (initial detection;k=0): It is lambda at the time of initial detection._0,nalambda_0,nbIt asks as follows.<br />At the time of repetitive APP decoding:

0061<maths num="28"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0028.tif" /></maths>

0062At the time of repetitive Max-log APP decoding:

0063<maths num="29"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0029.tif" /></maths>

0064<maths num="30"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0030.tif" /></maths>

0065However, it is referred to as X=a and b. And it is l about the number of times of repetition of repetitive detection of a MIMO signal._mimo= It is referred to as 0 and is l about the number of times of the maximum of the number of times of repetition._mimo,maxIt sets up.<br />Step Band2 (repetitive detection; number of times k of repetition): lambda at the time of number of times k of repetition_k,nalambda_k,nbIt is expressed like formula (31)-(34) from Is, formula (11) (13)-(15), (16), and (17). However, it becomes = (X, Y) (a, b) (b, a).<br />At the time of repetitive APP decoding:

0066<maths num="31"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0031.tif" /></maths>

0067<maths num="32"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0032.tif" /></maths>

0068At the time of repetitive Max-log APP decoding:

0069<maths num="33"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0033.tif" /></maths>

0070<maths num="34"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0034.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0071Step Band3 (the count of the number of times of repetition, numerals word presumption): It is l._mimo&lt;l_mimo,maxIt will be l if it becomes._mimoIt increments and returns to step B and 2. l_mimo=l_mimo,maxA of case asks for a presumed numerals word as follows.

0072<maths num="35"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0035.tif" /></maths>

0073However, it is referred to as X=a and b.<br />Drawing 3 shows an example of the composition of sending set 300 in this embodiment. Coding part 302A considers information (data) 301A and frame composition signal 313 as an input, Frame composition signal 313 (the information of the error correction method which coding part 302A uses for error correcting code-ization of data, a code rate, block length, etc. is included, and the method specified by frame composition signal 313 will be used.) An error correction method may be changed. It follows, for example, error correcting code-ization of a convolutional code, an LDPC code, turbo numerals, etc. is performed, and data 303A after coding is outputted.

0074Inta Riva 304A considers data 303A after coding, and frame composition signal 313 as an input, performs rearrangement of interleave, i.e., turn, and outputs data 305A after interleave. (The method of interleave may be changed based on frame composition signal 313.)<br />Mapping part 306A considers data 305A after interleave, and frame composition signal 313 as an input, QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying), 16QAM (16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), 64QAM (64 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), etc. are modulated, and baseband signal 307A is outputted. (A modulation method may be changed based on frame composition signal 313.)<br />Drawing 24 is made into an example of the mapping method in IQ plane of in-phase component I and rectangular ingredient Q which constitutes the baseband signal in QPSK abnormal conditions. for example, -- as shown in Drawing 24 (A), when input data is "00", I= 1.0 and Q= 1.0 are outputted, and like the following, when input data is "01", I=-1.0 and Q= 1.0 are outputted ... , is outputted. Drawing 24 (A) shows the example of the mapping method in IQ plane of different QPSK abnormal conditions, and Drawing 24 (B) can acquire the signal point of Drawing 24 (B) because the signal point in Drawing 24 (A) rotates the point that Drawing 24 (B) differs from Drawing 24 (A) focusing on the starting point. To the rotation method of such Consta ration, Cyclic*Q*Delay which is shown in nonpatent literature 9 and nonpatent literature 10, and is shown in nonpatent literature 9 and nonpatent literature 10 may be applied. As example with another Drawing 24, the signal point arrangement in IQ plane at the time of 16QAM is shown in Drawing 25, the example equivalent to Drawing 24 (A) is Drawing 25 (A), and the example equivalent to Drawing 24 (B) serves as Drawing 25 (B).

0075Coding part 302B considers information (data) 301B and frame composition signal 313 as an input, and is frame composition signal 313 (the information of the error correction method to be used, a code rate, block length, etc. is included, and the method specified by frame composition signal 313 will be used.). An error correction method may be changed. It follows, for example, error correcting code-ization of a convolutional code, an LDPC code, turbo numerals, etc. is performed, and data 303B after coding is outputted.

0076Inta Riva 304B considers data 303B after coding, and frame composition signal 313 as an input, performs rearrangement of interleave, i.e., turn, and outputs data 305B after interleave. (The method of interleave may be changed based on frame composition signal 313.)<br />Mapping part 306B considers data 305B after interleave, and frame composition signal 313 as an input, QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying), 16QAM (16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), 64QAM (64 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), etc. are modulated, and baseband signal 307B is outputted. (A modulation method may be changed based on frame composition signal 313.)<br />Dignity attachment composition information generating part 314 considers frame composition signal 313 as an input, and outputs information 315 about the dignity attachment synthesizing method based on frame composition signal 313. As for a dignity attachment synthesizing method, a dignity attachment synthesizing method changes regularly and things serve as the feature.

0077Dignity attachment synchronizers 308A are baseband signal 307A and baseband signal 307B, Information 315 about a dignity attachment synthesizing method is considered as an input, dignity attachment composition of baseband signal 307A and the baseband signal 307B is carried out based on information 315 about a dignity attachment synthesizing method, and signal 309A after dignity attachment composition is outputted. In addition. The details of the method of dignity attachment composition are explained in detail later.

0078Wireless section 310A considers signal 309A after dignity attachment composition as an input, quadrature modulation, a band limit, frequency conversion, amplification, etc. are processed, transmitted signal 311A is outputted, and transmitted signal 511A is outputted as an electric wave from antenna 312A.<br />Dignity attachment synchronizers 308B are baseband signal 307A and baseband signal 307B, Information 315 about a dignity attachment synthesizing method is considered as an input, dignity attachment composition of baseband signal 307A and the baseband signal 307B is carried out based on information 315 about a dignity attachment synthesizing method, and signal 309B after dignity attachment composition is outputted.

0079The composition of a dignity attachment synchronizer is shown in Drawing 26. Baseband signal 307A is multiplied with w11 (t), generates w11(t) s1(t), multiplies it with w21 (t), and generates w21(t) s1(t). Similarly, baseband signal 307B is multiplied with w12 (t), generates w12(t) s2(t), multiplies it with w22 (t), and generates w22(t) s2(t). Next, z1(t) =w11(t) s1(t)+w12(t) s2(t) z2(t) =w21(t) s1(t)+w22(t) s2(t) is obtained.<br />In addition. The details of the method of dignity attachment composition are explained in detail later.

0080Wireless section 310B considers signal 309B after dignity attachment composition as an input, quadrature modulation, a band limit, frequency conversion, amplification, etc. are processed, transmitted signal 311B is outputted, and transmitted signal 311B is outputted as an electric wave from antenna 312B.<br />Drawing 4 shows the example of composition of different sending set 400 in Drawing 3. A different portion from Drawing 3 is explained in Drawing 4.

0081Coding part 402 considers information (data) 401 and frame composition signal 313 as an input, performs error correcting code-ization based on frame composition signal 313, and outputs data 403 after coding.<br />Distribution part 404 considers data 403 after coding as an input, distributes it, and outputs data 405A and data 405B. Although Drawing 4 indicated the case where the number of coding parts was one, it is not what was restricted to this, and a coding part can be set to m (m is one or more integers), and the present invention can be similarly carried out about the case where a distribution part divides into two data the coding data created in each coding part, and outputs it.

0082Drawing 5 shows an example of the frame composition in the time-axis of the sending set in this embodiment. Symbol 500_1 transmits the information on the modulation method used in order to transmit the error correction method which is a symbol for notifying a transmission method, for example, is used for a receiving set in order to transmit a data symbol, the information on the code rate, and a data symbol, etc.<br />abnormal-conditions signal z1 (t) with which a sending set transmits symbol 501_1 -- {-- however, t is a symbol for presuming channel change of time}. The data symbol which abnormal-conditions signal z1 (t) transmits to symbol (it can set on time-axis) number u, and symbol 503_1 of symbol 502_1 are data symbols which abnormal-conditions signal z1 (t) transmits to symbol number u+1.

0083abnormal-conditions signal z2 (t) with which a sending set transmits symbol 501_2 -- {-- however, t is a symbol for presuming channel change of time}. The data symbol which abnormal-conditions signal z2 (t) transmits to symbol number u, and symbol 503_2 of symbol 502_2 are data symbols which abnormal-conditions signal z2 (t) transmits to symbol number u+1.<br />Abnormal-conditions signal z1 (t) which a sending set transmits, abnormal-conditions signal z2 (t), received signal r1 in a receiving set (t), and the relation of r2 (t) are explained.

0084In Drawing 5, 504#1, a transmitting antenna [ in / in 504#2 / a sending set ], 505#1, and 505#2 show the receiving antenna in a receiving set, and a sending set transmits transmitting antenna 504#1 and abnormal-conditions signal z2 (t) for abnormal-conditions signal z1 (t) from transmitting antenna 504#2. At this time, abnormal-conditions signal z1 (t) and abnormal-conditions signal z2 (t) assume that the same (it is common) frequency (zone) is occupied. It is h, respectively about channel change of each transmitting antenna of a sending set, and each antenna of a receiving set._１１(t), h_１２(t), h_２１(t), h_２２It is referred to as (t), and if the received signal with which receiving antenna 505#2 of r1 (t) and a receiving set received the received signal which receiving antenna 505#1 of the receiving set received is set to r2 (t), the following expressions of relations will be materialized.

0085<maths num="36"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0036.tif" /></maths>

0086Drawing 6 is a figure relevant to the weighting method (the Precoding (Precoding) method) in this embodiment, and dignity attachment synchronizer 600 is a dignity attachment synchronizer which unified both of dignity attachment synchronizers 308A and 308B of Drawing 3. As shown in Drawing 6, stream s1 (t) and stream s2 (t) are equivalent to baseband signals 307A and 307B of Drawing 3, that is, serve as the baseband signal said phase I according to mapping of modulation methods, such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM, and a rectangular cross Q ingredient. And stream s1 (t) expresses the signal of s1 (u) and symbol number u+1 as s1 (u+1) and ... for the signal of symbol number u like the frame composition of Drawing 6. Similarly, stream s2 (t) expresses the signal of s2 (u) and symbol number u+1 as s2 (u+1) and ... for the signal of symbol number u. And baseband signals [ in / in dignity attachment synchronizer 600 / Drawing 3 ] 307A (s1 (t)) and 307B (s2 (t)), Information 315 about dignity attachment information is considered as an input, the weighting method according to information 315 about dignity attachment information is given, and signals 309A (z1 (t)) and 309B (z2 (t)) after dignity attachment composition of Drawing 3 are outputted. At this time, z1 (t) and z2 (t) are expressed as follows.<br />At the time of symbol number 4i (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0087<maths num="37"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0037.tif" /></maths>

0088However, j is an imaginary unit.<br />At the time of symbol number 4i+1:

0089<maths num="38"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0038.tif" /></maths>

0090At the time of symbol number 4i+2:

0091<maths num="39"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0039.tif" /></maths>

0092At the time of symbol number 4i+3:

0093<maths num="40"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0040.tif" /></maths>

0094Thus, the dignity attachment synchronizer of Drawing 6 shall change Precoding weight regularly 4 slot cycles. (However, although it is considered as the method which changes Precoding weight regularly by four slots here, the number of slots changed regularly is not what was restricted to four slots.)<br />By the way, in nonpatent literature 4, it is said that Precoding weight is changed for every slot and it is characterized by changing Precoding weight at random with nonpatent literature 4. On the other hand, in the two-line Precoding weight procession of two rows which is characterized by providing a certain cycle and changing Precoding weight regularly in this embodiment, and comprises four Precoding weight, Each absolute value of four Precoding weight is characterized by changing a Precoding weight procession with this feature regularly equally (1-/sqrt (2)).

0095In the LOS environment, if a special Precoding procession is used, receiving quality may improve greatly, but the special Precoding procession changes with situations of a direct wave. However, there is a certain rule in the LOS environment, and if a special Precoding procession is regularly changed in accordance with this rule, the receiving quality of data will improve greatly. A possibility that Precoding processions other than the special Precoding procession described previously will also exist on the other hand when a Precoding procession is changed at random, A possibility of performing Precoding only in partial Precoding procession unsuitable for the LOS environment does not exist, either, and good receiving quality is not necessarily thereby necessarily obtained in the LOS environment. Therefore, the Precoding change method of having been suitable for the LOS environment needed to be realized, and the present invention has proposed the Puri coding method about it.

0096Drawing 7 shows an example of the composition of receiving set 700 in this embodiment. Wireless section 703_X considers received signal 702_X received by antenna 701_X as an input, processes frequency conversion, a rectangular recovery, etc., and outputs baseband signal 704_X.<br />Channel change estimating part 705_1 in abnormal-conditions signal z1 transmitted with the sending set considers baseband signal 704_X as an input, extracts reference symbol 501_1 for channel estimation in Drawing 5, and is h of a formula (36)._１１It is alike, a corresponding value is presumed and channel estimation signal 706_1 is outputted.

0097Channel change estimating part 705_2 in abnormal-conditions signal z2 transmitted with the sending set considers baseband signal 704_X as an input, extracts reference symbol 501_2 for channel estimation in Drawing 5, and is h of a formula (36)._１２It is alike, a corresponding value is presumed and channel estimation signal 706_2 is outputted.<br />Wireless section 703_Y considers received signal 702_Y received by antenna 701_Y as an input, processes frequency conversion, a rectangular recovery, etc., and outputs baseband signal 704_Y.<br />Channel change estimating part 707_1 in abnormal-conditions signal z1 transmitted with the sending set, Baseband signal 704_Y is considered as an input, reference symbol 501_1 for channel estimation in Drawing 5 is extracted, the value equivalent to h21 of a formula (36) is presumed, and channel estimation signal 708_1 is outputted.

0098Channel change estimating part 707_2 in abnormal-conditions signal z2 transmitted with the sending set, Baseband signal 704_Y is considered as an input, reference symbol 501_2 for channel estimation in Drawing 5 is extracted, the value equivalent to h22 of a formula (36) is presumed, and channel estimation signal 708_2 is outputted.<br />Control information decoding part 709 considers baseband signal 704_X and 704_Y as an input, detects symbol 500_1 for notifying the transmission method of Drawing 5, and outputs signal 710 about the information on the transmission method which the sending set notified.

0099signal processing part 711 -- baseband signal 704_X, 704_Y, channel estimation signal 706_1, 706_2, 708_1, and 708_2 -- and Signal 710 about the information on the transmission method which the sending set notified is considered as an input, detection and decoding are performed, and receiving data 712_1 and 712_2 are outputted.<br />Next, operation of signal processing part 711 of Drawing 7 is explained in detail. Drawing 8 shows an example of the composition of signal processing part 711 in this embodiment. Drawing 8 mainly comprises an INNER MIMO detection section, and a soft-in/soft-out decoder and a dignity attachment coefficient generation part. Although details of the method of repetitive decoding in this composition are given with nonpatent literature 2 and nonpatent literature 3, Although the MIMO transmission method indicated in nonpatent literature 2 and nonpatent literature 3 is a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method, the transmission method in this embodiment is the point that the point of changing Precoding weight with time and of being a MIMO transmission method differs from nonpatent literature 2 and nonpatent literature 3. They are W (t) (however, a Precoding weight procession changes with t.), and a receiving vector about a Precoding weight procession [ in / for the procession in a formula (36) (channel) / H (t) and Drawing 6 ] R(t) = (r1 (t), r2 (t))^TStream vector S (t) = (s1 (t), s2 (t))^TIf it carries out, the following expressions of relations will be materialized.

0100<maths num="41"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0041.tif" /></maths>

0101At this time, the receiving set can apply the decoding method of nonpatent literature 2 and nonpatent literature 3 for a receiving vector to R (t) by considering H(t) W (t) to be a channel procession.<br />Therefore, dignity attachment coefficient generation part 819 of Drawing 8 considers signal 818 (equivalent to 710 of Drawing 7) about the information on the transmission method which the sending set notified as an input, and outputs signal 820 about the information on a dignity attachment coefficient.

0102INNER MIMO detection section 803 will consider signal 820 about the information on a dignity attachment coefficient as an input, and will calculate a formula (41) using this signal. And the operation is explained although repetitive detection and decoding will be performed.<br />In the signal processing part of Drawing 8, in order to perform repetitive decoding (repetitive detection), it is necessary to perform a disposal method as shown in Drawing 10. Introduction, 1 numerals word (or one frame) of abnormal-conditions signal (stream) s1, and 1 numerals word (or one frame) of abnormal-conditions signal (stream) s2 are decoded. As a result, 1 numerals word of a soft-in/soft-out decoder to abnormal-conditions signal (stream) s1 Or the logarithm likelihood ratio (LLR:Log-Likelihood Ratio) of each bit of one frame and 1 numerals word (or one frame) of abnormal-conditions signal (stream) s2 is obtained. And detection and decoding are again performed using the LLR. This operation is performed two or more times (this operation is called repetitive decoding (repetitive detection).). Henceforth, it explains focusing on the preparation method of the logarithm likelihood ratio (LLR) of the symbol of the specific time in one frame.

0103In Drawing 8, storage part 815 is baseband signal 801X (it is equivalent to baseband signal 704_X of Drawing 7.), Channel estimation signal group 802X (it is equivalent to channel estimation signal 706_1 of Drawing 7, and 706_2.), Baseband signal 801Y (it is equivalent to baseband signal 704_Y of Drawing 7.), in order to consider channel estimation signal group 802Y (it is equivalent to channel estimation signal 708_1 of Drawing 7, and 708_2.) as an input and to realize repetitive decoding (repetitive detection), H(t) W (t) in a formula (41) was performed and (calculation) computed -- a procession is memorized as a modification channel signal group. And storage part 815 outputs the above-mentioned signal as baseband signal 816X, modification channel estimation signal group 817X, baseband signal 816Y, and modification channel estimation signal group 817Y, when required.

0104About subsequent operation, the case of initial detection and the case of repetitive decoding (repetitive detection) are divided and explained.<br />&lt;In the case of initial detection&gt;<br />INNER MIMO detection section 803 considers baseband signal 801X, channel estimation signal group 802X, baseband signal 801Y, and channel estimation signal group 802Y as an input. Here, the modulation method of abnormal-conditions signal (stream) s1 and abnormal-conditions signal (stream) s2 explains as 16QAM.

0105First, INNER MIMO detection section 803 performs H(t) W (t) from channel estimation signal group 802X and channel estimation signal group 802Y, and searches for the candidate signal point corresponding to baseband signal 801X. The situation at that time is shown in Drawing 11. In Drawing 11, - (black dot) is a candidate signal point in IQ plane, and since a modulation method is 16QAM, 256 candidate signal points exist. (However, Drawing 11 does not show 256 candidate signal points, in order to show the image figure.) It is here, When 4 bits which transmits 4 bits transmitted by abnormal-conditions signal s1 by b0, b1, b2, b3, and abnormal-conditions signal s2 are set to b4, b5, b6, and b7, the candidate signal point of corresponding for setting to Drawing 11 (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) will exist. And the square Euclid distance of received signal point 1101 (it is equivalent to baseband signal 801X.) and each candidate signal point is found. And it is distribution sigma of a noise about each square Euclid distance.^２Division is come out and done. Therefore, it is E about the value which did division of the candidate signal point and the square of received signal point Euclid distance corresponding to (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) by distribution of the noise._X(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) can be found.

0106Similarly, H(t) W (t) is performed from channel estimation signal group 802X and channel estimation signal group 802Y, The candidate signal point corresponding to baseband signal 801Y is searched for, square Euclid distance with a received signal point (it is equivalent to baseband signal 801Y.) is found, and it is distribution sigma of a noise about this square Euclid distance.^２Division is come out and done. Therefore, it is E about the value which did division of the candidate signal point and the square of received signal point Euclid distance corresponding to (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) by distribution of the noise._Y(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) can be found.

0107And E_X(b0,b1,b2,b3,b4,b5,b6,b7)+E_Y(b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) It asks for =E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7).<br />INNER MIMO detection section 803 outputs E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) as signal 804.

0108Logarithm likelihood calculation part 805A considers signal 804 as an input, computes bits b0 and b1 and the logarithm likelihood (log likelihood) of b2 and b3, and outputs logarithm likelihood signal 806A. However, in calculation of a logarithm likelihood, the logarithm likelihood at the time of "1" and the logarithm likelihood at the time of "0" are computed. The calculating method is as having been shown in the formula (28), the formula (29), and the formula (30), and, for details, is shown in nonpatent literature 2 and nonpatent literature 3.

0109Similarly, logarithm likelihood calculation part 805B considers signal 804 as an input, computes bits b4 and b5 and the logarithm likelihood of b6 and b7, and outputs logarithm likelihood signal 806B.<br />Deinterleaver (807A) considers logarithm likelihood signal 806A as an input, performs Deinterleave corresponding to Inta Riva (Inta Riva of Drawing 3 (304A)), and outputs logarithm likelihood signal 808A after Deinterleave.

0110Similarly, Deinterleaver (807B) considers logarithm likelihood signal 806B as an input, performs Deinterleave corresponding to Inta Riva (Inta Riva of Drawing 3 (304B)), and outputs logarithm likelihood signal 808B after Deinterleave.<br />Logarithm likelihood ratio calculation part 809A considers logarithm likelihood signal 808A after Deinterleave as an input, computes the logarithm likelihood ratio (LLR:Log-Likelihood Ratio) of the bit coded with coding machine 302A of Drawing 3, and outputs logarithm likelihood ratio signal 810A.

0111Similarly, logarithm likelihood ratio calculation part 809B considers logarithm likelihood signal 808B after Deinterleave as an input, computes the logarithm likelihood ratio (LLR:Log-Likelihood Ratio) of the bit coded with coding machine 302B of Drawing 3, and outputs logarithm likelihood ratio signal 810B.<br />Soft-in/soft-out decoder 811A decodes by considering logarithm likelihood ratio signal 810A as an input, and outputs logarithm likelihood ratio 812A after decoding.

0112Similarly, Soft-in/soft-out decoder 811B decodes by considering logarithm likelihood ratio signal 810B as an input, and outputs logarithm likelihood ratio 812B after decoding.<br />In &lt; repetition decoding (repetitive detection), it is number-of-times of repetition k&gt;.<br />Inta Riva (813A) considers logarithm likelihood ratio 812A after decoding obtained by the k-1st soft-in/soft-out decodings as an input, performs interleave, and outputs logarithm likelihood ratio 814A after interleave. At this time, the pattern of Inta Riva's (813A) interleave is the same as the interleave pattern of Inta Riva (304A) of Drawing 3.

0113Inta Riva (813B) considers logarithm likelihood ratio 812B after decoding obtained by the k-1st soft-in/soft-out decodings as an input, performs interleave, and outputs logarithm likelihood ratio 814B after interleave. At this time, the pattern of Inta Riva's (813B) interleave is the same as the interleave pattern of Inta Riva (304B) of Drawing 3.

0114INNER MIMO detection section 803 considers baseband signal 816X, modification channel estimation signal group 817X, baseband signal 816Y, modification channel estimation signal group 817Y, logarithm likelihood ratio 814A after interleave, and logarithm likelihood ratio 814B after interleave as an input. It is here and they are baseband signal 801X and channel estimation signal group 802X, Baseband signal 801Y and not channel estimation signal group 802Y but baseband signal 816X, modification channel estimation signal group 817X, baseband signal 816Y, and modification channel estimation signal group 817Y are used for repetitive decoding because the time delay has occurred.

0115The point that the operation at the time of repetitive decoding of INNER MIMO detection section 803 differs from the operation at the time of initial detection is using logarithm likelihood ratio 814A after interleave, and logarithm likelihood ratio 814B after interleave in the case of signal processing. INNER MIMO detection section 803 asks for E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) like the time of initial detection first. In addition, the coefficient equivalent to a formula (11) and a formula (32) is calculated from logarithm likelihood ratio 814A after interleave, and logarithm likelihood ratio 914B after interleave. And the value of E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) is amended using this calculated coefficient, that value is made into E' (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7), and it outputs as signal 804.

0116Logarithm likelihood calculation part 805A considers signal 804 as an input, computes bits b0 and b1 and the logarithm likelihood (log likelihood) of b2 and b3, and outputs logarithm likelihood signal 806A. However, in calculation of a logarithm likelihood, the logarithm likelihood at the time of "1" and the logarithm likelihood at the time of "0" are computed. The calculating method is as having been shown in a formula (31), the formula (32), the formula (33), the formula (34), and the formula (35), and is shown in nonpatent literature 2 and nonpatent literature 3.

0117Similarly, logarithm likelihood calculation part 805B considers signal 804 as an input, computes bits b4 and b5 and the logarithm likelihood of b6 and b7, and outputs logarithm likelihood signal 806B. The operation after Deinterleaver is the same as that of initial detection.<br />Although Drawing 8 showed the composition of the signal processing part in the case of performing repetitive detection, when repetitive detection obtains not necessarily good receiving quality, not indispensable composition but the component part needed only for repetitive detection and the composition which does not have Inta Riva 813A and 813B may be used for it. At this time, INNER MIMO detection section 803 will not perform repetitive detection.<br />And a portion important at this embodiment is calculating H(t) W (t). Initial detection and repetitive detection may be performed using QR decomposition as shown in the nonpatent literature 5 grade.<br />Based on H(t) W (t), the alignment operation of MMSE (Minimum*Mean*Square*Error) and ZF (Zero*Forcing) may be performed, and initial detection may be performed as shown in nonpatent literature 11.

0118Drawing 9 shows the composition of a different signal processing part from Drawing 8, and is a signal processing part for the abnormal-conditions signal which the sending set of Drawing 4 transmitted. A different point from Drawing 8 is the number of soft-in/soft-out decoders, and soft-in/soft-out decoder 901 decodes by considering logarithm likelihood ratio signals 810A and 810B as an input, and outputs logarithm likelihood ratio 902 after decoding. Distribution part 903 distributes by considering logarithm likelihood ratio 902 after decoding as an input. About the other portion, it becomes the same operation as Drawing 8.

0119The BER characteristic when a transmission method is made into the transmission method using Precoding weight of this embodiment on the same conditions as the time of Drawing 29 is shown in Drawing 12. The BER characteristic of Max-log-APP (refer to nonpatent literature 1 and nonpatent literature 2) (APP:a posterior probability) that (A) of Drawing 12 does not perform repetitive detection, (B) of Drawing 12 shows the BER characteristic of Max-log-APP (refer to nonpatent literature 1 and nonpatent literature 2) (five number of times of repetition) which performed repetitive detection. If Drawing 12 is compared with Drawing 29 and the transmission method of this embodiment will be used, it turns out that the BER characteristic when a rice factor is large has improved more greatly than the BER characteristic when spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission is used, and can check the validity of the method of this embodiment.

0120As mentioned above, it is while changing Precoding weight with time like this embodiment when the sending set of MIMO transmission systems transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals from two or more antennas, The effect that transmission quality improves can be acquired compared with the time of a direct wave using the conventional spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission in the dominant LOS environment by changing regularly.

0121In this embodiment, although the number of antennas was limited and operation was explained especially about the composition of the receiving set, even if the number of antennas increases, it can carry out similarly. That is, the number of antennas in a receiving set does not affect operation of this embodiment, and an effect. In particular in this embodiment, although the LDPC code was explained to the example, it is not what was restricted to this, It is not what restricted sum-product decoding to the example as a soft-in/soft-out decoder also about the decoding method, There are the decoding method of other soft-in/soft-out, for example, a BCJR algorithm, a SOVA algorithm, a Msx-log-MAP algorithm, etc. For details, it is shown in nonpatent literature 6.

0122In this embodiment, although the single career method was explained to the example, it is not what was restricted to this, and even when multicareer transmission is performed, it can carry out similarly. Therefore, a spread spectrum communication system, an OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing) method, SC-FDMA (Single Carrier Frequency Division MultipleAccess), It can carry out similarly about the case where a SC-OFDM (Single Carrier Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing) method, the wavelet OFDM method shown in the nonpatent literature 7 grade, etc. are used. In this embodiment, symbols (a preamble, a unique word, etc.) other than a data symbol, for example, pilot symbols, the symbol for transmission of control information, etc. may be arranged how at the frame.

0123Below, an example when an OFDM method is used is explained as an example of a multicareer method.<br />Drawing 13 shows the composition of the sending set when an OFDM method is used. In Drawing 13, the same numerals were attached about what operates like Drawing 3.<br />OFDM method related treating part 1301A considers signal 309A after dignity attachment as an input, processes OFDM method relation, and outputs transmitted signal 1302A. Similarly, OFDM method related treating part 1301B considers signal 309B after dignity attachment as an input, and outputs transmitted signal 1302B.

0124Drawing 14 shows an example of the composition after OFDM method related treating part 1301A of Drawing 13, and 1301B, the portion relevant to 312A from 1301A of Drawing 13 is 1410A from 1401A, and the portion relevant to 312B from 1301B is 1410B from 1401B.<br />Serial-parallel-conversion part 1402A performs signal 1401A (it is equivalent to signal 309A after dignity attachment of Drawing 13) serial parallel conversion after dignity attachment, and outputs parallel signal 1403A.

0125Rearranging part 1404A rearranges by considering parallel signal 1403A as an input, and outputs signal 1405A after rearrangement. Rearrangement is described in detail later.<br />Reverse fast Fourier transform section 1406A considers signal 1405A after rearrangement as an input, performs reverse Fast Fourier Transform, and outputs signal 1407A after inverse Fourier transform.<br />Wireless section 1408A considers signal 1407A after inverse Fourier transform as an input, frequency conversion, amplification, etc. are processed, abnormal-conditions signal 1409A is outputted, and abnormal-conditions signal 1409A is outputted as an electric wave from antenna 1410A.<br />Serial-parallel-conversion part 1402B performs signal 1401B (it is equivalent to signal 309B after dignity attachment of Drawing 13) serial parallel conversion after dignity attachment, and outputs parallel signal 1403B.

0126Rearranging part 1404B rearranges by considering parallel signal 1403B as an input, and outputs signal 1405B after rearrangement. Rearrangement is described in detail later.<br />Reverse fast Fourier transform section 1406B considers signal 1405B after rearrangement as an input, performs reverse Fast Fourier Transform, and outputs signal 1407B after inverse Fourier transform.<br />Wireless section 1408B considers signal 1407B after inverse Fourier transform as an input, frequency conversion, amplification, etc. are processed, abnormal-conditions signal 1409B is outputted, and abnormal-conditions signal 1409B is outputted as an electric wave from antenna 1410B.

0127In the sending set of Drawing 3, since it is not the transmission method which used multicareer, as shown in Drawing 6, Precoding was changed so that it might become four cycles, and the symbol after Precoding is arranged in the direction of a time-axis. Although the symbol after Precoding is naturally arranged in the direction of a time-axis as shown in Drawing 3 and the method which performs it for every career (substitute) can be considered, when a multicareer transmission method like an OFDM method as shown in Drawing 13 is used, In the case of a multicareer transmission method, the direction of a frequency axis or the method of arranging using a frequency axis and time-axis both can be considered. Henceforth, this point is explained.

0128Drawing 15 shows an example of how to rearrange the symbol in rearrangement parts 1404A and 1404B of Drawing 14 in horizontal-axis frequency and vertical-axis time, and is a frequency axis, (Substitute) It is constituted from career 0 by career 9 (substitute), the frequency band with abnormal-conditions signals z1 and z2 same at the same time (time) is used, and how to rearrange the symbol of abnormal-conditions signal z1, as for Drawing 15 (A) and how to rearrange the symbol of abnormal-conditions signal z2, as for Drawing 15 (B) are shown. Serial-parallel-conversion part 1402A waves [ #1, #2, #3, #4, ..., ] in order to the symbol of signal 1401A after dignity attachment considered as an input. At this time, it shall arrange regularly as symbol #1, #2, #3, #4, and ... are arranged in an order from career 0, symbol #1 to #9 is arranged to time $1, as shown in Drawing 15 (A), and symbol #10 to #19 is arranged to time $2 after that.

0129Similarly, serial-parallel-conversion part 1402B waves [ #1 #2, #3, #4, ..., ] in order to the symbol of signal 1401B after dignity attachment considered as an input. At this time, it shall arrange regularly as symbol #1, #2, #3, #4, and ... are arranged in an order from career 0, symbol #1 to #9 is arranged to time $1, as shown in Drawing 15 (B), and symbol #10 to #19 is arranged to time $2 after that.

0130And symbol group 1501 and symbol group 1502 which are shown in Drawing 15, It is a symbol for one cycle when the Precoding weight change method shown in Drawing 6 is used, Symbol #0 is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 4i of Drawing 6 is used, Symbol #1 is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 4i+1 of Drawing 6 is used, Symbol #2 is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 4i+2 of Drawing 6 is used, and symbol #3 is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 4i+3 of Drawing 6 is used. Therefore, when x mod4 is 0 in symbol #x, symbol #x is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 4i of Drawing 6 is used and x mod 4 is 1, When symbol #x is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 4i+1 of Drawing 6 is used and x mod 4 is 2, Symbol #x is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 4i+2 of Drawing 6 is used, and when x mod4 is 3, symbol #x is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 4i+3 of Drawing 6 is used.

0131Thus, when multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM method, are used, unlike the time of single career transmission, it will have the feature that a symbol can be put in order in the direction of a frequency axis. And it is not what was restricted to how to arrange as shown in Drawing 15 about how to put a symbol in order. Other examples are explained using Drawing 16 and Drawing 17.<br />Rearrangement part 1404A of Drawing 14 in horizontal-axis frequency and vertical-axis time from which Drawing 16 differs in Drawing 15, An example of how to rearrange the symbol in 1404B is shown, and Drawing 16 (A) shows how to rearrange the symbol of abnormal-conditions signal z1, and how to rearrange the symbol of abnormal-conditions signal z2, as for Drawing 16 (B). The point that Drawing 16 (A) and (B) differs from Drawing 15 is a point that how to rearrange the symbol of how to rearrange the symbol of abnormal-conditions signal z1 and abnormal-conditions signal z2 differs, and is in Drawing 16 (B), Symbol #0 to #5 is arranged on career 9 from career 4, symbol #6 to #9 is arranged on careers 0-3, and symbol #10 to #19 is arranged on each career under the same rule after that. At this time, symbol group 1601 and symbol group 1602 which are shown in Drawing 16 are a symbol for one cycle when the shown Precoding weight change method is used figure 6 like Drawing 15.

0132Rearrangement part 1404A of Drawing 14 in the horizontal-axis frequency and vertical-axis time when Drawing 17 differs from Drawing 15, An example of how to rearrange the symbol in 1404B is shown, and Drawing 17 (A) shows how to rearrange the symbol of abnormal-conditions signal z1, and how to rearrange the symbol of abnormal-conditions signal z2, as for Drawing 17 (B). While the point that Drawing 17 (A) and (B) differs from Drawing 15 arranges the symbol one by one on the career in Drawing 15, it is a point which does not arrange the symbol one by one on a career in Drawing 17. Although it is natural, how to rearrange how to rearrange the symbol of abnormal-conditions signal z1 and abnormal-conditions signal z2 like Drawing 16 may be made to differ in Drawing 17.

0133It can set at the horizontal-axis frequency and vertical-axis time which are different in Drawing 18 and Drawings 15-17, An example of how to rearrange the symbol in rearrangement parts 1404A and 1404B of Drawing 14 is shown, and Drawing 18 (A) shows how to rearrange the symbol of abnormal-conditions signal z1, and how to rearrange the symbol of abnormal-conditions signal z2, as for Drawing 18 (B). Although the symbol is put in order in the direction of a frequency axis in Drawings 15-17, the symbol is arranged in Drawing 18 using both frequency and a time-axis.

0134Although Drawing 6 explained the example in the case of changing the change of Precoding weight by four slots, the case where it changes by eight slots is explained to an example here. Symbol group 1801 and symbol group 1802 which are shown in Drawing 18, The symbol for one cycle when the Precoding weight change method is used (therefore) It is eight symbols and symbol #0 is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 8i is used, Symbol #1 is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 8i+1 is used, Symbol #2 is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 8i+2 is used, Symbol #3 is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 8i+3 is used, Symbol #4 is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 8i+4 is used, Symbol #5 is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 8i+5 is used, Symbol #6 is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 8i+6 is used, and symbol #7 is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 8i+7 is used. Therefore, when xmod 8 is 0 in symbol #x, symbol #x is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 8i is used and x mod 8 is 1, When symbol #x is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 8i+1 is used and x mod8 is 2, When symbol #x is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 8i+2 is used and x mod 8 is 3, When symbol #x is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 8i+3 is used and x mod 8 is 4, When symbol #x is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 8i+4 is used and x mod 8 is 5, When symbol #x is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 8i+5 is used and x mod 8 is 6, Symbol #x is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 8i+6 is used, and when x mod8 is 7, symbol #x is a symbol when Precoding weight of slot 8i+7 is used. Although total of two slots 4x2= 8 slot was used in the direction of a time-axis in four slots and the direction of a frequency axis and the symbol for one cycle is arranged in how to put the symbol of Drawing 18 in order, At this time, it is n about the slot (the number of careers) of the direction of a frequency axis which uses the number of the symbols for one cycle for arranging the symbol for mxn symbol (it is got blocked and Precoding weight recognizes mxn kind existence.) 1 cycle, When the slot used in the direction of a time-axis is set to m, it is good to consider it as m&gt;n. The change of the direction of a time-axis of the phase of a direct wave is [ this ] loose as compared with change of the direction of a frequency axis. Therefore, since a Precoding weight change of this embodiment is made in order to make influence of a steady direct wave small, I would like to make change of a direct wave small the cycle which changes Precoding weight. Therefore, it is good to consider it as m&gt;n. The effect of a possibility of a direct wave that the way which rearranges using both a frequency axis and a time-axis as shown in Drawing 18 will become steady rather than rearranging a symbol only in the direction of a frequency axis or the direction of a time-axis if the above point is taken into consideration being high, and being easy to acquire the effect of the present invention is acquired. However, since change of a frequency axis is steep and a diversity gain may be able to be obtained if it arranges in the direction of a frequency axis, the method of rearranging using both a frequency axis and a time-axis is not necessarily optimal method.

0135Rearrangement part 1404A of Drawing 14 in horizontal-axis frequency and vertical-axis time from which Drawing 19 differs in Drawing 18, An example of how to rearrange the symbol in 1404B is shown, and Drawing 19 (A) shows how to rearrange the symbol of abnormal-conditions signal z1, and how to rearrange the symbol of abnormal-conditions signal z2, as for Drawing 19 (B). Although Drawing 19 arranges the symbol like Drawing 18 using both frequency and a time-axis, While a different point from Drawing 18 gave priority to the frequency direction and arranges the symbol in the direction of a time-axis after that in Drawing 18, in Drawing 19, it gives priority to the direction of a time-axis, and is a point which arranges the symbol in the direction of a frequency axis after that. In Drawing 19, symbol group 1901 and symbol group 1902 are the symbols for one cycle when the Precoding change method is used.

0136In Drawing 18 and Drawing 19, even if it arranges like Drawing 16 so that the configuration method of the symbol of abnormal-conditions signal z1 may differ from the symbol configuration method of abnormal-conditions signal z2, it can carry out similarly, and the effect that high receiving quality can be obtained can be acquired. In Drawing 18 and Drawing 19, as shown in Drawing 17, even if it does not arrange the symbol one by one, it can carry out similarly and can acquire the effect that high receiving quality can be obtained.

0137An example of how to rearrange the symbol in rearrangement parts 1404A and 1404B of Drawing 14 in horizontal-axis frequency and vertical-axis time that the above differs in Drawing 27 is shown. The case where a Precoding procession is regularly changed using four slots like a formula (37) - a formula (40) is considered. Although the characteristic point is arranging the symbol in order in the direction of a frequency axis in Drawing 27, when it advances in the direction of a time-axis, it is a point which carries out n (example of Drawing 27 n= 1) symbol cyclic shift cyclically. In four symbols shown in symbol group 2710 of the direction of a frequency axis in Drawing 27, the Precoding procession of a formula (37) - a formula (40) shall be changed.

0138Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (37) as the symbol of #0 at this time, # Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (38) in 1, Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (39) in #2, and Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (40) in #3 shall be performed.<br />Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (37) as the symbol of #4 similarly about symbol group 2720 of the direction of a frequency axis, # Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (38) in 5, Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (39) in #6, and Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (40) in #7 shall be performed.

0139Although the above Precoding processions were changed in the symbol of time $1, In the direction of a time-axis, since the cyclic shift is carried out, about symbol groups 2701, 2702, 2703, and 2704, a Precoding procession will be changed as follows.<br />Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (37) as the symbol of #0 in symbol group 2701 of the direction of a time-axis, # Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (38) in 9, Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (39) in #18, and Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (40) in #27 shall be performed.

0140Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (37) as the symbol of #28 in symbol group 2702 of the direction of a time-axis, # Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (38) in 1, Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (39) in #10, and Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (40) in #19 shall be performed.

0141Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (37) as the symbol of #20 in symbol group 2703 of the direction of a time-axis, # Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (38) in 29, Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (39) in #2, and Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (40) in #11 shall be performed.

0142Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (37) as the symbol of #12 in symbol group 2704 of the direction of a time-axis, # Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (38) in 21, Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (39) in #30, and Precoding which used the Precoding procession of the formula (40) in #3 shall be performed.

0143The feature in Drawing 27 is a symbol (#10 and #12) of the neighbors of the direction of a frequency axis of the same time, when its attention is paid to the symbol of #11, for example, While performing Precoding using a different Precoding procession from both #11, # As for the symbol (#2 and #20) of the neighbors of the direction of a time-axis of the same career of the symbol of 11, both #11 are performing Precoding using a different Precoding procession. And this is not what was restricted to the symbol of #11, and the direction of a frequency axis and the direction of a time-axis will have the same feature as the symbol of #11 in all the symbols to which a symbol exists in neighbors. Since this will have changed the Precoding procession effectively and it is hard coming to be subject to influence on the steady situation of a direct wave, a possibility that the receiving quality of data will be improved becomes high.

0144In Drawing 27, although explained as n= 1, it is not what was restricted to this and can carry out similarly as n= 3. moreover -- although the above-mentioned feature was realized in Drawing 27 by giving the feature of carrying out the cyclic shift of the turn of arrangement of a symbol when a symbol was arranged in a frequency axis and time progressed in the direction of an axis There is also a method that the above-mentioned feature is realized by arranging a symbol at random (it may be regular).

0145(Embodiment 2)<br />Although Embodiment 1 explained the case where Precoding weight as shown in Drawing 6 was changed regularly, this embodiment explains the designing method of different concrete Precoding weight from Precoding weight of Drawing 6.<br />Drawing 6 explained how to change Precoding weight of a formula (37) - a formula (40). When this is generalized, Precoding weight can be changed as follows. (However, the change cycle of Precoding weight is set to 4 and performs the same statement as a formula (37) - a formula (40).)<br />At the time of symbol number 4i (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0146<maths num="42"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0042.tif" /></maths>

0147However, j is an imaginary unit.<br />At the time of symbol number 4i+1:

0148<maths num="43"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0043.tif" /></maths>

0149At the time of symbol number 4i+2:

0150<maths num="44"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0044.tif" /></maths>

0151At the time of symbol number 4i+3:

0152<maths num="45"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0045.tif" /></maths>

0153And it is a formula (36) and a formula (41) to a receiving vector R(t) = (r1 (t), r2 (t))^TIt can express as follows.<br />At the time of symbol number 4i:

0154<maths num="46"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0046.tif" /></maths>

0155At the time of symbol number 4i+1:

0156<maths num="47"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0047.tif" /></maths>

0157At the time of symbol number 4i+2:

0158<maths num="48"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0048.tif" /></maths>

0159At the time of symbol number 4i+3:

0160<maths num="49"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0049.tif" /></maths>

0161At this time, it is channel element h._１１(t), h_１２(t), h_２１(t), h_２２In (t), it assumes that only the ingredient of a direct wave exists, and all the amplitude ingredients of the ingredient of the direct wave are equal, and presuppose that change does not arise in time. Then, a formula (46) - a formula (49) can be expressed as follows.<br />At the time of symbol number 4i:

0162<maths num="50"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0050.tif" /></maths>

0163At the time of symbol number 4i+1:

0164<maths num="51"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0051.tif" /></maths>

0165At the time of symbol number 4i+2:

0166<maths num="52"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0052.tif" /></maths>

0167At the time of symbol number 4i+3:

0168<maths num="53"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0053.tif" /></maths>

0169However, in a formula (50) - a formula (53), A shall be the positive real number and q shall be a complex number. This value of A and q is decided according to the physical relationship of a sending set and a receiving set. And a formula (50) - a formula (53) shall be expressed as follows.<br />At the time of symbol number 4i:

0170<maths num="54"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0054.tif" /></maths>

0171At the time of symbol number 4i+1:

0172<maths num="55"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0055.tif" /></maths>

0173At the time of symbol number 4i+2:

0174<maths num="56"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0056.tif" /></maths>

0175At the time of symbol number 4i+3:

0176<maths num="57"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0057.tif" /></maths>

0177Since the signal ingredient based on either one of s1 or s2 to r1 and r2 is no longer contained when q is expressed as follows, it becomes impossible then, to acquire either signal of s1 and s2.<br />At the time of symbol number 4i:

0178<maths num="58"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0058.tif" /></maths>

0179At the time of symbol number 4i+1:

0180<maths num="59"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0059.tif" /></maths>

0181At the time of symbol number 4i+2:

0182<maths num="60"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0060.tif" /></maths>

0183At the time of symbol number 4i+3:

0184<maths num="61"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0061.tif" /></maths>

0185Since the channel element of a direct wave does not have [ q ] a big change suddenly in the same solution in symbol number 4i, 4i+1, 4i+2, and 4i+3 at this time, Also in which symbol number, since it becomes [ the receiving set which has a channel element with a value of q equal to the same above-mentioned solution ] impossible to obtain good receiving quality, even if it introduces an error correcting code, it is difficult for it to acquire error correcting capability. Therefore, in order for q not to have the same solution, when its attention is paid to the solution of the way which does not contain delta between the two solution to q, the following conditions are needed from a formula (58) - a formula (61).

0186<maths num="62"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0062.tif" /></maths>

0187(x is 0, 1, 2, and 3, and y is 0, 1, 2, and 3 and is x!=y.)<br /><br />As the example with which condition #1 is filled,<br />(Example #1) <br />&lt;1&gt; theta_１１(4i) =theta_１１(4i+1) =theta_１１(4i+2) =theta_１１(4i+3) = zero rad<br />It carries out,<br />&lt;2&gt; theta_２１(4i) = zero rad<br />&lt;3&gt; theta_２１(4i+1) =pi/2rad<br />&lt;4&gt; theta_２１(4i+2) =pi Radian<br />&lt;5&gt; theta_２１(4i+3) =3pi/2rad<br />How to set up can be considered. (The above being an example (theta).)_２１(4i), theta_２１(4i+1), theta_２１(4i+2), theta_２１Zero rad, pi/2rad, pi Radian, and every one 3pi / 2 rad should just exist in the set of (4i+3). At this time Since it is not necessary to baseband signal s1 (t) to give signal processing (rotation processing) if there are conditions of &lt;1&gt; especially, there is an advantage that reduction of circuit scales can be aimed at. As another example,<br />(Example #2) <br />&lt;6&gt; theta_１１(4i) = zero rad<br />&lt;7&gt; theta_１１(4i+1) =pi/2rad<br />&lt;8&gt; theta_１１(4i+2) =pi Radian<br />&lt;9&gt; theta_１１(4i+3) =3pi/2rad<br />It carries out,<br />&lt;10&gt; theta_２１(4i) =theta_２１(4i+1) =theta_２１(4i+2) =theta_２１(4i+3) =0 Radian<br />How to set up is also considered. (The above being an example (theta).)_１１(4i), theta_１１(4i+1), theta_１１(4i+2), theta_１１Zero rad, pi/2rad, pi Radian, and every one 3pi / 2 rad should just exist in the set of (4i+3). At this time Since it is not necessary to baseband signal s2 (t) to give signal processing (rotation processing) if there are conditions of &lt;6&gt; especially, there is an advantage that reduction of circuit scales can be aimed at. The following is raised as another example.<br />(Example #3) <br />&lt;11&gt; theta_１１(4i) =theta_１１(4i+1) =theta_１１(4i+2) =theta_１１(4i+3) =0 Radian<br />It carries out,<br />&lt;12&gt; theta_２１(4i) = zero rad<br />&lt;13&gt; theta_２１(4i+1) =pi/4rad<br />&lt;14&gt; theta_２１(4i+2) =pi/2rad<br />&lt;15&gt; theta_２１(4i+3) =3pi/4rad<br />(The above being an example (theta).)_２１(4i), theta_２１(4i+1), theta_２１(4i+2), theta_２１Zero rad, pi/4rad, pi/2rad, and every one 3pi / 4 rad should just exist in the set of (4i+3). <br />(Example #4) <br />&lt;16&gt; theta_１１(4i) = zero rad<br />&lt;17&gt; theta_１１(4i+1) =pi/4rad<br />&lt;18&gt; theta_１１(4i+2) =pi/2rad<br />&lt;19&gt; theta_１１(4i+3) =3pi/4rad<br />It carries out,<br />&lt;20&gt; theta_２１(4i) =theta_２１(4i+1) =theta_２１(4i+2) =theta_２１(4i+3) =0 Radian<br />(The above being an example (theta).)_１１(4i), theta_１１(4i+1), theta_１１(4i+2), theta_１１Zero rad, pi/4rad, pi/2rad, and every one 3pi / 4 rad should just exist in the set of (4i+3). <br />Although four examples were given, the method of filling condition #1 is not what was restricted to this.

0188Next, theta_１１theta_１２It is accepted and the requirements for a design about not Only but lambda and delta are explained. It may set to a certain value and it is necessary to give the requirements about delta as requirements about lambda. Then, the setting method of delta when lambda is zero rad is explained.<br />In this case, if it is pi/2 rad &lt;=|delta|&lt;=pi Radian to delta, in the LOS environment, good receiving quality can be obtained especially.

0189By the way, in symbol number 4i, 4i+1, 4i+2, and 4i+3, two q which becomes bad receiving quality, respectively exists. Therefore, a 2x4=8 point point will exist. In the LOS environment, in order to prevent receiving quality deteriorating in a specific receiving terminal, it is good in it being a solution from which all of these eight points differ. In this case, in addition to &lt;condition #1&gt;, the conditions of &lt;condition #2&gt; are needed.

0190<maths num="63"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0063.tif" /></maths>

0191In addition, it is good for the phase of these eight points to exist uniformly. (since it is thought that the phase of a direct wave has a high possibility of becoming uniform distribution) Below, the setting method of delta which satisfies this requirement is explained.<br />(Example #1) a case -- delta -- ±3pi / 4 rad -- setting up -- things -- the point that receiving quality is bad -- a phase -- uniform -- existing -- coming -- (example #2). For example, if it is referred to as (example #1) and delta is made into 3pi / 4 rad, as shown in Drawing (A is taken as the positive real number) 20, the point that receiving quality worsens once exists in four slots. (Example #3) a case -- delta -- ±pi Radian -- setting up -- things -- the point that receiving quality is bad -- a phase -- uniform -- existing -- coming -- (example #4). For example, it is referred to as (example #3), and if delta is made into pi Radian, as shown in Drawing 21, the point that receiving quality worsens once exists in four slots. (When element q in channel procession H exists in the point shown in Drawing 20 and Drawing 21, receiving quality will deteriorate.)<br />By making it above, good receiving quality can be obtained in the LOS environment. Although the example which changes Precoding weight explained 4 slot cycles above, below, N slot cycle explains the case where Precoding weight is changed. When it is considered Embodiment 1 and above-mentioned explanation the same way, processing which is expressed below will be performed to a symbol number.<br />At the time of symbol number nickel (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0192<maths num="64"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0064.tif" /></maths>

0193However, j is an imaginary unit.<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+1:

0194<maths num="65"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0065.tif" /></maths>

0195・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0196<maths num="66"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0066.tif" /></maths>

0197・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+N-1:

0198<maths num="67"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0067.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0199Therefore, r1 and r2 are expressed as follows.<br />At the time of symbol number nickel (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0200<maths num="68"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0068.tif" /></maths>

0201However, j is an imaginary unit.<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+1:

0202<maths num="69"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0069.tif" /></maths>

0203・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0204<maths num="70"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0070.tif" /></maths>

0205・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+N-1:

0206<maths num="71"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0071.tif" /></maths>

0207At this time, it is channel element h._１１(t), h_１２(t), h_２１(t), h_２２In (t), it assumes that only the ingredient of a direct wave exists, and all the amplitude ingredients of the ingredient of the direct wave are equal, and presuppose that change does not arise in time. Then, a formula (66) - a formula (69) can be expressed as follows.<br />At the time of symbol number nickel (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0208<maths num="72"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0072.tif" /></maths>

0209However, j is an imaginary unit.<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+1:

0210<maths num="73"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0073.tif" /></maths>

0211・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0212<maths num="74"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0074.tif" /></maths>

0213・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+N-1:

0214<maths num="75"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0075.tif" /></maths>

0215However, in a formula (70) - a formula (73), A shall be the real number and q shall be a complex number. This value of A and q is decided according to the physical relationship of a sending set and a receiving set. And a formula (70) - a formula (73) shall be expressed as follows.<br />At the time of symbol number nickel (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0216<maths num="76"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0076.tif" /></maths>

0217However, j is an imaginary unit.<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+1:

0218<maths num="77"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0077.tif" /></maths>

0219・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0220<maths num="78"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0078.tif" /></maths>

0221・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+N-1:

0222<maths num="79"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0079.tif" /></maths>

0223Since the signal ingredient based on either one of s1 or s2 to r1 and r2 is no longer contained when q is expressed as follows, it becomes impossible then, to acquire either signal of s1 and s2.<br />At the time of symbol number nickel (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0224<maths num="80"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0080.tif" /></maths>

0225At the time of symbol number nickel+1:

0226<maths num="81"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0081.tif" /></maths>

0227・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0228<maths num="82"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0082.tif" /></maths>

0229・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+N-1:

0230<maths num="83"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0083.tif" /></maths>

0231Since the channel element of a direct wave does not have [ q ] a big change suddenly in the same solution in symbol number N - nickel+N-1 at this time, it is a receiving set with a value of q equal to the same above-mentioned solution, Also in which symbol number, since it becomes impossible to obtain good receiving quality, even if it introduces an error correcting code, it is difficult to acquire error correcting capability. Therefore, in order for q not to have the same solution, when its attention is paid to the solution of the way which does not contain delta between the two solution to q, the following conditions are needed from a formula (78) - a formula (81).

0232<maths num="84"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0084.tif" /></maths>

0233(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br /><br />Next, theta_１１theta_１２It is accepted and the requirements for a design about not Only but lambda and delta are explained. It may set to a certain value and it is necessary to give the requirements about delta as requirements about lambda. Then, the setting method of delta when lambda is zero rad is explained.

0234In this case, like the time of the method of changing Precoding weight 4 slot cycles, if it is pi/2 rad &lt;=|delta|&lt;=pi Radian to delta, in the LOS environment, good receiving quality can be obtained especially.<br />In symbol number nickel-nickel+N-1, two q which becomes bad receiving quality, respectively will exist, therefore a 2N point point will exist. In the LOS environment, in order to acquire the good characteristic, it is good in it being a solution from which all of these 2N points differ. In this case, in addition to &lt;condition #3&gt;, the conditions of &lt;condition #4&gt; are needed.

0235<maths num="85"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0085.tif" /></maths>

0236In addition, it is good for a these 2N points phase to exist uniformly. (since it is thought that the phase of the direct wave in each receiving set has a high possibility of becoming uniform distribution)<br />As mentioned above, it is while changing Precoding weight with time when the sending set of MIMO transmission systems transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals from two or more antennas, The effect that transmission quality improves can be acquired compared with the time of a direct wave using the conventional spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission in the dominant LOS environment by changing regularly.

0237In this embodiment, although it was as Embodiment 1 having explained, and the number of antennas was limited and operation was explained especially about the composition of the receiving set, composition of a receiving set can be similarly carried out, even if the number of antennas increases. That is, the number of antennas in a receiving set does not affect operation of this embodiment, and an effect. In this embodiment, an error correcting code is not limited like Embodiment 1.

0238It is although it was made to contrast with Embodiment 1 and the Precoding weight changing method in a time-axis was explained by this embodiment, As Embodiment 1 explained, even if it carries out a Precoding weight changing method, it can carry out in a similar manner by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis using a multicareer transmission method. In this embodiment, symbols (a preamble, a unique word, etc.) other than a data symbol, for example, pilot symbols, the symbol for control information, etc. may be arranged how at the frame.

0239(Embodiment 3)<br />At Embodiment 1 and Embodiment 2, although the case where the amplitude of each element of the procession of Precoding weight was equal was explained in the method which changes Precoding weight regularly, this embodiment explains the example by which this condition is not fulfilled.<br />In order to contrast with Embodiment 2, N slot cycle explains the case where Precoding weight is changed. When it is considered Embodiment 1 and Embodiment 2 the same way, processing which is expressed below will be performed to a symbol number. However, beta considers it as the positive real number, and is set to beta!=1.<br />At the time of symbol number nickel (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0240<maths num="86"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0086.tif" /></maths>

0241However, j is an imaginary unit.<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+1:

0242<maths num="87"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0087.tif" /></maths>

0243・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0244<maths num="88"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0088.tif" /></maths>

0245・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+N-1:

0246<maths num="89"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0089.tif" /></maths>

0247Therefore, r1 and r2 are expressed as follows.<br />At the time of symbol number nickel (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0248<maths num="90"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0090.tif" /></maths>

0249However, j is an imaginary unit.<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+1:

0250<maths num="91"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0091.tif" /></maths>

0251・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0252<maths num="92"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0092.tif" /></maths>

0253・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+N-1:

0254<maths num="93"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0093.tif" /></maths>

0255At this time, it is channel element h._１１(t), h_１２(t), h_２１(t), h_２２In (t), it assumes that only the ingredient of a direct wave exists, and all the amplitude ingredients of the ingredient of the direct wave are equal, and presuppose that change does not arise in time. Then, a formula (86) - a formula (89) can be expressed as follows.<br />At the time of symbol number nickel (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0256<maths num="94"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0094.tif" /></maths>

0257However, j is an imaginary unit.<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+1:

0258<maths num="95"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0095.tif" /></maths>

0259・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0260<maths num="96"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0096.tif" /></maths>

0261・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+N-1:

0262<maths num="97"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0097.tif" /></maths>

0263However, in a formula (90) - a formula (93), A shall be the real number and q shall be a complex number. And a formula (90) - a formula (93) shall be expressed as follows.<br />At the time of symbol number nickel (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0264<maths num="98"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0098.tif" /></maths>

0265However, j is an imaginary unit.<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+1:

0266<maths num="99"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0099.tif" /></maths>

0267・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0268<maths num="100"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0100.tif" /></maths>

0269・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+N-1:

0270<maths num="101"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0101.tif" /></maths>

0271When q is expressed as follows, it becomes impossible then, to acquire either signal of s1 and s2.<br />At the time of symbol number nickel (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0272<maths num="102"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0102.tif" /></maths>

0273At the time of symbol number nickel+1:

0274<maths num="103"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0103.tif" /></maths>

0275・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0276<maths num="104"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0104.tif" /></maths>

0277・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number nickel+N-1:

0278<maths num="105"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0105.tif" /></maths>

0279Even if it introduces an error correcting code also in which symbol number since it becomes impossible to obtain good receiving quality since q does not have change with a big channel element of a direct wave suddenly in the same solution in symbol number N-nickel+N-1 at this time, it is difficult to acquire error correcting capability. Therefore, in order for q not to have the same solution, when its attention is paid to the solution of the way which does not contain delta between the two solution to q, the following conditions are needed from a formula (98) - a formula (101).

0280<maths num="106"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0106.tif" /></maths>

0281(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br /><br />Next, theta_１１theta_１２It is accepted and the requirements for a design about not Only but lambda and delta are explained. It may set to a certain value and it is necessary to give the requirements about delta as requirements about lambda. Then, the setting method of delta when lambda is zero rad is explained.

0282In this case, like the time of the method of changing Precoding weight 4 slot cycles, if it is pi/2 rad &lt;=|delta|&lt;=pi Radian to delta, in the LOS environment, good receiving quality can be obtained especially.<br />In symbol number nickel-nickel+N-1, two q which becomes bad receiving quality, respectively will exist, therefore a 2N point point will exist. In the LOS environment, in order to acquire the good characteristic, it is good in it being a solution from which all of these 2N points differ. In this case, in addition to &lt;condition #5&gt;, beta considers it as the positive real number, and when it takes into consideration that it is beta!=1, the conditions of &lt;condition #6&gt; are needed.

0283<maths num="107"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0107.tif" /></maths>

0284As mentioned above, it is while changing Precoding weight with time when the sending set of MIMO transmission systems transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals from two or more antennas, The effect that transmission quality improves can be acquired compared with the time of a direct wave using the conventional spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission in the dominant LOS environment by changing regularly.<br />In this embodiment, although it was as Embodiment 1 having explained, and the number of antennas was limited and operation was explained especially about the composition of the receiving set, composition of a receiving set can be similarly carried out, even if the number of antennas increases. That is, the number of antennas in a receiving set does not affect operation of this embodiment, and an effect. In this embodiment, an error correcting code is not limited like Embodiment 1.

0285It is although it was made to contrast with Embodiment 1 and the Precoding weight changing method in a time-axis was explained by this embodiment, As Embodiment 1 explained, even if it carries out a Precoding weight changing method, it can carry out in a similar manner by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis using a multicareer transmission method. In this embodiment, symbols (a preamble, a unique word, etc.) other than a data symbol, for example, pilot symbols, the symbol for control information, etc. may be arranged how at the frame.

0286(Embodiment 4)<br />In the method which changes Precoding weight regularly, Embodiment 3 explained two kinds, 1 and beta, of cases for the amplitude of each element of the procession of Precoding weight to the example.<br />Here,

0287<maths num="108"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0108.tif" /></maths>

0288It is Is ignored(ing).<br />　<br />Then, the example in the case of changing the value of beta by a slot is explained.<br />In order to contrast with Embodiment 3, a 2xN slot cycle explains the case where Precoding weight is changed.<br />When it is considered Embodiment 1, Embodiment 2, and Embodiment 3 the same way, processing which is expressed below will be performed to a symbol number. However, beta considers it as the positive real number, and is set to beta!=1. alpha considers it as the positive real number, and is taken as alpha!=beta.<br />At the time of symbol number 2nickel (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0289<maths num="109"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0109.tif" /></maths>

0290However, j is an imaginary unit.<br />At the time of symbol number 2nickel+1:

0291<maths num="110"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0110.tif" /></maths>

0292・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0293<maths num="111"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0111.tif" /></maths>

0294・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N-1:

0295<maths num="112"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0112.tif" /></maths>

0296At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0297<maths num="113"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0113.tif" /></maths>

0298However, j is an imaginary unit.<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N+1:

0299<maths num="114"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0114.tif" /></maths>

0300・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0301<maths num="115"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0115.tif" /></maths>

0302・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2nickel+2N-1:

0303<maths num="116"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0116.tif" /></maths>

0304Therefore, r1 and r2 are expressed as follows.<br />At the time of symbol number 2nickel (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0305<maths num="117"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0117.tif" /></maths>

0306However, j is an imaginary unit.<br />At the time of symbol number 2nickel+1:

0307<maths num="118"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0118.tif" /></maths>

0308・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0309<maths num="119"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0119.tif" /></maths>

0310・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N-1:

0311<maths num="120"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0120.tif" /></maths>

0312At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0313<maths num="121"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0121.tif" /></maths>

0314However, j is an imaginary unit.<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N+1:

0315<maths num="122"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0122.tif" /></maths>

0316・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0317<maths num="123"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0123.tif" /></maths>

0318・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2nickel+2N-1:

0319<maths num="124"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0124.tif" /></maths>

0320At this time, it is channel element h._１１(t), h_１２(t), h_２１(t), h_２２In (t), it assumes that only the ingredient of a direct wave exists, and all the amplitude ingredients of the ingredient of the direct wave are equal, and presuppose that change does not arise in time. Then, a formula (110) - a formula (117) can be expressed as follows.<br />At the time of symbol number 2nickel (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0321<maths num="125"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0125.tif" /></maths>

0322However, j is an imaginary unit.<br />At the time of symbol number 2nickel+1:

0323<maths num="126"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0126.tif" /></maths>

0324・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0325<maths num="127"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0127.tif" /></maths>

0326・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N-1:

0327<maths num="128"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0128.tif" /></maths>

0328At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0329<maths num="129"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0129.tif" /></maths>

0330However, j is an imaginary unit.<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N+1:

0331<maths num="130"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0130.tif" /></maths>

0332・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0333<maths num="131"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0131.tif" /></maths>

0334・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2nickel+2N-1:

0335<maths num="132"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0132.tif" /></maths>

0336However, in a formula (118) - a formula (125), A shall be the real number and q shall be a complex number. And a formula (118) - a formula (125) shall be expressed as follows.<br />At the time of symbol number 2nickel (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0337<maths num="133"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0133.tif" /></maths>

0338However, j is an imaginary unit.<br />At the time of symbol number 2nickel+1:

0339<maths num="134"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0134.tif" /></maths>

0340・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0341<maths num="135"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0135.tif" /></maths>

0342・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N-1:

0343<maths num="136"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0136.tif" /></maths>

0344At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0345<maths num="137"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0137.tif" /></maths>

0346However, j is an imaginary unit.<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N+1:

0347<maths num="138"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0138.tif" /></maths>

0348・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0349<maths num="139"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0139.tif" /></maths>

0350・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2nickel+2N-1:

0351<maths num="140"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0140.tif" /></maths>

0352When q is expressed as follows, it becomes impossible then, to acquire either signal of s1 and s2.<br />At the time of symbol number 2nickel (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0353<maths num="141"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0141.tif" /></maths>

0354At the time of symbol number 2nickel+1:

0355<maths num="142"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0142.tif" /></maths>

0356・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0357<maths num="143"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0143.tif" /></maths>

0358・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N-1:

0359<maths num="144"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0144.tif" /></maths>

0360At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0361<maths num="145"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0145.tif" /></maths>

0362At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N+1:

0363<maths num="146"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0146.tif" /></maths>

0364・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2 nickel+N+k (k= 0, 1, ..., N-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)):

0365<maths num="147"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0147.tif" /></maths>

0366・<br />　　　・<br />　　　・<br />At the time of symbol number 2nickel+2N-1:

0367<maths num="148"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0148.tif" /></maths>

0368Since the channel element of a direct wave does not have [ q ] a big change suddenly in the same solution in symbol number 2nickel - 2 nickel+N-1 at this time, Also in which symbol number, since it becomes impossible to obtain good receiving quality, even if it introduces an error correcting code, it is difficult to acquire error correcting capability. Therefore, in order for q not to have the same solution, when its attention is paid to the solution of the way which does not contain delta between the two solution to q, &lt;condition #7&gt; or &lt;condition #8&gt; are needed from a formula (134) - a formula (141), and alpha!=beta.

0369<maths num="149"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0149.tif" /></maths>

0370<maths num="150"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0150.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0371Although it is the conditions which stated &lt;condition #8&gt; by Embodiment 1 - Embodiment 3 at this time, and the same conditions, the solution of the way which does not contain delta between the two solution to q although &lt;condition #7&gt; is alpha!=beta therefore will have a different solution.<br />Next, theta_１１theta_１２It is accepted and the requirements for a design about not Only but lambda and delta are explained. It may set to a certain value and it is necessary to give the requirements about delta as requirements about lambda. Then, the setting method of delta when lambda is zero rad is explained.

0372In this case, like the time of the method of changing Precoding weight 4 slot cycles, if it is pi/2 rad &lt;=|delta|&lt;=pi Radian to delta, in the LOS environment, good receiving quality can be obtained especially.<br />In symbol number 2nickel - 2nickel+2N-1, two q which becomes bad receiving quality, respectively will exist, therefore a 4N point point will exist. In the LOS environment, in order to acquire the good characteristic, it is good in it being a solution from which all of these 4N points differ. When its attention is paid to amplitude at this time, since it is alpha!=beta, the following conditions are needed to &lt;condition #7&gt; or &lt;condition #8&gt;.

0373<maths num="151"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0151.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0374As mentioned above, it is while changing Precoding weight with time when the sending set of MIMO transmission systems transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals from two or more antennas, The effect that transmission quality improves can be acquired compared with the time of a direct wave using the conventional spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission in the dominant LOS environment by changing regularly.<br />In this embodiment, although it was as Embodiment 1 having explained, and the number of antennas was limited and operation was explained especially about the composition of the receiving set, composition of a receiving set can be similarly carried out, even if the number of antennas increases. That is, the number of antennas in a receiving set does not affect operation of this embodiment, and an effect. In this embodiment, an error correcting code is not limited like Embodiment 1.

0375It is although it was made to contrast with Embodiment 1 and the Precoding weight changing method in a time-axis was explained by this embodiment, As Embodiment 1 explained, even if it carries out a Precoding weight changing method, it can carry out in a similar manner by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis using a multicareer transmission method. In this embodiment, symbols (a preamble, a unique word, etc.) other than a data symbol, for example, pilot symbols, the symbol for control information, etc. may be arranged how at the frame.

0376(Embodiment 5)<br />Although Embodiment 1 - Embodiment 4 explained how to change Precoding weight regularly, this embodiment explains the modification.<br />Embodiment 1 - Embodiment 4 explained how to change Precoding weight regularly as shown in Drawing 6. This embodiment explains the method of changing Precoding weight regularly which is different in Drawing 6.

0377The method which changes four different Precoding weight (procession) shows the figure about the different method of changing to Drawing 22 in Drawing 6 like Drawing 6. In Drawing 22, four different Precoding weight (procession) shall be expressed as W1, W2, W3, and W4. (For example, Precoding weight [ in / for W1 / a formula (37) ] (procession)) W2 is made into Precoding weight (procession) in a formula (38), Precoding weight [ in / for W3 / a formula (39) ] (procession), and Precoding weight [ in / for W4 / a formula (40) ] (procession). And The same numerals are attached about what operates like Drawing 3 and Drawing 6. In Drawing 22, it is a peculiar portion,<br />- All of the 1st cycle 2201, the 2nd cycle 2202, the 3rd cycle 2203, and ... comprise four slots.<br />- Use a different Precoding weight procession for every slot, i.e., W1 and W2, W3, and W4 once in four slots, respectively.<br />- In the 1st cycle 2201, the 2nd cycle 2202, the 3rd cycle 2203, and ..., it is not necessary to necessarily make the same W1, W2, W3, and turn of W4.<br />It comes out. In order to realize this, Precoding weight generation part 2200 considers the signal about a weighting method as an input, and outputs information 2210 about Precoding weight according to the turn in each cycle. And dignity attachment synchronizer 600 makes this signal s1 (t) and s2 (t) with an input, performs dignity attachment composition, and outputs z1 (t) and z2 (t).

0378In Drawing 23, Drawing 22 shows the dignity attachment synthesizing method to the above-mentioned Puri coding method. In Drawing 23, the point that Drawings 22 differ is arranging a rearranging part and rearranging a signal after a dignity attachment synchronizer, and is a point of having realized the same method as Drawing 22.<br />In Drawing 23, Precoding weight generation part 2200 considers information 315 about a weighting method as an input, and it is Precoding weight W1 and W2, W3, W4, W1 and W2, W3, and W4._、Information 2210 on Precoding weight is outputted in order of ... Therefore, dignity attachment synchronizers 600 are Precoding weight W1 and W2, W3, W4, W1 and W2, W3, and W4._、Precoding weight is used in order of ... and signals 2300A and 2300B after Precoding are outputted.

0379Rearrangement part 2300 should consider signals 2300A and 2300B after Precoding as an input, and should serve as turn of the 1st cycle 2201 of Drawing 23, the 2nd cycle 2202, and the 3rd cycle 2203, It rearranges about signals 2300A and 2300B after Precoding, and outputs z1 (t) and z2 (t).<br />By Above, in order to compare the change cycle of Precoding weight with Drawing 6, it explained as 4, but it is possible like Embodiment 1 - Embodiment 4 to carry out similarly in the times other than periodic 4.<br />Although the value of delta and beta was explained the same for every slot within the cycle, it may be made to change the value of delta and beta for every slot in Embodiment 1 - Embodiment 4, and the above-mentioned Puri coding method.

0380As mentioned above, it is while changing Precoding weight with time when the sending set of MIMO transmission systems transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals from two or more antennas, The effect that transmission quality improves can be acquired compared with the time of a direct wave using the conventional spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission in the dominant LOS environment by changing regularly.<br />In this embodiment, although it was as Embodiment 1 having explained, and the number of antennas was limited and operation was explained especially about the composition of the receiving set, composition of a receiving set can be similarly carried out, even if the number of antennas increases. That is, the number of antennas in a receiving set does not affect operation of this embodiment, and an effect. In this embodiment, an error correcting code is not limited like Embodiment 1.

0381It is although it was made to contrast with Embodiment 1 and the Precoding weight changing method in a time-axis was explained by this embodiment, As Embodiment 1 explained, even if it carries out a Precoding weight changing method, it can carry out in a similar manner by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis using a multicareer transmission method. In this embodiment, symbols (a preamble, a unique word, etc.) other than a data symbol, for example, pilot symbols, the symbol for control information, etc. may be arranged how at the frame.

0382(Embodiment 6)<br />In Embodiments 1-4, although how to change Precoding weight regularly was described, this embodiment explains how to change Precoding weight regularly again including the contents described by Embodiments 1-4.<br />Here, the designing method of the Precoding procession of the spatial multiplexing type 2 x2MIMO system to which Precoding in which the feedback from the communication partner in consideration of the LOS environment does not exist probably is applied is described.

0383Drawing 30 shows the spatial multiplexing type 2 x2MIMO system model to which Precoding in which the feedback from a communication partner does not exist is applied. As for information vector z, coding and interleave are given. And it is vector [ of an after-coding bit ] u(p) = (u) as an output of interleave.₁(p),u₂(p) is obtained (p is slot time.). However, u_i(p)=(u_i1(p) --, u_ihIt is referred to as (p) (h: the number of transmission bits per symbol). It is a signal after abnormal conditions (after mapping) s(p) = (s1 (p), s2 (p))^TWhen it carries out, and a Precoding procession is set to F (p), it is signal [ after Precoding ] x(p) = (x).₁(p),x₂(p))^TIt is expressed with Is.

0384<maths num="152"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0152.tif" /></maths>

0385Therefore, it is a receiving vector y(p) = (y)₁(p),*y₂(p))^TIt is expressed with a following formula when it carries out.

0386<maths num="153"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0153.tif" /></maths>

0387At this time, H (p) is a channel procession and n(p) = (n).₁(p),n₂(p))^TIt is a Is noise vector and is n._i(p) is average value 0 and distribution sigma.²It is a of i.i.d. complex Gaussian random noise. And when a rice factor is set to K, an upper type can be expressed as follows.

0388<maths num="154"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0154.tif" /></maths>

0389At this time, it is H._d(p) is a channel procession of a direct wave ingredient, and H._s(p) is a channel procession of a dispersion wave ingredient. Therefore, channel procession H (p) is expressed as follows.

0390<maths num="155"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0155.tif" /></maths>

0391In a formula (145), it assumes that the environment of a direct wave is uniquely determined by the physical relationship of communication machines, and is channel procession H of a direct wave ingredient._d(p) shall not have change in time. Channel procession H of a direct wave ingredient_dIn (p), since a possibility that the distance between transceiver machines will serve as sufficiently long environment is high as compared with a transmitting antenna interval, it shall be a channel procession regular matrix of a direct wave ingredient. Therefore, channel procession H_d(p) shall be expressed as follows.

0392<maths num="156"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0156.tif" /></maths>

0393Here, A shall be the positive real number and q shall be a complex number. Below, the designing method of the Precoding procession of the spatial multiplexing type 2 x2MIMO system to which Precoding in which the feedback from the communication partner in consideration of the LOS environment does not exist is applied is described.<br />Since the analysis in the state where the dispersion wave was included from a formula (144) and (145) is difficult, it becomes difficult to ask for a Precoding procession without suitable feedback, where a dispersion wave is included. In addition, there is little degradation of the receiving quality of data [ environment / NLOS / the LOS environment ]. Therefore, the designing method (Precoding procession of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession with time) of a Precoding procession without suitable feedback in the LOS environment is described.

0394As mentioned above, since the analysis in the state where the dispersion wave was included is difficult, in the channel procession containing the ingredient of only a direct wave, it is carried out to asking for a suitable Precoding procession from a formula (144) and (145). Therefore, in a formula (144), the case where a channel procession contains the ingredient of only a direct wave is considered. Therefore, it can express as follows from a formula (146).

0395<maths num="157"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0157.tif" /></maths>

0396Here, a unitary matrix shall be used as a Precoding procession. Therefore, a Precoding procession is expressed as follows.

0397<maths num="158"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0158.tif" /></maths>

0398At this time, lambda is a fixed value. Therefore, a formula (147) can be expressed as follows.

0399<maths num="159"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0159.tif" /></maths>

0400It is s when a receiver performs the alignment operation of ZF (zeroforcing) or MMSE (minimum*meansquared*error), as shown in a formula (149).₁(p),*s₂The bit which transmitted by (p) cannot be judged. From this, it carries out repeatedly [ APP (or repetitive Max-log*APP) or APP (or Max-log*APP) ] it stated by Embodiment 1 (henceforth, it is called ML (Maximum*Likelihood) operation), and is s.₁(p),*s₂It will ask for the logarithm likelihood ratio of each bit which transmitted by (p), and decoding in an error correcting code will be performed. Therefore, the designing method of a Precoding procession without suitable feedback in the LOS environment over the receiver which performs ML operation is explained.

0401Precoding in a formula (149) is considered. It is e to the right-hand side of the 1st line, and the left side.^{-j psi}It multiplies and is e to the right-hand side of the 2nd line, and the left side similarly.^{-j psi}It multiplies. Then, it is expressed like a following formula.

0402<maths num="160"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0160.tif" /></maths>

0403e^{-j psi}y₁(p),e^{-j psi}y₂(p),*e^{-j psi}It is y about q, respectively.₁(p),*y₂It redefines with (p) and *q and is e.^{-j psi}n(p)=(e^{-j psi}n₁(p),*e^{-j psi}n₂(p))^TA next door, e^{-j psi}n₁(p),e^{-j psi}n₂(p) is average value 0 and distribution sigma.²ofi.i.d. (independentidentically)<br />Since it becomes a distributed complex Gaussian random noise, it is e.^{-j psi}n (p) is redefined with n (p). Then, generality is not lost even if it holds a formula (150) like a formula (151).

0404<maths num="161"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0161.tif" /></maths>

0405Next, it changes like a formula (152) so that it may be easy to understand a formula (151).

0406<maths num="162"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0162.tif" /></maths>

0407At this time, it is d about the minimum of the Euclid distance of a received signal point and a receiving candidate signal point._min²It is d when it carries out._min²While being the inferior point of taking the minimum called But zero, two q which will be in the inferior state where all the bits which transmit by s1 (p), or all the bits which transmit by s2 (p) disappear exists.<br />s1 (p) does not exist in a formula (152):

0408<maths num="163"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0163.tif" /></maths>

0409s2 (p) does not exist in a formula (152):

0410<maths num="164"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0164.tif" /></maths>

0411(Henceforth, a formula (153) and q which fills (154) are called "the receiving inferior point of s1 and s2", respectively)<br />When filling a formula (153), and it cannot ask for the receiving logarithm likelihood ratios of all the bits that transmitted by s1 (p) since all the bits that transmitted by s1 (p) have disappeared but a formula (154) is filled, Since all the bits that transmitted by s2 (p) have disappeared, it cannot ask for the receiving logarithm likelihood ratios of all the bits that transmitted by s2 (p).

0412Here, the broadcast and the multicasting communications system when not changing a Precoding procession are considered. At this time, the terminal which receives those with a base station which transmit an abnormal-conditions signal using the Precoding method which does not change a Precoding procession, and the abnormal-conditions signal which the base station transmitted considers the system model which recognizes two or more (gamma Pieces) existence.<br />It is thought that the change by time of the situation of the direct wave between a base station and a terminal is small. Then, the terminal which is in a position which is applied to the conditions of a formula (155) or a formula (156) from a formula (153) and (154), and has a rice factor in the large LOS environment may fall into the phenomenon in which the receiving quality of data deteriorates. Therefore, in order to solve this problem, it is necessary to change a Precoding procession in time.

0413<maths num="165"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0165.tif" /></maths>

0414<maths num="166"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0166.tif" /></maths>

0415Then, a time period is made into N slot and how (henceforth, it is called the Precoding hopping method) to change a Precoding procession regularly is considered.<br />For a time period N slot, Precoding procession F[i] of N kind based on a formula (148) is prepared (i= 0, 1, --, N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)). At this time, Precoding procession F[i] is expressed as follows.

0416<maths num="167"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0167.tif" /></maths>

0417Here, alpha shall not change in time and lambda shall not change in time, either (it may be made to change).<br />And it is time (time) Nxk+i (k is an integer greater than or equal to 0) like Embodiment 1. The Precoding procession used in order to acquire signal x (p=*Nxk+i) after i= 0, 1, --, Precoding in the formula (142) of N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) serves as F[i]. About this, the same may be said of henceforth.

0418At this time, the design condition of the Precoding procession of the following Precoding hopping becomes important based on formula * (153) and (154).

0419<maths num="168"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0168.tif" /></maths>

0420<maths num="169"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0169.tif" /></maths>

0421By &lt;condition #10&gt;, the slot which takes the receiving inferior point of s1 turns into one or less slot in N in a time period in all gamma terminals. Therefore, the logarithm likelihood ratio of the bit which transmitted by s1 (p) N-1 or more slots can be obtained. Similarly, in all gamma terminals, the slot which takes the receiving inferior point of s2 turns into one or less slot in N in a time period by &lt;condition #11&gt;. Therefore, the logarithm likelihood ratio of the bit which transmitted by s2 (p) N-1 or more slots can be obtained.

0422Thus, it is giving the design norm of &lt;condition #10&gt; and the Precoding procession of &lt;condition #11&gt;, It is guaranteeing the number of bits from which the logarithm likelihood ratio of the bit which transmitted by s1 (p) is obtained, and the number of bits from which the logarithm likelihood ratio of the bit which transmitted by s2 (p) is obtained in all gamma terminals more than fixed numbers, In all gamma terminals, a rice factor considers improving degradation of the data reception quality in the large LOS environment.

0423Below, the example of the Precoding procession in the Precoding hopping method is indicated.<br />It is possible that the probability density distribution of the phase of a direct wave is the uniform distribution of [0*2pi]. Therefore, it can be considered that the probability density distribution of a formula (151) and the phase of q in (152) is also the uniform distribution of [0*2pi]. Therefore, in the same LOS environment where only the phases of q differ, the following is given as conditions for giving the receiving quality of the fairest possible data to gamma terminals.<br />&lt;Condition #12&gt;<br />When the Precoding hopping method of a time period N slot is used, in N in a time period, the receiving inferior point of s1 is arranged so that it may become uniform distribution to a phase, and the receiving inferior point of s2 is arranged so that it may become uniform distribution to a phase.

0424Then, the example of the Precoding procession in the Precoding hopping method based on &lt;condition #10&gt; to &lt;condition #12&gt; is explained. It is referred to as alpha= 1.0 of the Precoding procession of a formula (157).<br />(Example #5) <br />In order to consider it as time period N= 8 and to fill &lt;condition #10&gt; to &lt;condition #12&gt;, the Precoding procession in the Precoding hopping method of time period N= 8 like a following formula is given.

0425<maths num="170"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0170.tif" /></maths>

0426However, j is an imaginary unit and is i= 0, and 1, --, 7. It may give with a formula (161) instead of a formula (160) (lambda, theta).₁₁[i] It shall not change in time (it may change). .

0427<maths num="171"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0171.tif" /></maths>

0428Therefore, s₁,*s₂A Receiving inferior point becomes as shown in Drawing 31 (a) and (b). (In Drawing 31, a horizontal axis turns into a real axis and a vertical axis turns into an imaginary axis.) It may give with a formula (162) and a formula (163) instead of a formula (160) and a formula (161) again (lambda (i= 0, 1, --, 7), theta).₁₁[i] Don't change in time.<br />It is considered as a thing (it may change). .

0429<maths num="172"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0172.tif" /></maths>

0430<maths num="173"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0173.tif" /></maths>

0431Next, in the same LOS environment that is different in conditions 12 where only the phases of q differ, the following is given as conditions for giving the receiving quality of the fairest possible data to gamma terminals.<br />&lt;Condition #13&gt;<br />When the Precoding hopping method of a time period N slot is used,

0432<maths num="174"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0174.tif" /></maths>

0433It is [ in / add Conditions and / N in a time period ] s.₁They are a phase and s about a Receiving inferior point.₂To a phase, a Receiving inferior point is arranged so that it may become uniform distribution.<br />Then, the example of the Precoding procession in the Precoding hopping method based on &lt;condition #10&gt;, *&lt;condition #11&gt;, and *&lt;condition #13&gt; is explained. It is referred to as alpha= 1.0 of the Precoding procession of a formula (157).<br />(Example #6) <br />It is considered as time period N= 4, and the Precoding procession in the Precoding hopping method of time period N= 4 like a following formula is given.

0434<maths num="175"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0175.tif" /></maths>

0435However, j is an imaginary unit and is i= 0, 1, 2, and 3. It may give with a formula (166) instead of a formula (165) (lambda, theta).₁₁[i] It shall not change in time (it may change). .

0436<maths num="176"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0176.tif" /></maths>

0437Therefore, s₁,*s₂A Receiving inferior point becomes as it is shown in Drawing 32. (In Drawing 32, a horizontal axis turns into a real axis and a vertical axis turns into an imaginary axis.) It may give with a formula (167) and a formula (168) instead of a formula (165) and a formula (166) again (lambda (i= 0, 1, 2, 3), theta).₁₁[i] It shall not change in time (it may change). .

0438<maths num="177"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0177.tif" /></maths>

0439<maths num="178"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0178.tif" /></maths>

0440Next, the Precoding hopping method using a non-unitary matrix is described.<br />Based on a formula (148), the Precoding procession treated by this examination is expressed as follows.

0441<maths num="179"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0179.tif" /></maths>

0442Then, a formula (151) and the formula equivalent to (152) are expressed like a following formula.

0443<maths num="180"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0180.tif" /></maths>

0444<maths num="181"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0181.tif" /></maths>

0445At this time, it is minimum d of the Euclid distance of a received signal point and a receiving candidate signal point._min²Two q used as But zero exists.<br />When s1 (p) does not exist in a formula (171):

0446<maths num="182"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0182.tif" /></maths>

0447When s2 (p) does not exist in a formula (171):

0448<maths num="183"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0183.tif" /></maths>

0449In the Precoding hopping method of time period N, it refers to a formula (169) and expresses Precoding procession F[i] of N kind as follows.

0450<maths num="184"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0184.tif" /></maths>

0451Here, alpha and delta shall not change in time. At this time, the design condition of the Precoding procession of the following Precoding hopping is given based on a formula (34) and * (35).

0452<maths num="185"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0185.tif" /></maths>

0453<maths num="186"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0186.tif" /></maths>

0454(Example #7) <br />It is referred to as alpha= 1.0 of the Precoding procession of a formula (174). And in order to consider it as time period N= 16 and to fill &lt;condition #12&gt;, *&lt;condition #14&gt;, and *&lt;condition #15&gt;, the Precoding procession in the Precoding hopping method of time period N= 16 like a following formula is given.<br />At the time of i= 0, and 1, --, 7:

0455<maths num="187"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0187.tif" /></maths>

0456At the time of i= 8, and 9, --, 15:

0457<maths num="188"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0188.tif" /></maths>

0458It can give as follows as a different Precoding procession from a formula (177) and a formula (178).<br />At the time of i= 0, and 1, --, 7:

0459<maths num="189"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0189.tif" /></maths>

0460At the time of i= 8, and 9, --, 15:

0461<maths num="190"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0190.tif" /></maths>

0462Therefore, the receiving inferior point of s1 and *s2 becomes as shown in Drawing 33 (a) and (b).<br />(In Drawing 33, a horizontal axis turns into a real axis and a vertical axis turns into an imaginary axis.) A Precoding procession may be given as follows instead of a formula (177), a formula (178), a formula (179), and a formula (180) again.<br />At the time of i= 0, and 1, --, 7:

0463<maths num="191"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0191.tif" /></maths>

0464At the time of i= 8, and 9, --, 15:

0465<maths num="192"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0192.tif" /></maths>

0466or<br />At the time of i= 0, and 1, --, 7:

0467<maths num="193"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0193.tif" /></maths>

0468At the time of i= 8, and 9, --, 15:

0469<maths num="194"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0194.tif" /></maths>

0470(In formula (177) (184) -, it is good also considering 7pi/8 as -7pi/8 again.)<br />Next, in the same different LOS environment from &lt;condition #12&gt; where only the phases of q differ, the following is given as conditions for giving the receiving quality of the fairest possible data to gamma terminals.<br />&lt;Condition #16&gt;<br />When the Precoding hopping method of a time period N slot is used,

0471<maths num="195"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0195.tif" /></maths>

0472It arranges so that Conditions may be added and it may become uniform distribution to a phase in N in a time period about a phase and the receiving inferior point of s2 in the receiving inferior point of s1.<br />Then, the example of the Precoding procession in the Precoding hopping method based on &lt;condition #14&gt;, *&lt;condition #15&gt;, and *&lt;condition #16&gt; is explained. It is referred to as alpha= 1.0 of the Precoding procession of a formula (174).<br />(Example #8) <br />It is considered as time period N= 8, and the Precoding procession in the Precoding hopping method of time period N= 8 like a following formula is given.

0473<maths num="196"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0196.tif" /></maths>

0474However, it is i= 0, and 1, --, 7.<br />It can give as follows as a different Precoding procession from a formula (186) (lambda (i= 0, 1, --, 7), theta).₁₁[i] It shall not change in time (it may change). .

0475<maths num="197"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0197.tif" /></maths>

0476Therefore, the receiving inferior point of s1 and *s2 becomes as it is shown in Drawing 34. A Precoding procession may be given as follows instead of a formula (186) and a formula (187) (lambda (i= 0, 1, --, 7), theta).₁₁[i] It shall not change in time (it may change). .

0477<maths num="198"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0198.tif" /></maths>

0478or

0479<maths num="199"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0199.tif" /></maths>

0480(In a formula (186) - a formula (189), it is good also considering 7pi/8 as -7pi/8 again.)<br />Next, in the Precoding procession of a formula (174), the different Precoding hopping method from * (example #8) of it having been referred to as alpha!=1, and having taken into consideration the point of the distance in the complex plane of receiving inferior points (example #7) is considered.<br />Here, it is [ in / in / at this time / all gamma terminals / although the Precoding hopping method of time period N of a formula (174) is treated / by &lt;condition #14&gt; / N in a time period ] s.₁The slot which takes a Receiving inferior point turns into one or less slot. Therefore, the logarithm likelihood ratio of the bit which transmitted by s1 (p) N-1 or more slots can be obtained. Similarly, in all gamma terminals, the slot which takes the receiving inferior point of s2 turns into one or less slot in N in a time period by &lt;condition #15&gt;. Therefore, the logarithm likelihood ratio of the bit which transmitted by s2 (p) N-1 or more slots can be obtained.

0481Therefore, it turns out that the number of slots from which the way which made time period N the large value can obtain a logarithm likelihood ratio becomes large.<br />By the way, by an actual channel model, in order to receive the influence of a dispersion wave ingredient, when time period N is fixation, the shortest distance on the complex plane of a receiving inferior point is considered that the larger possible one of receiving quality of data may improve. Therefore, in (example #7) and * (example #8), it is referred to as alpha!=1, and the Precoding hopping method which improved (example #7) and * (example #8) is considered. First, the Puri coding method it becomes easy to understand and which improved (example #8) is described.<br />(Example #9) <br />From a formula (186), the Precoding procession in the Precoding hopping method of time period N= 8 of having improved (example #8) is given with a following formula.

0482<maths num="200"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0200.tif" /></maths>

0483However, it is i= 0, and 1, --, 7. It can give as follows as a different Precoding procession from a formula (190) (lambda (i= 0, 1, --, 7), theta).₁₁[i] It shall not change in time (it may change). .

0484<maths num="201"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0201.tif" /></maths>

0485or

0486<maths num="202"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0202.tif" /></maths>

0487or

0488<maths num="203"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0203.tif" /></maths>

0489or

0490<maths num="204"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0204.tif" /></maths>

0491or

0492<maths num="205"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0205.tif" /></maths>

0493or

0494<maths num="206"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0206.tif" /></maths>

0495or

0496<maths num="207"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0207.tif" /></maths>

0497Therefore, at the time of alpha&lt; 1.0, at Drawing 35 (a) and the time of alpha&gt; 1.0, the receiving inferior point of s1 and *s2 is expressed, as shown in Drawing 35 (b).<br />(i) At the time of alpha&lt; 1.0<br />The shortest distance [ in / time of alpha&lt; 1.0 / the complex plane of a receiving inferior point ] is the distance (d) of receiving inferior point #1 and #2._＃1,＃2And distance (d) of receiving inferior point #1 and #3_＃1,＃3It is min{d when its attention is paid._＃1,＃2,*d_＃1,＃3It is expressed}. At this time, they are alpha and d._＃1,＃2And d_＃1,＃3connection of is shown in Drawing 36. And min{d_＃1,＃2,*d_＃1,＃3alpha which enlarges} most

0498<maths num="208"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0208.tif" /></maths>

0499It becomes. min{d at this time_＃1,＃2,*d_＃1,＃3}

0500<maths num="209"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0209.tif" /></maths>

0501It becomes. Therefore, the Puri coding method which gives alpha by a formula (198) in a formula (190) - a formula (197) becomes effective. However, it is one suitable method for obtaining the receiving quality of good data to set the value of alpha to a formula (198). However, even if it sets up alpha to take a value which is close to a formula (198), the receiving quality of good data may be able to be obtained similarly. Therefore, the preset value of alpha is not what was restricted to the formula (198).

0502(ii) At the time of alpha&gt; 1.0<br />The shortest distance [ in / time of alpha&gt; 1.0 / the complex plane of a receiving inferior point ] is the distance (d) of receiving inferior point #4 and #5._＃4,＃5And distance (d) of receiving inferior point #4 and #6_＃4,＃6It is min{d when its attention is paid._＃4,＃5,*d_＃4,＃6It is expressed}. At this time, they are alpha and d._＃4,＃5And d_＃4,＃6connection of is shown in Drawing 37. And min{d_＃4,＃5,*d_＃4,＃6alpha which enlarges} most

0503<maths num="210"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0210.tif" /></maths>

0504It becomes. min{d at this time_＃4,＃5,*d_＃4,＃6}

0505<maths num="211"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0211.tif" /></maths>

0506It becomes. Therefore, the Puri coding method which gives alpha by a formula (200) in a formula (190) - a formula (197) becomes effective. However, it is one suitable method for obtaining the receiving quality of good data to set the value of alpha to a formula (200). However, even if it sets up alpha to take a value which is close to a formula (200), the receiving quality of good data may be able to be obtained similarly. Therefore, the preset value of alpha is not what was restricted to the formula (200).<br />(Example #10)<br />The Precoding procession in the Precoding hopping method of time period N= 16 of having improved (example #7) from examination of (example #9) can be given with a following formula (lambda, theta).₁₁[i] It shall not change in time (it may change). .

0507At the time of i= 0, and 1, --, 7:

0508<maths num="212"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0212.tif" /></maths>

0509At the time of i= 8, and 9, --, 15:

0510<maths num="213"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0213.tif" /></maths>

0511or<br />At the time of i= 0, and 1, --, 7:

0512<maths num="214"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0214.tif" /></maths>

0513At the time of i= 8, and 9, --, 15:

0514<maths num="215"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0215.tif" /></maths>

0515or<br />At the time of i= 0, and 1, --, 7:

0516<maths num="216"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0216.tif" /></maths>

0517At the time of i= 8, and 9, --, 15:

0518<maths num="217"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0217.tif" /></maths>

0519or<br />At the time of i= 0, and 1, --, 7:

0520<maths num="218"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0218.tif" /></maths>

0521At the time of i= 8, and 9, --, 15:

0522<maths num="219"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0219.tif" /></maths>

0523or<br />At the time of i= 0, and 1, --, 7:

0524<maths num="220"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0220.tif" /></maths>

0525At the time of i= 8, and 9, --, 15:

0526<maths num="221"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0221.tif" /></maths>

0527or<br />At the time of i= 0, and 1, --, 7:

0528<maths num="222"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0222.tif" /></maths>

0529At the time of i= 8, and 9, --, 15:

0530<maths num="223"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0223.tif" /></maths>

0531or<br />At the time of i= 0, and 1, --, 7:

0532<maths num="224"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0224.tif" /></maths>

0533At the time of i= 8, and 9, --, 15:

0534<maths num="225"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0225.tif" /></maths>

0535or<br />At the time of i= 0, and 1, --, 7:

0536<maths num="226"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0226.tif" /></maths>

0537At the time of i= 8, and 9, --, 15:

0538<maths num="227"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0227.tif" /></maths>

0539However, alpha is suitable for obtaining the receiving quality of good data when it comes to a formula (198) or a formula (200). At the time of alpha&lt; 1.0, at Drawing 38 (a), (b), and the time of alpha&gt; 1.0, at this time, the receiving inferior point of s1 is expressed, as shown in Drawing 39 (a) and (b).<br />This embodiment explained the constitution method of N different Precoding processions for the Precoding hopping method of time period N. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] will be prepared as N different Precoding processions at this time, Although the case where it arranged in the direction of a time-axis (or frequency axis) in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] was explained since this embodiment explained the time of a single career transmission method to an example, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply N different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of time period N, Even if it uses N different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use N different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

0540Although example #5 to example #10 was shown based on &lt;condition #10&gt; to &lt;condition #16&gt;, In order to lengthen the change cycle of a Precoding procession, a plurality of examples may be chosen from example #5 to example #10, and the Precoding procession change method of a long cycle may be realized using the Precoding procession shown in the selected example, for example. For example, it will be said using the Precoding procession shown by the Precoding procession shown by example #7, and example #10 that the Precoding procession change method of a long cycle is realized. In this case, &lt;condition #16&gt; is not necessarily followed from &lt;condition #10&gt;. (Setting at the formula (158) of &lt;condition #10&gt;, the formula (159) of &lt;condition #11&gt;, the formula (164) of &lt;condition #13&gt;, the formula (175) of &lt;condition #14&gt;, and a ceremony (176) of &lt;condition #15&gt;.) The place set to "all x, all the y" "x of existing, It will be said that the conditions y of existing" become important when giving good receiving quality. When it thinks from another viewpoint, it sets to the Precoding procession change method of cycle N (N is taken as a big natural number), If one Precoding procession of example #5 to example #10 is included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high.<br />(Embodiment 7)<br />This embodiment explains the composition of the receiving set which receives the abnormal-conditions signal transmitted with the transmission method which was explained by Embodiments 1-6, and which changes a Precoding procession regularly.

0541According to Embodiment 1, the sending set which transmits an abnormal-conditions signal using the transmission method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The information about a Precoding procession is transmitted and a receiving set is based on the information, The regular Precoding procession change information that it was used for the transmitting frame was acquired, decoding of Precoding and detection were performed, the logarithm likelihood ratio of the transmission bit was obtained, and how to perform error correction decoding was explained after that.

0542This embodiment explains how to change the composition of a different receiving set from the above, and a Precoding procession.<br />Drawing 40 shows an example of the composition of the sending set in this embodiment, and attached the same numerals about what operates like Drawing 3. A coding machine group (4002) considers a transmission bit (4001) as an input. At this time, as Embodiment 1 explained the coding machine group (4002), multiple coding parts of an error correcting code will be held, and the coding machine of one number of one coding machine, two coding machines, and four coding machines will operate based on frame composition signal 313.

0543When one coding machine operates, coding is performed, the transmission bit after coding is obtained, a transmission bit (4001) distributes the transmission bit after this coding to two lines, and a coding machine group (4002) outputs the distributed bit (4003A) and the distributed bit (4003B).<br />When two coding machines operate, a transmission bit (4001) is divided into two (division bits A and B are named), and the 1st coding machine codes by considering division bit A as an input, and it outputs it as a bit (4003A) to which the bit after coding was distributed. The 2nd coding machine codes by considering division bit B as an input, and it outputs it as a bit (4003B) to which the bit after coding was distributed.

0544When four coding machines operate, a transmission bit (4001) is divided into four (division bit A, B, and C and D are named), and the 1st coding machine codes by considering division bit A as an input, and outputs bit A after coding. The 2nd coding machine codes by considering division bit B as an input, and outputs bit B after coding. The 3rd coding machine codes by considering division bit C as an input, and outputs bit C after coding. The 4th coding machine codes by considering division bit D as an input, and outputs bit D after coding. And it divides into the bit (4003A) to which bit A, B, and C after coding and D were distributed, and the distributed bit (4003B).

0545A sending set will support a transmission method as an example as shown in the following table 1 (Table 1A and 1B).

0546<tables num="1A"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0228.tif" /></tables>

0547<tables num="1B"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0229.tif" /></tables>

0548As shown in Table 1, as the number of transmitted signals (the number of transmitting antennas), transmission of the signal of one stream and transmission of the signal of two streams are supported. A modulation method supports QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, 256QAM, and 1024QAM. In particular, when the number of transmitted signals is 2, stream #1 and stream #2 can set up a modulation method separately, for example, it sets them to Table 1, "#1:*256QAM, *#2:*1024QAM" show ", as for the modulation method of stream #1, the modulation method of 256QAM and stream #2 is 1024QAM" (it is expressing similarly about others). As an error correcting code-ized method, it is assumed that three kinds, A, B, and C, are supported. At this time, each of A, B, and C may be different numerals, A, B, and C may be different code rates, and A, B, and C may be the encoding methods of different block size.

0549The transmitting information on Table 1 assigns each transmitting information to each mode which defined "the number of transmitted signals", the "modulation method", the "number of coding machines", and the "error correcting code-ized method." Therefore, for example, in "number of transmitted signals:2", "modulation method:#1:1024QAM, #2:1024QAM", "number of coding machines:4", and "error correcting code-ized method:C", transmitting information is set to 01001101. And a sending set transmits transmitting information and send data in a frame. And when transmitting send data, when "the number of transmitted signals" is 2, according to Table 1, the "Precoding procession change method" will be used especially. In Table 1, as the "Precoding procession change method", five kinds, D, E, F, G, and H, are prepared, and this either of five kinds will be set up according to Table 1. As five kinds of different realization methods at this time,<br />- Prepare five kinds from which a Precoding procession differs, and realize.<br />- Realize five kinds of different cycles, for example, the cycle of D, by making the cycle of 4 and E into 8 and ...<br />- Realize by using together both of a different cycle which Precoding-lines up and is different.<br />etc can be considered.

0550Drawing 41 shows an example of the frame composition of the abnormal-conditions signal which the sending set of Drawing 40 transmits, and makes a sending set the thing which both in the mode who transmit one abnormal-conditions signal can set [ a setup in two abnormal-conditions signals z1 (t) and the mode which transmits z2 (t) and ] up.<br />In Drawing 41, a symbol (4100) is a symbol for transmitting the "transmitting information" shown in Table 1. A symbol (4101_1 and 4101_2) is a reference (pilot) symbol for channel estimation. Symbol (4102_1, 4103_1), The symbol for data communications which transmits by abnormal-conditions signal z1 (t), and a symbol (4102_2, 4103_2), It is a symbol for data communications which transmits by abnormal-conditions signal z2 (t), and a symbol (4102_1) and a symbol (4102_2) use the same (common) frequency for the same time, and are transmitted to it, A symbol (4103_1) and a symbol (4103_2) use the same (common) frequency for the same time, and are transmitted to it. And a symbol (4102_1, 4103_1) and a symbol (4102_2, 4103_2), It becomes a symbol after a Precoding procession operation when the method which was explained by Embodiments 1-4 and Embodiment 6 and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is used (therefore, Embodiment 1 explained like). Stream s1 (t) and the composition of s2 (t) are as in Drawing 6. <br />In Drawing 41, a symbol (4104) is a symbol for transmitting the "transmitting information" shown in Table 1. A symbol (4105) is a reference (pilot) symbol for channel estimation. Since the number of transmitted signals is 1, as for the symbol for data communications which a symbol (4106, 4107) is a symbol for data communications which transmits by abnormal-conditions signal z1 (t), and transmits by abnormal-conditions signal z1 (t) at this time, Precoding will be performed.

0551Therefore, the sending set of Drawing 40 will generate the frame composition of Drawing 41, and the abnormal-conditions signal according to Table 1, and will transmit. In Drawing 40, frame composition signal 313 will include the information about the "number of transmitted signals" set up based on Table 1, a "modulation method", the "number of coding machines", and the "error correcting code-ized method." And a coding part (4002), mapping part 306A, B, dignity attachment synchronizer 308A, B, Is, and a frame composition signal will be considered as an input, and operation based on the "number of transmitted signals" set up based on Table 1, a "modulation method", the "number of coding machines", and the "error correcting code-ized method" will be performed. It will transmit to a receiving set also about the "transmitting information" equivalent to the set-up "number of transmitted signals", a "modulation method", the "number of coding machines", and the "error correcting code-ized method."

0552The composition of a receiving set can be expressed like Embodiment 1 in Drawing 7. Since, as for a different point from Embodiment 1, transceiving equipment has shared the information on Table 1 beforehand, Even if a sending set does not transmit the information on the Precoding procession changed regularly, It is the point that a sending set can transmit the "transmitting information" equivalent to "the number of transmitted signals", a "modulation method", the "number of coding machines", and the "error correcting code-ized method", and it can acquire the information on the Precoding procession changed regularly from Table 1 because a receiving set acquires this information. Therefore, the receiving set of Drawing 7 is that control information decoding part 709 acquires the "transmitting information" which the sending set of Drawing 40 transmitted, Signal 710 about the information on the transmission method which the sending set including the information on the Precoding procession changed regularly notified can be acquired from the information equivalent to Table 1. Therefore, at the time of two transmitted signals, signal processing part 711 can perform detection based on the change pattern of a Precoding procession, and can obtain a receiving logarithm likelihood ratio.

0553in addition -- although "transmitting information" was set up, on the other hand the Precoding procession change method is set up in Above to "the number of transmitted signals", a "modulation method", the "number of coding machines", and the "error correcting code-ized method", as shown in Table 1 Like [ it is not necessary to "the number of transmitted signals", a "modulation method", the "number of coding machines", and the "error correcting code-ized method" to set up "transmitting information", and / of Table 2 ] not necessarily, To "the number of transmitted signals", and a "modulation method", "transmitting information" may be set up, on the other hand the Precoding procession change method may be set up.

0554<tables num="2"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0230.tif" /></tables>

0555Here, they are "transmitting information" and a setting method of the Precoding procession change method, Not the thing restricted to Table 1 or Table 2 but the Precoding procession change method, If the rule is beforehand decided to change based on transmitting parameters, such as "the number of transmitted signals", a "modulation method", the "number of coding machines", and the "error correcting code-ized method" (sending set) If the rule decided beforehand is shared by the receiving set (it is got blocked and is either of the transmitting parameters about the Precoding procession change method), Or it is a sending set if it has changed by the gap constituted from plurality of a transmitting parameter, It is not necessary to transmit the information about the Precoding procession change method, and since the receiving set can distinguish the Precoding procession change method which the sending set used by distinguishing the information on a transmitting parameter, it can perform exact decoding and detection. In Table 1 and Table 2, when the number of transmitting abnormal-conditions signals is 2, the transmission method which changes a Precoding procession regularly shall be used, but if the number of transmitting abnormal-conditions signals is two or more, the transmission method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applicable.

0556Therefore, it is if transceiving equipment is sharing the table about a transmitting parameter including the information about the Precoding change method, A sending set will not transmit the information about the Precoding change method, but the control information which does not include the information about the Precoding change method will be transmitted, and the Precoding change method can be presumed because a receiving set acquires this control information.

0557As mentioned above, In which does not transmit the direct information about the way a sending set changes a Precoding procession regularly, in this embodiment, The receiving set explained how to presume the information about Precoding of the "method of changing a Precoding procession regularly" which the sending set used. Thereby, since a sending set does not transmit the direct information about the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, it can acquire the effect that the part and the transmission efficiency of data improve.

0558In this embodiment, although the embodiment when [ in a time-axis ] making a Precoding weight change was described, as Embodiment 1 explained, even when multicareer transmission methods, such as OFDM transmission, are used, this embodiment can be carried out similarly.<br />When the Precoding change method has been especially changed only with the number of transmitted signals, a receiving set is acquiring the information on the number of transmitted signals which a sending set transmits, and sweet red bean soup with mochi can do the Precoding change method.

0559The sending set is provided in this specification, For example, it is possible to be communication / broadcast apparatus, such as a broadcasting station, a base station, an access point, a terminal, and a mobile phone (mobile phone), and provides the receiving set at this time, It is possible to be communication equipment, such as television, radio, a terminal, a personal computer, a mobile phone, an access point, and a base station. A sending set in the present invention and a receiving set, It is apparatus which has a communication function and it is also considered that it is a form which the apparatus understands a certain interface to the device for performing applications, such as television, radio, a personal computer, and a mobile phone, and can connect to it.<br />In this embodiment, symbols (preamble, unique word, and post Ambur, a reference symbol, etc.) other than a data symbol, for example, pilot symbols, the symbol for control information, etc. may be arranged how at the frame. And although the pilot symbol and the symbol for control information are named, what kind of how to name may be performed and the function itself is important here.

0560The known symbol which modulated the pilot symbol, for example in the transceiver machine using PSK abnormal conditions Or it is a receiver when a receiver takes a synchronization, The symbol which the transmitter transmitted is known. It may be and is a receiver, Detection of a frequency synchronization, a time synchronization, channel estimation (each abnormal-conditions signal) (presumption of CSI (Channel State Information)), and a signal, etc. will be performed using this symbol.

0561In order that the symbol for control information may realize communication of those other than data (application etc.), It is a symbol for transmitting the information, including for example, the code rate of the modulation method, error correcting code-ized method, and error correcting code-ized method used for communication, the setting information on a higher rank layer, etc., which needs to be transmitted to a communication partner.<br />It is possible for the present invention not to be limited to the above-mentioned Embodiments 1-5, but to change variously, and to carry out. For example, although the above-mentioned embodiment explains the case where it carries out as a communication apparatus, it is also possible for it not to be restricted to this and to perform this correspondence procedure as software.

0562It is although the Precoding change method in the method of transmitting two abnormal-conditions signals from two antennas was explained above, Precoding is performed not to the thing restricted to this but to the signal after four mapping, The method, jam which generate four abnormal-conditions signals and transmit from four antennas, It can carry out similarly as the Precoding change method of performing Precoding, generating N abnormal-conditions signals to the signal after N mapping, and changing Precoding weight (procession) similarly in the method of transmitting from N antennas.

0563In this specification, although terms, such as "Precoding" and "Precoding weight", are used, what kind of thing may be sufficient as the called way itself, and it becomes important [ the signal processing itself ] in the present invention.<br />Different data may be transmitted by stream s1 (t) and s2 (t), and the same data may be transmitted.

0564The transmitting antenna of a sending set, the receiving antenna of a receiving set, and one antenna both indicated with the drawing may be constituted by a plurality of antennas.<br />For example, the program which performs the above-mentioned correspondence procedure is beforehand stored in ROM (Read OnlyMemory), and it may be made to operate the program by CPU (Central Processor Unit).

0565The program which stored the program which performs the above-mentioned correspondence procedure in the storage which can be read by computer, and was stored in the storage is recorded on RAM (Random Access Memory) of a computer, It may be made to operate a computer according to the program.<br />And each composition, such as each of above-mentioned embodiments, may be typically realized as LSI (Large Scale Integration) which is an integrated circuit. These may be individually formed into 1 chip, and they may be formed into 1 chip so that all the composition of each embodiment or a part of composition may be included. Here, although referred to as LSI, it may be called IC (Integrated Circuit), a system LSI, super LSI, and Ultra LSI by the difference in a degree of location. The technique of integrated-circuit-izing is not restricted to LSI, and may be realized by the dedicated communication circuit or a general-purpose processor. After LSI manufacture, the reconfigurable processor which can reconstruct connection and a setup of FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) which can be programmed, and the circuit cell inside LSI may be used.

0566As long as the art of integrated-circuit-izing of replacing LSI with another art which semiconductor technology progresses or derives appears, naturally a functional block may be integrated using the art. Application of biotechnology, etc. can be made into possibility.<br /><br />(Embodiment 8)<br />This embodiment explains here the example of application of the method of changing regularly Precoding weight explained by Embodiments 1-4 and Embodiment 6.

0567Drawing 6 is a figure relevant to the weighting method (the Precoding (Precoding) method) in this embodiment, and dignity attachment synchronizer 600 is a dignity attachment synchronizer which unified both of dignity attachment synchronizers 308A and 308B of Drawing 3. As shown in Drawing 6, stream s1 (t) and stream s2 (t) are, It is equivalent to baseband signals 307A and 307B of Drawing 3, that is, becomes in-phase component I of the baseband signal according to mapping of modulation methods, such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM, and rectangular ingredient Q. And stream s1 (t) expresses the signal of s1 (u) and symbol number u+1 as s1 (u+1) and ... for the signal of symbol number u like the frame composition of Drawing 6. Similarly, stream s2 (t) expresses the signal of s2 (u) and symbol number u+1 as s2 (u+1) and ... for the signal of symbol number u. And baseband signals [ in / in dignity attachment synchronizer 600 / Drawing 3 ] 307A (s1 (t)) and 307B (s2 (t)), Information 315 about dignity attachment information is considered as an input, the weighting method according to information 315 about dignity attachment information is given, and signals 309A (z1 (t)) and 309B (z2 (t)) after dignity attachment composition of Drawing 3 are outputted.

0568When the Precoding procession change method of cycle N= 8 of Example 8 in Embodiment 6 is used, for example at this time, z1 (t) and z2 (t) are expressed as follows.<br />At the time of symbol number 8i (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0569<maths num="228"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0231.tif" /></maths>

0570However, j is an imaginary unit and k= 0.<br />At the time of symbol number 8i+1:

0571<maths num="229"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0232.tif" /></maths>

0572However, k= 1.<br />At the time of symbol number 8i+2:

0573<maths num="230"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0233.tif" /></maths>

0574However, k= 2.<br />At the time of symbol number 8i+3:

0575<maths num="231"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0234.tif" /></maths>

0576However, k= 3.<br />At the time of symbol number 8i+4:

0577<maths num="232"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0235.tif" /></maths>

0578However, k= 4.<br />At the time of symbol number 8i+5:

0579<maths num="233"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0236.tif" /></maths>

0580However, k= 5.<br />At the time of symbol number 8i+6:

0581<maths num="234"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0237.tif" /></maths>

0582However, k= 6.<br />At the time of symbol number 8i+7:

0583<maths num="235"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0238.tif" /></maths>

0584However, k= 7.<br />Here, although it is indicated as the symbol number, a symbol number may be considered to be time (time). For example, in a formula (225), z1 (8i+7) and z2 of time 8i+7 (8i+7) are a signal of the same time, and a sending set will transmit z1 (8i+7) and z2 (8i+7) using the same (it is common) frequency as other embodiments explained. If the signal of a jam and time T is set to s1 (T), s2 (T), z1 (T), and z2 (T), A certain Precoding procession, s1 (T), s2 (T) to z1 (T), and z2 (T) will be calculated, and a sending set will transmit z1 (T) and z2 (T) using the same (it is common) frequency (at the same time (time)). moreover -- if the signal equivalent to s1, s2, z1, and z2 in career (substitute) L and time T is set to s1 (T, L), s2 (T, L), z1 (T, L), and z2 (T, L) when multicareer transmission methods, such as OFDM, are used A certain Precoding procession, and s1 (T, L) and s2 (T, L) to z1 (T, L) and z2 (T, L) will be calculated, and a sending set will transmit z1 (T, L) and z2 (T, L) using the same (it is common) frequency (at the same time (time)).

0585At this time, there is a formula (198) or a formula (200) as a suitable value of alpha.<br />This embodiment describes the Precoding change method which enlarges a cycle based on the Precoding procession of the formula (190) described above.<br />When the cycle of a Precoding change procession is set to 8M, a different Precoding procession 8M piece is expressed as follows.

0586<maths num="236"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0239.tif" /></maths>

0587It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, k= 0, 1, ..., *M-2, and *M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />For example, as shown in Drawing 42 (a), when referred to as M= 2, if alpha&lt; 1, the receiving inferior point of s1 at the time of k= 0 (O) and the receiving inferior point () of s2 are expressed. Similarly, the receiving inferior point of s1 at the time of k= 1 (O) and the receiving inferior point () of s2 are expressed as shown in Drawing 42 (b). Thus, when it carries out based on the Precoding procession of a formula (190), a receiving inferior point becomes as it is shown in Drawing 42 (a), and is e to each element of the 2nd line of the procession of the right-hand side of this formula (190).^jXA (formula (226) referring-to) and receiving inferior point has the rotated receiving inferior point to Drawing 42 (a) by considering the multiplied procession as a Precoding procession (refer to Drawing 42 (b)). (However, the receiving inferior point of Drawing 42 (a) and Drawing 42 (b) has not overlapped.) Thus, e^jXEven if it multiplies, a receiving inferior point is good to make it not overlap. It is e to each element of the 2nd line of the procession of the right-hand side of a formula (190).^jXIt does not multiply but is e to each element of the 1st line of the procession of the right-hand side of a formula (190).^jXIt is good also considering the multiplied procession as a Precoding procession. At this time, Precoding procession F [0] - F [15] are denoted by a following formula.

0588<maths num="237"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0240.tif" /></maths>

0589However, it is set to i= 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, k= 0, and 1.<br />Then, it means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [15] was generated at the time of M= 2 (F [0] the Precoding procession of -F [15] is located in a line with what kind of turn.). It is good in the procession of F [0] - F [15] being a procession different, respectively. . And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number 16i, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number 16i+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number 16 i+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., 14, 15). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly)<br />When the above is summarized, it refers to a formula (82) - a formula (85), and denotes the Precoding procession of cycle N by a following formula.

0590<maths num="238"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0241.tif" /></maths>

0591Since the cycle is N at this time, it is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1). And the Precoding procession of periodic NxM based on a formula (228) is denoted by a following formula.

0592<maths num="239"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0242.tif" /></maths>

0593It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />then, it means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [NxM-1] was generated (the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [NxM-1] -- periodic NxM -- it may be used, ranking with what kind of turn.) And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number NxMxi, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number NxMxi+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number NxMxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., NxM-2, NxM-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly)<br />Thus, if a Precoding procession is generated, how to change a Precoding procession with a large cycle can be realized, the position of a receiving inferior point can be changed easily, and this may lead to improvement in the receiving quality of data. Although the Precoding procession of periodic NxM was carried out as [ be / it / a formula (229) ], the Precoding procession of periodic NxM may be carried out like a following formula as mentioned above.

0594<maths num="240"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0243.tif" /></maths>

0595It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br /><br />In a formula (229) and a formula (230), when it is considered as zero rad &lt;=delta&lt;2pi Radian, it becomes a unitary matrix at the time of delta=pi Radian, and becomes a non-unitary matrix at the time of delta!=pi Radian. In this method, the time of the non-unitary matrix of pi/2 rad &lt;=|delta|&lt;pi Radian is one characteristic composition (about the conditions of delta, it is the same also at the time of other embodiments.), and the receiving quality of good data will be obtained. Although a unitary matrix may be as another composition, although stated in detail, if N is made into odd number, in Embodiment 10 or Embodiment 16, a possibility that the receiving quality of good data can be obtained will become high in a formula (229) and a formula (230).<br /><br />(Embodiment 9)<br />This embodiment describes how to change regularly the Precoding procession which used the unitary matrix.

0596In the way cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly as Embodiment 8 described, the Precoding procession modeled after a formula (82) - a formula (85) prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula.

0597<maths num="241"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0244.tif" /></maths>

0598It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. (It shall be alpha&gt; 0) At this embodiment, since a unitary matrix is treated, the Precoding procession of a formula (231) can be denoted by a following formula.

0599<maths num="242"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0245.tif" /></maths>

0600It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. (It shall be alpha&gt; 0) At this time, the following conditions become important from conditions 5 of (several 106) of Embodiment 3, and conditions 6 of (several 107), in order to obtain the receiving quality of good data.

0601<maths num="243"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0246.tif" /></maths>

0602(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />

0603<maths num="244"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0247.tif" /></maths>

0604(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br /><br />When Embodiment 6 explained, the distance between receiving inferior points was described, but in order to enlarge distance between receiving inferior points, cycle N becomes important [ that the number is odd / three or more ]. Below, this point is explained.

0605In order to arrange a receiving inferior point so that it may become uniform distribution to a phase on a complex plane as Embodiment 6 explained, &lt;conditions 19&gt; or &lt;conditions 20&gt; are given.<br />

0606<maths num="245"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0248.tif" /></maths><br /><br /><br />

0607<maths num="246"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0249.tif" /></maths><br /><br /><br />

0608That is, &lt;conditions 19&gt; mean that the difference of a phase is 2pi/Nrad.<br />&lt;Conditions 20&gt; mean that the difference of a phase is -2 pi/N rad.<br /><br />And theta_１１(0) -theta_２１(0) When it is considered as =0 rad and referred to as alpha&lt; 1, the arrangement on the complex plane of the receiving inferior point of s1 at the time of cycle N= 3 and the receiving inferior point of s2 is shown in Drawing 43 (a), and the arrangement on the complex plane of the receiving inferior point of s1 at the time of cycle N= 4 and the receiving inferior point of s2 is shown in Drawing 43 (b). theta_１１(0) -theta_２１(0) When it is considered as =0 rad and referred to as alpha&gt; 1, the arrangement on the complex plane of the receiving inferior point of s1 at the time of cycle N= 3 and the receiving inferior point of s2 is shown in Drawing 44 (a), and the arrangement on the complex plane of the receiving inferior point of s1 at the time of cycle N= 4 and the receiving inferior point of s2 is shown in Drawing 44 (b).

0609In the line segment formed at a receiving inferior point and the starting point at this time, and the axis of Real, the case where the phase (refer to Drawing 43 (a).) formed by the half line of Real&gt;=0 is considered -- alpha&gt; 1 and alpha&lt; 1 -- the case where the above-mentioned phase in the receiving inferior point about the above-mentioned phase in the receiving inferior point about s1 and s2 serves as the same value certainly occurs also about which case at the time of N= 4. (4301 of Drawing 43, 4302, 4401 of Drawing 44, 4402 references) At this time, the distance between receiving inferior points becomes small in a complex plane. On the other hand, at the time of N= 3, when the above-mentioned phase in the receiving inferior point about the above-mentioned phase in the receiving inferior point about s1 and s2 serves as the same value, it does not generate.

0610As mentioned above, if it takes into consideration that the case where the above-mentioned phase in the receiving inferior point about the above-mentioned phase in the receiving inferior point about s1 and s2 serves as the same value certainly occurs when the number of cycles N is even, the way in case the number of cycles N is odd, As compared with the time of the number of cycles N being even, a possibility that the distance between receiving inferior points will become large is high in a complex plane. However, when cycle N is a small value (N&lt;=16 or less [ for example, ]), since the shortest distance of the receiving inferior point in a complex plane has little number in which a receiving inferior point exists, it can secure a certain amount of length. Therefore, in the case of N&lt;=16, even if the number is even, the receiving quality of data may be securable.

0611Therefore, in the method based on a formula (232) which changes a Precoding procession regularly, when cycle N is made into odd number, its a possibility that the receiving quality of data can be raised is high. It means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [N-1] was generated based on the formula (232) (F [0] the Precoding procession of -F [N-1] may use it, ranking with what kind of turn to cycle N.). And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number nickel, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number nickel+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number Nxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly) The modulation method of s1 and s2 is alpha again at both the times of 16QAM.

0612<maths num="247"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0250.tif" /></maths>

0613If it carries out, the effect that the shortest distance between the 16x16=256 piece signal points in IQ plane can be enlarged in a certain specific LOS environment may be able to be acquired.<br />This embodiment explained the constitution method of N different Precoding processions for the Precoding hopping method of time period N. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] will be prepared as N different Precoding processions at this time, Although the case where it arranged in the direction of a time-axis (or frequency axis) in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] was explained since this embodiment explained the time of a single career transmission method to an example, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply N different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of time period N, Even if it uses N different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use N different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

0614In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H is taken as a bigger natural number than cycle N of the method which changes a Precoding procession to the above-mentioned rule target), If N different Precoding processions in this embodiment are included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high. At this time, &lt;condition #17 &lt;condition #18&gt;&gt; can be transposed to the following conditions. (A cycle is considered as N.)

0615<maths num="248"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0251.tif" /></maths>

0616(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />

0617<maths num="249"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0252.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0618(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />(Embodiment 10)<br />This embodiment describes an example which is different in Embodiment 9 about how to change regularly the Precoding procession which used the unitary matrix.<br />In the method of cycle 2N which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle 2N is denoted by a following formula.

0619<maths num="250"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0253.tif" /></maths>

0620It shall be alpha&gt; 0 and shall be a fixed (not based on i) value.

0621<maths num="251"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0254.tif" /></maths>

0622It shall be alpha&gt; 0 and shall be a fixed (not based on i) value. (alpha of a formula (234) and alpha of a formula (235) shall be the same values)<br />At this time, to a formula (234), the following conditions become important from conditions 5 of (several 106) of Embodiment 3, and conditions 6 of (several 107), in order to obtain the receiving quality of good data.

0623<maths num="252"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0255.tif" /></maths>

0624(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />

0625<maths num="253"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0256.tif" /></maths>

0626(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br /><br />And it considers adding the following conditions.

0627<maths num="254"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0257.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0628Next, in order to arrange a receiving inferior point so that it may become uniform distribution to a phase on a complex plane as Embodiment 6 explained, &lt;condition #24&gt; or &lt;condition #25&gt; are given.

0629<maths num="255"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0258.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0630<maths num="256"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0259.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0631That is, &lt;conditions 24&gt; mean that the difference of a phase is 2pi/Nrad. &lt;Conditions 25&gt; mean that the difference of a phase is -2 pi/N rad.<br /><br />And theta_１１(0) -theta_２１(0) When it is considered as =0 rad and referred to as alpha&gt; 1, the arrangement on the complex plane of the receiving inferior point of s1 at the time of N= 4 and the receiving inferior point of s2 is shown in Drawing 45 (a) and (b). As shown in Drawing 45 (a) and (b), in the complex plane, the shortest distance of the receiving inferior point of s1 can be kept large, and the shortest distance of the receiving inferior point of s2 can be similarly kept large. And it will be in the state same also at the time of alpha&lt; 1. When it is considered Embodiment 9 the same way, as compared with the time of the number of N being [ the way in case the number of N is odd ] even, a possibility that the distance between receiving inferior points will become large is high in a complex plane. However, when N is a small value (N&lt;=16 or less [ for example, ]), since the shortest distance of the receiving inferior point in a complex plane has little number in which a receiving inferior point exists, it can secure a certain amount of length. Therefore, in the case of N&lt;=16, even if the number is even, the receiving quality of data may be securable.

0632Therefore, in a formula (234) and the method based on (235) which changes a Precoding procession regularly, when N is made into odd number, its a possibility that the receiving quality of data can be raised is high. It means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [2N-1] was generated based on a formula (234) and (235) (F [0] the Precoding procession of -F [2N-1] may use it, ranking with what kind of turn to cycle 2N.). And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number 2nickel, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number 2nickel+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number 2 Nxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly) If the modulation method of s1 and s2 makes alpha a formula (233) again at both the times of 16QAM, The effect that the shortest distance between the 16x16=256 piece signal points in IQ plane can be enlarged in a certain specific LOS environment may be able to be acquired.

0633The following conditions are considered as different conditions from &lt;condition #23&gt;.

0634<maths num="257"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0260.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0635(x is N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1 (as for x, more than N is an integer not more than 2N-1), and y is N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1 (as for y, more than N is an integer not more than 2N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />

0636<maths num="258"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0261.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0637(x is N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1 (as for x, more than N is an integer not more than 2N-1), and y is N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1 (as for y, more than N is an integer not more than 2N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />At this time, it is filling &lt;condition #21&gt;, &lt;condition #22&gt;, &lt;condition #26&gt;, and &lt;condition #27&gt;, Since distance of the receiving inferior point of s2 comrades can be greatly enlarged for the distance of the receiving inferior point of s1 comrades in a complex plane, the receiving quality of good data can be obtained.

0638This embodiment explained the constitution method of a 2N piece different Precoding procession for the Precoding hopping method of time period 2N. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] will be prepared as a 2N piece different Precoding procession at this time, Although the case where it arranged in the direction of a time-axis (or frequency axis) in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] was explained since this embodiment explained the time of a single career transmission method to an example, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply 2N piece different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of time period 2N, Even if it uses 2N piece different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use 2N piece different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

0639In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H is taken as a bigger natural number than cycle 2N of the method which changes a Precoding procession to the above-mentioned rule target), If a 2N piece [ in this embodiment ] different Precoding procession is included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high.<br />(Embodiment 11)<br />This embodiment describes how to change regularly the Precoding procession which used the non-unitary matrix.

0640In the method of cycle 2N which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle 2N is denoted by a following formula.

0641<maths num="259"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0262.tif" /></maths>

0642It shall be alpha&gt; 0 and shall be a fixed (not based on i) value. It is considered as delta!=pi Radian.<br />

0643<maths num="260"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0263.tif" /></maths>

0644It shall be alpha&gt; 0 and shall be a fixed (not based on i) value. (alpha of a formula (236) and alpha of a formula (237) shall be the same values)<br />At this time, to a formula (236), the following conditions become important from conditions 5 of (several 106) of Embodiment 3, and conditions 6 of (several 107), in order to obtain the receiving quality of good data.

0645<maths num="261"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0264.tif" /></maths>

0646(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />

0647<maths num="262"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0265.tif" /></maths>

0648(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br /><br />And it considers adding the following conditions.

0649<maths num="263"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0266.tif" /></maths><br /><br /><br />

0650The Precoding procession of a following formula may be given instead of a formula (237).<br />

0651<maths num="264"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0267.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0652It shall be alpha&gt; 0 and shall be a fixed (not based on i) value. (alpha of a formula (236) and alpha of a formula (238) shall be the same values)<br />In order to arrange a receiving inferior point as an example so that it may become uniform distribution to a phase on a complex plane as Embodiment 6 explained, &lt;condition #31&gt; or &lt;condition #32&gt; are given.

0653<maths num="265"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0268.tif" /></maths><br /><br /><br />

0654<maths num="266"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0269.tif" /></maths><br /><br /><br />

0655That is, &lt;conditions 31&gt; mean that the difference of a phase is 2pi/Nrad. &lt;Conditions 32&gt; mean that the difference of a phase is -2 pi/N rad.<br />And theta_１１(0) -theta_２１(0) When it is considered as =0 rad, and is referred to as alpha&gt; 1 and considered as delta = (3 pi) / 4 rad, the arrangement on the complex plane of the receiving inferior point of s1 at the time of N= 4 and the receiving inferior point of s2 is shown in Drawing 46 (a) and (b). By doing in this way, the cycle which changes a Precoding procession can be enlarged and it sets to a complex plane, Since the shortest distance of the receiving inferior point of s1 can be kept large and can keep large similarly the shortest distance of the receiving inferior point of s2, it can obtain good receiving quality. Here, although the time of alpha&gt; 1, delta=(3 pi) /4rad, and N= 4 was explained to the example, it is not what was restricted to this, and the same effect can be acquired if it is pi/2 rad &lt;=|delta|&lt;pi Radian, alpha&gt; 0, and alpha!=1.

0656The following conditions are considered as different conditions from &lt;condition #30&gt;.

0657<maths num="267"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0270.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0658(x is N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1 (as for x, more than N is an integer not more than 2N-1), and y is N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1 (as for y, more than N is an integer not more than 2N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />

0659<maths num="268"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0271.tif" /></maths>

0660(x is N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1 (as for x, more than N is an integer not more than 2N-1), and y is N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1 (as for y, more than N is an integer not more than 2N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />At this time, it is filling &lt;condition #28&gt;, &lt;condition #29&gt;, &lt;condition #33&gt;, and &lt;condition #34&gt;, Since distance of the receiving inferior point of s2 comrades can be greatly enlarged for the distance of the receiving inferior point of s1 comrades in a complex plane, the receiving quality of good data can be obtained.

0661This embodiment explained the constitution method of a 2N piece different Precoding procession for the Precoding hopping method of time period 2N. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] will be prepared as a 2N piece different Precoding procession at this time, Although the case where it arranged in the direction of a time-axis (or frequency axis) in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] was explained since this embodiment explained the time of a single career transmission method to an example, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply 2N piece different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of time period 2N, Even if it uses 2N piece different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use 2N piece different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

0662In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H is taken as a bigger natural number than cycle 2N of the method which changes a Precoding procession to the above-mentioned rule target), If a 2N piece [ in this embodiment ] different Precoding procession is included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high.<br />(Embodiment 12)<br />This embodiment describes how to change regularly the Precoding procession which used the non-unitary matrix.<br />In the way cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula.

0663<maths num="269"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0272.tif" /></maths>

0664It shall be alpha&gt; 0 and shall be a fixed (not based on i) value. It is referred to as delta!=pi Radian (it is not based on i but is a fixed value), i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1).<br />At this time, to a formula (239), the following conditions become important from conditions 5 of (several 106) of Embodiment 3, and conditions 6 of (several 107), in order to obtain the receiving quality of good data.

0665<maths num="270"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0273.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0666(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />

0667<maths num="271"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0274.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0668(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />In order to arrange a receiving inferior point as an example so that it may become uniform distribution to a phase on a complex plane as Embodiment 6 explained, &lt;condition #37&gt; or &lt;condition #38&gt; are given.

0669<maths num="272"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0275.tif" /></maths><br /><br /><br />

0670<maths num="273"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0276.tif" /></maths><br /><br /><br />

0671That is, &lt;conditions 37&gt; mean that the difference of a phase is 2pi/Nrad. &lt;Conditions 38&gt; mean that the difference of a phase is -2 pi/N rad.<br />Since distance of the receiving inferior point of s2 comrades can be greatly enlarged for the distance of the receiving inferior point of s1 comrades in a complex plane if it is pi/2 rad &lt;=|delta|&lt;pi Radian, alpha&gt; 0, and alpha!=1 at this time, the receiving quality of good data can be obtained. &lt;Condition #37&gt; and &lt;condition #38&gt; are not the conditions which are certainly needed.

0672This embodiment explained the constitution method of N different Precoding processions for the Precoding hopping method of time period N. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] will be prepared as N different Precoding processions at this time, Although the case where it arranged in the direction of a time-axis (or frequency axis) in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] was explained since this embodiment explained the time of a single career transmission method to an example, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply N different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of time period N, Even if it uses N different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use N different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

0673In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H is taken as a bigger natural number than cycle N of the method which changes a Precoding procession to the above-mentioned rule target), If N different Precoding processions in this embodiment are included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high. At this time, &lt;condition #35 &lt;condition #36&gt;&gt; can be transposed to the following conditions. (A cycle is considered as N.)

0674<maths num="274"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0277.tif" /></maths>

0675(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />

0676<maths num="275"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0278.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0677(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br /><br />(Embodiment 13)<br />This embodiment explains another example of Embodiment 8.<br />In the method of cycle 2N which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle 2N is denoted by a following formula.

0678<maths num="276"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0279.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0679It shall be alpha&gt; 0 and shall be a fixed (not based on i) value.

0680<maths num="277"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0280.tif" /></maths>

0681It shall be alpha&gt; 0 and shall be a fixed (not based on i) value. (alpha of a formula (240) and alpha of a formula (241) shall be the same values)<br />And the Precoding procession of periodic 2xNxM based on a formula (240) and a formula (241) is denoted by a following formula.

0682<maths num="278"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0281.tif" /></maths>

0683It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.

0684<maths num="279"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0282.tif" /></maths>

0685It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time. It may be Xk=Yk and may be Xk!=Yk.<br />then, it means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [2xNxM-1] was generated (the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [2xNxM-1] -- periodic 2xNxM -- it may be used, ranking with what kind of turn.) And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number 2xNxMxi, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number 2xNxMxi+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number 2xNxMxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., 2xNxM-2, and 2xNxM-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly)<br />Thus, if a Precoding procession is generated, how to change a Precoding procession with a large cycle can be realized, the position of a receiving inferior point can be changed easily, and this may lead to improvement in the receiving quality of data.<br /><br />The formula (242) of the Precoding procession of periodic 2xNxM may be held like a following formula.

0686<maths num="280"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0283.tif" /></maths>

0687It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />It is good also considering the formula (243) of the Precoding procession of periodic 2xNxM as either a formula (245) - a formula (247).

0688<maths num="281"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0284.tif" /></maths>

0689It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />

0690<maths num="282"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0285.tif" /></maths>

0691It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.

0692<maths num="283"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0286.tif" /></maths>

0693It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />In [ if its attention is paid about a receiving inferior point / formula / (242) ] a formula (247),

0694<maths num="284"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0287.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0695(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)

0696<maths num="285"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0288.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0697(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)

0698<maths num="286"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0289.tif" /></maths><br /><br /><br />

0699If All of is filled, the receiving quality of good data can be obtained. In Embodiment 8, it is good to fill &lt;condition #39&gt; and &lt;condition #40&gt;.<br />When its attention is paid to Xk of a formula (242) to a formula (247), and *Yk,

0700<maths num="287"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0290.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0701(a is 0, 1, 2, ..., M-2, and *M-1, and b is 0, 1, 2, ..., *M-2, and *M-1 (a and b are or more 0 integers less than or equal to M-1), and is a!=b.)<br />However, s is an integer.

0702<maths num="288"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0291.tif" /></maths><br /><br /><br />

0703(a is 0, 1, 2, ..., M-2, and *M-1, and b is 0, 1, 2, ..., *M-2, and *M-1 (a and b are or more 0 integers less than or equal to M-1), and is a!=b.)<br />However, u is an integer.<br />If the conditions of two of are fulfilled, the receiving quality of good data can be obtained. In Embodiment 8, it is good to fulfill &lt;conditions 42&gt;.

0704In a formula (242) and a formula (247), when it is considered as zero rad &lt;=delta&lt;2pi Radian, it becomes a unitary matrix at the time of delta=pi Radian, and becomes a non-unitary matrix at the time of delta!=pi Radian. In this method, the time of the non-unitary matrix of pi/2 rad &lt;=|delta|&lt;pi Radian is one characteristic composition, and the receiving quality of good data will be obtained. Although a unitary matrix may be as another composition, although stated in detail, if N is made into odd number in a formula (247) from a formula (242), in Embodiment 10 or Embodiment 16, a possibility that the receiving quality of good data can be obtained will become high.<br /><br />(Embodiment 14)<br />In the method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, this embodiment explains the example of proper use in the case of using the case where a unitary matrix is used, and a non-unitary matrix, as a Precoding procession.

0705For example, when the two-line Precoding procession (each element shall comprise a complex number) of two rows is used, That is, to two abnormal-conditions signals (s1 (t) and s2 (t)) based on a certain modulation method, Precoding is given and the case where two signals after Precoding are transmitted from two antennas is explained.<br />When transmitting data using the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, as for the sending set of Drawing 3 and Drawing 13, mapping parts 306A and 306B will change a modulation method with frame composition signal 313. At this time, the number of abnormal-conditions many values of a modulation method (the number of abnormal-conditions many values: the number of the signal points of the modulation method in IQ plane) and the relation of a Precoding procession are explained.

0706The advantage of the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, As it explained in Embodiment 6, in the LOS environment, it is the point that the receiving quality of good data can be obtained, and the effect is large when a receiving set gives APP (or Max-log*APP) based on ML operation or ML operation especially. By the way, ML operation has big influence on a circuit scale (operation scale) in connection with the number of abnormal-conditions many values of a modulation method. For example, two signals after Precoding are transmitted from two antennas, When each of two abnormal-conditions signals (signal based on the modulation method in front of Precoding) assumes that the same modulation method is used, The number of candidate signal points [ in / when a modulation method is QPSK / IQ plane ] (received signal point 1101 of Drawing 11) is 4x4=16 piece, In the case of 16QAM, in the case of 16x16=256 piece and 64QAM, it is 64x64=4096 piece, In order to become [ in the case of 256QAM ] 1024x1024=1048576 piece in the case of 256x256=65536 piece and 1024QAM and to suppress the operation scale of a receiving set by a certain amount of circuit scale, modulation methods are QPSK, *16QAM, and *. In the case of 64QAM, in the case of 256QAM and *1024QAM, in a receiving set, the detection using an alignment operation like MMSE and *ZF will be used using ML operation (APP based on ML operation (Max-log)). (In the case of 256QAM, ML operation may be used depending on the case.)<br />When such a receiving set is assumed and SNR (signal-to-noisepowerratio) after multiplex signal separation is considered, When an alignment operation like MMSE and *ZF is used with the receiving set, the unitary matrix is suitable as a Precoding procession, and when ML operation is used, it may have any of a unitary matrix and a non-unitary matrix as a Precoding procession, and may be. Consideration of explanation of one of above-mentioned embodiments will transmit two signals after Precoding from two antennas, When each of two abnormal-conditions signals (signal based on the modulation method in front of Precoding) assumes that the same modulation method is used, the number of abnormal-conditions many values of a modulation method is 64 or less values. Or a non-unitary matrix is used as a Precoding procession when the method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is used at the time of 256 or less values, In all the modulation methods which the communications system will support if a unitary matrix is used when larger (or larger than 256 values) than 64 values, A possibility that the effect that the receiving quality of good data can be obtained can be acquired becomes high, making the circuit scale of a receiving set small in the case of which modulation method.

0707It may be better to use a unitary matrix, when the number of abnormal-conditions many values of a modulation method is 64 or less (or 256 or less values) values. When such a thing is taken into consideration, the number of abnormal-conditions many values of a modulation method is 64 or less values. Or when a plurality of modulation methods of 256 or less values are being supported, It becomes important that a non-unitary matrix may be used as a Precoding procession when the method which changes a Precoding procession regularly with one modulation method of a plurality of modulation methods of 64 or less values currently supported is used.

0708Although Above explained as an example the case where two signals after Precoding were transmitted from two antennas, When not the thing restricted to this but N signals after Precoding are transmitted from N antennas and each N abnormal-conditions signal (signal based on the modulation method in front of Precoding) assumes that the same modulation method is used, it is beta to the number of abnormal-conditions many values of a modulation method._NThe threshold to say is provided and the number of abnormal-conditions many values of a modulation method is beta._Nbeta currently supported when a plurality of following modulation methods are being supported_NA non-unitary matrix may be used as a Precoding procession when the method which changes a Precoding procession regularly with one modulation method of a plurality of following modulation methods is used, and the number of abnormal-conditions many values of a modulation method is beta._NIn all the modulation methods which the communications system will support if a unitary matrix is used in the case of a larger modulation method, A possibility that the effect that the receiving quality of good data can be obtained can be acquired becomes high, making the circuit scale of a receiving set small in the case of which modulation method. (The number of abnormal-conditions many values of a modulation method is beta.)_NA non-unitary matrix may always be used as a Precoding procession when the method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is used at the following times. <br />Although the modulation method of N abnormal-conditions signals transmitted simultaneously explained by the case where the same modulation method is used, in Above, below in N abnormal-conditions signals transmitted simultaneously, the case where two or more kinds of modulation methods exist is explained.

0709As an example, the case where two signals after Precoding are transmitted from two antennas is explained. When each of two abnormal-conditions signals (signal based on the modulation method in front of Precoding) shall be the same modulation method or a different modulation method, the number of abnormal-conditions many values is 2.^a1The modulation method of a value and the number of abnormal-conditions many values are 2.^a2It is assumed that the modulation method of a value is used. The number of candidate signal points [ in / when ML operation (APP based on ML operation (Max-log)) is used in the receiving set at this time / IQ plane ] (received signal point 1101 of Drawing 11) is 2.^a1×２^a2＝２^a1+a2A Candidate signal point will exist. It is 2 in order to be able to obtain the receiving quality of good data at this time, making the circuit scale of a receiving set small, as stated above.^a1+a2It is alike, receives and is 2.^betaThe threshold to say is provided and it is 2.^a1+a2≦２^betaAt the time of of, a non-unitary matrix is used as a Precoding procession when the method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is used, and it is 2.^a1+a2＞２^betaa case -- a unitary matrix -- using -- if -- it is good .

07102^a1+a2≦２^betaIt may be better to use a unitary matrix for a of case. It is 2 when such a thing is taken into consideration.^a1+a2≦２^beta2 currently supported when the combination of the modulation method of Multiple of is being supported^a1+a2≦２^betaIt becomes important that a non-unitary matrix may be used as a Precoding procession when the method which changes a Precoding procession regularly in the combination of one modulation method of the combination of the modulation method of Multiple of is used.

0711Although Above explained as an example the case where two signals after Precoding were transmitted from two antennas, it is not what was restricted to this. For example, when each N abnormal-conditions signal (signal based on the modulation method in front of Precoding) is a case where the same modulation method or a different modulation method exists, it is the number of abnormal-conditions many values of the modulation method of the i-th abnormal-conditions signal 2^aiIt carries out (i= 1, 2, ..., N-1, N).

0712The number of candidate signal points [ in / when ML operation (APP based on ML operation (Max-log)) is used in the receiving set at this time / IQ plane ] (received signal point 1101 of Drawing 11) is 2.^a1×２^a2×・・・×２^ai×・・・×２^aN＝２^{a1+a2+ ... +ai+ ... +aN}A Candidate signal point will exist. It is 2 in order to be able to obtain the receiving quality of good data at this time, making the circuit scale of a receiving set small, as stated above.^{a1+a2+ ... +ai+ ... +aN}It is alike, receives and is 2.^betaThe threshold to say is provided,

0713<maths num="289"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0292.tif" /></maths>

0714When the combination of a plurality of modulation methods which fill &lt;condition #44&gt; is being supported, A non-unitary matrix may be used as a Precoding procession when the method which changes a Precoding procession regularly in the combination of one modulation method of the combination of a plurality of modulation methods which fill &lt;condition #44&gt; currently supported is used.

0715<maths num="290"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0293.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0716In all the modulation methods which the communications system will support if a unitary matrix is used in the case of the combination of all the modulation methods which fill &lt;condition #45&gt;, A possibility that the effect that the receiving quality of good data can be obtained can be acquired becomes high, making the circuit scale of a receiving set small in the case of the combination of which modulation method. (In all the combination of a plurality of modulation methods which fill &lt;condition #44&gt; currently supported, a non-unitary matrix may be used as a Precoding procession when the method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is used.)<br />(Embodiment 15)<br />This embodiment explains the example of a system of the method which changes a Precoding procession regularly using a multicareer transmission method like OFDM.

0717In the system of the method which changes a Precoding procession regularly using a multicareer transmission method like OFDM in this embodiment, Drawing 47 shows an example of the frame composition in the time-frequency axis of the transmitted signal which a broadcasting station (base station) transmits. (It has frame composition from time $1 to time $T.) The frame composition in the time-frequency axis of stream s1 which explained Drawing 47 (A) in the embodiment 1 grade, and Drawing 47 (B) show the frame composition in the time-frequency axis of stream s2 explained in the embodiment 1 grade. The symbol of the same time of stream s1 and stream s2 and the same (substitute) career will be transmitted on the same time and the same frequency using a plurality of antennas.

0718The career used when OFDM is used in Drawing 47 (A) and (B) (substitute), (Substitute) Career group #A which comprised career a - (substitute) career a+Na, (Substitute) It shall divide by career group #B which comprised career b - (substitute) career b+Nb, career group #C which comprised career (substitute) c - (substitute) career c+Nc, career group #D which comprised career (substitute) d - (substitute) career d+Nd, and ... And a plurality of transmission methods shall be supported in each subcarrier group. Here, it becomes possible to utilize effectively the advantage which each transmission method has by supporting a plurality of transmission methods. For example, career group #A is a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method in Drawing 47 (A) and (B), Or a Precoding procession shall use a fixed MIMO transmission method. Career group #C shall transmit only stream s1 using the MIMO transmission method with which career group #B changes a Precoding procession regularly, and career group #D shall transmit using space-time block numerals.<br />In the system of the method which changes a Precoding procession regularly using a multicareer transmission method [ like OFDM in this embodiment ] whose Drawing 48 is, An example of the frame composition in the time-frequency axis of the transmitted signal which a broadcasting station (base station) transmits is shown, and the frame composition from time [ of time to differ ] $X to time $X+T' is shown in Drawing 47. The career which in Drawing 48 is used like Drawing 47 when OFDM is used (substitute), (Substitute) Career group #A which comprised career a - (substitute) career a+Na, (Substitute) It shall divide by career group #B which comprised career b - (substitute) career b+Nb, career group #C which comprised career (substitute) c - (substitute) career c+Nc, career group #D which comprised career (substitute) d - (substitute) career d+Nd, and ... And the point that Drawing 48 differs from Drawing 47 is that the career group from which the communication method used in Drawing 47 and the communication method used in Drawing 48 differ exists. In Drawing 48, it is career group #A at (A) and (B), It shall transmit using space-time block numerals, and career group #B shall use the MIMO transmission method which changes a Precoding procession regularly. Career group #D shall transmit only stream s1 using the MIMO transmission method with which career group #C changes a Precoding procession regularly.

0719Next, the transmission method to support is explained.<br />Drawing 49 shows the signal processing method when a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method or the MIMO transmission method of fixation of a Precoding procession is used, and attaches the same number as Drawing 6. Dignity attachment synchronizer 600 which is a baseband signal according to a certain modulation method, Information 315 about stream s1 (t), (307A), stream s2 (t) and (307B), and a weighting method is considered as an input, and abnormal-conditions signal z2 (t) and (309B) after abnormal-conditions signal z1 after dignity attachment (t), (309A), and dignity attachment is outputted. When information 315 about a weighting method shows the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method here, signal processing of method #1 of Drawing 49 is performed. That is, the following processings are performed.

0720<maths num="291"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0294.tif" /></maths>

0721However, when the method which transmits one abnormal-conditions signal is being supported, a formula (250) may be expressed like a formula (251) from a point of transmission power.

0722<maths num="292"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0295.tif" /></maths>

0723And when information 315 about a weighting method shows the MIMO transmission method of fixation of a Precoding procession, signal processing of method #2 of Drawing 49 is performed, for example. That is, the following processings are performed.

0724<maths num="293"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0296.tif" /></maths>

0725It is here and is theta._１１theta_１２lambda and delta become a fixed value.<br />Drawing 50 shows the composition of the abnormal-conditions signal when space-time block numerals are used. The baseband signal based on a certain abnormal-conditions signal considers the block coding section (5002) between space-time of Drawing 50 as an input. For example, the block coding section (5002) between space-time considers symbol s1, symbol s2, and ... as an input. then -- as shown in Drawing 50, block coding between space-time is performed -- z1 (5003A) -- As "it is s1 as symbol #0" "symbol #1 - s2^＊"It is s3 as symbol #2". "as symbol #3 - s4 [ " and ]^＊" -- becoming ... z2 (5003B) -- as "it is s2 as symbol #0" "symbol #1 -- s1^＊as" "being [ s4 ]-as symbol #2" "symbol #3 -- s3 [ it ]^＊" It becomes ... At this time, symbol #X in z1 and symbol #X in z2 will be transmitted to the same time by the same frequency from an antenna.

0726Although Drawing 47 and Drawing 48 have indicated only the symbol which transmits data, it is necessary to transmit information, including a transmission method, a modulation method, an error correction method, etc., in fact. For example, as shown in Drawing 51, if these pieces of information is periodically transmitted only by one abnormal-conditions signal z1, these pieces of information can be transmitted to a communication partner. It is necessary to transmit a symbol (for example, a pilot symbol, a reference symbol, a preamble, a symbol known by transmission and reception (PSK:Phase*Shift*Keying)) for change of a transmission way, i.e., a receiving set, to presume channel change. Although Drawing 47 and Drawing 48 have omitted and described these symbols, the symbol for presuming channel change will be contained in the frame composition of a time-frequency axis in practice. therefore, it is only a symbol for each career group to transmit data -- it does not necessarily comprise The. (About this point, it is the same also in Embodiment 1.)<br />Drawing 52 shows an example of the composition of the sending set of the broadcasting station (base station) in this embodiment. A transmission method deciding part (5205) determines the number of careers of each career group, a modulation method, an error correction method, the code rate of an error correcting code, a transmission method, etc., and outputs them as a control signal (5206).<br />Modulating signal generation part #1 (5201_1) considers information (5200_1) and a control signal (5206) as an input, and it outputs abnormal-conditions signal z1 (5202_1) and abnormal-conditions signal z2 (5203_1) of career group #A of Drawing 47 and Drawing 48 based on the information on the communication method of a control signal (5206).

0727Similarly, modulating signal generation part #2 (5201_2) is, Information (5200_2) and a control signal (5206) are considered as an input, and abnormal-conditions signal z1 (5202_2) and abnormal-conditions signal z2 (5203_2) of career group #B of Drawing 47 and Drawing 48 are outputted based on the information on the communication method of a control signal (5206).<br />Similarly, modulating signal generation part #3 (5201_3) is, Information (5200_3) and a control signal (5206) are considered as an input, and abnormal-conditions signal z1 (5202_3) and abnormal-conditions signal z2 (5203_3) of career group #C of Drawing 47 and Drawing 48 are outputted based on the information on the communication method of a control signal (5206).

0728Similarly, modulating signal generation part #4 (5201_4) is, Information (5200_4) and a control signal (5206) are considered as an input, and abnormal-conditions signal z1 (5202_4) and abnormal-conditions signal z2 (5203_4) of career group #D of Drawing 47 and Drawing 48 are outputted based on the information on the communication method of a control signal (5206).<br />Hereinafter, although not illustrated, suppose that it is the same from modulating signal generation part #5 to modulating signal generation part #M-1.<br />And similarly, modulating signal generation part #M (5201_M) considers information (5200_M) and a control signal (5206) as an input, and outputs abnormal-conditions signal z1 (5202_M) and abnormal-conditions signal z2 (5203_M) of a certain career group based on the information on the communication method of a control signal (5206).

0729OFDM method related treating part (5207_1), Abnormal-conditions signal z1 (5202_1) of career group #A, abnormal-conditions signal z1 (5202_2) of career group #B, Abnormal-conditions signal z1 (5202_3) of career group #C, abnormal-conditions signal z1 (5202_4) of career group #D, ... and abnormal-conditions signal z1 (5202_M) of a certain career group -- and A control signal (5206) is considered as an input, and is rearranged, inverse Fourier transform, frequency conversion, amplification, etc. are processed, a transmitted signal (5208_1) is outputted, and a transmitted signal (5208_1) is outputted as an electric wave from an antenna (5209_1).

0730Similarly, it is an OFDM method related treating part (5207_2), Abnormal-conditions signal z1 (5203_1) of career group #A, abnormal-conditions signal z2 (5203_2) of career group #B, Abnormal-conditions signal z2 (5203_3) of career group #C, abnormal-conditions signal z2 (5203_4) of career group #D, ... and abnormal-conditions signal z2 (5203_M) of a certain career group -- and A control signal (5206) is considered as an input, and is rearranged, inverse Fourier transform, frequency conversion, amplification, etc. are processed, a transmitted signal (5208_2) is outputted, and a transmitted signal (5208_2) is outputted as an electric wave from an antenna (5209_2).

0731Drawing 53 shows an example of the composition of modulating signal generation part [ of Drawing 52 ] #1 - #M. An error correcting code-ized part (5302) considers information (5300) and a control signal (5301) as an input, according to a control signal (5301), sets up the code rate of an error correcting code-ized method and error-correcting-code-izing, performs error correcting code-ization, and outputs the data (5303) after error-correcting-code-izing. (By setup of the code rate of an error correcting code-ized method and error-correcting-code-izing, when an LDPC code, turbo numerals, a convolutional code, etc. are used, a puncture may be performed depending on a code rate and a code rate may be realized, for example.)<br />An interleaving part (5304) is data (5303) after error-correcting-code-izing, A control signal (5301) is considered as an input, the data (5303) after error-correcting-code-izing is rearranged according to the information on the interleaving method included in a control signal (5301), and the data (5305) after interleave is outputted.

0732A mapping part (5306_1) considers the data (5305) and the control signal (5301) after interleave as an input, performs a mapping process according to the information on the modulation method contained in a control signal (5301), and outputs a baseband signal (5307_1).<br />Similarly, a mapping part (5306_2) considers the data (5305) and the control signal (5301) after interleave as an input, performs a mapping process according to the information on the modulation method contained in a control signal (5301), and outputs a baseband signal (5307_2).

0733A signal processing part (5308) considers a baseband signal (5307_1), a baseband signal (5307_2), and a control signal (5301) as an input, A transmission method included in a control signal (5301) (here) For example, a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method, the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession, Based on the information on a transmission method which only the MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the block coding between space-time, and stream s1 transmit, signal processing is performed and z2 (5309_2) after signal z1 (5309_1) after signal processing and signal processing is outputted. When the transmission method which transmits only stream s1 is chosen, a signal processing part (5308) may not output z2 (5309_2) after signal processing. In Drawing 53, although composition in case the number of error correcting code-ized parts is one was shown, it is not what was restricted to this, and as shown in Drawing 3, a plurality of coding machines may be provided, for example.

0734Drawing 54 shows an example of the composition of the OFDM method related treating part (5207_1 and 5207_2) in Drawing 52, and attaches the same numerals about what operates like Drawing 14. A rearrangement part (5402A) is abnormal-conditions signal z1 (5400_1) of career group #A, Abnormal-conditions signal z1 (5400_2) of career group #B, abnormal-conditions signal z1 (5400_3) of career group #C, It rearranges by considering abnormal-conditions signal z1 (5400_4) of career group #D, ..., abnormal-conditions signal z1 (5400_M) of a certain career group, and a control signal (5403) as an input, and outputs signals 1405A and 1405B after rearrangement. Although the example which constitutes assignment of a career group from a subcarrier which gathered explains in Drawing 47, Drawing 48, and Drawing 51, it is not what was restricted to this and a discrete subcarrier may constitute a career group for every time. In Drawing 47, Drawing 48, and Drawing 51, although the example which is not changed in time explains the number of careers of a career group, it is not what was restricted to this. This point is explained separately later.

0735Drawing 55 shows the detailed example of the frame composition in the time-frequency axis of the method which sets up a transmission method for every career group as shown in Drawing 47, Drawing 48, and Drawing 51. In Drawing 55, 5501 shows 5500 and an individual control information symbol, and 5503 shows a control information symbol, a data symbol, and 5502 and a pilot symbol. Drawing 55 (A) shows the frame composition in the time-frequency axis of stream s1, and Drawing 55 (B) shows the frame composition in the time-frequency axis of stream s2.

0736A control information symbol is a symbol for transmitting control information common to a career group, and comprises information about a symbol for a transceiver machine to perform frequency and a time synchronization and assignment of a career (substitute), etc. And a control control symbol shall be transmitted only from stream s1 in time $1.<br />an individual control information symbol -- a subcarrier group -- it is a symbol for transmitting individual control information It comprises information, including the block size of the code rate and error correcting code of the transmission method, the modulation method, the error correcting code-ized method, and error-correcting-code-izing of a data symbol, etc., information on the insertion method of a pilot symbol, information on the transmitting power of a pilot symbol, etc. An individual control information symbol shall be transmitted only from stream s1 in time $1.

0737a data symbol is a symbol for transmitting and explained data (information) using Drawing 47 - Drawing 50 -- as For example, it is a symbol of one transmission method of the transmission methods which only a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method, the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession, the MIMO method that changes a Precoding procession regularly, the block coding between space-time, and stream s1 transmit. In career group #A, career group #B, career group #C, and career group #D, although it has indicated that a data symbol exists in stream s2, when the transmission method which only stream s1 transmits is used, a data symbol may not exist in stream s2.

0738As for a pilot symbol, a receiving set is h of channel estimation (36), i.e., a formula._１１(t), h_１２(t), h_２１(t), h_２２It is a symbol for presuming change equivalent to (t). (Since a multicareer transmission method like an OFDM method is used here, it is h for every subcarrier.)_１１(t), h_１２(t), h_２１(t), h_２２It will be called the symbol for presuming change equivalent to (t). Therefore, the PSK transmission method is used for the pilot symbol, and it will constitute it, for example so that it may become a known pattern with a transceiver machine. A receiving set may use a pilot symbol for presumption of frequency offset, phase distortion presumption, and a time synchronization.

0739Drawing 56 shows an example of the composition of the receiving set for receiving the abnormal-conditions signal which the sending set of Drawing 52 transmitted, and attaches the same numerals about what operates like Drawing 7.<br />In Drawing 56, an OFDM method related treating part (5600_X) considers received signal 702_X as an input, performs predetermined processing, and outputs signal 704_X after signal processing. Similarly, an OFDM method related treating part (5600_Y) considers received signal 702_Y as an input, performs predetermined processing, and outputs signal 704_Y after signal processing.

0740Control information decoding part 709 of Drawing 56 considers signal 704after signal processing_X, and signal 704_Y after signal processing as an input, extracts the control information symbol and individual control information symbol in Drawing 55, acquires the control information transmitted as these symbols, and outputs control signal 710 including this information.<br />Channel change estimating part 705_1 of abnormal-conditions signal z1 considers signal 704after signal processing_X, and control signal 710 as an input, performs channel estimation in the career group (desired career group) which this receiving set needs, and outputs channel estimation signal 706_1.

0741Similarly, channel change estimating part 705_2 of abnormal-conditions signal z2 considers signal 704after signal processing_X, and control signal 710 as an input, performs channel estimation in the career group (desired career group) which this receiving set needs, and outputs channel estimation signal 706_2.<br />Similarly, channel change estimating part 705_1 of abnormal-conditions signal z1 considers signal 704after signal processing_Y, and control signal 710 as an input, performs channel estimation in the career group (desired career group) which this receiving set needs, and outputs channel estimation signal 708_1.

0742Similarly, channel change estimating part 705_2 of abnormal-conditions signal z2 considers signal 704after signal processing_Y, and control signal 710 as an input, performs channel estimation in the career group (desired career group) which this receiving set needs, and outputs channel estimation signal 708_2.<br />And signal processing parts 711 are signal 706_1, 706_2, 708_1, 708_2, and 704_X, 704_Y and control signal 710 are considered as an input, and it is contained in control signal 710, Based on information, including the block size etc. of the code rate and error correcting code of the transmission method, the modulation method, the error correcting code-ized method, and error-correcting-code-izing in the data symbol transmitted by the desired career group, processing of a recovery and decoding is performed and receiving data 712 is outputted.

0743The composition of the OFDM method related treating part (5600_X, 5600_Y) in Drawing 56 is shown, a frequency conversion part (5701) considers a received signal (5700) as an input, and Drawing 57 performs frequency conversion, and outputs the signal (5702) after frequency conversion.<br />A Fourier transform part (5703) Fourier-transforms by considering the signal (5702) after frequency conversion as an input, and outputs the signal (5704) after a Fourier transform.

0744As mentioned above, when using a multicareer transmission method like an OFDM method, it is dividing into a plurality of career groups, and setting up a transmission method for every career group, Since receiving quality and access speed can be set up for every career group, the effect that a flexible system can be built can be acquired. While being able to obtain high receiving quality to the LOS environment by enabling it to choose a method which was described by other embodiments and which changes a Precoding procession regularly at this time, the advantage that high access speed can be obtained can be acquired. As the transmission method which a career group can set up in this embodiment, "A spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method, the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession, Although the transmission method which only the MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the block coding between space-time, and stream s1 transmit" was held, it is not what was restricted to this, At this time, as a space-time block code, although the method of Drawing 50 was explained, it is not what was restricted to this, and the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession is not what was restricted to method #2 of Drawing 49, and should just comprise a fixed Precoding procession. In this embodiment, although the number of antennas of the sending set was explained by the case of 2, it is not what was restricted to this, Also in the case where it is larger than 2, it is a "spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method for every career group, The same effect can be acquired if it enables it to choose any of a transmission method" or the transmission method which only the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession, the MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the block coding between space-time, and stream s1 transmit.

0745Drawing 58 shows how to assign a different career group in Drawing 47, Drawing 48, and Drawing 51. Although the example which constitutes assignment of a career group from a subcarrier which gathered explains in Drawing 47, Drawing 48, Drawing 51, and Drawing 55, it has been the feature in Drawing 58 to arrange the career of a career group discretely. Drawing 58 shows an example of the frame composition in a time [ to differ in Drawing 47, Drawing 48, Drawing 51, and Drawing 55 ]-frequency axis, shows the frame composition of career H and time $1 to time $K from career 1, and attaches the same numerals about the same thing as Drawing 55 in Drawing 58. The symbol indicated to be "A" in the data symbol of Drawing 58 is a symbol of career group A, It is shown that the symbol indicated to be "B" is a symbol of career group B, that the symbol indicated to be "C" is a symbol of career group C, and that the symbol indicated to be "D" is a symbol of career group D. Thus, in the direction of a career (substitute), even if it arranges a career group discretely, it can be carried out similarly and does not always need to use the same career in the direction of a time-axis. By performing such arrangement, the effect that time and a frequency diversity gain can be obtained can be acquired.

0746In Drawing 47, Drawing 48, Drawing 51, and Drawing 58, although the control information symbol and the peculiar control information symbol are arranged for every career group at the same time, it may arrange at time to differ. The number of careers (substitute) which a career group uses may be changed with time.<br /><br /><br />(Embodiment 16)<br />This embodiment describes the case where N is made into odd number about the method of changing the Precoding procession using a unitary matrix regularly like Embodiment 10.

0747In the method of cycle 2N which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle 2N is denoted by a following formula.

0748<maths num="294"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0297.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0749It shall be alpha&gt; 0 and shall be a fixed (not based on i) value.

0750<maths num="295"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0298.tif" /></maths>

0751It shall be alpha&gt; 0 and shall be a fixed (not based on i) value. (alpha of a formula (253) and alpha of a formula (254) shall be the same values)<br />At this time, to a formula (253), the following conditions become important from conditions 5 of (several 106) of Embodiment 3, and conditions 6 of (several 107), in order to obtain the receiving quality of good data.

0752<maths num="296"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0299.tif" /></maths>

0753(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />

0754<maths num="297"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0300.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0755(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br /><br />And it considers adding the following conditions.

0756<maths num="298"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0301.tif" /></maths><br /><br /><br />

0757Next, in order to arrange a receiving inferior point so that it may become uniform distribution to a phase on a complex plane as Embodiment 6 explained, &lt;condition #49&gt; or &lt;condition #50&gt; are given.

0758<maths num="299"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0302.tif" /></maths><br /><br /><br />

0759<maths num="300"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0303.tif" /></maths><br /><br /><br />

0760That is, &lt;conditions 49&gt; mean that the difference of a phase is 2pi/Nrad. &lt;Conditions 50&gt; mean that the difference of a phase is -2 pi/N rad.<br />And theta_１１(0) -theta_２１(0) When it is considered as =0 rad and referred to as alpha&gt; 1, the arrangement on the complex plane of the receiving inferior point of s1 at the time of N= 3 and the receiving inferior point of s2 is shown in Drawing 60 (a) and (b). As shown in Drawing 60 (a) and (b), in the complex plane, the shortest distance of the receiving inferior point of s1 can be kept large, and the shortest distance of the receiving inferior point of s2 can be similarly kept large. And it will be in the state same also at the time of alpha&lt; 1. When it is considered Embodiment 9 the same way as compared with Drawing 45 of Embodiment 10, as compared with the time of the number of N being [ the way in case the number of N is odd ] even, a possibility that the distance between receiving inferior points will become large is high in a complex plane. However, when N is a small value (N&lt;=16 or less [ for example, ]), since the shortest distance of the receiving inferior point in a complex plane has little number in which a receiving inferior point exists, it can secure a certain amount of length. Therefore, in the case of N&lt;=16, even if the number is even, the receiving quality of data may be securable.

0761Therefore, in a formula (253) and the method based on (254) which changes a Precoding procession regularly, when N is made into odd number, its a possibility that the receiving quality of data can be raised is high. It means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [2N-1] was generated based on a formula (253) and (254) (F [0] the Precoding procession of -F [2N-1] may use it, ranking with what kind of turn to cycle 2N.). And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number 2nickel, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number 2nickel+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number 2 Nxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly) If the modulation method of s1 and s2 makes alpha a formula (233) again at both the times of 16QAM, The effect that the shortest distance between the 16x16=256 piece signal points in IQ plane can be enlarged in a certain specific LOS environment may be able to be acquired.

0762The following conditions are considered as different conditions from &lt;condition #48&gt;.

0763<maths num="301"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0304.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0764(x is N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1 (as for x, more than N is an integer not more than 2N-1), and y is N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1 (as for y, more than N is an integer not more than 2N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />

0765<maths num="302"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0305.tif" /></maths><br /><br /><br />

0766(x is N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1 (as for x, more than N is an integer not more than 2N-1), and y is N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1 (as for y, more than N is an integer not more than 2N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />At this time, it is filling &lt;condition #46&gt;, &lt;condition #47&gt;, &lt;condition #51&gt;, and &lt;condition #52&gt;, Since distance of the receiving inferior point of s2 comrades can be greatly enlarged for the distance of the receiving inferior point of s1 comrades in a complex plane, the receiving quality of good data can be obtained.

0767This embodiment explained the constitution method of a 2N piece different Precoding procession for the Precoding hopping method of time period 2N. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] will be prepared as a 2N piece different Precoding procession at this time, Although the case where it arranged in the direction of a time-axis (or frequency axis) in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] was explained since this embodiment explained the time of a single career transmission method to an example, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply 2N piece different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of time period 2N, Even if it uses 2N piece different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use 2N piece different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

0768In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H is taken as a bigger natural number than cycle 2N of the method which changes a Precoding procession to the above-mentioned rule target), If a 2N piece [ in this embodiment ] different Precoding procession is included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high.<br />(Embodiment 17)<br />This embodiment explains the example of the method of changing concrete Precoding weight based on Embodiment 8 regularly.

0769Drawing 6 is a figure relevant to the weighting method (the Precoding (Precoding) method) in this embodiment, and dignity attachment synchronizer 600 is a dignity attachment synchronizer which unified both of dignity attachment synchronizers 308A and 308B of Drawing 3. As shown in Drawing 6, stream s1 (t) and stream s2 (t) are equivalent to baseband signals 307A and 307B of Drawing 3, that is, serve as the baseband signal said phase I according to mapping of modulation methods, such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM, and a rectangular cross Q ingredient.<br />And stream s1 (t) expresses the signal of s1 (u) and symbol number u+1 as s1 (u+1) and ... for the signal of symbol number u like the frame composition of Drawing 6. Similarly, stream s2 (t) expresses the signal of s2 (u) and symbol number u+1 as s2 (u+1) and ... for the signal of symbol number u. And baseband signals [ in / in dignity attachment synchronizer 600 / Drawing 3 ] 307A (s1 (t)) and 307B (s2 (t)), Information 315 about dignity attachment information is considered as an input, the weighting method according to information 315 about dignity attachment information is given, and signals 309A (z1 (t)) and 309B (z2 (t)) after dignity attachment composition of Drawing 3 are outputted.

0770When the Precoding procession change method of cycle N= 8 of Example 8 in Embodiment 6 is used, for example at this time, z1 (t) and z2 (t) are expressed as follows.<br />At the time of symbol number 8i (i is taken as an integer greater than or equal to 0):

0771<maths num="303"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0306.tif" /></maths>

0772However, j is an imaginary unit and k= 0.<br />At the time of symbol number 8i+1:

0773<maths num="304"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0307.tif" /></maths>

0774However, k= 1.<br />At the time of symbol number 8i+2:

0775<maths num="305"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0308.tif" /></maths>

0776However, k= 2.<br />At the time of symbol number 8i+3:

0777<maths num="306"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0309.tif" /></maths>

0778However, k= 3.<br />At the time of symbol number 8i+4:

0779<maths num="307"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0310.tif" /></maths>

0780However, k= 4.<br />At the time of symbol number 8i+5:

0781<maths num="308"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0311.tif" /></maths>

0782However, k= 5.<br />At the time of symbol number 8i+6:

0783<maths num="309"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0312.tif" /></maths>

0784However, k= 6.<br />At the time of symbol number 8i+7:

0785<maths num="310"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0313.tif" /></maths>

0786However, k= 7.<br />Here, although it is indicated as the symbol number, a symbol number may be considered to be time (time). For example, in a formula (262), z1 (8i+7) and z2 of time 8i+7 (8i+7) are a signal of the same time, and a sending set will transmit z1 (8i+7) and z2 (8i+7) using the same (it is common) frequency as other embodiments explained. If the signal of a jam and time T is set to s1 (T), s2 (T), z1 (T), and z2 (T), A certain Precoding procession, s1 (T), s2 (T) to z1 (T), and z2 (T) will be calculated, and a sending set will transmit z1 (T) and z2 (T) using the same (it is common) frequency (at the same time (time)). moreover -- if the signal equivalent to s1, s2, z1, and z2 in career (substitute) L and time T is set to s1 (T, L), s2 (T, L), z1 (T, L), and z2 (T, L) when multicareer transmission methods, such as OFDM, are used A certain Precoding procession, and s1 (T, L) and s2 (T, L) to z1 (T, L) and z2 (T, L) will be calculated, and a sending set will transmit z1 (T, L) and z2 (T, L) using the same (it is common) frequency (at the same time (time)).<br />At this time, there is a formula (198) or a formula (200) as a suitable value of alpha. In a formula (255) - a formula (262), the value of alpha may be set as a value which is different in each. That is, when two formulas are extracted among a formula (255) - a formula (262) (it is considered as formula (X) and a formula (Y)), it may be a value from which alpha of formula (X) and alpha of a formula (Y) differ.

0787This embodiment describes the Precoding change method which enlarges a cycle based on the Precoding procession of the formula (190) described above.<br />When the cycle of a Precoding change procession is set to 8M, a different Precoding procession 8M piece is expressed as follows.

0788<maths num="311"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0314.tif" /></maths>

0789It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, k= 0, 1, ..., *M-2, and *M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />For example, as shown in Drawing 42 (a), when referred to as M= 2, if alpha&lt; 1, the receiving inferior point of s1 at the time of k= 0 (O) and the receiving inferior point () of s2 are expressed. Similarly, the receiving inferior point of s1 at the time of k= 1 (O) and the receiving inferior point () of s2 are expressed as shown in Drawing 42 (b). thus -- if it carries out based on the Precoding procession of a formula (190) -- a receiving inferior point -- Drawing 42 (a) -- becoming like -- each element of the 2nd line of the procession of the right-hand side of this formula (190) -- e^jXA (formula (226) referring-to) and receiving inferior point has the rotated receiving inferior point to Drawing 42 (a) by considering the multiplied procession as a Precoding procession (refer to Drawing 42 (b)). (However, the receiving inferior point of Drawing 42 (a) and Drawing 42 (b) has not overlapped.) Thus, e^jXEven if it multiplies, a receiving inferior point is good to make it not overlap. It is e to each element of the 2nd line of the procession of the right-hand side of a formula (190).^jXIt does not multiply but is e to each element of the 1st line of the procession of the right-hand side of a formula (190).^jXIt is good also considering the multiplied procession as a Precoding procession. At this time, Precoding procession F [0] - F [15] are denoted by a following formula.

0790<maths num="312"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0315.tif" /></maths>

0791However, it is set to i= 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, k= 0, and 1.<br />Then, it means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [15] was generated at the time of M= 2 (F [0] the Precoding procession of -F [15] is located in a line with what kind of turn.). It is good in the procession of F [0] - F [15] being a procession different, respectively. . And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number 16i, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number 16i+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number 16 i+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., 14, 15). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly)<br />When the above is summarized, it refers to a formula (82) - a formula (85), and denotes the Precoding procession of cycle N by a following formula.

0792<maths num="313"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0316.tif" /></maths>

0793Since the cycle is N at this time, it is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1). And the Precoding procession of periodic NxM based on a formula (265) is denoted by a following formula.

0794<maths num="314"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0317.tif" /></maths>

0795It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />then, it means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [NxM-1] was generated (the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [NxM-1] -- periodic NxM -- it may be used, ranking with what kind of turn.) And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number NxMxi, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number NxMxi+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number NxMxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., NxM-2, NxM-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly)<br />Thus, if a Precoding procession is generated, how to change a Precoding procession with a large cycle can be realized, the position of a receiving inferior point can be changed easily, and this may lead to improvement in the receiving quality of data. Although the Precoding procession of periodic NxM was carried out as [ be / it / a formula (266) ], the Precoding procession of periodic NxM may be carried out like a following formula as mentioned above.

0796<maths num="315"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0318.tif" /></maths>

0797It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />In a formula (265) and a formula (266), when it is considered as zero rad &lt;=delta&lt;2pi Radian, it becomes a unitary matrix at the time of delta=pi Radian, and becomes a non-unitary matrix at the time of delta!=pi Radian. In this method, the time of the non-unitary matrix of pi/2 rad &lt;=|delta|&lt;pi Radian may be characteristic composition (about the conditions of delta, it is the same also at the time of other embodiments.), and although the receiving quality of good data will be obtained, it may be a unitary matrix.

0798It is although the case where it sets to lambda= 0 rad as an example of the Precoding procession at the time of treating lambda as a fixed value is mentioned as an example and this embodiment explains it, When mapping of a modulation method is taken into consideration, they are lambda=pi/2rad, and lambda=pi Radian, It may set to a value fixed at either lambda = (3 pi) / 2 rad (for example, in the Precoding procession of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, it is considered as lambda=pi Radian.). Reduction of circuit scales can be aimed at like the case where this sets to lambda= 0 rad.<br />(Embodiment 18)<br />This embodiment describes how to change regularly the Precoding procession using the unitary matrix based on Embodiment 9.<br />In the way cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly as Embodiment 8 described, the Precoding procession modeled after a formula (82) - a formula (85) prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula.

0799<maths num="316"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0319.tif" /></maths>

0800It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. (It shall be alpha&gt; 0) At this embodiment, since a unitary matrix is treated, the Precoding procession of a formula (268) can be denoted by a following formula.

0801<maths num="317"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0320.tif" /></maths>

0802It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. (It shall be alpha&gt; 0) At this time, the following conditions become important from conditions 5 of (several 106) of Embodiment 3, and conditions 6 of (several 107), in order to obtain the receiving quality of good data.

0803<maths num="318"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0321.tif" /></maths>

0804<maths num="319"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0322.tif" /></maths>

0805When Embodiment 6 explained, the distance between receiving inferior points was described, but in order to enlarge distance between receiving inferior points, cycle N becomes important [ that the number is odd / three or more ]. Below, this point is explained.<br />In order to arrange a receiving inferior point so that it may become uniform distribution to a phase on a complex plane as Embodiment 6 explained, &lt;conditions 55&gt; or &lt;conditions 56&gt; are given.<br />

0806<maths num="320"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0323.tif" /></maths>

0807<maths num="321"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0324.tif" /></maths>

0808And theta_１１(0) -theta_２１(0) When it is considered as =0 rad and referred to as alpha&lt; 1, the arrangement on the complex plane of the receiving inferior point of s1 at the time of cycle N= 3 and the receiving inferior point of s2 is shown in Drawing 43 (a), and the arrangement on the complex plane of the receiving inferior point of s1 at the time of cycle N= 4 and the receiving inferior point of s2 is shown in Drawing 43 (b). theta_１１(0) -theta_２１(0) When it is considered as =0 rad and referred to as alpha&gt; 1, the arrangement on the complex plane of the receiving inferior point of s1 at the time of cycle N= 3 and the receiving inferior point of s2 is shown in Drawing 44 (a), and the arrangement on the complex plane of the receiving inferior point of s1 at the time of cycle N= 4 and the receiving inferior point of s2 is shown in Drawing 44 (b).

0809In the line segment formed at a receiving inferior point and the starting point at this time, and the axis of Real, the case where the phase (refer to Drawing 43 (a).) formed by the half line of Real&gt;=0 is considered -- alpha&gt; 1 and alpha&lt; 1 -- the case where the above-mentioned phase in the receiving inferior point about the above-mentioned phase in the receiving inferior point about s1 and s2 serves as the same value certainly occurs also about which case at the time of N= 4. (4301 of Drawing 43, 4302, 4401 of Drawing 44, 4402 references) At this time, the distance between receiving inferior points becomes small in a complex plane. On the other hand, at the time of N= 3, when the above-mentioned phase in the receiving inferior point about the above-mentioned phase in the receiving inferior point about s1 and s2 serves as the same value, it does not generate.

0810As mentioned above, if it takes into consideration that the case where the above-mentioned phase in the receiving inferior point about the above-mentioned phase in the receiving inferior point about s1 and s2 serves as the same value certainly occurs when the number of cycles N is even, the way in case the number of cycles N is odd, As compared with the time of the number of cycles N being even, a possibility that the distance between receiving inferior points will become large is high in a complex plane. However, when cycle N is a small value (N&lt;=16 or less [ for example, ]), since the shortest distance of the receiving inferior point in a complex plane has little number in which a receiving inferior point exists, it can secure a certain amount of length. Therefore, in the case of N&lt;=16, even if the number is even, the receiving quality of data may be securable.

0811Therefore, in the method based on a formula (269) which changes a Precoding procession regularly, when cycle N is made into odd number, its a possibility that the receiving quality of data can be raised is high. It means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [N-1] was generated based on the formula (269) (F [0] the Precoding procession of -F [N-1] may use it, ranking with what kind of turn to cycle N.). And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number nickel, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number nickel+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number Nxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly) The modulation method of s1 and s2 is alpha again at both the times of 16QAM.

0812<maths num="322"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0325.tif" /></maths>

0813If it carries out, the effect that the shortest distance between the 16x16=256 piece signal points in IQ plane can be enlarged in a certain specific LOS environment may be able to be acquired.<br />Drawing 94 shows the example of signal point arrangement of 16QAM in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane. Signal point 9400 of Drawing 94 is = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (1, 0, 0, 0), when the bit (input bit) which transmits is set to b0-b3 (this value). It is the value indicated in Drawing 94. Coordinates [ in / it is a signal point at the time and / a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane ], It is (-3xg, 3xg) and can read in Drawing 94 the coordinates in the relation between the bit which transmits also about signal points other than signal point 9400, and a signal point, and the said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane of a signal point.

0814Drawing 95 shows the example of signal point arrangement of QPSK in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane. Signal point 9500 of Drawing 95 is = (b0, b1) (1, 0), when the bit (input bit) which transmits is set to b0 and b1 (this value). It is the value indicated in Drawing 95. Coordinates [ in / it is a signal point at the time and / a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane ], It is (-1xh, 1xh) and can read in Drawing 95 the coordinates in the relation between the bit which transmits also about signal points other than signal point 9500, and a signal point, and the said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane of a signal point.<br /><br />It is alpha, when the modulation method of s1 is considered as QPSK abnormal conditions and the modulation method of s2 is made into 16QAM.

0815<maths num="323"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0326.tif" /></maths>

0816If it carries out, the effect that the shortest distance between the candidate signal points in IQ plane can be enlarged in a certain specific LOS environment may be able to be acquired.<br />The signal point arrangement in the I-Q plane of 16QAM is as in Drawing 94, and the signal point arrangement in the I-Q plane of QPSK is as in Drawing 95. And g of Drawing 94,

0817<maths num="324"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0327.tif" /></maths>

0818If it carries out, it is h of Drawing 94,

0819<maths num="325"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0328.tif" /></maths>

0820It becomes.<br />As an example of a Precoding procession based on the formula (269) prepared for cycle N, when referred to as N= 5, the following processions can be considered.

0821<maths num="326"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0329.tif" /></maths>

0822<maths num="327"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0330.tif" /></maths>

0823<maths num="328"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0331.tif" /></maths>

0824<maths num="329"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0332.tif" /></maths>

0825<maths num="330"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0333.tif" /></maths>

0826Thus, in order to lessen the operation scale by the above-mentioned Precoding of a sending set, in a formula (269), it is good to set it as theta11(i)=0 rad and lambda= 0 rad. However, in a formula (269), lambda may be good also as a value which changes with i, and may be the same value. That is, in a formula (269), lambda (x!=y) in lambda and F [i=y] in F [i=x] may be the same value, and may be a different value.<br />Although it becomes an effective value whose preset value described by Above is one as a preset value of alpha, it is not what was restricted to this, and as Embodiment 17 described, alpha may be set up for every value of i of procession F[i], for example. (It is got blocked and alpha in F[i] does not always have to be taken as a steady value in i.)<br />This embodiment explained the constitution method of N different Precoding processions for the Precoding hopping method of time period N. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] will be prepared as N different Precoding processions at this time, Although it will arrange in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] in the direction of a time-axis (or it is also possible to arrange on a frequency axis in the case of multicareer) at the time of a single career transmission method, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply N different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of cycle N, Even if it uses N different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use N different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

0827In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H is taken as a bigger natural number than cycle N of the method which changes a Precoding procession to the above-mentioned rule target), If N different Precoding processions in this embodiment are included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high. At this time, &lt;condition #55 &lt;condition #56&gt;&gt; can be transposed to the following conditions. (A cycle is considered as N.)

0828<maths num="331"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0334.tif" /></maths>

0829<maths num="332"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0335.tif" /></maths>

0830It is although the case where it sets to lambda= 0 rad as an example of the Precoding procession at the time of treating lambda as a fixed value is mentioned as an example and this embodiment explains it, When mapping of a modulation method is taken into consideration, they are lambda=pi/2rad, and lambda=pi Radian, It may set to a value fixed at either lambda = (3 pi) / 2 rad (for example, in the Precoding procession of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, it is considered as lambda=pi Radian.). Reduction of circuit scales can be aimed at like the case where this sets to lambda= 0 rad.<br />(Embodiment 19)<br />This embodiment describes how to change regularly the Precoding procession using the unitary matrix based on Embodiment 10.<br />In the method of cycle 2N which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle 2N is denoted by a following formula.

0831<maths num="333"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0336.tif" /></maths>

0832<maths num="334"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0337.tif" /></maths>

0833At this time, the following conditions become important from conditions 5 of (several 106) of Embodiment 3, and conditions 6 of (several 107), in order to obtain the receiving quality of good data.

0834<maths num="335"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0338.tif" /></maths>

0835<maths num="336"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0339.tif" /></maths>

0836And it considers adding the following conditions.

0837<maths num="337"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0340.tif" /></maths>

0838Next, in order to arrange a receiving inferior point so that it may become uniform distribution to a phase on a complex plane as Embodiment 6 explained, &lt;condition #60&gt; or &lt;condition #61&gt; are given.

0839<maths num="338"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0341.tif" /></maths>

0840<maths num="339"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0342.tif" /></maths>

0841And theta_１１(0) -theta_２１(0) When it is considered as =0 rad and referred to as alpha&gt; 1, the arrangement on the complex plane of the receiving inferior point of s1 at the time of N= 4 and the receiving inferior point of s2 is shown in Drawing 43 (a) and (b). As shown in Drawing 43 (a) and (b), in the complex plane, the shortest distance of the receiving inferior point of s1 can be kept large, and the shortest distance of the receiving inferior point of s2 can be similarly kept large. And it will be in the state same also at the time of alpha&lt; 1. When it is considered Embodiment 9 the same way, as compared with the time of the number of N being [ the way in case the number of N is odd ] even, a possibility that the distance between receiving inferior points will become large is high in a complex plane. However, when N is a small value (N&lt;=16 or less [ for example, ]), since the shortest distance of the receiving inferior point in a complex plane has little number in which a receiving inferior point exists, it can secure a certain amount of length. Therefore, in the case of N&lt;=16, even if the number is even, the receiving quality of data may be securable.

0842Therefore, in a formula (279) and the method based on (280) which changes a Precoding procession regularly, when N is made into odd number, its a possibility that the receiving quality of data can be raised is high. It means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [2N-1] was generated based on a formula (279) and (280) (F [0] the Precoding procession of -F [2N-1] may use it, ranking with what kind of turn to cycle 2N.). And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number 2nickel, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number 2nickel+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number 2 Nxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly) If the modulation method of s1 and s2 makes alpha a formula (270) again at both the times of 16QAM, The effect that the shortest distance between the 16x16=256 piece signal points in IQ plane can be enlarged in a certain specific LOS environment may be able to be acquired.<br />And if alpha is made into a formula (271) when the modulation method of s1 is considered as QPSK abnormal conditions and the modulation method of s2 is made into 16QAM, the effect that the shortest distance between the candidate signal points in IQ plane can be enlarged in a certain specific LOS environment may be able to be acquired.<br />The signal point arrangement in the I-Q plane of 16QAM is as in Drawing 60, and the signal point arrangement in the I-Q plane of QPSK is as in Drawing 94. And if g of Drawing 60 considers it as a formula (272), h of Drawing 94 will become a formula (273).

0843The following conditions are considered as different conditions from &lt;condition #59&gt;.

0844<maths num="340"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0343.tif" /></maths>

0845<maths num="341"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0344.tif" /></maths>

0846At this time, it is filling &lt;condition #57&gt;, &lt;condition #58&gt;, &lt;condition #62&gt;, and &lt;condition #63&gt;, Since distance of the receiving inferior point of s2 comrades can be greatly enlarged for the distance of the receiving inferior point of s1 comrades in a complex plane, the receiving quality of good data can be obtained.<br />As an example of a Precoding procession based on the formula (279) prepared for cycle 2N, and a formula (280), when referred to as N= 15, the following processions can be considered.

0847<maths num="342"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0345.tif" /></maths>

0848<maths num="343"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0346.tif" /></maths>

0849<maths num="344"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0347.tif" /></maths>

0850<maths num="345"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0348.tif" /></maths>

0851<maths num="346"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0349.tif" /></maths>

0852<maths num="347"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0350.tif" /></maths>

0853<maths num="348"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0351.tif" /></maths>

0854<maths num="349"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0352.tif" /></maths>

0855<maths num="350"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0353.tif" /></maths>

0856<maths num="351"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0354.tif" /></maths>

0857<maths num="352"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0355.tif" /></maths>

0858<maths num="353"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0356.tif" /></maths>

0859<maths num="354"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0357.tif" /></maths>

0860<maths num="355"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0358.tif" /></maths>

0861<maths num="356"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0359.tif" /></maths>

0862<maths num="357"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0360.tif" /></maths>

0863<maths num="358"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0361.tif" /></maths>

0864<maths num="359"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0362.tif" /></maths>

0865<maths num="360"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0363.tif" /></maths>

0866<maths num="361"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0364.tif" /></maths>

0867<maths num="362"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0365.tif" /></maths>

0868<maths num="363"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0366.tif" /></maths>

0869<maths num="364"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0367.tif" /></maths>

0870<maths num="365"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0368.tif" /></maths>

0871<maths num="366"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0369.tif" /></maths>

0872<maths num="367"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0370.tif" /></maths>

0873<maths num="368"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0371.tif" /></maths>

0874<maths num="369"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0372.tif" /></maths>

0875<maths num="370"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0373.tif" /></maths>

0876<maths num="371"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0374.tif" /></maths>

0877Thus, it is [ in / in order to lessen the operation scale by the above-mentioned Precoding of a sending set / a formula (279) ] theta._１１(i)= setting it as zero rad and lambda= 0 rad, and setting at a ceremony (280) -- theta_２１(i)= it is good to set it as zero rad and lambda= 0 rad.<br />However, in a formula (279) and a formula (280), lambda may be good also as a value which changes with i, and may be the same value. That is, in a formula (279) and a formula (280), lambda (x!=y) in lambda and F [i=y] in F [i=x] may be the same value, and may be a different value. In a formula (279), it is good as another method also as a value which considers it as the value of fixation of lambda, and considers it as the value of fixation of lambda in a formula (280), and is different in the value of fixed lambda in a formula (279), and the value of fixed lambda in a formula (280). (How to make it into the value of fixed lambda in a formula (279) and the value of fixed lambda in a formula (280) as another technique may be used.)<br />Although it becomes an effective value whose preset value described by Above is one as a preset value of alpha, it is not what was restricted to this, and as Embodiment 17 described, alpha may be set up for every value of i of procession F[i], for example. (It is got blocked and alpha in F[i] does not always have to be taken as a steady value in i.)<br />This embodiment explained the constitution method of a 2N piece different Precoding procession for the Precoding hopping method of time period 2N. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] will be prepared as a 2N piece different Precoding procession at this time, Although it will arrange in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] in the direction of a time-axis (or it is also possible to arrange on a frequency axis in the case of multicareer) at the time of a single career transmission method, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply 2N piece different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of cycle 2N, Even if it uses 2N piece different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use 2N piece different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

0878In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H is taken as a bigger natural number than cycle 2N of the method which changes a Precoding procession to the above-mentioned rule target), If a 2N piece [ in this embodiment ] different Precoding procession is included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high.<br />It is although the case where it sets to lambda= 0 rad as an example of the Precoding procession at the time of treating lambda as a fixed value is mentioned as an example and this embodiment explains it, When mapping of a modulation method is taken into consideration, they are lambda=pi/2rad, and lambda=pi Radian, It may set to a value fixed at either lambda = (3 pi) / 2 rad (for example, in the Precoding procession of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, it is considered as lambda=pi Radian.). Reduction of circuit scales can be aimed at like the case where this sets to lambda= 0 rad.<br />(Embodiment 20)<br />This embodiment describes how to change regularly the Precoding procession using the unitary matrix based on Embodiment 13.<br />In the method of cycle 2N which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle 2N is denoted by a following formula.

0879<maths num="372"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0375.tif" /></maths>

0880It shall be alpha&gt; 0 and shall be a fixed (not based on i) value.<br />

0881<maths num="373"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0376.tif" /></maths>

0882It shall be alpha&gt; 0 and shall be a fixed (not based on i) value. (It may be alpha&lt; 0.)<br />And the Precoding procession of periodic 2xNxM based on a formula (311) and a formula (312) is denoted by a following formula.

0883<maths num="374"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0377.tif" /></maths>

0884It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.

0885<maths num="375"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0378.tif" /></maths>

0886It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time. It may be Xk=Yk and may be Xk!=Yk.<br />then, it means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [2xNxM-1] was generated (the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [2xNxM-1] -- periodic 2xNxM -- it may be used, ranking with what kind of turn.) And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number 2xNxMxi, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number 2xNxMxi+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number 2xNxMxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., 2xNxM-2, and 2xNxM-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly)<br />Thus, if a Precoding procession is generated, how to change a Precoding procession with a large cycle can be realized, the position of a receiving inferior point can be changed easily, and this may lead to improvement in the receiving quality of data.<br />The formula (313) of the Precoding procession of periodic 2xNxM may be held like a following formula.

0887<maths num="376"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0379.tif" /></maths>

0888It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />It is good also considering the formula (314) of the Precoding procession of periodic 2xNxM as either a formula (316) - a formula (318).

0889<maths num="377"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0380.tif" /></maths>

0890It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />

0891<maths num="378"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0381.tif" /></maths>

0892It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.

0893<maths num="379"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0382.tif" /></maths>

0894It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br /><br /><br />In [ if its attention is paid about a receiving inferior point / formula / (313) ] a formula (318),

0895<maths num="380"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0383.tif" /></maths>

0896(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)

0897<maths num="381"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0384.tif" /></maths>

0898(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)

0899<maths num="382"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0385.tif" /></maths>

0900If All of is filled, the receiving quality of good data can be obtained. In Embodiment 8, it is good to fill &lt;condition #39&gt; and &lt;condition #40&gt;.<br />When its attention is paid to Xk of a formula (313) to a formula (318), and *Yk,

0901<maths num="383"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0386.tif" /></maths>

0902(a is 0, 1, 2, ..., M-2, and *M*-1, and b is 0, 1, 2, ..., *M-2, and *M-1 (a and b are or more 0 integers less than or equal to M-1), and is a!=b.)<br />However, s is an integer.

0903<maths num="384"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0387.tif" /></maths>

0904(a is 0, 1, 2, ..., M-2, and *M*-1, and b is 0, 1, 2, ..., *M-2, and *M-1 (a and b are or more 0 integers less than or equal to M-1), and is a!=b.)<br />However, u is an integer.<br />If the conditions of two of are fulfilled, the receiving quality of good data can be obtained. In Embodiment 8, it is good to fulfill &lt;conditions 42&gt;.<br />In a formula (313) and a formula (318), when it is considered as zero rad &lt;=delta&lt;2pi Radian, it becomes a unitary matrix at the time of delta=pi Radian, and becomes a non-unitary matrix at the time of delta!=pi Radian. In this method, the time of the non-unitary matrix of pi/2 rad &lt;=|delta|&lt;pi Radian may be characteristic composition, and although the receiving quality of good data will be obtained, it may be a unitary matrix.

0905Next, the example of the Precoding procession in the Puri coding method in this embodiment is given. A procession when the formula (313) - formula (318) of periodic 2xNxM are set to N= 5 and M= 2 as an example of the Precoding procession on which it bases is indicated below.

0906<maths num="385"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0388.tif" /></maths>

0907<maths num="386"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0389.tif" /></maths>

0908<maths num="387"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0390.tif" /></maths>

0909<maths num="388"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0391.tif" /></maths>

0910<maths num="389"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0392.tif" /></maths>

0911<maths num="390"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0393.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0912<maths num="391"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0394.tif" /></maths>

0913<maths num="392"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0395.tif" /></maths>

0914<maths num="393"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0396.tif" /></maths>

0915<maths num="394"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0397.tif" /></maths>

0916<maths num="395"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0398.tif" /></maths>

0917<maths num="396"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0399.tif" /></maths>

0918<maths num="397"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0400.tif" /></maths>

0919<maths num="398"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0401.tif" /></maths>

0920<maths num="399"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0402.tif" /></maths>

0921<maths num="400"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0403.tif" /></maths>

0922<maths num="401"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0404.tif" /></maths>

0923<maths num="402"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0405.tif" /></maths>

0924<maths num="403"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0406.tif" /></maths>

0925<maths num="404"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0407.tif" /></maths>

0926Thus, in order to lessen the operation scale by the above-mentioned Precoding of a sending set in the above-mentioned example, In a formula (313), it set to lambda= 0 rad, delta=pi Radian, X1=0 rad, and X2=pi Radian, and has set to lambda= 0 rad, delta=pi Radian, Y1=0 rad, and Y2=pi Radian in a formula (314). However, in a formula (313) and a formula (314), lambda may be good also as a value which changes with i, and may be the same value. That is, in a formula (313) and a formula (314), lambda (x!=y) in lambda and F [i=y] in F [i=x] may be the same value, and may be a different value. In a formula (313), it is good as another method also as a value which considers it as the value of fixation of lambda, and considers it as the value of fixation of lambda in a formula (314), and is different in the value of fixed lambda in a formula (313), and the value of fixed lambda in a formula (314). (How to make it into the value of fixed lambda in a formula (313) and the value of fixed lambda in a formula (314) as another technique may be used.)<br />Although it becomes an effective value whose preset value described by Embodiment 18 is one as a preset value of alpha, it is not what was restricted to this, and as Embodiment 17 described, alpha may be set up for every value of i of procession F[i], for example. (It is got blocked and alpha in F[i] does not always have to be taken as a steady value in i.)<br />It is although the case where it sets to lambda= 0 rad as an example of the Precoding procession at the time of treating lambda as a fixed value is mentioned as an example and this embodiment explains it, When mapping of a modulation method is taken into consideration, they are lambda=pi/2rad, and lambda=pi Radian, It may set to a value fixed at either lambda = (3 pi) / 2 rad (for example, in the Precoding procession of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, it is considered as lambda=pi Radian.). Reduction of circuit scales can be aimed at like the case where this sets to lambda= 0 rad.<br />(Embodiment 21)<br />This embodiment shows the example of the Puri coding method which was described by 18 of the embodiment and which changes a Precoding procession regularly.

0927As an example of a Precoding procession based on the formula (269) prepared for cycle N, when referred to as N= 9, the following processions can be considered.

0928<maths num="405"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0408.tif" /></maths>

0929<maths num="406"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0409.tif" /></maths>

0930<maths num="407"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0410.tif" /></maths>

0931<maths num="408"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0411.tif" /></maths>

0932<maths num="409"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0412.tif" /></maths>

0933<maths num="410"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0413.tif" /></maths>

0934<maths num="411"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0414.tif" /></maths>

0935<maths num="412"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0415.tif" /></maths>

0936<maths num="413"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0416.tif" /></maths>

0937In an upper type, it may be good to set alpha to 1 especially. At this time, a formula (339) - a formula (347) are expressed as follows.

0938<maths num="414"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0417.tif" /></maths>

0939<maths num="415"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0418.tif" /></maths>

0940<maths num="416"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0419.tif" /></maths>

0941<maths num="417"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0420.tif" /></maths>

0942<maths num="418"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0421.tif" /></maths>

0943<maths num="419"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0422.tif" /></maths>

0944<maths num="420"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0423.tif" /></maths>

0945<maths num="421"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0424.tif" /></maths>

0946<maths num="422"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0425.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

0947As another example, as an example of a Precoding procession based on the formula (269) prepared for cycle N, when referred to as N= 15, the following processions can be considered.

0948<maths num="423"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0426.tif" /></maths>

0949<maths num="424"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0427.tif" /></maths>

0950<maths num="425"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0428.tif" /></maths>

0951<maths num="426"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0429.tif" /></maths>

0952<maths num="427"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0430.tif" /></maths>

0953<maths num="428"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0431.tif" /></maths>

0954<maths num="429"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0432.tif" /></maths>

0955<maths num="430"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0433.tif" /></maths>

0956<maths num="431"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0434.tif" /></maths>

0957<maths num="432"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0435.tif" /></maths>

0958<maths num="433"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0436.tif" /></maths>

0959<maths num="434"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0437.tif" /></maths>

0960<maths num="435"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0438.tif" /></maths>

0961<maths num="436"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0439.tif" /></maths>

0962<maths num="437"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0440.tif" /></maths>

0963In an upper type, it may be good to set alpha to 1 especially. At this time, a formula (357) - a formula (371) are expressed as follows.

0964<maths num="438"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0441.tif" /></maths>

0965<maths num="439"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0442.tif" /></maths>

0966<maths num="440"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0443.tif" /></maths>

0967<maths num="441"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0444.tif" /></maths>

0968<maths num="442"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0445.tif" /></maths>

0969<maths num="443"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0446.tif" /></maths>

0970<maths num="444"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0447.tif" /></maths>

0971<maths num="445"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0448.tif" /></maths>

0972<maths num="446"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0449.tif" /></maths>

0973<maths num="447"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0450.tif" /></maths>

0974<maths num="448"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0451.tif" /></maths>

0975<maths num="449"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0452.tif" /></maths>

0976<maths num="450"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0453.tif" /></maths>

0977<maths num="451"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0454.tif" /></maths>

0978<maths num="452"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0455.tif" /></maths>

0979As a preset value of alpha, as an example, although set to 1, it is not what was restricted to this here. As one example of application of the preset value of alpha, to the data to transmit, as the figure 3 grade showed, error correcting code-ization is performed by the coding part. The value of alpha may be changed with the code rate of the error correcting code used by error correcting code-ization. For example, alpha is set to 1 at the time of code rates 1/2, and how to set alpha to alpha&gt; 1 (or alpha&lt; 1) for a code rate, for example except one at the time of two thirds can be considered. By doing in this way, the receiving quality of good data may be able to be obtained also in which code rate in a receiving set. (The receiving quality of data good also as fixation may be obtained in alpha.)<br />As another example, as Embodiment 17 described, alpha may be set up for every value of i of procession F[i]. (It is got blocked and alpha in F[i] does not always have to be taken as a steady value in i.)<br />This embodiment explained the constitution method of N different Precoding processions for the Precoding hopping method of time period N. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] will be prepared as N different Precoding processions at this time, Although it will arrange in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] in the direction of a time-axis (or it is also possible to arrange on a frequency axis in the case of multicareer) at the time of a single career transmission method, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply N different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of cycle N, Even if it uses N different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use N different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.<br />(Embodiment 22)<br />This embodiment shows the example of the Puri coding method which was described by 19 of the embodiment and which changes a Precoding procession regularly.

0980As an example of a Precoding procession based on the formula (279) prepared for cycle 2N, and a formula (280), when referred to as N= 9, the following processions can be considered.

0981<maths num="453"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0456.tif" /></maths>

0982<maths num="454"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0457.tif" /></maths>

0983<maths num="455"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0458.tif" /></maths>

0984<maths num="456"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0459.tif" /></maths>

0985<maths num="457"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0460.tif" /></maths>

0986<maths num="458"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0461.tif" /></maths>

0987<maths num="459"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0462.tif" /></maths>

0988<maths num="460"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0463.tif" /></maths>

0989<maths num="461"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0464.tif" /></maths>

0990<maths num="462"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0465.tif" /></maths>

0991<maths num="463"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0466.tif" /></maths>

0992<maths num="464"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0467.tif" /></maths>

0993<maths num="465"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0468.tif" /></maths>

0994<maths num="466"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0469.tif" /></maths>

0995<maths num="467"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0470.tif" /></maths>

0996<maths num="468"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0471.tif" /></maths>

0997<maths num="469"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0472.tif" /></maths>

0998<maths num="470"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0473.tif" /></maths>

0999In an upper type, it may be good to set alpha to 1 especially. At this time, a formula (387) - a formula (404) are expressed as follows.

1000<maths num="471"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0474.tif" /></maths>

1001<maths num="472"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0475.tif" /></maths>

1002<maths num="473"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0476.tif" /></maths>

1003<maths num="474"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0477.tif" /></maths>

1004<maths num="475"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0478.tif" /></maths>

1005<maths num="476"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0479.tif" /></maths>

1006<maths num="477"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0480.tif" /></maths>

1007<maths num="478"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0481.tif" /></maths>

1008<maths num="479"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0482.tif" /></maths>

1009<maths num="480"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0483.tif" /></maths>

1010<maths num="481"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0484.tif" /></maths>

1011<maths num="482"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0485.tif" /></maths>

1012<maths num="483"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0486.tif" /></maths>

1013<maths num="484"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0487.tif" /></maths>

1014<maths num="485"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0488.tif" /></maths>

1015<maths num="486"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0489.tif" /></maths>

1016<maths num="487"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0490.tif" /></maths>

1017<maths num="488"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0491.tif" /></maths>

1018It is good to set alpha to 1 to the example of the formula (281) of Embodiment 19 - a formula (310). Although it becomes an effective value whose preset value described by Above is one as a preset value of another alpha, it is not what was restricted to this, and as Embodiment 17 described, alpha may be set up for every value of i of procession F[i], for example. (It is got blocked and alpha in F[i] does not always have to be taken as a steady value in i.)<br />This embodiment explained the constitution method of a 2N piece different Precoding procession for the Precoding hopping method of time period 2N. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] will be prepared as a 2N piece different Precoding procession at this time, Although it will arrange in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] in the direction of a time-axis (or it is also possible to arrange on a frequency axis in the case of multicareer) at the time of a single career transmission method, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply 2N piece different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of cycle 2N, Even if it uses 2N piece different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use 2N piece different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

1019In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H is taken as a bigger natural number than cycle 2N of the method which changes a Precoding procession to the above-mentioned rule target), If a 2N piece [ in this embodiment ] different Precoding procession is included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high.<br />(Embodiment 23)<br />Although Embodiment 9 explained how to change regularly the Precoding procession which used the unitary matrix, this embodiment explains how to change regularly the Precoding procession using a procession which is different in Embodiment 9.

1020First, Precoding procession F which serves as the foundation as a Precoding procession is denoted by a following formula.

1021<maths num="489"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0492.tif" /></maths>

1022In a formula (423), A, B, and C shall be the real numbers, and mu11, mu12, and mu21 shall be the real numbers, and it shall denote a unit by Radian. And in the way cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula.

1023<maths num="490"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0493.tif" /></maths>

1024It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and A, B, and C are mu._１１mu_１２mu_２１It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value. And since "0" exists in one of the elements of a Precoding procession of the receiving inferior point of having explained by other embodiments when the procession denoted by form of a formula (424) is treated as a Precoding procession, it will have the advantage that it can lessen.

1025A following formula is given as a Precoding procession used as the different foundation from a formula (423).

1026<maths num="491"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0494.tif" /></maths>

1027In a formula (425), A, B, and D are the real numbers, and it is mu._１１mu_１２mu_２２It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. And in the way cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula.

1028<maths num="492"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0495.tif" /></maths>

1029It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and A, B, and D are mu._１１mu_１２mu_２２It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value. And since "0" exists in one of the elements of a Precoding procession of the receiving inferior point of having explained by other embodiments when the procession denoted by form of a formula (426) is treated as a Precoding procession, it will have the advantage that it can lessen.

1030A following formula is given as a Precoding procession used as the different foundation from a formula (423) and a formula (425).

1031<maths num="493"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0496.tif" /></maths>

1032In a formula (427), A, C, and D are the real numbers, and it is mu._１１mu_２１mu_２２It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. And in the way cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula.

1033<maths num="494"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0497.tif" /></maths>

1034It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and A, C, and D are mu._１１mu_２１mu_２２It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value. And since "0" exists in one of the elements of a Precoding procession of the receiving inferior point of having explained by other embodiments when the procession denoted by form of a formula (428) is treated as a Precoding procession, it will have the advantage that it can lessen.

1035A following formula is given as a Precoding procession used as the different foundation from a formula (423), a formula (425), and a formula (427).

1036<maths num="495"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0498.tif" /></maths>

1037In a formula (429), B, C, and D are the real numbers, and it is mu._１２mu_２１mu_２２It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. And in the way cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula.

1038<maths num="496"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0499.tif" /></maths>

1039It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and B, C, and D are mu._１２mu_２１mu_２２It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value. And since "0" exists in one of the elements of a Precoding procession of the receiving inferior point of having explained by other embodiments when the procession denoted by form of a formula (430) is treated as a Precoding procession, it will have the advantage that it can lessen. At this time, since it may be considered conditions 5 of (several 106) of Embodiment 3, and conditions 6 of (several 107) the same way, the following conditions become important, in order to obtain the receiving quality of good data.

1040<maths num="497"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0500.tif" /></maths>

1041(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />

1042<maths num="498"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0501.tif" /></maths>

1043(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />In order to arrange a receiving inferior point so that it may become uniform distribution to a phase on a complex plane as Embodiment 6 explained, &lt;conditions 71&gt; or &lt;conditions 72&gt; are given.

1044<maths num="499"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0502.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1045<maths num="500"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0503.tif" /></maths>

1046Even if it does in this way, since a receiving inferior point is effectively avoidable, the receiving set can acquire the effect that the receiving quality of data improves, especially in the LOS environment.<br />It is theta as an example of the Puri coding method which was explained above and which changes a Precoding procession regularly._１１(i) Fix like zero rad (it is not based on i but is considered as a steady value.). At this time, even if it sets to values other than zero rad, it is good theta._１１(i) And theta_２１(i) There is the method of fulfilling the conditions explained by Above. theta_１１(i) It is theta rather than considering it as a fixed value._２１(i) Fix like zero rad (it is not based on i but is considered as a steady value.). At this time, even if it sets to values other than zero rad, it is good theta._１１(i) And theta_２１(i) There is the method of fulfilling the conditions explained by Above.

1047This embodiment explained the constitution method of N different Precoding processions for the Precoding hopping method of time period N. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] will be prepared as N different Precoding processions at this time, Although it will arrange in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] in the direction of a time-axis (or it is also possible to arrange on a frequency axis in the case of multicareer) at the time of a single career transmission method, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply N different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of cycle N, Even if it uses N different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use N different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

1048In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H is taken as a bigger natural number than cycle N of the method which changes a Precoding procession to the above-mentioned rule target), If N different Precoding processions in this embodiment are included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high. At this time, &lt;condition #69 &lt;condition #70&gt;&gt; can be transposed to the following conditions. (A cycle is considered as N.)

1049<maths num="501"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0504.tif" /></maths>

1050(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />

1051<maths num="502"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0505.tif" /></maths>

1052(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />(Embodiment 24)<br />Although Embodiment 10 explained how to change regularly the Precoding procession which used the unitary matrix, this embodiment explains how to change regularly the Precoding procession using a procession which is different in Embodiment 10.<br />In the method of cycle 2N which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle 2N is denoted by a following formula.

1053<maths num="503"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0506.tif" /></maths>

1054At this time, A, B, and C are the real numbers, and mu._１１mu_１２mu_２１It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and A, B, and C are mu._１１mu_１２mu_２１It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value.

1055<maths num="504"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0507.tif" /></maths>

1056At this time, alpha, beta, and delta are the real numbers, and nu._１１nu_１２nu_２２It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and alpha, beta, and delta are nu._１１nu_１２nu_２２It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value.<br /><br />A formula (431) and a formula (432) express with a following formula the Precoding procession prepared for different cycle 2N.

1057<maths num="505"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0508.tif" /></maths>

1058At this time, A, B, and C are the real numbers, and mu._１１mu_１２mu_２１It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and A, B, and C are mu._１１mu_１２mu_２１It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value.

1059<maths num="506"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0509.tif" /></maths>

1060At this time, beta, gamma, and delta are the real numbers, and nu._１２nu_２１nu_２２It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and beta, gamma, and delta are nu._１２nu_２１nu_２２It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value.<br /><br />The Precoding procession prepared for another cycle 2N is expressed in a following formula as these.<br />

1061<maths num="507"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0510.tif" /></maths>

1062At this time, A, C, and D are the real numbers, and mu._１１mu_２１mu_２２It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and A, C, and D are mu._１１mu_２１mu_２２It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value.

1063<maths num="508"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0511.tif" /></maths>

1064At this time, alpha, beta, and delta are the real numbers, and nu._１１nu_１２nu_２２It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and alpha, beta, and delta are nu._１１nu_１２nu_２２It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value.<br /><br />The Precoding procession prepared for another cycle 2N is expressed in a following formula as these.<br />

1065<maths num="509"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0512.tif" /></maths>

1066At this time, A, C, and D are the real numbers, and mu._１１mu_２１mu_２２It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and A, C, and D are mu._１１mu_２１mu_２２It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value.

1067<maths num="510"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0513.tif" /></maths>

1068At this time, beta, gamma, and delta are the real numbers, and nu._１２nu_２１nu_２２It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and beta, gamma, and delta are nu._１２nu_２１nu_２２It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value.<br /><br />At this time, if it is considered conditions 5 of (several 106) of Embodiment 3, and conditions 6 of (several 107) the same way, the following conditions will become important, in order to obtain the receiving quality of good data.

1069<maths num="511"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0514.tif" /></maths>

1070(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />

1071<maths num="512"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0515.tif" /></maths>

1072(x is N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1, and y is N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1 (as for x and y, more than N is the integers not more than 2N-1), and is x!=y.)<br /><br />Next, in order to arrange a receiving inferior point so that it may become uniform distribution to a phase on a complex plane as Embodiment 6 explained, &lt;condition #77&gt; or &lt;condition #78&gt; are given.

1073<maths num="513"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0516.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1074<maths num="514"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0517.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1075In order similarly to arrange a receiving inferior point so that it may become uniform distribution to a phase on a complex plane, &lt;condition #79&gt; or &lt;condition #80&gt; are given.

1076<maths num="515"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0518.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1077<maths num="516"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0519.tif" /></maths>

1078Since "0" exists in one of the elements of a Precoding procession of the receiving inferior point of having explained by other embodiments, by making it above, Since it will have the advantage that it can lessen and the receiving set can avoid a receiving inferior point effectively especially in the LOS environment, the effect that the receiving quality of data improves can be acquired.<br />It is theta as an example of the Puri coding method which was explained above and which changes a Precoding procession regularly._１１(i) Fix like zero rad (it is not based on i but is considered as a steady value.). At this time, even if it sets to values other than zero rad, it is good theta._１１(i) And theta_２１(i) There is the method of fulfilling the conditions explained by Above. theta_１１(i) It is theta rather than considering it as a fixed value._２１(i) Fix like zero rad (it is not based on i but is considered as a steady value.). At this time, even if it sets to values other than zero rad, it is good theta._１１(i) And theta_２１(i) There is the method of fulfilling the conditions explained by Above.<br />Similarly, it is psi._１１(i) Fix like zero rad (it is not based on i but is considered as a steady value.). At this time, even if it sets to values other than zero rad, it is good psi._１１(i) And psi_２１(i) There is the method of fulfilling the conditions explained by Above. psi_１１(i) It is psi rather than considering it as a fixed value._２１(i) Fix like zero rad (it is not based on i but is considered as a steady value.). At this time, even if it sets to values other than zero rad, it is good psi._１１(i) And psi_２１(i) There is the method of fulfilling the conditions explained by Above.

1079This embodiment explained the constitution method of a 2N piece different Precoding procession for the Precoding hopping method of time period 2N. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] will be prepared as a 2N piece different Precoding procession at this time, Although it will arrange in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] in the direction of a time-axis (or it is also possible to arrange on a frequency axis in the case of multicareer) at the time of a single career transmission method, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply 2N piece different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of cycle 2N, Even if it uses 2N piece different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use 2N piece different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

1080In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H is taken as a bigger natural number than cycle 2N of the method which changes a Precoding procession to the above-mentioned rule target), If a 2N piece [ in this embodiment ] different Precoding procession is included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high.<br />(Embodiment 25)<br />By this embodiment, to the Precoding procession of Embodiment 23, Embodiment 17 is applied and how to enlarge the cycle about the change of a Precoding procession is explained.<br />In the way cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula from Embodiment 23.

1081<maths num="517"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0520.tif" /></maths>

1082It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. A, B, and C are not based on i, but are a fixed value, and mu11, mu12, and mu21 are not based on i, but it is a fixed value. And the Precoding procession of periodic NxM based on a formula (439) is denoted by a following formula.

1083<maths num="518"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0521.tif" /></maths>

1084It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time. then, it means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [NxM-1] was generated (the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [NxM-1] -- periodic NxM -- it may be used, ranking with what kind of turn.) And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number NxMxi, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number NxMxi+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number NxMxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., NxM-2, NxM-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly)<br />Thus, if a Precoding procession is generated, how to change a Precoding procession with a large cycle can be realized, the position of a receiving inferior point can be changed easily, and this may lead to improvement in the receiving quality of data. Although the Precoding procession of periodic NxM was carried out as [ be / it / a formula (440) ], the Precoding procession of periodic NxM may be carried out like a following formula as mentioned above.

1085<maths num="519"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0522.tif" /></maths>

1086It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />The Precoding procession prepared for cycle N for the way cycle N different from the above changes a Precoding procession regularly is denoted by a following formula from Embodiment 23.

1087<maths num="520"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0523.tif" /></maths>

1088It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and A, B, and D are mu._１１mu_１２mu_２２It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value. And the Precoding procession of periodic NxM based on a formula (441) is denoted by a following formula.

1089<maths num="521"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0524.tif" /></maths>

1090It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />then, it means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [NxM-1] was generated (the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [NxM-1] -- periodic NxM -- it may be used, ranking with what kind of turn.) And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number NxMxi, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number NxMxi+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number NxMxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., NxM-2, NxM-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly)<br />Thus, if a Precoding procession is generated, how to change a Precoding procession with a large cycle can be realized, the position of a receiving inferior point can be changed easily, and this may lead to improvement in the receiving quality of data. Although the Precoding procession of periodic NxM was carried out as [ be / it / a formula (443) ], the Precoding procession of periodic NxM may be carried out like a following formula as mentioned above.

1091<maths num="522"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0525.tif" /></maths>

1092It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />The Precoding procession prepared for cycle N for the way cycle N different from the above changes a Precoding procession regularly is denoted by a following formula from Embodiment 23.

1093<maths num="523"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0526.tif" /></maths>

1094It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and A, C, and D are mu._１１mu_２１mu_２２It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value. And the Precoding procession of periodic NxM based on a formula (445) is denoted by a following formula.

1095<maths num="524"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0527.tif" /></maths>

1096It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />then, it means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [NxM-1] was generated (the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [NxM-1] -- periodic NxM -- it may be used, ranking with what kind of turn.) And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number NxMxi, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number NxMxi+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number NxMxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., NxM-2, NxM-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly)<br />Thus, if a Precoding procession is generated, how to change a Precoding procession with a large cycle can be realized, the position of a receiving inferior point can be changed easily, and this may lead to improvement in the receiving quality of data. Although the Precoding procession of periodic NxM was carried out as [ be / it / a formula (446) ], the Precoding procession of periodic NxM may be carried out like a following formula as mentioned above.

1097<maths num="525"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0528.tif" /></maths>

1098It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />The Precoding procession prepared for cycle N for the way cycle N different from the above changes a Precoding procession regularly is denoted by a following formula from Embodiment 23.

1099<maths num="526"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0529.tif" /></maths>

1100It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and B, C, and D are mu._１２mu_２１mu_２２It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value. And the Precoding procession of periodic NxM based on a formula (448) is denoted by a following formula.

1101<maths num="527"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0530.tif" /></maths>

1102It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />then, it means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [NxM-1] was generated (the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [NxM-1] -- periodic NxM -- it may be used, ranking with what kind of turn.) And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number NxMxi, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number NxMxi+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number NxMxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., NxM-2, NxM-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly)<br />Thus, if a Precoding procession is generated, how to change a Precoding procession with a large cycle can be realized, the position of a receiving inferior point can be changed easily, and this may lead to improvement in the receiving quality of data. Although the Precoding procession of periodic NxM was carried out as [ be / it / a formula (449) ], the Precoding procession of periodic NxM may be carried out like a following formula as mentioned above.

1103<maths num="528"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0531.tif" /></maths>

1104It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />This embodiment explained the constitution method of NxM different Precoding processions for the Precoding hopping method of time period NxM. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [NxM-2], and F [NxM-1] will be prepared as NxM different Precoding processions at this time, Although it will arrange in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [NxM-2], and F [NxM-1] in the direction of a time-axis (or it is also possible to arrange on a frequency axis in the case of multicareer) at the time of a single career transmission method, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply NxM different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [NxM-2], and F [NxM-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of periodic NxM, Even if it uses NxM different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use NxM different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

1105In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (periodic NxM of the method with which H changes a Precoding procession to the above-mentioned rule target is taken as a bigger natural number), If NxM different Precoding processions in this embodiment are included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high.<br />(Embodiment 26)<br />By this embodiment, to the Precoding procession of Embodiment 24, Embodiment 20 is applied and how to enlarge the cycle about the change of a Precoding procession is explained.<br />In the method of cycle 2N which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle 2N is denoted by a following formula.

1106<maths num="529"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0532.tif" /></maths>

1107At this time, A, B, and C are the real numbers, and mu._１１mu_１２mu_２１It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and A, B, and C are mu._１１mu_１２mu_２１It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value.

1108<maths num="530"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0533.tif" /></maths>

1109At this time, alpha, beta, and delta are the real numbers, and nu._１１nu_１２nu_２２It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and alpha, beta, and delta are nu._１１nu_１２nu_２２It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value. And the Precoding procession of periodic 2xNxM based on a formula (451) and a formula (452) is denoted by a following formula.

1110<maths num="531"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0534.tif" /></maths>

1111It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.

1112<maths num="532"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0535.tif" /></maths>

1113It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time. It may be Xk=Yk and may be Xk!=Yk.<br />then, it means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [2xNxM-1] was generated (the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [2xNxM-1] -- periodic 2xNxM -- it may be used, ranking with what kind of turn.) And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number 2xNxMxi, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number 2xNxMxi+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number 2xNxMxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., 2xNxM-2, and 2xNxM-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly)<br />Thus, if a Precoding procession is generated, how to change a Precoding procession with a large cycle can be realized, the position of a receiving inferior point can be changed easily, and this may lead to improvement in the receiving quality of data.<br />The formula (453) of the Precoding procession of periodic 2xNxM may be held like a following formula.

1114<maths num="533"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0536.tif" /></maths>

1115It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />The formula (454) of the Precoding procession of periodic 2xNxM may be held like a following formula.

1116<maths num="534"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0537.tif" /></maths>

1117It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br /><br />Another example is indicated to be the above. In the method of cycle 2N which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle 2N is denoted by a following formula.

1118<maths num="535"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0538.tif" /></maths>

1119At this time, A, B, and C are the real numbers, and mu._１１mu_１２mu_２１It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and A, B, and C are mu._１１mu_１２mu_２１It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value.

1120<maths num="536"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0539.tif" /></maths>

1121At this time, beta, gamma, and delta are the real numbers, and nu._１２nu_２１nu_２２It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and beta, gamma, and delta are nu._１２nu_２１nu_２２It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value. And the Precoding procession of periodic 2xNxM based on a formula (457) and a formula (458) is denoted by a following formula.

1122<maths num="537"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0540.tif" /></maths>

1123It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.

1124<maths num="538"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0541.tif" /></maths>

1125It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time. It may be Xk=Yk and may be Xk!=Yk.<br />then, it means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [2xNxM-1] was generated (the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [2xNxM-1] -- periodic 2xNxM -- it may be used, ranking with what kind of turn.) And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number 2xNxMxi, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number 2xNxMxi+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number 2xNxMxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., 2xNxM-2, and 2xNxM-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly)<br />Thus, if a Precoding procession is generated, how to change a Precoding procession with a large cycle can be realized, the position of a receiving inferior point can be changed easily, and this may lead to improvement in the receiving quality of data.<br />The formula (459) of the Precoding procession of periodic 2xNxM may be held like a following formula.

1126<maths num="539"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0542.tif" /></maths>

1127It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />The formula (460) of the Precoding procession of periodic 2xNxM may be held like a following formula.

1128<maths num="540"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0543.tif" /></maths>

1129It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br /><br />Another example is indicated to be the above. In the method of cycle 2N which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle 2N is denoted by a following formula.

1130<maths num="541"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0544.tif" /></maths>

1131At this time, A, C, and D are the real numbers, and mu._１１mu_２１mu_２２It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and A, C, and D are mu._１１mu_２１mu_２２It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value.

1132<maths num="542"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0545.tif" /></maths>

1133At this time, alpha, beta, and delta are the real numbers, and nu._１１nu_１２nu_２２It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and alpha, beta, and delta are nu._１１nu_１２nu_２２It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value. And the Precoding procession of periodic 2xNxM based on a formula (463) and a formula (464) is denoted by a following formula.

1134<maths num="543"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0546.tif" /></maths>

1135It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.

1136<maths num="544"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0547.tif" /></maths>

1137It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time. It may be Xk=Yk and may be Xk!=Yk.<br />then, it means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [2xNxM-1] was generated (the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [2xNxM-1] -- periodic 2xNxM -- it may be used, ranking with what kind of turn.) And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number 2xNxMxi, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number 2xNxMxi+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number 2xNxMxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., 2xNxM-2, and 2xNxM-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly)<br />Thus, if a Precoding procession is generated, how to change a Precoding procession with a large cycle can be realized, the position of a receiving inferior point can be changed easily, and this may lead to improvement in the receiving quality of data.<br />The formula (465) of the Precoding procession of periodic 2xNxM may be held like a following formula.

1138<maths num="545"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0548.tif" /></maths>

1139It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />The formula (466) of the Precoding procession of periodic 2xNxM may be held like a following formula.

1140<maths num="546"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0549.tif" /></maths>

1141It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br /><br />Another example is indicated to be the above. In the method of cycle 2N which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle 2N is denoted by a following formula.

1142<maths num="547"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0550.tif" /></maths>

1143At this time, A, C, and D are the real numbers, and mu._１１mu_２１mu_２２It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and A, C, and D are mu._１１mu_２１mu_２２It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value.

1144<maths num="548"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0551.tif" /></maths>

1145At this time, beta, gamma, and delta are the real numbers, and nu._１２nu_２１nu_２２It shall be Is a real number and shall denote a unit by Radian. It is not based on i, but is a fixed value, and beta, gamma, and delta are nu._１２nu_２１nu_２２It is not based on Is and i but is a fixed value. And the Precoding procession of periodic 2xNxM based on a formula (469) and a formula (470) is denoted by a following formula.

1146<maths num="549"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0552.tif" /></maths>

1147It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.

1148<maths num="550"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0553.tif" /></maths>

1149It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time. It may be Xk=Yk and may be Xk!=Yk.<br />then, it means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [2xNxM-1] was generated (the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [2xNxM-1] -- periodic 2xNxM -- it may be used, ranking with what kind of turn.) And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number 2xNxMxi, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number 2xNxMxi+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number 2xNxMxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., 2xNxM-2, and 2xNxM-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly)<br />Thus, if a Precoding procession is generated, how to change a Precoding procession with a large cycle can be realized, the position of a receiving inferior point can be changed easily, and this may lead to improvement in the receiving quality of data.<br />The formula (471) of the Precoding procession of periodic 2xNxM may be held like a following formula.

1150<maths num="551"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0554.tif" /></maths>

1151It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br />The formula (472) of the Precoding procession of periodic 2xNxM may be held like a following formula.

1152<maths num="552"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0555.tif" /></maths>

1153It is set to k= 0, 1, ..., M-2, and M-1 (k is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to M-1) at this time.<br /><br />In an above-mentioned example, if its attention is paid about a receiving inferior point, the following conditions will become important.

1154<maths num="553"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0556.tif" /></maths>

1155(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />

1156<maths num="554"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0557.tif" /></maths>

1157(x is N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1, and y is N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1 (as for x and y, more than N is the integers not more than 2N-1), and is x!=y.)*

1158<maths num="555"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0558.tif" /></maths>

1159<maths num="556"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0559.tif" /></maths>

1160The receiving quality of Meet and good data may be able to be obtained. It is good to fulfill the following conditions. (Refer to embodiment 24)<br />

1161<maths num="557"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0560.tif" /></maths>

1162(x is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1, and y is 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (x and y are or more 0 integers less than or equal to N-1), and is x!=y.)<br />

1163<maths num="558"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0561.tif" /></maths>

1164(x is N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1, and y is N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1 (as for x and y, more than N is the integers not more than 2N-1), and is x!=y.)<br /><br />When its attention is paid to Xk and *Yk,

1165<maths num="559"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0562.tif" /></maths>

1166(a is 0, 1, 2, ..., M-2, and *M*-1, and b is 0, 1, 2, ..., *M-2, and *M-1 (a and b are or more 0 integers less than or equal to M-1), and is a!=b.)<br />However, s is an integer.

1167<maths num="560"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0563.tif" /></maths>

1168(a is 0, 1, 2, ..., M-2, and *M*-1, and b is 0, 1, 2, ..., *M-2, and *M-1 (a and b are or more 0 integers less than or equal to M-1), and is a!=b.)<br />However, u is an integer.<br />If the conditions of two of are fulfilled, the receiving quality of good data may be able to be obtained. In Embodiment 25, it is good to fulfill &lt;conditions 87&gt;.

1169This embodiment explained the constitution method of 2xNxM different Precoding processions for the Precoding hopping method of periodic 2 NxM. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2xNxM-2], and F [2xNxM-1] will be prepared as 2xNxM different Precoding processions at this time, Although it will arrange in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2xNxM-2], and F [2xNxM-1] in the direction of a time-axis (or it is also possible to arrange on a frequency axis in the case of multicareer) at the time of a single career transmission method, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply 2xNxM different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [2xNxM-2], and F [2xNxM-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of periodic 2xNxM, Even if it uses 2xNxM different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use 2xNxM different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

1170In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H is taken as a bigger natural number than periodic 2xNxM of the method which changes a Precoding procession to the above-mentioned rule target), If 2xNxM different Precoding processions in this embodiment are included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high.<br />(Embodiment A1)<br />This embodiment explains in detail how to apply the transmission method which has so far been explained and which changes a Precoding procession regularly to the communications system using DVB(DigitalVideoBroadcasting)-T2 (T:Terrestrial) standard.

1171Drawing 61 shows the outline of the frame composition of the signal which a broadcasting station transmits in DVB-T2 standard. In DVB-T2 standard, since the OFDM method is used, the frame is constituted by the time-frequency axis. Drawing 61 shows the frame composition in a time-frequency axis, and is a frame, P1*Signalling*data (6101), L1 Pre-Signallingdata (6102), It comprises L1*Post-Signalling*data (6103), Common*PLP (6104), PLP#1 - #N (6105_1-6105_N) (PLP:Physical*LayerPipe). (* Being here. L1)<br />Pre-Signallingdata (6102) and L1*Post-Signalling*data (6103) are called P2 symbol. Such, P1*Signalling*data (6101), L1*Pre-Signalling*data (6102), The frame which comprises L1 Post-Signallingdata (6103), Common*PLP (6104), PLP#1 - #N (6105_1-6105_N) is named T2 frame, and it has become one unit of frame composition.

1172By P1*Signalling*data (6101), a receiving set is signal detection, At the same time it is a symbol for performing a frequency synchronization (frequency offset presumption is also included), the information on the FFT (Fast*Fourier*Transform) size which can be boiled and set with a frame, The information on whether an abnormal-conditions signal is transmitted by which method of SISO(Single-InputSingle-Output)/MISO (Multiple-InputSingle-Output), etc. are transmitted. (In the case of the SISO method, in the case of the MISO method, it is how to transmit a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals, and uses space-time block numerals by the method which transmits one abnormal-conditions signal.)<br />L1*Pre-Signalling*data (6102), Information on the guard interval used with a transmitting frame, information about the method of PAPR (Peak*to*Average*Power*Ratio), The modulation method at the time of transmitting L1 Post-Signallingdata, Error correction method (FEC:*ForwardError*Correction), Information on the information on the code rate of an error correction method, the size of L1*Post-Signallingdata, and information size, The information on whether which method of the information on a pilot pattern, the information on a cell (frequency domain) peculiar number, a normal mode, and extend mode (from extend mode, a normal mode differs in the number of subcarriers used for data communications.) is used, etc. are transmitted.

1173L1*Post-Signalling*data (6103), the information about the information on the number of PLP(s), and the frequency domain to be used, and every -- the information on the peculiar number of PLP, and every -- the information on the code rate of the modulation method used for transmitting PLP, an error correction method, and an error correction method, and every -- the information on the number of blocks which PLP transmits, etc. are transmitted.<br />Common*PLP (6104), PLP#1 - #N (6105_1-6105_N) are the fields for transmitting data.<br />By the frame composition of Drawing 61, it is P1*Signalling*data (6101), Written Have L1*Pre-Signalling*data (6102), L1 Post-Signallingdata (6103), Common*PLP (6104), PLP#1 - #N (6105_1-6105_N) as transmitted by time sharing, In practice, two or more kinds of signals exist in the same time. The example is shown in Drawing 62. As shown in Drawing 62, L1*Pre-Signalling*data, L1 Post-Signallingdata, and Common*PLP may exist in the same time, or PLP#1 and PLP#2 may exist in the same time. That is, each signal uses together time sharing and frequency division, and the frame is constituted.<br />Drawing 63 shows an example of the composition of the sending set to which the transmission method which has so far been explained, and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applied to the sending set in DVB-T2 standard (for example, broadcasting station). PLP signal generating part 6302 is send data 6301 (data which is the objects for PLP) for PLP, every which considers control signal 6309 as an input and is contained in control signal 6309 -- based on information, including the information on error-correcting-code-izing of PLP, the information on a modulation method, etc., error-correcting-code-izing and mapping based on a modulation method are performed, and baseband signal (rectangular cross) 6303 of PLP is outputted.<br />P2 symbol signal generating part 6305 considers send data 6304 for P2 symbols, and control signal 6309 as an input, Based on information, including the information on the error correction of P2 symbol contained in control signal 6309, the information on a modulation method, etc., error-correcting-code-izing and mapping based on a modulation method are performed, and baseband signal (rectangular cross) 6306 of P2 symbol is outputted.<br />Control signal generating part 6308 considers send data 6307 for P1 symbols, and send data 6304 for P2 symbols as an input, Each symbol group in Drawing 61 (P1*Signalling*data (6101)) L1 Pre-Signallingdata (6102), L1*Post-Signalling*data (6103), A transmission method of Common*PLP (6104), PLP#1 - #N (6105_1-6105_N) (error correcting code) The code rate of an error correcting code, a modulation method, block length, frame composition, the selected transmission method including the transmission method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, a pilot symbol insertion method, IFFT (Inverse*Fast*Fourier*) The information on the information on PAPR reduction methods, including the information on Transform/FFT, etc., and the information on a guard interval insertion method is outputted as control signal 6309. Frame formation part 6310 considers baseband signal 6312 of PLP, baseband signal 6306 of P2 symbol, and control signal 6309 as an input, Based on the information on the frame composition included in a control signal, baseband signal (rectangular cross) 6311_1 of stream 1 which gave rearrangement in frequency and a time-axis and followed frame composition, and baseband signal (rectangular cross) 6311_2 of stream 2 are outputted.

1174Signal processing part 6312 considers baseband signal 6311_1 of stream 1, baseband signal 6311_2 of stream 2, and control signal 6309 as an input, Abnormal-conditions signal 1 (6313_1) after signal processing based on the transmission method included in control signal 6309 and abnormal-conditions signal 2 (6313_2) after signal processing are outputted. A characteristic point is a signal processing part here, when the transmission method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is chosen as a transmission method, Like Drawing 6, Drawing 22, Drawing 23, and Drawing 26, while changing a Precoding procession regularly, dignity attachment composition (Precoding) is performed and the signal after Precoding turns into abnormal-conditions signal 1 (6313_1) after signal processing, and abnormal-conditions signal 2 (6313_2) after signal processing.<br />Pilot insert portion 6314_1 is abnormal-conditions signal 1 (6313_1) after signal processing, Control signal 6309 is considered as an input, a pilot symbol is inserted in abnormal-conditions signal 1 (6313_1) after signal processing based on the information about the insertion method of the pilot symbol contained in control signal 6309, and abnormal-conditions signal 6315_1 after pilot symbol insertion is outputted.<br />Pilot insert portion 6314_2 is abnormal-conditions signal 2 (6313_2) after signal processing, Control signal 6309 is considered as an input, a pilot symbol is inserted in abnormal-conditions signal 2 (6313_2) after signal processing based on the information about the insertion method of the pilot symbol contained in control signal 6309, and abnormal-conditions signal 6315_2 after pilot symbol insertion is outputted.<br />IFFT (Inverse*Fast*Fourier*Transform) section 6316_1, Abnormal-conditions signal 6315_1 after pilot symbol insertion and control signal 6309 are considered as an input, IFFT is given based on the information on the method of IFFT contained in control signal 6309, and signal 6317_1 after IFFT is outputted.

1175IFFT part 6316_2 considers abnormal-conditions signal 6315_2 after pilot symbol insertion, and control signal 6309 as an input, gives IFFT based on the information on the method of IFFT contained in control signal 6309, and outputs signal 6317_2 after IFFT.<br />PAPR reduction part 6318_1 considers signal 6317_1 after IFFT, and control signal 6309 as an input, Based on the information about the PAPR reduction included in control signal 6309, it processes to signal 6317_1 after IFFT for PAPR reduction, and outputs signal 6319_1 after PAPR reduction to it.<br />PAPR reduction part 6318_2 considers signal 6317_2 after IFFT, and control signal 6309 as an input, Based on the information about the PAPR reduction included in control signal 6309, it processes to signal 6317_2 after IFFT for PAPR reduction, and outputs signal 6319_2 after PAPR reduction to it.<br />Guard interval insert portion 6320_1 considers signal 6319_1 after PAPR reduction, and control signal 6309 as an input, Based on the information about the insertion method of the guard interval contained in control signal 6309, a guard interval is inserted in signal 6319_1 after PAPR reduction, and signal 6321_1 after guard interval insertion is outputted.<br />Guard interval insert portion 6320_2 considers signal 6319_2 after PAPR reduction, and control signal 6309 as an input, Based on the information about the insertion method of the guard interval contained in control signal 6309, a guard interval is inserted in signal 6319_2 after PAPR reduction, and signal 6321_2 after guard interval insertion is outputted.<br />P1 symbol insert portion 6322 considers signal 6321_1 after guard interval insertion, signal 6321_2 after guard interval insertion, and send data 6307 for P1 symbols as an input, The signal of P1 symbol is generated from send data 6307 for P1 symbols, P1 symbol is added to signal 6321_1 after guard interval insertion, P1 symbol is added to signal 6323_1 after the processing for P1 symbols, and signal 6321_2 after guard interval insertion, and signal 6323_2 after the processing for P1 symbols is outputted. The signal of P1 symbol may be added to signal [ after the processing for P1 symbols ] 6323_1, and signal 6323_2 after the processing for P1 symbols both, and may be added to all or one side. When added to one side, in the section where the signal added is added, the signal of zero will exist in the signal which is not added as a baseband signal. Signal 6323_1 after the processing for P1 symbols is considered as an input, processing of frequency conversion, amplification, etc. is performed, and wireless processing section 6324_1 outputs transmitted signal 6325_1. And transmitted signal 6325_1 is outputted as an electric wave from antenna 6326_1.<br />Signal 6323_2 after the processing for P1 symbols is considered as an input, processing of frequency conversion, amplification, etc. is performed, and wireless processing section 6324_2 outputs transmitted signal 6325_2. And transmitted signal 6325_2 is outputted as an electric wave from antenna 6326_2.

1176Next, the frame composition of the transmitted signal of a broadcasting station (base station) when the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly is applied to DVB-T2 system, and the transmission method of control information (information transmitted by P1 symbol and P2 symbol) are explained in detail.<br />Drawing 64 shows an example of the frame composition in the frequency-time-axis in the case of transmitting a plurality of PLP(s) after transmitting P1 symbol, P2 symbol, and Common*PLP. In Drawing 64, subcarrier #1 - subcarrier #M are used for stream s1 in the frequency axis, and stream s2 uses subcarrier #1 - subcarrier #M in the frequency axis similarly. Therefore, in s1, s2, and both, when the symbol exists in the same time of the same subcarrier, the symbol of two streams will exist in the same frequency. As other embodiments explained, when Precoding including the method of Precoding which changes a Precoding procession regularly is being performed, s1 and s2 are, Dignity attachment and composition will be performed using a Precoding procession, and z1 and z2 will be outputted from an antenna, respectively.<br />As shown in Drawing 64, section 1 shall transmit symbol group 6401 of PLP#1 using stream s1 and stream s2, and shall transmit data using the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method shown in Drawing 49, or the MIMO transmission method of fixation of a Precoding procession.

1177Section 2 shall transmit symbol group 6402 of PLP#2 using stream s1, and it shall transmit data by transmitting one abnormal-conditions signal.<br />Section 3 shall transmit symbol group 6403 of PLP#3 using stream s1 and stream s2, and shall transmit data using the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly.<br />Section 4 shall transmit symbol group 6404 of PLP#4 using stream s1 and stream s2, and shall transmit data using the space-time block numerals shown in Drawing 50. Arrangement of a symbol is not the thing limited in the direction of time, may be arranged in the direction of a frequency axis, and may be suitably arranged in the symbol group formed on time-frequency at space-time block numerals. Space-time block numerals are not what was restricted to the method explained in Drawing 50.<br />As a broadcasting station shown in Drawing 64, when each PLP is transmitted, it is necessary to learn the transmission method of each PLP in the receiving set which receives the transmitted signal of Drawing 64. Therefore, as the above-mentioned described, it is necessary to transmit the information on the transmission method of each PLP using L1*Post-Signalling*data (6103 of Drawing 61) which is P2 symbol. Below, an example of the constitution method of P1 symbol at this time and the constitution method of P2 symbol is explained.<br />The example of the control information transmitted using Table three P1 symbol is shown. *

1178<tables num="3"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0564.tif" /></tables>

1179In DVB-T2 standard, when DVB-T2 standard is used [ whether the standard of DVB-T2 is used, and ] using the control information on S1 (3-bit information) again, a receiving set can judge the used transmission method. As S1 3-bit information, when "000" is set up, the abnormal-conditions signal to transmit will be based on "one abnormal-conditions signal transmission of DVB-T2 standard."<br />As S1 3-bit information, when "001" is set up, the abnormal-conditions signal to transmit will be based on "transmission using the space-time block numerals of DVB-T2 standard."<br />In DVB-T2 standard, "010"- "111" is "Reserve" for the future. As compatible with DVB-T2 here, in order to apply the present invention, When it sets, for example to "010" as S1 3-bit information (it may be except "000" and "001".), If the abnormal-conditions signal to transmit will be based on standards other than DVB-T2, Ru will be shown and, as for the receiving set of a terminal, it turns out that this information is "010", it can know that the abnormal-conditions signal which the broadcasting station transmitted is based on standards other than DVB-T2.<br />Next, the example of the constitution method of P2 symbol in case the abnormal-conditions signal which the broadcasting station transmitted is based on standards other than DVB-T2 is explained. The first example explains the method using P2 symbol in DVB-T2 standard.<br />The 1st example of the control information transmitted by L1*Post-Signalling*data among P2 symbols is shown in Table 4.

1180<tables num="4"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0565.tif" /></tables>

1181SISO: *Single-Input*Single-Output* (one abnormal-conditions signal transmission and one antenna receive)<br />SIMO: *Single-Input*Multiple-Output (one abnormal-conditions signal transmission and a plurality of antennas receive)<br />MISO: *Multiple-Input*Single-Output (two or more antennas receive a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals with transmission and one antenna)<br />MIMO: *Multiple-Input*Multiple-Output(two or more antennas receive a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals with transmission and a plurality of antennas) *<br />"PLP_MODE" which is the 2-bit information shown in Table 4 is the control information for notifying the transmission method of each PLP (from PLP#1 to #4 [ Drawing 64 ]) to a terminal, as shown in Drawing 64, and the information on PLP_MODE will exist for every PLP. that is, the case of Drawing 64 -- the information on PLP_MODE for information [ on PLP_MODE for information / on PLP_MODE for information / on PLP_MODE for PLP#1 /, and PLP#2 /, and PLP#3 ], and PLP#4 ... will be transmitted from a broadcasting station. Although it is natural, the terminal can recognize the transmission method which the broadcasting station used for PLP by restoring to this information (error correction decoding is also performed again).<br />As "PLP_MODE", when it sets to "00", data is transmitted by carrying out it "is transmission about one abnormal-conditions signal" of the PLP. When it sets to "01", data is transmitted by carrying out it "is transmission about a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals which performed block coding between space-time" of the PLP. When it sets to "10", as for the PLP, data is transmitted using "the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly." When it sets to "11", as for the PLP, data is transmitted using "a MIMO method with a fixed Precoding procession, or a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method."<br />When set to "01"- "11" as "PLP_MODE", The broadcasting station performed what kind of processing concretely, or (for example, it was used as the concrete method of changing in the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, the used implement lock encoding method between space-time, and a Precoding procession composition of a procession) it is necessary to transmit to a terminal. Below, the constitution method including the composition of the control information at this time of control information which is different in Table 4 is explained.<br />Table 5 is the 2nd different example in Table 4 of the control information transmitted by L1*Post-Signalling*data among P2 symbols.

1182<tables num="5"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0566.tif" /></tables>

1183"PLP_MODE" which is 1-bit information as shown in Table 5, "MIMO_MODE" which is 1-bit information, "MIMO_PATTERN#1" which is 2-bit information, and "MIMO_PATTER#2" which are 2-bit information exist, and they are these four control information, As shown in Drawing 64, it is the information for notifying the transmission method of each PLP (from PLP#1 to #4 [ Drawing 64 ]) to a terminal, therefore these four control information will exist for every PLP. That is, in the case of Drawing 64, it is the information on the information / MIMO_PATTER#2 of the information / MIMO_PATTERN#1 of the information/MIMO_MODE of PLP_MODE for PLP#1, Information on the information / MIMO_PATTER#2 of the information / MIMO_PATTERN#1 of the information/MIMO_MODE of PLP_MODE for PLP#2, Information on the information / MIMO_PATTER#2 of the information / MIMO_PATTERN#1 of the information/MIMO_MODE of PLP_MODE for PLP#3, the information on the information / MIMO_PATTER#2 of the information / MIMO_PATTERN#1 of the information/MIMO_MODE of PLP_MODE for PLP#4 ... will be transmitted from a broadcasting station. Although it is natural, the terminal can recognize the transmission method which the broadcasting station used for PLP by restoring to this information (error correction decoding is also performed again).

1184As "PLP_MODE", when it sets to "0", data is transmitted by carrying out it "is transmission about one abnormal-conditions signal" of the PLP. "When it sets to "1", the PLP is transmission about a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals which performed block coding between space-time," Data is transmitted by one method of "the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly", "a MIMO method with a fixed Precoding procession", and a "spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method."

1185When "PLP_MODE" is set to "1", the information on "MIMO_MODE" turns into effective information, and data is transmitted without using the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, when it sets to "0" as "MIMO_MODE." As "MIMO_MODE", when it sets to "1", using the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, data is transmitted.<br />When "PLP_MODE" is set to "1" and "MIMO_MODE" is set to "0", the information on "MIMO_PATTERN#1" turns into effective information, and as "MIMO_PATTERN#1", when it sets to "00", data is transmitted using space-time block numerals. When it sets to "01", data is transmitted using the Puri coding method which performs dignity attachment composition using Precoding procession #1 fixed. When it sets to "10", data is transmitted using the Puri coding method which performs dignity attachment composition using Precoding procession #2 fixed. (Precoding procession #1 and Precoding procession #2 -- things -- it is a procession.) when it sets to "11", data is transmitted using a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method. [ however, ] (Although it is natural, it can be interpreted as the Precoding procession of method 1 of Drawing 49 having been chosen.)<br />When "PLP_MODE" is set to "1" and "MIMO_MODE" is set to "1", the information on "MIMO_PATTERN#2" turns into effective information, and it is as "MIMO_PATTERN#2", When it sets to "00", data is transmitted using the Puri coding method of Precoding procession change method #1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly. When it sets to "01", data is transmitted using the Puri coding method of Precoding procession change method #2 which changes a Precoding procession regularly. When it sets to "10", data is transmitted using the Puri coding method of Precoding procession change method #3 which changes a Precoding procession regularly. When it sets to "11", data is transmitted using the Puri coding method of Precoding procession change method #4 which changes a Precoding procession regularly. If a different method is made into the method which differs in #A and #B, for example at this time although Precoding procession change method #1 - #4 become a different method here, respectively,<br />- Although the same Precoding procession is included in a plurality of Precoding processions used for #A, and a plurality of Precoding processions used for #B, cycles differ,<br />- The Precoding procession which is included and which is not included in #B although it is exists in #A,<br />- Don't include a plurality of Precoding processions used by #A by the method of #B in Precoding to be used.<br />There is the method of saying.<br />Above explained as what transmits the control information on Table 4 and Table 5 by L1*Post-Signalling*data among P2 symbols. However, in DVB-T2 standard, the amount of information which can transmit as P2 symbol has restriction. Therefore, it is adding the information on Table 4 and Table 5 in addition to the information which needs to be transmitted as P2 symbol in DVB-T2 standard, When restriction of the amount of information which can transmit as P2 symbol is exceeded, be shown in Drawing 65, Signalling*PLP (6501) may be provided and the control information (a part may be sufficient, i.e., it transmits by both L1*Post-Signalling*data and Signalling*PLP) which is needed by standards other than DVB-T2 standard may be transmitted. It is although it has the same frame composition as Drawing 61 in Drawing 65, Like [ L1 Pre-signalling*data of Drawing 62 instead of what was restricted to such frame composition, etc. ], In a time-frequency axis, it is specific time about Signalling*PLP. - It may be made to assign the field of a specific career, i.e., in a time-frequency axis, it is Signalling*. PLP may be assigned how.<br />As mentioned above, it is enabling it to choose the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, maintaining compatibility to DVB-T2 standard using a multicareer transmission method like an OFDM method, While being able to obtain high receiving quality to the LOS environment, the advantage that high access speed can be obtained can be acquired. As the transmission method which a career group can set up in this embodiment, "A spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method, the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession, Although the transmission method which only the MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the block coding between space-time, and stream s1 transmit" was held, it is not what was restricted to this, The MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession is not what was restricted to method #2 of Drawing 49, and should just comprise a fixed Precoding procession.

1186Although the example which the broadcasting station makes selectable explained and the transmission method which only a "spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method, the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession, the MIMO method that changes a Precoding procession regularly, the block coding between space-time, and stream s1 transmit", all these transmission methods may not be selectable transmission methods -- for example<br />- A transmission method with a selectable transmission method which only the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession, the MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the block coding between space-time, and stream s1 transmit<br />- A MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession, a MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, a transmission method with selectable block coding between space-time<br />- A transmission method with the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession, the MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, and a selectable transmission method which only stream s1 transmits<br />- A transmission method with a selectable transmission method which only the MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the block coding between space-time, and stream s1 transmit<br />- A transmission method with the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession, and a selectable MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly<br />- A MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, a transmission method with selectable block coding between space-time<br />- A transmission method with the MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, and a selectable transmission method which only stream s1 transmits<br />of -- by the MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly being included like, high-speed data communications can be performed in the LOS environment, and the effect that the receiving data quality of a receiving set is securable can be acquired.<br />While setting up S1 in P1 symbol at this time to have stated above, Table 6 can be considered as P2 symbol, for example as a setting method (every setting method of the transmission method of PLP) of control information which is different in Table 4.

1187<tables num="6"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0567.tif" /></tables>

1188The point that Tables 6 differ in Table 4 is a point set to Reserve, when "PLP_MODE" is set to "11." Thus, case [ whose selectable transmission method is / like the example shown above as a transmission method of PLP ], the number of bits which constitutes PLP_MODE of Table 4 and Table 6 may be greatly made small with the number of selectable transmission methods, for example.<br />Necessity [ the same may be said of Table 5, for example, / the control information on "MIMO_MODE" ] when only the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is being supported as a MIMO transmission method. When the Precoding procession is not supporting the fixed MIMO method in "MIMO_PATTER#1", The control information on "MIMO_PATTER#1" may not be needed. When multiple Precoding processions which a Precoding procession uses for a fixed MIMO method do not need, It is good also as not 2-bit control information but 1-bit control information, and when enabling a setup of further a plurality of Precoding processions, it is good also as control information of 2 bits or more.

1189"MIMO_PATTERN#2" can be considered the same way, When multiple how to change a Precoding procession as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly does not need, It is good also as not 2-bit control information but 1-bit control information, and when still enabling a setup of how to change a plurality of Precoding processions, it is good also as control information of 2 bits or more.<br />In this embodiment, although the number of antennas of the sending set was explained by the case of 2, it is not what was restricted to this, and when larger than 2, control information may be transmitted similarly. In order to carry out the case where an abnormal-conditions signal is transmitted using four antennas, at this time in addition to the case where an abnormal-conditions signal is transmitted using two antennas, the case where the number of bits which constitutes each control information needs to be increased occurs. At this time, the point which transmits control information as P1 symbol of transmitting control information as P2 symbol is the same as that of the case where it explains above.<br />Although how to transmit by time sharing about the frame composition of the symbol group of PLP which a broadcasting station transmits as shown in Drawing 64 was explained, below, the modification is explained.<br />Drawing 66 shows an example of the configuration method of the symbol of streams s1 and s2 in the frequency-time-axis after transmitting P1 different symbol, P2 symbol, and Common*PLP in Drawing 64. In Drawing 66, the symbol indicated to be "#1" shows one symbol of the symbol groups of PLP#1 in Drawing 64. The symbol which similarly is indicated to be "#2", The symbol which shows one symbol of the symbol groups of PLP#2 in Drawing 64, and is indicated to be "#3", One symbol of the symbol groups of PLP#3 in Drawing 64 is shown, and the symbol indicated to be "#4" shows one symbol of the symbol groups of PLP#4 in Drawing 64. And PLP#1 shall transmit data like Drawing 64 using the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method shown in Drawing 49, or the MIMO transmission method of fixation of a Precoding procession. And PLP#2 shall transmit data by transmitting one abnormal-conditions signal. PLP#3 shall transmit data using the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly. PLP#4 shall transmit data using the space-time block numerals shown in Drawing 50. Arrangement of a symbol is not the thing limited in the direction of time, may be arranged in the direction of a frequency axis, and may be suitably arranged in the symbol group formed on time-frequency at space-time block numerals. Space-time block numerals are not what was restricted to the method explained in Drawing 50.<br />In Drawing 66, when the symbol exists in the same time of the same subcarrier in s1, s2, and both, the symbol of two streams will exist in the same frequency. As other embodiments explained, when Precoding including the method of Precoding which changes a Precoding procession regularly is being performed, s1 and s2 are, Dignity attachment and composition will be performed using a Precoding procession, and z1 and z2 will be outputted from an antenna, respectively.

1190Although the point that Drawing 66 differed from Drawing 64 showed the example which arranges a plurality of PLP(s) to time sharing as mentioned above in Drawing 64, it uses together time sharing and frequency division, and is making a plurality of PLP(s) exist in Drawing 66 unlike Drawing 64. That is, for example, the symbol of PLP#1 and the symbol of PLP#2 exist in time 1, and the symbol of PLP#3 and the symbol of PLP#4 exist at time 3. Thus, the symbol of PLP of a different index (#X; X= 1, 2, ...) can be assigned for every symbol (it comprises 1 time and one subcarrier).<br />In Drawing 66, in simple, although only "#1" and "#2" exist in time 1, it is not what was restricted to this, The symbol of PLP of indexes other than PLP of "#1" and "#2" may exist in time 1, and the relation of the index of the subcarrier in time 1 and PLP is not what was restricted to Drawing 66, and may assign the symbol of PLP of which index to a subcarrier. In other time, the symbol of PLP of which index may be similarly assigned to a subcarrier.<br />Drawing 67 shows an example of the configuration method of the symbol of streams s1 and s2 in the frequency-time-axis after transmitting P1 different symbol, P2 symbol, and Common*PLP in Drawing 64. In T2 frame, as a transmission method of PLP, the characteristic portion in Drawing 67 is the point that "the transmission method which only stream s1 transmits" cannot be chosen, when based on two or more antenna transmission.<br />Therefore, as for symbol group 6701 of PLP#1, in Drawing 67, data shall be transmitted by "the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method or the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession." As for symbol group 6702 of PLP#2, data shall be transmitted by "the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly." As for symbol group 6703 of PLP#3, data shall be transmitted by "space-time block numerals." And the PLP symbol group within T2 after symbol group 6703 of PLP#3, "spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method, Data will be transmitted by one transmission method of or the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession", "the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly", and "space-time block numerals."

1191Drawing 68 shows an example of the configuration method of the symbol of streams s1 and s2 in the frequency-time-axis after transmitting P1 different symbol, P2 symbol, and Common*PLP in Drawing 66. In Drawing 68, the symbol indicated to be "#1" shows one symbol of the symbol groups of PLP#1 in Drawing 67. Similarly, the symbol indicated to be "#2" shows one symbol of the symbol groups of PLP#2 in Drawing 67, and the symbol indicated to be "#3" shows one symbol of the symbol groups of PLP#3 in Drawing 67. And PLP#1 shall transmit data like Drawing 67 using the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method shown in Drawing 49, or the MIMO transmission method of fixation of a Precoding procession. And PLP#2 shall transmit data using the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly. PLP#3 shall transmit data using the space-time block numerals shown in Drawing 50. Arrangement of a symbol is not the thing limited in the direction of time, may be arranged in the direction of a frequency axis, and may be suitably arranged in the symbol group formed on time-frequency at space-time block numerals. Space-time block numerals are not what was restricted to the method explained in Drawing 50.<br />In Drawing 68, when the symbol exists in the same time of the same subcarrier in s1, s2, and both, the symbol of two streams will exist in the same frequency. As other embodiments explained, when Precoding including the method of Precoding which changes a Precoding procession regularly is being performed, s1 and s2 are, Dignity attachment and composition will be performed using a Precoding procession, and z1 and z2 will be outputted from an antenna, respectively.<br />Although the point that Drawing 68 differed from Drawing 67 showed the example which arranges a plurality of PLP(s) to time sharing as mentioned above in Drawing 67, it uses together time sharing and frequency division, and is making a plurality of PLP(s) exist in Drawing 68 unlike Drawing 67. That is, for example, at time 1, the symbol of PLP#1 and the symbol of PLP#2 exist. Thus, the symbol of PLP of a different index (#X; X= 1, 2, ...) can be assigned for every symbol (it comprises 1 time and one subcarrier).

1192In Drawing 68, in simple, although only "#1" and "#2" exist in time 1, it is not what was restricted to this, The symbol of PLP of indexes other than PLP of "#1" and "#2" may exist in time 1, and the relation of the index of the subcarrier in time 1 and PLP is not what was restricted to Drawing 68, and may assign the symbol of PLP of which index to a subcarrier. In other time, the symbol of PLP of which index may be similarly assigned to a subcarrier. On the other hand, in a certain time, only the symbol of one PLP may be assigned like time 3. That is, the symbol of PLP may be assigned how in the frame method in time-frequency.<br />Thus, since PLP using "the transmission method which only stream s1 transmits" does not exist [ in T two frames ], Since the dynamic range of the received signal which a terminal receives can be stopped, a possibility of obtaining good receiving quality can be made high, and the That effect can be acquired.<br />It is in charge of Drawing 68 explaining, and is a "spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method as a transmission method, although the example which chooses either explained or the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession", "the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly", and "space-time block numerals", it is not necessary to make all of these transmission methods selectable -- for example<br />- Selectable in "the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly", "space-time block numerals", and "the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession"<br />- Selectable in "the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly", and "space-time block numerals"<br />- Selectable in "the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly", and "the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession"<br />It may carry out.<br />Although Above explained the case where a plurality of PLP(s) existed in T two frames, henceforth, the case where only one PLP exists in T two frames is explained.<br />Drawing 69 shows an example of stream s1 in a time-frequency axis in case one PLP exists in T two frames, and the frame composition of s2. Although it is indicated as the "control symbol", this as used in Drawing 69 means P1 symbol explained by Above, and symbols, such as P2 symbol. And in Drawing 69, the 1T2nd frame is transmitted using section 1, similarly, the 2T2nd frame is transmitted using section 2, the 3T2nd frame is transmitted using section 3, and the 4T2nd frame is transmitted using section 4.

1193In Drawing 69, by the 1T2nd frame, symbol group 6801 of PLP#1-1 is transmitted and "the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method or the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession" is chosen as a transmission method.<br />In the 2T2nd frame, symbol group 6802 of PLP#2-1 is transmitted and "the method of transmitting one abnormal-conditions signal" is chosen as a transmission method.<br />In the 3T2nd frame, symbol group 6803 of PLP#3-1 is transmitted and "the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly" is chosen as a transmission method.<br />In the 4T2nd frame, symbol group 6804 of PLP#4-1 is transmitted and "space-time block numerals" is chosen as a transmission method. Arrangement of a symbol is not the thing limited in the direction of time, may be arranged in the direction of a frequency axis, and may be suitably arranged in the symbol group formed on time-frequency at space-time block numerals. Space-time block numerals are not what was restricted to the method explained in Drawing 50.<br />In Drawing 69, when the symbol exists in the same time of the same subcarrier in s1, s2, and both, the symbol of two streams will exist in the same frequency. As other embodiments explained, when Precoding including the method of Precoding which changes a Precoding procession regularly is being performed, s1 and s2 are, Dignity attachment and composition will be performed using a Precoding procession, and z1 and z2 will be outputted from an antenna, respectively.<br />Since a transmission method can be set up in consideration of the access speed of data, and the data reception quality of a terminal for every PLP by doing in this way, it becomes possible to aim at improvement in the access speed of data, and coexistence of reservation of the receiving quality of data. The example of the constitution method of control information, including the transmission method of P1 symbol and P2 symbol (depending on the case, it is Signalling*PLP), etc., can be similarly carried out, if it constitutes as shown in the above-mentioned table 3 to table 6. Although a different point needed control information, including the transmission method for a plurality of PLP(s), etc., for it in the frame composition of the figure 64 grade since it had a plurality of PLP(s) in one T2 frame, Since only one PLP exists in one T2 frame in the frame composition of Drawing 69, it is the point that only control information, including the transmission method for the one PLP, etc., is needed.

1194Although Above described how to transmit the information about the transmission method of PLP, using P1 symbol and P2 symbol (it is Signalling*PLP depending on the case), Especially henceforth, how to transmit the information about the transmission method of PLP without using P2 symbol is explained.<br />Drawing 70 shows the frame composition in a time-frequency axis when the terminal whose broadcasting station is a partner who transmits data corresponds to the standard which is not DVB-T2 standard. In Drawing 70, the same numerals are attached about what operates like Drawing 61. The frame of Drawing 70 is P1 Signalling*data (6101), the -- the [ 1*Signalling*data (7001) and ] -- it comprises 2*Signalling*data (7002), Common*PLP (6104), PLP#1 - #N (6105_1-6105_N) (PLP:Physical*Layer*Pipe). the [ thus, / P1*Signallingdata (6101) and ] -- 1*Signalling*data (7001), the -- the frame which comprises 2*Signalling*data (7002), Common*PLP (6104), PLP#1 - #N (6105_1-6105_N) is a unit of one frame.

1195By P1*Signalling*data (6101), a receiving set is signal detection, S1 which showed whether it was a frame of DVB-T2 standard in this case at data 3 for identifying, for example, a table, while it was a symbol for performing a frequency synchronization (frequency offset presumption is also included), It is necessary to transmit that they are not that it is a signal of DVB-T2 standard / signal.<br />the -- the information on the guard interval used with a transmitting frame by 1*Signalling*data (7001), for example, the information about the method of PAPR (Peak*to*Average*Power*Ratio), and the 2nd Signalling<br />Information on the code rate of the modulation method at the time of transmitting data, an error correction method, and an error correction method, How to transmit the information on whether which method of the information on the size of the 2nd Signalling*data and information size, the information on a pilot pattern, the information on a cell (frequency domain) peculiar number, a normal mode, and extend mode is used, etc. can be considered. this time -- the -- 1*Signalling*data (7001) does not necessarily need to transmit the data based on DVB-T2 standard. the -- 2*Signalling*data (7002) for example, the information about the information on the number of PLP(s), and the frequency domain to be used, and every -- the information on the peculiar number of PLP, and every -- the information on the code rate of the modulation method used for transmitting PLP, an error correction method, and an error correction method, and every -- the information on the number of blocks which PLP transmits, etc. are transmitted.

1196the frame composition of Drawing 70 -- the -- the [ 1*Signalling*data (7001) and ] -- 2*Signalling*data (7002) and L1<br />In written Have, two or more kinds of signals exist in the same time in practice as Post-Signallingdata (6103), Common*PLP (6104), PLP#1 - #N (6105_1-6105_N) are transmitted by time sharing. The example is shown in Drawing 71. it is shown in Drawing 71 -- as -- the same time -- the [ the 1st Signalling*data and ] -- 2*Signalling*data and Common*PLP may exist or PLP#1 and PLP#2 may exist in the same time. That is, each signal uses together time sharing and frequency division, and the frame is constituted.<br />An example of the composition of the sending set to which the transmission method which Drawing 72 has so far illustrated to the sending set in the standard from which DVB-T2 differs (for example, broadcasting station), and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applied is shown. In Drawing 72, the same numerals are attached about what operates like Drawing 63, and the explanation about the operation becomes being the same as that of Above. control signal generating part 6308 -- the [ 1st ] -- considering send data 7201 for 2*Signalling*data, and send data 6307 for P1 symbols as an input A transmission method of each symbol group in Drawing 70 (code rate of an error correcting code and an error correcting code) A modulation method, block length, frame composition, a selected transmission method including the transmission method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The information on the information on PAPR reduction methods, including a pilot symbol insertion method, the information on IFFT(Inverse*Fast*Fourier*Transform)/FFT, etc., and the information on a guard interval insertion method is outputted as control signal 6309.<br />control symbol signal generating part 7202 -- the [ 1st ] -- considering send data 7201 for 2*Signalling*data, and control signal 6309 as an input the [ that is contained in control signal 6309 / 1st ] -- the information on the error correction of 2*Signalling*data, performing error-correcting-code-izing and mapping based on a modulation method based on information, including the information on a modulation method, etc., -- the [ 1st ] -- baseband signal (rectangular cross) 7203 of 2*Signalling*data is outputted.

1197Next, frame composition of the transmitted signal of a broadcasting station (base station) when the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly is applied to the system of a different standard from DVB-T2, The transmission method of control information (the [ 1st ] P1 symbol and the information transmitted by 2*Signalling*data) is explained in detail.<br />Drawing 64 -- the [ P1 symbol and / 1st ] -- an example of the frame composition in the frequency-time-axis in the case of transmitting a plurality of PLP(s) is shown after transmitting 2*Signalling*data and Common*PLP. In Drawing 64, subcarrier #1 - subcarrier #M are used for stream s1 in the frequency axis, and stream s2 uses subcarrier #1 - subcarrier #M in the frequency axis similarly. Therefore, in s1, s2, and both, when the symbol exists in the same time of the same subcarrier, the symbol of two streams will exist in the same frequency. As other embodiments explained, when Precoding including the method of Precoding which changes a Precoding procession regularly is being performed, s1 and s2 are, Dignity attachment and composition will be performed using a Precoding procession, and z1 and z2 will be outputted from an antenna, respectively.<br />As shown in Drawing 64, section 1 shall transmit symbol group 6401 of PLP#1 using stream s1 and stream s2, and shall transmit data using the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method shown in Drawing 49, or the MIMO transmission method of fixation of a Precoding procession.

1198Section 2 shall transmit symbol group 6402 of PLP#2 using stream s1, and it shall transmit data by transmitting one abnormal-conditions signal.<br />Section 3 shall transmit symbol group 6403 of PLP#3 using stream s1 and stream s2, and shall transmit data using the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly.<br />Section 4 shall transmit symbol group 6404 of PLP#4 using stream s1 and stream s2, and shall transmit data using the space-time block numerals shown in Drawing 50. Arrangement of a symbol is not the thing limited in the direction of time, may be arranged in the direction of a frequency axis, and may be suitably arranged in the symbol group formed on time-frequency at space-time block numerals. Space-time block numerals are not what was restricted to the method explained in Drawing 50.<br />As a broadcasting station shown in Drawing 64, when each PLP is transmitted, it is necessary to learn the transmission method of each PLP in the receiving set which receives the transmitted signal of Drawing 64. therefore, the above-mentioned described -- as -- the [ 1st ] -- using 2*Signalling*data -- every -- it is necessary to transmit the information on the transmission method of PLP the following -- the [ the constitution method of P1 symbol at this time, and / 1st ] -- an example of the constitution method of 2*Signalling*data is explained. The example of the control information transmitted using Table three P1 symbol is as in Table 3.<br />In DVB-T2 standard, when DVB-T2 standard is used [ whether the standard of DVB-T2 is used, and ] using the control information on S1 (3-bit information) again, a receiving set can judge the used transmission method. As S1 3-bit information, when "000" is set up, the abnormal-conditions signal to transmit will be based on "one abnormal-conditions signal transmission of DVB-T2 standard."

1199As S1 3-bit information, when "001" is set up, the abnormal-conditions signal to transmit will be based on "transmission using the space-time block numerals of DVB-T2 standard."<br />In DVB-T2 standard, "010"- "111" is "Reserve" for the future. As compatible with DVB-T2 here, in order to apply the present invention, When it sets, for example to "010" as S1 3-bit information (it may be except "000" and "001".), If the abnormal-conditions signal to transmit will be based on standards other than DVB-T2, Ru will be shown and, as for the receiving set of a terminal, it turns out that this information is "010", it can know that the abnormal-conditions signal which the broadcasting station transmitted is based on standards other than DVB-T2.<br />Next, the 1st in case the abnormal-conditions signal which the broadcasting station transmitted is based on standards other than DVB-T2, the 2nd<br />The example of the constitution method of Signallingdata is explained. the [ 1st ] -- the 1st example of the control information on 2*Signalling*data is as in Table 4.<br />"PLP_MODE" which is the 2-bit information shown in Table 4 is the control information for notifying the transmission method of each PLP (from PLP#1 to #4 [ Drawing 64 ]) to a terminal, as shown in Drawing 64, and the information on PLP_MODE will exist for every PLP. that is, the case of Drawing 64 -- the information on PLP_MODE for information [ on PLP_MODE for information / on PLP_MODE for information / on PLP_MODE for PLP#1 /, and PLP#2 /, and PLP#3 ], and PLP#4 ... will be transmitted from a broadcasting station. Although it is natural, the terminal can recognize the transmission method which the broadcasting station used for PLP by restoring to this information (error correction decoding is also performed again).<br />As "PLP_MODE", when it sets to "00", data is transmitted by carrying out it "is transmission about one abnormal-conditions signal" of the PLP. When it sets to "01", data is transmitted by carrying out it "is transmission about a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals which performed block coding between space-time" of the PLP. When it sets to "10", as for the PLP, data is transmitted using "the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly." When it sets to "11", as for the PLP, data is transmitted using "a MIMO method with a fixed Precoding procession, or a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method."

1200When set to "01"- "11" as "PLP_MODE", The broadcasting station performed what kind of processing concretely, or (for example, it was used as the concrete method of changing in the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, the used implement lock encoding method between space-time, and a Precoding procession composition of a procession) it is necessary to transmit to a terminal. Below, the constitution method including the composition of the control information at this time of control information which is different in Table 4 is explained.<br />the [ 1st ] -- the 2nd example of the control information on 2*Signalling*data is as in Table 5.<br />"PLP_MODE" which is 1-bit information as shown in Table 5, "MIMO_MODE" which is 1-bit information, "MIMO_PATTERN#1" which is 2-bit information, and "MIMO_PATTER#2" which are 2-bit information exist, and they are these four control information, As shown in Drawing 64, it is the information for notifying the transmission method of each PLP (from PLP#1 to #4 [ Drawing 64 ]) to a terminal, therefore these four control information will exist for every PLP. That is, in the case of Drawing 64, it is the information on the information / MIMO_PATTER#2 of the information / MIMO_PATTERN#1 of the information/MIMO_MODE of PLP_MODE for PLP#1, Information on the information / MIMO_PATTER#2 of the information / MIMO_PATTERN#1 of the information/MIMO_MODE of PLP_MODE for PLP#2, Information on the information / MIMO_PATTER#2 of the information / MIMO_PATTERN#1 of the information/MIMO_MODE of PLP_MODE for PLP#3, the information on the information / MIMO_PATTER#2 of the information / MIMO_PATTERN#1 of the information/MIMO_MODE of PLP_MODE for PLP#4 ... will be transmitted from a broadcasting station. Although it is natural, the terminal can recognize the transmission method which the broadcasting station used for PLP by restoring to this information (error correction decoding is also performed again).<br />As "PLP_MODE", when it sets to "0", data is transmitted by carrying out it "is transmission about one abnormal-conditions signal" of the PLP. "When it sets to "1", the PLP is transmission about a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals which performed block coding between space-time," Data is transmitted by one method of "the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly", "a MIMO method with a fixed Precoding procession", and a "spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method."<br />When "PLP_MODE" is set to "1", the information on "MIMO_MODE" turns into effective information, and data is transmitted without using the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, when it sets to "0" as "MIMO_MODE." As "MIMO_MODE", when it sets to "1", using the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, data is transmitted.<br />When "PLP_MODE" is set to "1" and "MIMO_MODE" is set to "0", the information on "MIMO_PATTERN#1" turns into effective information, and as "MIMO_PATTERN#1", when it sets to "00", data is transmitted using space-time block numerals. When it sets to "01", data is transmitted using the Puri coding method which performs dignity attachment composition using Precoding procession #1 fixed. When it sets to "10", data is transmitted using the Puri coding method which performs dignity attachment composition using Precoding procession #2 fixed. (Precoding procession #1 and Precoding procession #2 -- things -- it is a procession.) when it sets to "11", data is transmitted using a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method. [ however, ] (Although it is natural, it can be interpreted as the Precoding procession of method 1 of Drawing 49 having been chosen.)

1201When "PLP_MODE" is set to "1" and "MIMO_MODE" is set to "1", the information on "MIMO_PATTERN#2" turns into effective information, and it is as "MIMO_PATTERN#2", When it sets to "00", data is transmitted using the Puri coding method of Precoding procession change method #1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly. When it sets to "01", data is transmitted using the Puri coding method of Precoding procession change method #2 which changes a Precoding procession regularly. When it sets to "10", data is transmitted using the Puri coding method of Precoding procession change method #3 which changes a Precoding procession regularly. When it sets to "11", data is transmitted using the Puri coding method of Precoding procession change method #4 which changes a Precoding procession regularly. If a different method is made into the method which differs in #A and #B, for example at this time although Precoding procession change method #1 - #4 become a different method here, respectively,<br />- Although the same Precoding procession is included in a plurality of Precoding processions used for #A, and a plurality of Precoding processions used for #B, cycles differ,<br />- The Precoding procession which is included and which is not included in #B although it is exists in #A,<br />- There is a method of not including a plurality of Precoding processions used by #A in Precoding used by the method of #B.<br />Above -- the control information on Table 4 and Table 5 -- the [ 1st ] -- it explained as what transmits by 2*Signalling*data. In this case, in order to transmit control information, there is an advantage that it is not necessary to use PLP in particular.

1202As mentioned above, it is while discernment from DVB-T2 standard is possible, using a multicareer transmission method like an OFDM method, While being able to obtain high receiving quality to the LOS environment by enabling it to choose the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly to a different standard from DVB-T2, the advantage that high access speed can be obtained can be acquired. As the transmission method which a career group can set up in this embodiment, "A spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method, the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession, Although the transmission method which only the MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the block coding between space-time, and stream s1 transmit" was held, it is not what was restricted to this, The MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession is not what was restricted to method #2 of Drawing 49, and should just comprise a fixed Precoding procession.<br />Although the example which the broadcasting station makes selectable explained and the transmission method which only a "spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method, the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession, the MIMO method that changes a Precoding procession regularly, the block coding between space-time, and stream s1 transmit", all these transmission methods may not be selectable transmission methods -- for example<br />- A transmission method with a selectable transmission method which only the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession, the MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the block coding between space-time, and stream s1 transmit<br />- A MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession, a MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, a transmission method with selectable block coding between space-time<br />- A transmission method with the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession, the MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, and a selectable transmission method which only stream s1 transmits<br />- A transmission method with a selectable transmission method which only the MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the block coding between space-time, and stream s1 transmit<br />- A transmission method with the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession, and a selectable MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly<br />- A MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, a transmission method with selectable block coding between space-time<br />- A transmission method with the MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, and a selectable transmission method which only stream s1 transmits<br />of -- by the MIMO method which changes a Precoding procession regularly being included like, high-speed data communications can be performed in the LOS environment, and the effect that the receiving data quality of a receiving set is securable can be acquired.<br />While setting up S1 in P1 symbol at this time to have stated above, Table 6 can be considered as the 1st and 2nd Signallingdata, for example as a setting method (every setting method of the transmission method of PLP) of control information which is different in Table 4.

1203The point that Tables 6 differ in Table 4 is a point set to Reserve, when "PLP_MODE" is set to "11." Thus, case [ whose selectable transmission method is / like the example shown above as a transmission method of PLP ], the number of bits which constitutes PLP_MODE of Table 4 and Table 6 may be greatly made small with the number of selectable transmission methods, for example.<br />Necessity [ the same may be said of Table 5, for example, / the control information on "MIMO_MODE" ] when only the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is being supported as a MIMO transmission method. When the Precoding procession is not supporting the fixed MIMO method in "MIMO_PATTER#1", The control information on "MIMO_PATTER#1" may not be needed. When multiple Precoding processions which a Precoding procession uses for a fixed MIMO method do not need, It is good also as not 2-bit control information but 1-bit control information, and when enabling a setup of further a plurality of Precoding processions, it is good also as control information of 2 bits or more.<br />"MIMO_PATTERN#2" can be considered the same way, When multiple how to change a Precoding procession as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly does not need, It is good also as not 2-bit control information but 1-bit control information, and when still enabling a setup of how to change a plurality of Precoding processions, it is good also as control information of 2 bits or more.<br />In this embodiment, although the number of antennas of the sending set was explained by the case of 2, it is not what was restricted to this, and when larger than 2, control information may be transmitted similarly. In order to carry out the case where an abnormal-conditions signal is transmitted using four antennas, at this time in addition to the case where an abnormal-conditions signal is transmitted using two antennas, the case where the number of bits which constitutes each control information needs to be increased occurs. the [ that transmits control information as P1 symbol at this time / 1st ] -- the point of transmitting control information by 2*Signalling*data is the same as that of the case where it explains above.<br />Although how to transmit by time sharing about the frame composition of the symbol group of PLP which a broadcasting station transmits as shown in Drawing 64 was explained, below, the modification is explained.<br />the [ P1 symbol from which Drawing 66 differs in Drawing 64, and / 1st ] -- an example of the configuration method of the symbol of streams s1 and s2 in the frequency-time-axis after transmitting 2*Signalling*data and Common*PLP is shown.

1204In Drawing 66, the symbol indicated to be "#1" shows one symbol of the symbol groups of PLP#1 in Drawing 64. The symbol which similarly is indicated to be "#2", The symbol which shows one symbol of the symbol groups of PLP#2 in Drawing 64, and is indicated to be "#3", One symbol of the symbol groups of PLP#3 in Drawing 64 is shown, and the symbol indicated to be "#4" shows one symbol of the symbol groups of PLP#4 in Drawing 64. And PLP#1 shall transmit data like Drawing 64 using the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method shown in Drawing 49, or the MIMO transmission method of fixation of a Precoding procession. And PLP#2 shall transmit data by transmitting one abnormal-conditions signal. PLP#3 shall transmit data using the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly. PLP#4 shall transmit data using the space-time block numerals shown in Drawing 50. Arrangement of a symbol is not the thing limited in the direction of time, may be arranged in the direction of a frequency axis, and may be suitably arranged in the symbol group formed on time-frequency at space-time block numerals. Space-time block numerals are not what was restricted to the method explained in Drawing 50.<br />In Drawing 66, when the symbol exists in the same time of the same subcarrier in s1, s2, and both, the symbol of two streams will exist in the same frequency. As other embodiments explained, when Precoding including the method of Precoding which changes a Precoding procession regularly is being performed, s1 and s2 are, Dignity attachment and composition will be performed using a Precoding procession, and z1 and z2 will be outputted from an antenna, respectively.<br />Although the point that Drawing 66 differed from Drawing 64 showed the example which arranges a plurality of PLP(s) to time sharing as mentioned above in Drawing 64, it uses together time sharing and frequency division, and is making a plurality of PLP(s) exist in Drawing 66 unlike Drawing 64. That is, for example, the symbol of PLP#1 and the symbol of PLP#2 exist in time 1, and the symbol of PLP#3 and the symbol of PLP#4 exist at time 3. Thus, the symbol of PLP of a different index (#X; X= 1, 2, ...) can be assigned for every symbol (it comprises 1 time and one subcarrier).

1205In Drawing 66, in simple, although only "#1" and "#2" exist in time 1, it is not what was restricted to this, The symbol of PLP of indexes other than PLP of "#1" and "#2" may exist in time 1, and the relation of the index of the subcarrier in time 1 and PLP is not what was restricted to Drawing 66, and may assign the symbol of PLP of which index to a subcarrier. In other time, the symbol of PLP of which index may be similarly assigned to a subcarrier.<br />the [ P1 symbol from which Drawing 67 differs in Drawing 64, and / 1st ] -- an example of the configuration method of the symbol of streams s1 and s2 in the frequency-time-axis after transmitting 2*Signalling*data and Common*PLP is shown. In T2 frame, as a transmission method of PLP, the characteristic portion in Drawing 67 is the point that "the transmission method which only stream s1 transmits" cannot be chosen, when based on two or more antenna transmission.<br />Therefore, as for symbol group 6701 of PLP#1, in Drawing 67, data shall be transmitted by "the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method or the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession." As for symbol group 6702 of PLP#2, data shall be transmitted by "the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly." As for symbol group 6703 of PLP#3, data shall be transmitted by "space-time block numerals." And the PLP symbol group within the unit frame after symbol group 6703 of PLP#3, "spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method, Data will be transmitted by one transmission method of or the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession", "the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly", and "space-time block numerals."<br />the [ P1 symbol from which Drawing 68 differs in Drawing 66, and / 1st ] -- an example of the configuration method of the symbol of streams s1 and s2 in the frequency-time-axis after transmitting 2*Signalling*data and Common*PLP is shown.

1206In Drawing 68, the symbol indicated to be "#1" shows one symbol of the symbol groups of PLP#1 in Drawing 67. Similarly, the symbol indicated to be "#2" shows one symbol of the symbol groups of PLP#2 in Drawing 67, and the symbol indicated to be "#3" shows one symbol of the symbol groups of PLP#3 in Drawing 67. And PLP#1 shall transmit data like Drawing 67 using the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method shown in Drawing 49, or the MIMO transmission method of fixation of a Precoding procession. And PLP#2 shall transmit data using the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly. PLP#3 shall transmit data using the space-time block numerals shown in Drawing 50. Arrangement of a symbol is not the thing limited in the direction of time, may be arranged in the direction of a frequency axis, and may be suitably arranged in the symbol group formed on time-frequency at space-time block numerals. Space-time block numerals are not what was restricted to the method explained in Drawing 50.<br />In Drawing 68, when the symbol exists in the same time of the same subcarrier in s1, s2, and both, the symbol of two streams will exist in the same frequency. As other embodiments explained, when Precoding including the method of Precoding which changes a Precoding procession regularly is being performed, s1 and s2 are, Dignity attachment and composition will be performed using a Precoding procession, and z1 and z2 will be outputted from an antenna, respectively.<br />Although the point that Drawing 68 differed from Drawing 67 showed the example which arranges a plurality of PLP(s) to time sharing as mentioned above in Drawing 67, it uses together time sharing and frequency division, and is making a plurality of PLP(s) exist in Drawing 68 unlike Drawing 67. That is, for example, at time 1, the symbol of PLP#1 and the symbol of PLP#2 exist. Thus, the symbol of PLP of a different index (#X; X= 1, 2, ...) can be assigned for every symbol (it comprises 1 time and one subcarrier).

1207In Drawing 68, in simple, although only "#1" and "#2" exist in time 1, it is not what was restricted to this, The symbol of PLP of indexes other than PLP of "#1" and "#2" may exist in time 1, and the relation of the index of the subcarrier in time 1 and PLP is not what was restricted to Drawing 68, and may assign the symbol of PLP of which index to a subcarrier. In other time, the symbol of PLP of which index may be similarly assigned to a subcarrier. On the other hand, in a certain time, only the symbol of one PLP may be assigned like time 3. That is, the symbol of PLP may be assigned how in the frame method in time-frequency.<br />Thus, since PLP using "the transmission method which only stream s1 transmits" does not exist [ in a unit frame ], Since the dynamic range of the received signal which a terminal receives can be stopped, a possibility of obtaining good receiving quality can be made high, and the That effect can be acquired.<br />It is in charge of Drawing 68 explaining, and is a "spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method as a transmission method, although the example which chooses either explained or the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession", "the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly", and "space-time block numerals", it is not necessary to make all of these transmission methods selectable -- for example<br />- Selectable in "the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly", "space-time block numerals", and "the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession"<br />- Selectable in "the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly", and "space-time block numerals"<br />- Selectable in "the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly", and "the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession"<br />It may carry out.

1208Although Above explained the case where a plurality of PLP(s) existed in a unit frame, henceforth, the case where only one PLP exists in a unit frame is explained.<br />Drawing 69 shows an example of stream s1 in a time-frequency axis in case one PLP exists in a unit frame, and the frame composition of s2.<br />Although it is indicated as the "control symbol", this as used in Drawing 69 means P1 symbol explained by Above, and symbols, such as the 1st and 2nd Signallingdata. And in Drawing 69, the 1st unit frame is transmitted using section 1, similarly, the 2nd unit frame is transmitted using section 2, the 3rd unit frame is transmitted using section 3, and the 4th unit frame is transmitted using section 4.<br />In Drawing 69, with the 1st unit frame, symbol group 6801 of PLP#1-1 is transmitted and "the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method or the MIMO method using a fixed Precoding procession" is chosen as a transmission method.<br />In the 2nd unit frame, symbol group 6802 of PLP#2-1 is transmitted and "the method of transmitting one abnormal-conditions signal" is chosen as a transmission method.<br />In the 3rd unit frame, symbol group 6803 of PLP#3-1 is transmitted and "the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly" is chosen as a transmission method.<br />In the 4th unit frame, symbol group 6804 of PLP#4-1 is transmitted and "space-time block numerals" is chosen as a transmission method. Arrangement of a symbol is not the thing limited in the direction of time, may be arranged in the direction of a frequency axis, and may be suitably arranged in the symbol group formed on time-frequency at space-time block numerals. Space-time block numerals are not what was restricted to the method explained in Drawing 50.<br />In Drawing 69, when the symbol exists in the same time of the same subcarrier in s1, s2, and both, the symbol of two streams will exist in the same frequency. As other embodiments explained, when Precoding including the method of Precoding which changes a Precoding procession regularly is being performed, s1 and s2 are, Dignity attachment and composition will be performed using a Precoding procession, and z1 and z2 will be outputted from an antenna, respectively.

1209Since a transmission method can be set up in consideration of the access speed of data, and the data reception quality of a terminal for every PLP by doing in this way, it becomes possible to aim at improvement in the access speed of data, and coexistence of reservation of the receiving quality of data. the [ P1 symbol and / 1st ] -- the example of the constitution method of control information, including the transmission method of 2*Signalling*data, etc., can be similarly carried out, if it constitutes as shown in the above-mentioned table 3 to table 6. Although a different point needed control information, including the transmission method for a plurality of PLP(s), etc., for it in the frame composition of the figure 64 grade since it had a plurality of PLP(s) on one unit frame, Since only one PLP exists in one unit frame in the frame composition of Drawing 69, it is the point that only control information, including the transmission method for the one PLP, etc., is needed.

1210This embodiment described the application method at the time of applying the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly to the system using a DVB standard. It is as Embodiment 16 having shown to the example of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly from Embodiment 1 at this time. However, about the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, It is not what was restricted to the method shown by Embodiment 16 from Embodiment 1, While choosing one Precoding procession for every slot from a plurality of Precoding processions which prepare multiple Precoding processions and were prepared and performing Precoding, If it is a method which changes the Precoding procession regularly used for every slot, this embodiment can be carried out similarly.

1211In this embodiment, how to call control information although the special way of calling is adopted does not affect the present invention. *<br />(Embodiment A2)<br />This embodiment explains in detail a receiving method when the method of applying the method of changing a Precoding procession to the communications system using DVB-T2 standard explained by Embodiment A1 regularly is used, and the composition of a receiving set.<br />Drawing 73 shows an example of the composition of the receiving set of a terminal when the sending set of the broadcasting station of Drawing 63 applies the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, and attaches the same numerals about what operates like Drawing 7 and Drawing 56.<br />In Drawing 73, P1 symbol detection and decoding part 7301 are, It is receiving the signal which the broadcasting station transmitted, considering signal 704after signal processing_X, and 704_Y as an input, and detecting P1 symbol, The control information included in P1 symbol is acquired (recovery and error correction decoding are performed), and P1 symbol control information 7302 is outputted at the same time it performs signal detection and a temporal frequency synchronization. OFDM method related treating part 5600_X and 5600_Y are considering P1 symbol control information 7302 as the input, and change the signal processing method for an OFDM method based on this information. (As indicated to Embodiment A1, the information on the transmission method of the signal which a broadcasting station transmits is because it is contained in P1 symbol.)<br />P2 symbol (Signalling*PLP may be included.) demodulation section 7303, Signal 704after signal processing_X, 704_Y, and P1 symbol control information 7302 is considered as an input, and it gets over by performing signal processing based on P1 symbol control information (error correction decoding is included), and outputs P2 symbol control information 7304.<br />Control information generating part 7305 considers P1 symbol control information 7302 and P2 symbol control information 7304 as an input, and outputs control (it is related to reception operation) information as Tavern and control signal 7306. And control signal 7306 will be inputted into each part as shown in Drawing 73.

1212Signal processing parts 711 are signal 706_1, 706_2, 708_1, 708_2, and 704_X, 704_Y and control signal 7306 are considered as an input, and it is contained in control signal 7306, every -- based on information, including the block size etc. of the code rate and error correcting code of a transmission method, a modulation method, an error correcting code-ized method, and error-correcting-code-izing used in order to transmit PLP, processing of a recovery and decoding is performed and receiving data 712 is outputted.<br />The MIMO method which uses a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method and a fixed Precoding procession in order to transmit PLP at this time, When one transmission method of the Puri coding methods which change a Precoding procession regularly is used, signal processing part 711 should just perform recovery processing using the expression of relations of the formula (143) of the formula (41) of (several 41), and (several 153). A channel procession (H) can be obtained from the output of a channel change estimating part (705_1, 705_2, 707_1, 707_2), and the composition of the procession changes with transmission methods which the Precoding procession (F or W) used. The Precoding procession using the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly especially case [ a procession ], each time [ a procession ] and used will be changed, and it will get over. Also when using space-time block numerals, it will get over using a channel estimation value and a received (baseband) signal.<br />Drawing 74 shows an example of the composition of the receiving set of a terminal when the sending set of the broadcasting station of Drawing 72 applies the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, and attaches the same numerals about what operates like Drawing 7, Drawing 56, and Drawing 73.<br />The receiving set of Drawing 73 receives the signal of DVB-T2 standard and the other standard, the point that the receiving set of Drawing 74 differs from the receiving set of Drawing 73 receives that data can be obtained, and the receiving set of Drawing 74 is the point that only signals other than DVB-T2 standard can be received and data can be obtained. In Drawing 74, P1 symbol detection and decoding part 7301 are, It is receiving the signal which the broadcasting station transmitted, considering signal 704after signal processing_X, and 704_Y as an input, and detecting P1 symbol, The control information included in P1 symbol is acquired (recovery and error correction decoding are performed), and P1 symbol control information 7302 is outputted at the same time it performs signal detection and a temporal frequency synchronization. OFDM method related treating part 5600_X and 5600_Y are considering P1 symbol control information 7302 as the input, and change the signal processing method for an OFDM method based on this information. (As indicated to Embodiment A1, the information on the transmission method of the signal which a broadcasting station transmits is because it is contained in P1 symbol.)

1213the [ 1st ] -- 2*Signalling*data demodulation section 7401, considering signal 704after signal processing_X, 704_Y, and P1 symbol control information 7302 as an input, and getting over by performing signal processing based on P1 symbol control information (error correction decoding is included) -- the [ 1st ] -- 2*Signalling*data control information 7402 is outputted.<br />control information generating part 7305 -- the [ P1 symbol control information 7302 and / 1st ] -- 2*Signalling*data control information 7402 is considered as an input, and control (related to reception operation) information is outputted as Tavern and control signal 7306. And control signal 7306 will be inputted into each part as shown in Drawing 73.<br />Signal processing parts 711 are signal 706_1, 706_2, 708_1, 708_2, and 704_X, 704_Y and control signal 7306 are considered as an input, and it is contained in control signal 7306, every -- based on information, including the block size etc. of the code rate and error correcting code of a transmission method, a modulation method, an error correcting code-ized method, and error-correcting-code-izing used in order to transmit PLP, processing of a recovery and decoding is performed and receiving data 712 is outputted.<br />The MIMO method which uses a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method and a fixed Precoding procession in order to transmit PLP at this time, When one transmission method of the Puri coding methods which change a Precoding procession regularly is used, signal processing part 711 should just perform recovery processing using the expression of relations of the formula (143) of the formula (41) of (several 41), and (several 153). A channel procession (H) can be obtained from the output of a channel change estimating part (705_1, 705_2, 707_1, 707_2), and the composition of the procession changes with transmission methods which the Precoding procession (F or W) used. The Precoding procession using the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly especially case [ a procession ], each time [ a procession ] and used will be changed, and it will get over. Also when using space-time block numerals, it will get over using a channel estimation value and a received (baseband) signal.

1214Drawing 75 corresponds to DVB-T2 standard, and shows the composition of the receiving set of a terminal corresponding to standards other than DVB-T2, and attaches the same numerals about what operates like Drawing 7, Drawing 56, and Drawing 73.<br />The point that the receiving set of Drawing 75 differs from the receiving set of Drawing 73 and Drawing 74, the recovery of the receiving set of Drawing 75 is attained to both of the signal of DVB-T2 standard and the other standard -- as -- P2 symbol or the 1st, and the 2nd -- it is the point of providing Signalling*data demodulation section 7501.<br />The 1st and 2nd Signalling*data demodulation section 7501, Signal 704after signal processing_X, 704_Y, and P1 symbol control information 7302 is considered as an input, The signal corresponding to DVB-T2 standard in the signal received based on P1 symbol control information, Or it judges whether it is a signal corresponding to the other standard (for example, it can judge by Table 3.), and gets over by performing signal processing (error correction decoding is included), and the standard to which the received signal corresponds outputs control information 7502 include that information which is what. About the other portion, it becomes the same operation as Drawing 73 and Drawing 74.<br />As mentioned above, the high data of receiving quality can be obtained by receiving the signal which the sending set of the broadcasting station indicated by Embodiment A1 transmitted, and giving suitable signal processing by having composition of a receiving set as shown by this embodiment. Especially when the signal of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is received, in the LOS environment, coexistence of improvement in the transmission efficiency of data and improvement in data reception quality can be realized.<br />It is although the number of receiving antennas was explained about the composition of the receiving set at the time of two since the composition of the receiving set corresponding to the transmission method of the broadcasting station described by Embodiment A1 was explained in this embodiment, Since the number of antennas of a receiving set is not what was restricted to two, and can be similarly carried out as three or more and its diversity gain improves at this time, it can raise the receiving quality of data. When the number of transmitting antennas of the sending set of a broadcasting station is made or more into three and the number of transmitting abnormal-conditions signals is made or more into three, it can carry out similarly by making the number of receiving antennas of the receiving set of a terminal increase. At this time, it is desirable to have applied the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly as a transmission method.<br />It is as Embodiment 16 having shown to the example of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly from Embodiment 1. However, about the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, It is not what was restricted to the method shown by Embodiment 16 from Embodiment 1, While choosing one Precoding procession for every slot from a plurality of Precoding processions which prepare multiple Precoding processions and were prepared and performing Precoding, If it is a method which changes the Precoding procession regularly used for every slot, this embodiment can be carried out similarly.

1215(Embodiment A3)<br />The control information which was indicated by Embodiment A1 and which specifies a pilot's insertion pattern as DVB-T2 standard by L1*Pre-Signalling in the system to which the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applied exists. This embodiment explains the application method of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly when, changing a pilot insertion pattern by L1*pre-signalling.

1216Drawing 76 and Drawing 77 show an example of the frame composition in the frequency-time-axis of DVB-T2 standard when using the transmission method which transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals from two or more antennas using the same frequency band. In Drawing 76 and Drawing 77, the horizontal axis shows frequency, i.e., a career number, and it is a vertical axis, Time is shown and the frame composition of abnormal-conditions signal z1 in the embodiment which explained (A) until now, and (B) show the frame composition of abnormal-conditions signal z2 in the embodiment described until now. As a career number, the index called "t1, t2, t3 ..." is attached as "f0, f1, f2 ...", and time. And in Drawing 76 and Drawing 77, the symbol of the same career number and the same time turns into a symbol which exists in the same frequency and the same time.

1217Drawing 76 and Drawing 77 show the example of the insertion point of the pilot symbol in DVB-T2 standard. (Although eight kinds of methods related with a pilot's insertion point exist in DVB-T2 standard when transmitting a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals using two or more antennas) Drawing 76 and Drawing 77 show two of them. In Drawing 76 and Drawing 77, two kinds of symbols, the symbol for a pilot and the symbol for data communications, are indicated. The Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly as other embodiments explained, Or when the Precoding procession uses the fixed Puri coding method, it is a symbol for the data communications of abnormal-conditions signal z1, It becomes a symbol after the composition after dignity attachment of stream s1 and stream s2, and the symbol for the data communications of abnormal-conditions signal z2 also turns into a symbol after dignity attachment composition of stream s1 and stream s2. When space-time block numerals and a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method are used, it is a symbol for the data communications of abnormal-conditions signal z1, It becomes a symbol of either stream s1 or stream s2, and the symbol for the data communications of abnormal-conditions signal z2 also turns into a symbol of either stream s1 or stream s2. In Drawing 76 and Drawing 77, either of the indexes of "PP1" or "PP2" is given to the symbol for a pilot, and it becomes a different pilot symbol of a constitution method by "PP1" and "PP2." As the above-mentioned also described, it is at DVB-T2 standard, A broadcasting station can specify now one insertion method of eight kinds of pilot insertion methods (the insertion frequency in the frame of a pilot symbol differs), and Drawing 76 and Drawing 77 show two kinds of eight kinds of above-mentioned pilot insertion methods. And the information about the pilot insertion method which the broadcasting station chose from eight kinds of inside is transmitted to the terminal which is a transmitting partner as L1*Pre-Signalling*data of the P2 symbols described by Embodiment A1.

1218Next, the application method of the Puri coding method accompanying a pilot insertion method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is explained. As an example, different Precoding procession F of the plurality in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly to prepare is made into ten kinds, A Precoding procession shall be expressed as F [0], F [1], F [2], F [3], F [4], F [5], F [6], F [7], F [8], and F [9]. It is to Drawing 78 about a situation when a Precoding procession when the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly was applied in the frame composition in the frequency-time-axis of Drawing 76 is assigned, In the frame composition in the frequency-time of Drawing 77, a situation when a Precoding procession when the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly was applied is assigned is shown in Drawing 79. Although the symbol of f1 and t1 is indicated to be "#1" for example, also in the frame composition of abnormal-conditions signal z1 of (A) of Drawing 78, the frame composition of abnormal-conditions signal z2 of (B), and any, As for this, the symbol of f1 and t1 means that Precoding is performed using the Precoding procession of F [1]. Therefore, in Drawing 78 and Drawing 79, it is career fx (x= 0, 1, 2, ...), When the symbol of ty (y= 1, 2, 3, ...) is indicated to be "#Z", the symbol of fx and ty means that Precoding is performed using the Precoding procession of F [Z].

1219Although it is natural, in the frame composition in the frequency-time-axis of Drawing 78 and Drawing 79, the insertion methods (insert space) of a pilot symbol differ. To a pilot symbol if, the Puri coding method which changes a regular Precoding procession is not applied. For this reason, it is even if it applies the Puri coding method with which both same synchronizations (the number of different Precoding processions prepared as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly) change a Precoding procession regularly in Drawing 78 and Drawing 79, As shown in Drawing 78 and Drawing 79, in Drawing 78 and Drawing 79, the case where it differs generates the Precoding procession to which the symbol of the same career and the same time is also assigned. For example, the symbol of f5 and t2 of Drawing 78 is indicated to be "#7", and Precoding will be performed by the Precoding procession by F [7]. On the other hand, the symbol of f5 and t2 of Drawing 79 is indicated to be "#8", and Precoding will be performed by the Precoding procession by F [8].<br />Therefore, it is although a broadcasting station will transmit the control information which shows a pilot pattern (pilot insertion method) by L1*Pre-Signalling*data, The control information which shows this pilot pattern is control information on Table 4 or 5, while a pilot insertion method is shown, When a broadcasting station chooses the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly as a transmission method which transmits PLP, it may be made for how to assign the Precoding procession in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly to be shown. Therefore, a receiving set of the terminal which receives the abnormal-conditions signal which the broadcasting station transmitted, By acquiring the control information which shows the pilot pattern in L1*Pre-Signnaling*data, how to assign the Precoding procession in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly can be learned. (As the transmission method to which a broadcasting station transmits PLP using the control information on Table 4 or 5 at this time) It will be the requisite to have chosen the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly. Although here is explaining in addition using L1*Pre-Signalling*data, When it is the frame composition of Drawing 70 where P2 symbol does not exist, the control information which shows a pilot pattern and how to assign the Precoding procession in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly -- the [ 1st ] -- it will exist in 2*Signalling*data.

1220Below, further another example is explained. For example, when the Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly at the same time a modulation method is specified as shown in Table 2 is determined, It is being able to consider it above-mentioned explanation the same way, and transmitting only the control information of a pilot pattern on P2 symbol, the control information on the transmission method of PLP, and the control information on a modulation method, The receiving set of a terminal can presume how to assign the Precoding procession of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly (it can set on a frequency-time-axis) by acquiring these pieces of control information. When the Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which similarly changes a Precoding procession regularly at the same time a modulation method and the method of an error correcting code are specified as shown in Table 1B is determined, A receiving set which is a terminal in transmitting only the control information of a pilot pattern on P2 symbol, the control information on the transmission method of PLP, the control information on a modulation method, and the method of an error correcting code, By acquiring these pieces of control information, how to assign the Precoding procession of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly (it can set on a frequency-time-axis) can be presumed.

1221However, even if it determines a modulation method unlike Table 1B and Table 2, either of two or more kinds of different Puri coding methods which change a Precoding procession regularly can be chosen. (For example, it can choose from the Puri coding method with which cycles differ and which changes a Precoding procession regularly.) Or it can choose from the Puri coding method with which the Precoding processions itself differ and which changes a Precoding procession regularly, Or even if it determines a modulation method and an error correction method, either of two or more kinds of different methods of changing a Precoding procession regularly can be chosen, or the case where it can choose from two or more kinds of different Puri coding methods which change a Precoding procession regularly even if it determines an error correction method -- Table 5 -- like Although the Precoding procession change method of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly will be transmitted, In addition, the information about how to assign the Precoding procession of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly (it can set on a frequency-time-axis) may be transmitted.<br />The example of composition of the control information about the information about how to assign the Precoding procession of the Puri coding method at that time, which changes a Precoding procession regularly (it can set on a frequency-time-axis) is shown in Table 7.

1222<tables num="7"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0568.tif" /></tables>

1223For example, as a pilot's insertion pattern, the sending set of the broadcasting station should choose Drawing 76, and should choose the method, A, as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly. At this time, the sending set of a broadcasting station makes selectable either Drawing 78 or Drawing 80 as how to assign a Precoding procession (it can set on a frequency-time-axis). For example, when the sending set of a broadcasting station chooses Drawing 78, "MATRIX_FRAME_ARRANGEMENT" of Table 7 is set to "00", and when Drawing 80 is chosen, "MATRIX_FRAME_ARRANGEMENT" of Table 7 shall be set to "01." And the receiving set of a terminal can learn how to assign a Precoding procession (it can set on a frequency-time-axis) by acquiring the control information on Table 7. The control information on Table 7 can be transmitted by P2 symbol, and transmitting by the 1st and 2nd Signalling*data is also possible.<br />As mentioned above, how based on a pilot insertion method to assign the Precoding procession of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is realized, And the receiving set of the terminal which is a transmitting partner can acquire the effect that coexistence of improvement in the transmission efficiency of data and improvement in the receiving quality of data can be aimed at, by transmitting the information on the method of assigning to a transmitting partner exactly.<br />In this embodiment, although the case where the number of transmitted signals of a broadcasting station was set to 2 was explained, when the number of transmitting antennas of the sending set of a broadcasting station is made or more into three and the number of transmitting abnormal-conditions signals is made or more into three, it can carry out similarly. It is as Embodiment 16 having shown to the example of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly from Embodiment 1. However, about the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, It is not what was restricted to the method shown by Embodiment 16 from Embodiment 1, While choosing one Precoding procession for every slot from a plurality of Precoding processions which prepare multiple Precoding processions and were prepared and performing Precoding, If it is a method which changes the Precoding procession regularly used for every slot, this embodiment can be carried out similarly.<br />(Embodiment A4)<br />In the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, this embodiment describes the repetition (repetition) method for raising the receiving quality of data.<br />Although the composition of the sending set to which the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applied is as having been shown in Drawing 3, Drawing 4, Drawing 13, Drawing 40, and Drawing 53, This embodiment explains the example of application at the time of applying repetition to the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly.<br />Drawing 81 shows an example of the composition of the signal processing part of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly at the time of repetition application. Drawing 81 is equivalent to signal processing part 5308, when it thinks in Drawing 53.<br />Baseband signal 8101_1 of Drawing 81 is equivalent to baseband signal 5307_1 of Drawing 53, is a baseband signal after mapping and turns into a baseband signal of stream s1. Similarly, baseband signal 8101_2 of Drawing 81 is equivalent to baseband signal 5307_2 of Drawing 53, is a baseband signal after mapping and turns into a baseband signal of stream s2.

1224Signal processing part (duplicate part) 8102_1 considers baseband signal 8101_1 and control signal 8104 as an input, and reproduces a baseband signal based on the information on the number of times of repetition contained in control signal 8104. For example, the information on the number of times of repetition contained in control signal 8104, When are indicated as 4 times of repetitions and baseband signal 8101_1 is a signal of s11, s12, s13, s14, and ... to the time-axis, signal processing part (duplicate part) 8102_1 reproduces each signal 4 times, and outputs it. (Therefore, output 8103_1 of signal processing part (duplicate part) 8102_1, i.e., the baseband signal after Revelation) To a time-axis, four s11 is outputted like s11, s11, s11, and s11, and after that, four s12 is outputted like s12, s12, s12, and s12, and it outputs with s13, s13, s13, s13, s14, s14, s14, s14, and ...<br />Signal processing part (duplicate part) 8102_2 considers baseband signal 8101_2 and control signal 8104 as an input, and reproduces a baseband signal based on the information on the number of times of repetition contained in control signal 8104. For example, the information on the number of times of repetition contained in control signal 8104, When are indicated as 4 times of repetitions and baseband signal 8101_2 is a signal of s21, s22, s23, s24, and ... to the time-axis, signal processing part (duplicate part) 8102_2 reproduces each signal 4 times, and outputs it. (Therefore, output 8103_2 of signal processing part (duplicate part) 8102_2, i.e., the baseband signal after Revelation) To a time-axis, four s21 is outputted like s21, s21, s21, and s21, and after that, four s22 is outputted like s22, s22, s22, and s22, and it outputs with s23, s23, s23, s23, s24, s24, s24, s24, and ...

1225Dignity attachment synchronizer (Precoding operation part) 8105, Baseband signal 8103_1 after Revelation, 8103_2, and control signal 8104 are considered as an input, Precoding based on the information on the Puri coding method which is included in control signal 8104 and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is given, That is, to baseband signal 8103_1 after Revelation, and 8103_2, dignity attachment composition is performed and it is baseband signal 8106_1 after Precoding (here). It expresses z1(i). Baseband signal 8106_2 (here, it expresses z2(i).) after Precoding is outputted (however, i expresses turn (time or frequency)).<br />The following relations will be realized, if baseband signal 8103_1 after Revelation and 8103_2 are made into y1(i) and y2(i) and a Precoding procession is made into F(i), respectively.

1226<maths num="561"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0569.tif" /></maths>

1227However, if N (N is an integer greater than or equal to 2) Precoding processions prepared for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly are set to F [0], *F [1], *F [2], F [3], ..., *F [N-1], it will set at a ceremony (475), F(i) is F [0] about a Precoding procession,<br />F [1], *F [2], *F [3], and * -- either ... or *F [N-1] shall be used<br />Here, in y1(i), i shall be four duplicate baseband signals s11, s11, s11, and s11 in 0, 1, 2, and 3, and y2(i)s shall be four duplicate baseband signals s21, s21, s21, and s21, for example. Then, it becomes important that the following conditions are satisfied.

1228<maths num="562"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0570.tif" /></maths>

1229The above is generalized and considered. The number of times of repetition is made into K times, and i is g._０g_１g_２..., g_K-1(Getting it blocked. g)_jIn the integer of 0 to K-1, y1(i) of j shall be s11. Then, it becomes important that the following conditions are satisfied.

1230<maths num="563"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0571.tif" /></maths>

1231Similarly, the number of times of repetition is made into K times, and i is h._０h_１h_２..., h_K-1(Getting it blocked. h)_jIn the integer of 0 to K-1, y2(i) of j shall be s21. Then, it becomes important that the following conditions are satisfied.

1232<maths num="564"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0572.tif" /></maths>

1233At this time, it is g._j=h_jIt may Established and does not need to be materialized. By doing in this way, by using a Precoding procession which is different in the same stream that occurred by carrying out repetition, since it will transmit, the effect that the receiving quality of data improves can be acquired.<br />In this embodiment, although the case where the number of transmitted signals of a broadcasting station was set to 2 was explained, when the number of transmitting antennas of the sending set of a broadcasting station is made or more into three and the number of transmitting abnormal-conditions signals is made or more into three, it can carry out similarly. When the number of transmitted signals is set to Q, the number of times of repetition is made into K times, and i is g._０g_１g_２..., g_K-1(Getting it blocked. g)_jIn the integer of 0 to K-1, yb(i) of j shall be sb1 (b is an integer of 1 to Q). Then, it becomes important that the following conditions are satisfied.

1234<maths num="565"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0573.tif" /></maths>

1235However, F(i) serves as a Precoding procession at the time of Q in the number of transmitted signals.<br />Next, an example which is different in Drawing 81 is described using Drawing 82. In Drawing 82, the same numerals were attached about what operates like Drawing 81. In Drawing 82, a different point from Drawing 81 is a point which is rearranging data, as the same data is transmitted from a different antenna.

1236Baseband signal 8101_1 of Drawing 82 is equivalent to baseband signal 5307_1 of Drawing 53, is a baseband signal after mapping and turns into a baseband signal of stream s1. Similarly, baseband signal 8101_2 of Drawing 81 is equivalent to baseband signal 5307_2 of Drawing 53, is a baseband signal after mapping and turns into a baseband signal of stream s2.<br />Signal processing part (duplicate part) 8102_1 considers baseband signal 8101_1 and control signal 8104 as an input, and reproduces a baseband signal based on the information on the number of times of repetition contained in control signal 8104. For example, the information on the number of times of repetition contained in control signal 8104, When are indicated as 4 times of repetitions and baseband signal 8101_1 is a signal of s11, s12, s13, s14, and ... to the time-axis, signal processing part (duplicate part) 8102_1 reproduces each signal 4 times, and outputs it. (Therefore, output 8103_1 of signal processing part (duplicate part) 8102_1, i.e., the baseband signal after Revelation) To a time-axis, four s11 is outputted like s11, s11, s11, and s11, and after that, four s12 is outputted like s12, s12, s12, and s12, and it outputs with s13, s13, s13, s13, s14, s14, s14, s14, and ...<br />Signal processing part (duplicate part) 8102_2 considers baseband signal 8101_2 and control signal 8104 as an input, and reproduces a baseband signal based on the information on the number of times of repetition contained in control signal 8104. For example, the information on the number of times of repetition contained in control signal 8104, When are indicated as 4 times of repetitions and baseband signal 8101_2 is a signal of s21, s22, s23, s24, and ... to the time-axis, signal processing part (duplicate part) 8102_2 reproduces each signal 4 times, and outputs it. (Therefore, output 8103_2 of signal processing part (duplicate part) 8102_2, i.e., the baseband signal after Revelation) To a time-axis, four s21 is outputted like s21, s21, s21, and s21, and after that, four s22 is outputted like s22, s22, s22, and s22, and it outputs with s23, s23, s23, s23, s24, s24, s24, s24, and ...

1237Rearrangement part 8201 considers baseband signal 8103_1 after Revelation, baseband signal 8103_2 after Revelation, and control signal 8104 as an input, Based on the information on the repetition method included in control signal 8104, data is rearranged and baseband signal 8202_1 after rearrangement and 8202_2 are outputted. For example, baseband signal 8103_1 after Revelation receives a time-axis, s11 shall be constituted from four pieces like s11, s11, s11, and s11, and baseband signal 8103_2 after Revelation shall comprise four pieces in s21 like s21, s21, s21, and s21 to a time-axis similarly. In Drawing 82, s11 is outputted as both y1(i) of a formula (475), and y2(i), and s21 is similarly outputted as both y1(i) of a formula (475), and y2(i). Therefore, the same rearrangement as s11 is given also to (s12, s13, ...), and the same rearrangement as s21 is given also to (s22, s23, ...). Therefore, baseband signal 8202_1 after rearrangement becomes s11, s21, s11, s21, s12, s22, s12, s22, s13, s23, s13, s23, and ..., and this is equivalent to y1(i) of a formula (475). The turn (here, referred to as s11, s21, s11, and s21) of s11 and s21 is not what was restricted to this, and it may become what kind of turn, and similarly, turn may be set to s13 also about s12 and s22, and may turn into what kind of turn about s23. And baseband signal 8202_2 after rearrangement becomes s21, s11, s21, s11, s22, s12, s22, s12, s23, s13, s23, s13, and ..., and this is equivalent to y2(i) of a formula (475). The turn (here, referred to as s21, s11, s21, and s11) of s11 and s21 is not what was restricted to this, and it may become what kind of turn, and similarly, turn may be set to s13 also about s12 and s22, and may turn into what kind of turn about s23.

1238Dignity attachment synchronizer (Precoding operation part) 8105, Baseband signal 8202_1 after rearrangement, 8202_2, and control signal 8104 are considered as an input, Precoding based on the information on the Puri coding method which is included in control signal 8104 and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is given, That is, to baseband signal 8202_1 after rearrangement, and 8202_2, dignity attachment composition is performed and it is baseband signal 8106_1 after Precoding (here). It expresses z1(i). Baseband signal 8106_2 (here, it expresses z2(i).) after Precoding is outputted (however, i expresses turn (time or frequency)).<br />If baseband signal 8202_1 after rearrangement and 8202_2 are made into y1(i) and y2(i) and a Precoding procession is made into F(i) as above-mentioned, respectively, the relation of a formula (475) will be materialized.

1239However, if N (N is an integer greater than or equal to 2) Precoding processions prepared for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly are set to F [0], *F [1], *F [2], F [3], ..., *F [N-1], it will set at a ceremony (475), F(i) is F [0] about a Precoding procession,<br />F [1], *F [2], *F [3], and * -- either ... or *F [N-1] shall be used<br />In Above, although the number of times of repetition was explained as 4 times, it is not what was restricted to this. And like the time of explaining using Drawing 81, if several 304 to several 307 conditions are satisfied also to the time of the composition of Drawing 82, high receiving quality can be obtained.

1240The composition of a receiving set is as having been shown in Drawing 7 and Drawing 56, uses that the relation between a formula (144) and a formula (475) is materialized, and is at a signal processing part, It restores to the bit which restores to the bit transmitted by each of (s11, s12, s13 and s14, ...), and is transmitted by each of (s21, s22, s23 and s24, ...). Each bit may be computed as a logarithm likelihood ratio, and may be obtained as a hard decision value. For example, since K times of repetitions are performed, s11 is using this and it becomes possible to obtain the reliable estimate of the bit transmitted by s1. The estimate of the transmitted bit same also to (s21, s22 and s23, ...) in (s12, s13, ...) and , and reliable can be obtained.

1241By this embodiment, when repetition was performed, how to apply the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly was explained. When both of a slot who have transmitted data without performing the slot and repetition which performed repetition and have transmitted data at this time exist, Which transmission method including the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, and the Puri coding method with a fixed Precoding procession may be used for the communication method of the slot which has transmitted data without performing repetition. That is, to the slot which performed repetition, in a receiving set, it becomes important to use the transmission method of this embodiment itself, when obtaining the receiving quality of high data.

1242In the system relevant to the DVB standard explained by Embodiment A3 from Embodiment A1, P2 symbol and the 1st and 2nd signallingdata, As the method which transmits P2 symbol and the 1st and 2nd signalling*data since it is necessary to secure receiving quality from PLP, Since the receiving quality in the receiving set of control information will improve if the Puri coding method which was explained by this embodiment, to which repetition is applied and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applied, it becomes important in order to operate a system stably.<br />In this embodiment, it is as Embodiment 16 having shown to the example of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly from Embodiment 1. However, about the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, It is not what was restricted to the method shown by Embodiment 16 from Embodiment 1, While choosing one Precoding procession for every slot from a plurality of Precoding processions which prepare multiple Precoding processions and were prepared and performing Precoding, If it is a method which changes the Precoding procession regularly used for every slot, this embodiment can be carried out similarly.<br />(Embodiment A5)<br />This embodiment explains how to transmit an abnormal-conditions signal by performing common amplification to the transmission method explained by Embodiment A1.

1243Drawing 83 shows an example of the composition of a sending set, and attached the same numerals about what operates like Drawing 52.<br />Modulating signal generation part [ of Drawing 83 ] #1 to #M (from 5201_1 to 5201_M) is Drawing 63 from an input signal (input data), Or it is for generating signal 6323_1 after the processing for P1 symbols of Drawing 72, and 6323_2, and outputs abnormal-conditions signal z1 (from 5202_1 to 5202_M), and abnormal-conditions signal z2 (from 5203_1 to 5203_M).

1244Wireless processing section 8301_1 of Drawing 83 considers abnormal-conditions signal z1 (from 5202_1 to 5202_M) as an input, it amplifies by performing signal processing, such as frequency conversion, abnormal-conditions signal 8302_1 is outputted, and abnormal-conditions signal 8302_1 is outputted as an electric wave from antenna 8303_1.<br />Similarly, wireless processing section 8301_2 considers abnormal-conditions signal z1 (from 5203_1 to 5203_M) as an input, it amplifies by performing signal processing, such as frequency conversion, abnormal-conditions signal 8302_2 is outputted, and abnormal-conditions signal 8302_2 is outputted as an electric wave from antenna 8303_2.

1245As mentioned above, it is very good in the transmission method of carrying out frequency conversion of the abnormal-conditions signal of a different frequency band at once, and amplifying it to the transmission method of Embodiment A1.<br />(Embodiment B1)<br />Below, the example of application of a transmission method and a receiving method shown by each above-mentioned embodiment and the example of composition of the system using it are explained.

1246Drawing 84 is a figure showing the example of composition of the system containing the device which performs the transmission method and receiving method which were shown by the above-mentioned embodiment. A transmission method and a receiving method which were shown by each above-mentioned embodiment, A broadcasting station as shown in Drawing 84, It carries out in system 8400 for digital broadcasting containing television (television) 8411, DVD recorder 8412, STB(Set*Top*Box)8413, computer 8420, mounted television 8441, and the receiver of various kinds of mobile phone 8430 grade. Specifically, broadcasting station 8401 transmits the multiplexing data in which picture image data, voice data, etc. were multiplexed to a predetermined transmission band using the transmission method shown by each above-mentioned embodiment.

1247The signal transmitted from broadcasting station 8401 is received by the antenna (for example, antennas 8560 and 8440) which was built in each receiver, or was installed outside and connected with the receiver concerned. It gets over using the receiving method which showed the signal received in the antenna by each above-mentioned embodiment, and each receiver acquires multiplexing data. Thereby, system 8400 for digital broadcasting can acquire the effect of the invention in this application explained by each above-mentioned embodiment.

1248Picture image data contained in multiplexing data here, For example, it is coded using the moving image encoding method based on standards, such as MPEG(Moving Picture Experts Group) 2, MPEG4-AVC (Advanced Video Coding), and VC-1. The voice data contained in multiplexing data is for example, Dolbey AC(Audio Coding)-3 and Dolby Digital Plus, It is coded with sound encoding methods, such as MLP (Meridian Lossless Packing), DTS (Digital Theater Systems), DTS-HD, and linear PCM (Pulse Coding Modulation).

1249Drawing 85 is a figure showing an example of the composition of receiver 8500 which enforces the receiving method explained by each above-mentioned embodiment. As shown in Drawing 85, the constitution method of constituting a modem portion from one LSI (or chip set), and constituting the portion of a codec from one another LSI (or chip set) as an example of one composition of receiver 8500 can be considered. Receiver 8500 shown in Drawing 85 is equivalent to the composition with which television (television) 8411 shown in Drawing 84, DVD recorder 8412, STB(Set*Top*Box)8413, computer 8420, mounted television 8441, and mobile phone 8430 grade are provided. Receiver 8500 comprises: Tuner 8501 which changes into a baseband signal a high frequency signal received with antenna 8560, Demodulation section 8502 which restores to a baseband signal by which frequency conversion was carried out, and acquires multiplexing data. The receiving method shown by each above-mentioned embodiment is enforced in demodulation section 8502, and can acquire the effect of the invention in this application which this explained by each above-mentioned embodiment.

1250Receiver 8500 comprises: Stream I/O part 8520 which separates picture image data and voice data from multiplexing data obtained by demodulation section 8502, Signal processing part 8504 which decodes picture image data to a picture signal using a video decoding method corresponding to separated picture image data, and decodes voice data to an audio signal using a voice decoding method corresponding to separated voice data, Voice output parts 8506, such as a speaker which outputs a decoded audio signal, Image displays 8507, such as a display which displays a decoded picture signal.

1251For example, a user transmits the information on the tuned-in channel (the tuned-in program (television), the tuned-in audio broadcast) to operation input section 8510 using remote control (remote controller) 8550. Then, receiver 8500 will process the signal which is equivalent to the tuned-in channel in the received signal received with antenna 8560 for a recovery, error correction decoding, etc., and receiving data will be obtained. Transmission methods (a transmission method, a modulation method, an error correction method, etc. which were described by the above-mentioned embodiment) (this) included in the signal which is equivalent to the channel which tuned in receiver 8500 at this time Embodiment A1 - Embodiment A4 have described, and it is as given in Drawing 5 and Drawing 41. It is acquiring the information on a control symbol including information, It becomes possible to obtain the data contained in the data symbol which transmitted at the broadcasting station (base station) by setting up correctly methods, such as reception operation, a demodulation method, and error correction decoding. In Above, although the user explained the example which tunes in a channel with the remote control 8550, even if he tunes in a channel using the tuning key which receiver 8500 carries, he becomes the same operation as the above.

1252By the above-mentioned composition, the user can view and listen to the program received with the receiving method which receiver 8500 showed by each above-mentioned embodiment.<br />Multiplexing data obtained by restoring to receiver 8500 of this embodiment by demodulation section 8502, and decoding an error correction (error correction decoding may not be performed to the signal acquired by getting over by demodulation section 8502 depending on the case.) Signal processing of others [ receiver / 8500 / after / error correction decoding ] may be given. This point is the same also about the portion which is performing same expression about henceforth. Data contained, Or it has record part (drive) 8508 which records the data (for example, data obtained by compressing data) equivalent to the data, and the data produced by processing an animation and a sound on archive media, such as semiconductor memory of a magnetic disk, an optical disc, and fixity. An optical disc is an archive medium into which memory and read-out of information are made, for example using laser beams, such as DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) and BD (Blu-rayDisc), here. Magnetic disks are FD (Floppy (registered trademark) Disk) and a hard disk (Hard), for example. It is an archive medium which memorizes information by magnetizing a magnetic body using magnetic flux, such as Disk. The semiconductor memory of fixity is a flash memory, ferroelectric random-access memory (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory), etc., for example, It is the archive medium constituted by the semiconductor device, and SD card, Flash SSD (Solid State Drive), etc. using a flash memory are mentioned. The kind of archive medium quoted here is the example to the last, and it cannot be overemphasized that it may record using archive media other than the above-mentioned archive medium.

1253By the above-mentioned composition, a user records and saves the program received with the receiving method which receiver 8500 showed by each above-mentioned embodiment, and it becomes possible to read, view and listen to the data recorded on the arbitrary time after the time when the program is broadcast.<br />In the above-mentioned explanation, although it got over by demodulation section 8502 and receiver 8500 presupposed that the multiplexing data obtained by decoding an error correction is recorded in record part 8508, it may extract and record some data among the data contained in multiplexing data. For example, when the contents of the data-broadcasting service of those other than picture image data or voice data, etc. are contained in the multiplexing data obtained by getting over by demodulation section 8502 and decoding an error correction, Record part 8508 may record the new multiplexing data which extracted and carried out multiplex [ of picture image data or the voice data ] from the multiplexing data to which it restored by demodulation section 8502. It may get over by demodulation section 8502, and record part 8508 may record the new multiplexing data which carried out multiplex [ only of either ] among the picture image data and voice data which are contained in the multiplexing data obtained by decoding an error correction. And record part 8508 may record the contents of the data-broadcasting service included in the multiplexing data described above.

1254Television, a recorder (for example, a DVD recorder, a Blu-ray recorder) When receivers 8500 explained to the mobile phone by the present invention, such as a HDD recorder and SD card, are carried, To the multiplexing data obtained by getting over by demodulation section 8502 and decoding an error correction, When the data for correcting the defect (bug) of the software for preventing the outflow of data and personal information for correcting the defect (bug) of the software used for operating television and a recorder, or the recorded data is contained, The defect of the software of television or a recorder may be corrected by installing these data. And when the data for correcting the defect (bug) of the software of receiver 8500 to data is contained, the defect of receiver 8500 can also be corrected with this data. Thereby, it becomes possible for a stable target to make it operate more of the television, recorder, and mobile phone by which receiver 8500 is carried.

1255Here, processing which extracts and carries out multiplex [ of some data ] from a plurality of data contained in the multiplexing data obtained by getting over by demodulation section 8502 and decoding an error correction is performed, for example in stream I/O part 8503. Directions from control parts, such as CPU which stream I/O part 8503 is not specifically illustrating, The multiplexing data to which it restored by demodulation section 8502 is divided into a plurality of data of the contents of picture image data, voice data, and data-broadcasting service, etc., multiplex [ only of the data specified from the data after separation ] is extracted and carried out, and new multiplexing data is generated. About which data is extracted from the data after separation, a user may determine, for example and it may be beforehand decided for every kind of archive medium.

1256Since receiver 8500 can extract and record only required data by the above-mentioned composition when it views and listens to the recorded program, the data size of the data to record is reducible.<br />By the above-mentioned explanation, record part 8508 is although it got over at demodulation section 8502 and the multiplexing data obtained by decoding an error correction is recorded, Like [ to which data size or the bit rate becomes low rather than the picture image data concerned about the picture image data contained in the multiplexing data obtained by getting over by demodulation section 8502 and decoding an error correction ], It may change into the picture image data coded with a different video encoding method from the video encoding method given to the picture image data concerned, and may record the new multiplexing data which carried out multiplex [ of the picture image data after conversion ]. At this time, the video encoding method given to the original picture image data and the video encoding method given to the picture image data after conversion may be based on a mutually different standard, and may differ only in the parameter used based on the same standard at the time of coding. Like [ to which similarly data size or the bit rate becomes low rather than the voice data concerned about the voice data contained in the multiplexing data obtained by restoring to record part 8508 by demodulation section 8502, and decoding an error correction ], It may change into the voice data coded with a different sound encoding method from the sound encoding method given to the voice data concerned, and may record the new multiplexing data which carried out multiplex [ of the voice data after conversion ].

1257Processing which changes the picture image data contained in the multiplexing data obtained by getting over by demodulation section 8502 and decoding an error correction here, and voice data into the picture image data in which data size differs from the bit rate, or voice data, For example, it is carried out by stream I/O part 8503 and signal processing part 8504. The multiplexing data obtained because stream I/O part 8503 gets over by demodulation section 8502 and specifically decodes an error correction with the directions from control parts, such as CPU, is divided into a plurality of data of the contents of picture image data, voice data, and data-broadcasting service, etc. Processing from which signal processing part 8504 changes the picture image data after separation into the picture image data coded with a different video encoding method from the video encoding method to which it was given at the picture image data concerned with the directions from a control part, And processing changed into the voice data coded with a different sound encoding method from the sound encoding method to which voice data after separation was given at the voice data concerned is performed. With the directions from a control part, stream I/O part 8503 carries out multiplex [ of the picture image data after conversion, and the voice data after conversion ], and generates new multiplexing data. Signal processing part 8504 may process conversion only to either according to the directions from a control part among picture image data and voice data, and may process conversion to both. A user may determine the data size or the bit rate of the picture image data after conversion, and voice data, and it may be beforehand decided for every kind of archive medium.

1258By the above-mentioned composition, receiver 8500 can change and record the data size or the bit rate of picture image data or voice data according to the speed at which data size recordable on an archive medium and record part 8508 perform record or read-out of data. Thereby, data size recordable on an archive medium gets over by demodulation section 8502, When smaller than the data size of the multiplexing data obtained by decoding an error correction, Since a record part is enabled to record a program even when the speed at which a record part performs record or read-out of data is lower than the bit rate of the multiplexing data to which it restored by demodulation section 8502, It enables a user to read, view and listen to the data recorded on the arbitrary time after the time when the program is broadcast.

1259Receiver 8500 is provided with stream output IF(Interface: interface)8509 which transmits the multiplexing data to which it restored by demodulation section 8502 via communication media 8530 to external apparatus. As an example of stream output IF8509, Wi-Fi (registered trademark) (IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b) WiGiG(s), such as IEEE802.11g and IEEE802.11n, The radio communication equipment which transmits the multiplexing data modulated using the wireless communication method based on wireless-communications standards, such as WirelessHD, Bluetooth (registered trademark), and Zigbee (registered trademark), to external apparatus via a radio medium (equivalent to communication media 8530) is mentioned. Stream output IF8509 are Ethernet (registered trademark) and USB (Universal Serial Bus), PLC (Power Line Communication), Pass the cable transmission way (equivalent to communication media 8530) where the multiplexing data modulated using the correspondence procedure based on cable-communications standards, such as HDMI (High-Definition MultimediaInterface), was connected to the stream output IF8509 concerned. It may be a cable-communications device which transmits to external apparatus.

1260By the above-mentioned composition, the user can use the multiplexing data received with the receiving method which receiver 8500 showed by each above-mentioned embodiment by external apparatus. With use of multiplexing data here, it includes recording multiplexing data in the record part with which external apparatus was equipped, transmitting [ that a user views and listens to multiplexing data in real time using external apparatus, ] multiplexing data from external apparatus to another external apparatus, etc.

1261In the above-mentioned explanation, although it got over by demodulation section 8502 and receiver 8500 presupposed that stream output IF8509 outputs the multiplexing data obtained by decoding an error correction, it may extract and output some data among the data contained in multiplexing data. For example, when the contents of the data-broadcasting service of those other than picture image data or voice data, etc. are contained in the multiplexing data obtained by getting over by demodulation section 8502 and decoding an error correction, It may get over by demodulation section 8502, and stream output IF8509 may output the new multiplexing data which extracted and carried out multiplex [ of picture image data or the voice data ] from the multiplexing data obtained by decoding an error correction. Stream output IF8509 may output the new multiplexing data which carried out multiplex [ only of either ] among the picture image data and voice data which are contained in the multiplexing data to which it restored by demodulation section 8502.

1262Here, processing which extracts and carries out multiplex [ of some data ] from a plurality of data contained in the multiplexing data obtained by getting over by demodulation section 8502 and decoding an error correction is performed, for example in stream I/O part 8503. Directions from control parts, such as CPU (Central Processing Unit) which stream I/O part 8503 is not specifically illustrating, The multiplexing data to which it restored by demodulation section 8502 is divided into a plurality of data of the contents of picture image data, voice data, and data-broadcasting service, etc., multiplex [ only of the data specified from the data after separation ] is extracted and carried out, and new multiplexing data is generated. About which data is extracted from the data after separation, a user may determine, for example and it may be decided beforehand every kind of stream output IF8509.

1263Since receiver 8500 can extract and output only the data which needs external apparatus by the above-mentioned composition, the communication bands consumed by the output of multiplexing data are reducible.<br />By the above-mentioned explanation, stream output IF8509 is although it got over at demodulation section 8502 and the multiplexing data obtained by decoding an error correction is recorded, Like [ to which data size or the bit rate becomes low rather than the picture image data concerned about the picture image data contained in the multiplexing data obtained by getting over by demodulation section 8502 and decoding an error correction ], It may change into the picture image data coded with a different video encoding method from the video encoding method given to the picture image data concerned, and may output the new multiplexing data which carried out multiplex [ of the picture image data after conversion ]. At this time, the video encoding method given to the original picture image data and the video encoding method given to the picture image data after conversion may be based on a mutually different standard, and may differ only in the parameter used based on the same standard at the time of coding. Like [ to which similarly data size or the bit rate becomes low rather than the voice data concerned about the voice data contained in the multiplexing data obtained by restoring to stream output IF8509 by demodulation section 8502, and decoding an error correction ], It may change into the voice data coded with a different sound encoding method from the sound encoding method given to the voice data concerned, and may output the new multiplexing data which carried out multiplex [ of the voice data after conversion ].

1264Processing which changes the picture image data contained in the multiplexing data obtained by getting over by demodulation section 8502 and decoding an error correction here, and voice data into the picture image data in which data size differs from the bit rate, or voice data, For example, it is carried out by stream I/O part 8503 and signal processing part 8504. The multiplexing data obtained because stream I/O part 8503 gets over by demodulation section 8502 and specifically decodes an error correction with the directions from a control part is divided into a plurality of data of the contents of picture image data, voice data, and data-broadcasting service, etc. Processing from which signal processing part 8504 changes the picture image data after separation into the picture image data coded with a different video encoding method from the video encoding method to which it was given at the picture image data concerned with the directions from a control part, And processing changed into the voice data coded with a different sound encoding method from the sound encoding method to which voice data after separation was given at the voice data concerned is performed. With the directions from a control part, stream I/O part 8503 carries out multiplex [ of the picture image data after conversion, and the voice data after conversion ], and generates new multiplexing data. Signal processing part 8504 may process conversion only to either according to the directions from a control part among picture image data and voice data, and may process conversion to both. A user may determine the data size or the bit rate of the picture image data after conversion, and voice data, and it may be decided beforehand every kind of stream output IF8509.

1265By the above-mentioned composition, receiver 8500 can change and output the bit rate of picture image data or voice data according to the transmission speed between external apparatus. Thereby, the transmission speed between external apparatus gets over by demodulation section 8502, case it is lower than the bit rate of the multiplexing data obtained by decoding an error correction -- the external apparatus from stream output IF -- since it becomes possible to output new multiplexing data, it enables a user to use new multiplexing data in other communication apparatus.

1266Receiver 8500 is provided with AV (Audio and Visual) output IF(Interface)8511 which outputs the picture signal and audio signal which were decoded by signal processing part 8504 to external apparatus to external communication media. As an example of AV output IF8511, it is Wi-Fi (registered trademark) (IEEE802.11a). IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, IEEE802.11n, etc., The radio communication equipment which transmits the picture signal and audio signal which were modulated using the wireless communication method based on wireless-communications standards, such as WiGiG, WirelessHD, Bluetooth (registered trademark), and Zigbee (registered trademark), to external apparatus via a radio medium is mentioned. Stream output IF8509 are Ethernet (registered trademark) and USB, It may be a cable-communications device which transmits to external apparatus via the cable transmission way where the picture signal and audio signal which were modulated using the correspondence procedure based on cable-communications standards, such as PLC and HDMI, were connected to the stream output IF8509 concerned. Stream output IF8509 may be a terminal which connects the cable which outputs a picture signal and an audio signal with an analog signal.

1267By the above-mentioned composition, the user can use the picture signal and audio signal which were decoded by signal processing part 8504 by external apparatus.<br />Receiver 8500 is provided with operation input section 8510 which receives the input of user operation. Receiver 8500 is based on the control signal inputted into operation input section 8510 according to a user's operation, Setup, such as a change of various operations of the change of ON/OFF of a power supply, the change of the channel to receive, the existence of a title display and the change of the language to display, change of the volume outputted from voice output part 8506, etc. and a setup of a receivable channel, is changed.

1268Receiver 8500 may be provided with the function which displays the antenna level which shows the receiving quality of the signal under reception with the receiver 8500 concerned. RSSI of the signal which receiver 8500 received with the antenna level here, for example (Received Signal Strength Indication) Received Signal Strength Indicator, Receiving signal strength, received field intensity, C/N (Carrier-to-noise power ratio), BER (Bit Error Rate: bit error ratio), a packet error ratio, a frame error ratio, channel state information (ChannelState) It is an index which shows the receiving quality computed based on Information etc., and they are a signal level and a signal which shows the superiority or inferiority of a signal. In this case, RSSI of the signal which demodulation section 8502 received, received field intensity, Having a receiving quality measurement part which measures C/N, BER, a packet error ratio, a frame error ratio, channel state information, etc., receiver 8500 displays an antenna level (a signal level, the signal which shows the superiority or inferiority of a signal) on image display 8507 in form with an identifiable user according to a user's operation. The display style of an antenna level (a signal level, the signal which shows the superiority or inferiority of a signal), RSSI, received field intensity, C/N, BER, a packet error ratio, a frame error ratio, It seems that the numerical value according to channel state information etc. may be displayed, and a different picture according to RSSI, received field intensity, C/N, BER, a packet error ratio, a frame error ratio, channel state information, etc. may be displayed. a plurality of streams s1 and s2 separated by receiving receiver 8500 using the receiving method shown by each above-mentioned embodiment and ... a plurality of antenna levels (signal level) for which every was asked The signal which shows the superiority or inferiority of a signal may be displayed, and a plurality of streams s1 and s2 and one antenna level (a signal level, the signal which shows the superiority or inferiority of a signal) for which it asked from ... may be displayed. When the picture image data and voice data which constitute a program are transmitted using the hierarchy transmission method, it is possible even if the level (signal which shows the superiority or inferiority of a signal) of a signal is shown for every hierarchy.

1269By the above-mentioned composition, the user can grasp numerically or visually the antenna level in the case of receiving using the receiving method shown by each above-mentioned embodiment (a signal level, the signal which shows the superiority or inferiority of a signal).<br />Although receiver 8500 mentioned as the example the case where it had voice output part 8506, image display 8507, record part 8508, stream output IF8509, and AV output IF8511 and explained it by the above-mentioned explanation, it is not necessary to have all these composition. Since the multiplexing data obtained by restoring to a user by demodulation section 8502, and decoding an error correction can be used if receiver 8500 is provided with any at least one of the above-mentioned composition, According to the use, it may have each receiver, combining the above-mentioned composition arbitrarily.<br />(Multiplexing data)<br />Next, an example of the structure of multiplexing data is explained in detail. As a data structure used for broadcast, it is general, and an MPEG 2-transport stream (TS) mentions MPEG 2-TS as an example, and explains it here. However, no matter the data structure of the multiplexing data transmitted with the transmission method and receiving method which were shown by each above-mentioned embodiment may not be restricted to MPEG 2-TS but it may be what other data structures, it cannot be overemphasized that the effect explained by each of above-mentioned embodiments can be acquired.

1270Drawing 86 is a figure showing an example of the composition of multiplexing data. As shown in Drawing 86, multiplexing data is an element which constitutes the program (event which is programme or its part) sponsored now from each service, For example, it is obtained by multiplexing one or more of elementary streams, such as a video stream, an audio stream, a presentation graphics stream (PG), and an interactive GRAPHICS stream (IG). When the program sponsored by multiplexing data is a movie, as for the presentation graphics stream, the title of the movie is shown for the subsound for which, as for a video stream, an audio stream mixes the main image and subpicture of a movie with the fundamental sound voice portion of a movie, and the fundamental sound voice concerned, respectively. The main image shows here the usual image displayed on a screen, and subpictures are images (for example, image etc. of the text data which showed the outline of the movie) displayed on a small screen into the main image. The interactive graphics stream shows the dialog screen created by arranging a GUI section article on a screen.

1271Each stream contained in multiplexing data is identified by PID which is the identifier assigned to each stream. For example, 0x1011 is in the video stream used for the image of a movie, In from 0x1200 to 0x121F, in an audio stream, from 0x1100 to 0x111F is to presentation graphics, In the video stream which from 0x1400 to 0x141F uses for an interactive graphics stream at the subpicture of a movie, it is from 0x1B00 to 0x1B1F, 0x1A00 to 0x1A1F is assigned to the audio stream used for the subsound mixed with fundamental sound voice, respectively.

1272Drawing 87 is a figure showing an example of how multiplexing data is multiplexed typically. First, video stream 8701 which consists of a plurality of video frames, and audio stream 8704 which consists of a plurality of audio frames are changed into PES packet rows 8702 and 8705, respectively, and is changed into TS packets 8703 and 8706. Similarly the data of presentation graphics stream 8711 and interactive graphics 8714 is changed into PES packet rows 8712 and 8715, respectively, and also it changes into TS packets 8713 and 8716. Multiplexing data 8717 comprises multiplexing these TS packets (8703, 8706, 8713, 8716) to one stream.

1273Drawing 88 shows in more detail how a video stream is stored in a PES packet row. The 1st step in Drawing 88 shows the video frame sequence of a video stream. The 2nd step shows a PES packet row. As shown in arrow yy1 of Drawing 88, yy2, yy3, and yy4, I picture which are a plurality of Video Presentation Unit which can be set to a video stream, B picture, and P picture are divided for every picture, and are stored in the payload of a PES packet. Each PES packet has a PES header and DTS (Decoding Time-Stamp) which is the decoding time of PTS (Presentation Time-Stamp) or a picture which is the display time of a picture is stored in a PES header.

1274Drawing 89 shows the form of TS packet finally written in multiplexing data. TS packet is a packet of 188Byte fixed length which comprises a TS payload of 184Byte which stores TS header and data of 4Byte with information, including PID etc. which identify a stream, and the above-mentioned PES packet is divided and is stored in TS payload. In BD-ROM, TP_Extra_Header of 4Byte is given to TS packet, the source packet of 192Byte is constituted, and it is written in multiplexing data. Information, including ATS (Arrival_Time_Stamp) etc., is indicated to TP_Extra_Header. ATS shows the transmission start time to the PID filter of the decoder of the TS packet concerned. As shown in Drawing 89 lower berth, a source packet will be located in a line, and the number incremented from the head of multiplexing data is called SPN (source packet number) to multiplexing data.

1275In TS packet contained in multiplexing data, It is PAT (Program Association Table) besides each stream, such as a video stream, an audio stream, and a presentation graphics stream, There are PMT (Program Map Table), PCR (Program Clock Reference), etc. It is shown what PID of PAT of PMT used into multiplexing data is, and PAT's own PID is registered by zero. PMT has the attribute information on the stream corresponding to PID and each PID of each stream, such as an image, a sound, a title, etc. contained in multiplexing data, including a frame rate, an aspect ratio, etc., and has the various descriptors about multiplexing data. There are copy control information that permission and disapproval are directed etc. in a descriptor, about the copy of multiplexing data. PCR has the information on the STC time corresponding to ATS by which the PCR packet is transmitted to a decoder, in order to take the synchronization of ATC (Arrival Time Clock) which is a time-axis of ATS, and STC (System TimeClock) which is the time-axes of PTS-DTS.

1276Drawing 90 is a figure which illustrates the data structure of PMT in detail. The PMT header which described the length etc. of the data contained in the PMT in the head of PMT is arranged. Multiple descriptors about multiplexing data are arranged behind that. The above-mentioned copy control information etc. are indicated as a descriptor. After a descriptor, multiple stream information about each stream contained in multiplexing data is arranged. Stream information comprises a stream descriptor in which the stream type for identifying the compression codec of a stream, etc., PID of a stream, and the attribute information on a stream, including a frame rate, an aspect ratio, etc., were indicated. Only the number of streams with which a stream descriptor exists in multiplexing data exists.

1277When recording on a recording medium etc., the above-mentioned multiplexing data is recorded with a multiplexing data information file.<br />Drawing 91 is a figure showing the composition of the multiplexing data file information. A multiplexing data information file is the management information on multiplexing data, as shown in Drawing 91, corresponds to multiplexing data and 1 to 1, and comprises multiplexing data information, stream attribute information, and an entry map.

1278Multiplexing data information comprises a system rate, reproduction start time, and reproduction finish time, as shown in Drawing 91. A system rate shows the maximum transmission rate to the PID filter of a system target decoder which multiplexing data mentions below. The interval of ATS contained in multiplexing data is set up to become below a system rate. Playback start time is PTS of the video frame of the head of multiplexing data, and that by which playback finish time did the playback interval for one frame to PTS of the video frame of the termination of multiplexing data is set up.

1279Drawing 92 is a figure showing the composition of the stream attribute information included in multiplexing data file information. As stream attribute information is shown in Drawing 92, the attribute information about each stream contained in multiplexing data is registered for every PID. Attribute information has different information for every a video stream, audio stream, presentation graphics stream, and interactive graphics stream. It has which is the resolution of each picture data in which the video stream was compressed by what kind of compression codec, or video stream attribute information constitutes a video stream, which is an aspect ratio or which is a frame rate, and information. The number of channels by which the audio stream was compressed by what kind of compression codec, or audio stream attribute information is included in the audio stream is what, or to what language it corresponding and a sampling frequency have which it is and information. These pieces of information is used for initialization of the decoder before a player is reproduced, etc.

1280In this embodiment, the stream type included in PMT among the above-mentioned multiplexing data is used. When multiplexing data is recorded on the recording medium, the video stream attribute information included in multiplexing data information is used. The stream type specifically included in PMT in the video encoding method or device shown by each above-mentioned embodiment, Or the step or the means of setting up the peculiar information which shows that it is the picture image data generated by the video encoding method or device shown by each above-mentioned embodiment is established to video stream attribute information. It becomes possible to identify the picture image data generated with the video encoding method or device shown by each above-mentioned embodiment, and the picture image data based on other standards by this composition.

1281Drawing 93 shows an example of the composition of image speech output unit 9300 containing receiving set 9304 which receives the abnormal-conditions signal containing the image and the audio data which were transmitted from the broadcasting station (base station), or the data for data broadcasting. The composition of receiving set 9304 is equivalent to receiving set 8500 of Drawing 85. OS (Operating*System: operating system) is carried in image speech output unit 9300, for example, Communication apparatus 9306 (for example, wireless LAN (Local*Area*Network) and a communication apparatus for an ETHE network) for accessing the Internet is carried. Thereby, in portion 9301 which displays an image, they are an image and audio data, Or it becomes possible to display simultaneously image 9302 in the data for data broadcasting, and hypertext (World*Wide*Web (world * wide web: WWW)) 9303 provided on the Internet. And a remote control<br />(They may be a mobile phone and a keyboard) By operating 9307, either of hypertexts 9303 provided on image 9302 in the data for data broadcasting and the Internet will be chosen, and operation will be changed. For example, when hypertext 9303 provided on the Internet is chosen, the site of WWW currently displayed will be changed by operating a remote control. When image 9302 in an image and audio data, or the data for data broadcasting is chosen, the information on the tuned-in channel (the tuned-in program (television), the tuned-in audio broadcast) is transmitted with the remote control 9307. Then, IF9305 will acquire the information transmitted with the remote control, receiving set 9304 will process the signal equivalent to the tuned-in channel for a recovery, error correction decoding, etc., and receiving data will be obtained. A transmission method included in the signal which is equivalent to the channel which tuned in receiving set 9304 at this time (this) Embodiment A1 - Embodiment A4 have described, and it is as given in Drawing 5 and Drawing 41. It is acquiring the information on a control symbol including information, It becomes possible to obtain the data contained in the data symbol which transmitted at the broadcasting station (base station) by setting up correctly methods, such as reception operation, a demodulation method, and error correction decoding. In Above, although the user explained the example which tunes in a channel with the remote control 9307, even if he tunes in a channel using the tuning key which image speech output unit 9300 carries, he becomes the same operation as the above.

1282Image speech output unit 9300 may be operated using the Internet. For example, recording (memory) is reserved to image speech output unit 9300 from other terminals which are carrying out the Internet connectivity. (Therefore, image speech output unit 9300) As shown in Drawing 85, it will have record part 8508. And before starting recording, a channel will be tuned in, receiving set 9304 will process the signal equivalent to the tuned-in channel for a recovery, error correction decoding, etc., and receiving data will be obtained. Transmission methods (a transmission method, a modulation method, an error correction method, etc. which were described by the above-mentioned embodiment) (this) included in the signal which is equivalent to the channel which tuned in receiving set 9304 at this time Embodiment A1 - Embodiment A4 have described, and it is as given in Drawing 5 and Drawing 41. It is acquiring the information on a control symbol including information, It becomes possible to obtain the data contained in the data symbol which transmitted at the broadcasting station (base station) by setting up correctly methods, such as reception operation, a demodulation method, and error correction decoding.<br />(Embodiment C1)<br />By this embodiment, in Embodiment 2, although it is explaining in the Precoding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, it explains as a setting method of the Precoding procession in consideration of a receiving inferior point (Example (Example 1) 2) at this time. This embodiment explains the case where Embodiment 2 (Example (Example 1) 2) is generalized.

1283In the way cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula.

1284<maths num="566"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0574.tif" /></maths>

1285It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. (It shall be alpha&gt; 0) A unitary matrix is treated and a following formula expresses the Precoding procession of a formula (#1) in this embodiment.

1286<maths num="567"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0575.tif" /></maths>

1287It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. ((It shall be alpha&gt; 0) If simplification of mapping in a sending set and a receiving set is taken into consideration) It is good to consider it as lambda= 0 rad, pi/2rad, pi Radian, and (3 pi) / 2 rad, and it good to consider it as one fixed value of these three values. It is treating as alpha= 1 and a formula (#2) is expressed especially with Embodiment 2 as follows.

1288<maths num="568"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0576.tif" /></maths>

1289Like Embodiment 2, in order to arrange a receiving inferior point so that it may become uniform distribution to a phase on a complex plane, in a formula (#1) or a formula (#2), &lt;condition #101&gt; or &lt;condition #102&gt; are given.

1290<maths num="569"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0577.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1291<maths num="570"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0578.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1292In particular, it is theta._１１(i) When it does not depend on i but is considered as a fixed value, &lt;condition #103&gt; or &lt;condition #104&gt; can be given.<br />

1293<maths num="571"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0579.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1294<maths num="572"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0580.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1295Similarly, it is theta._２１(i) When it does not depend on i but is considered as a fixed value, &lt;condition #105&gt; or &lt;condition #106&gt; can be given.<br />

1296<maths num="573"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0581.tif" /></maths><br /><br /><br />

1297<maths num="574"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0582.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1298next, method Hey to which cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly -- the example of the Precoding procession using the unitary matrix described above is given. The Precoding procession based on a formula (#2) prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula. (In a formula (#2), they are zero rad and theta about lambda.)_１１(i) It may be zero rad. <br />

1299<maths num="575"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0583.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1300At this time, it is i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) (it shall be alpha&gt; 0), and &lt;condition #103&gt; or &lt;condition #104&gt; will be filled. theta_２１A certain value may be set up for (i= 0) like zero rad.<br />method Hey to which cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly as another different example from Above -- the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula. (In a formula (#2), they are pi Radian and theta about lambda.)_１１(i) It may be zero rad. <br />

1301<maths num="576"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0584.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1302At this time, it is i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) (it shall be alpha&gt; 0), and &lt;condition #103&gt; or &lt;condition #104&gt; will be filled. theta_２１A certain value may be set up for (i= 0) like zero rad.<br />As another different example, Above expresses with a following formula the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N. (In a formula (#2), they are zero rad and theta about lambda.)_２１(i) It may be zero rad. <br />

1303<maths num="577"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0585.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1304At this time, it is i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) (it shall be alpha&gt; 0), and &lt;condition #105&gt; or &lt;condition #106&gt; will be filled. theta_１１A certain value may be set up for (i= 0) like zero rad.<br />As another different example, Above expresses with a following formula the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N. (In a formula (#2), they are pi Radian and theta about lambda.)_２１(i) It may be zero rad. <br />

1305<maths num="578"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0586.tif" /></maths>

1306At this time, it is i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) (it shall be alpha&gt; 0), and &lt;condition #105&gt; or &lt;condition #106&gt; will be filled. theta_１１A certain value may be set up for (i= 0) like zero rad.<br />When it thinks in the example of Embodiment 2, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula as another example. (In a formula (#3), they are zero rad and theta about lambda.)_１１(i) It may be zero rad. <br />

1307<maths num="579"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0587.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1308At this time, it is i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), and &lt;condition #103&gt; or &lt;condition #104&gt; will be filled. theta_２１A certain value may be set up for (i= 0) like zero rad.<br />method Hey to which cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly as another different example from Above -- the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula. (In a formula (#3), they are pi Radian and theta about lambda.)_１１(i) It may be zero rad. <br />

1309<maths num="580"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0588.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1310At this time, it is i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), and &lt;condition #103&gt; or &lt;condition #104&gt; will be filled. theta_２１A certain value may be set up for (i= 0) like zero rad.<br />As another different example, Above expresses with a following formula the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N. (In a formula (#3), they are zero rad and theta about lambda.)_２１(i) It may be zero rad. <br />

1311<maths num="581"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0589.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1312At this time, it is i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), and &lt;condition #105&gt; or &lt;condition #106&gt; will be filled. theta_１１A certain value may be set up for (i= 0) like zero rad.<br />As another different example, Above expresses with a following formula the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N. (In a formula (#3), they are pi Radian and theta about lambda.)_２１(i) It may be zero rad. <br />

1313<maths num="582"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0590.tif" /></maths>

1314At this time, it is i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), and &lt;condition #105&gt; or &lt;condition #106&gt; will be filled. theta_１１A certain value may be set up for (i= 0) like zero rad.<br />When it compares with the Puri coding method which was explained by Embodiment 9 and which changes a Precoding procession regularly, it is the Puri coding method of this embodiment, data reception quality high also as a cycle of the minute of the cycle in Embodiment 9 half [ about ] may be able to be obtained, and since the Precoding procession to prepare can be lessened, the effect which can reduce the circuit scales of a sending set and a receiving set can be acquired. In order to make an above-mentioned effect higher, it is good to consider it as a sending set with the composition which has one coding machine and distributes coding data, for example as shown in Drawing 4, and the receiving set corresponding to this.

1315Although there is a method like Embodiment 18 as one suitable example of alpha in an above-mentioned example, it is not necessarily what was restricted to this.<br />This embodiment explained the constitution method of N different Precoding processions for the Precoding hopping method of time period N. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] will be prepared as N different Precoding processions at this time, Although it will arrange in the direction of a time-axis (or frequency axis) in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] at the time of a single career transmission method, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply N different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of cycle N, Even if it uses N different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use N different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

1316In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H is taken as a bigger natural number than cycle N of the method which changes a Precoding procession to the above-mentioned rule target), If N different Precoding processions in this embodiment are included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high.<br />(Embodiment C2)<br />A different Puri coding method from Embodiment C1 with which Embodiment C1 and Embodiment 9 were united which changes a Precoding procession regularly, i.e., the method of realizing Embodiment C1 in Embodiment 9 using the case where a cycle is made into odd number, is explained.

1317In the way cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula.

1318<maths num="583"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0591.tif" /></maths>

1319It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. (It shall be alpha&gt; 0) A unitary matrix is treated and a following formula expresses the Precoding procession of a formula (#1) in this embodiment.

1320<maths num="584"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0592.tif" /></maths>

1321It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. ((It shall be alpha&gt; 0) If simplification of mapping in a sending set and a receiving set is taken into consideration) It is good to consider it as lambda= 0 rad, pi/2rad, pi Radian, and (3 pi) / 2 rad, and it good to consider it as one fixed value of these three values. Especially, it is treating as alpha= 1 and a formula (#19) is expressed as follows.

1322<maths num="585"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0593.tif" /></maths>

1323Although the Precoding procession of the Puri coding method in this embodiment which changes a Precoding procession regularly is denoted by above-mentioned form, It becomes the feature that cycle N of the Puri coding method in this embodiment which changes a Precoding procession regularly is expressed as odd number, i.e., N=2n+1. And a different Precoding procession (in addition about different Precoding, explanation is given behind.) prepared in order to realize cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1 will be n+1 piece. And n Precoding processions are used twice within 1 cycle among n+1 different Precoding, respectively, one Precoding is used once and cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1 is realized. Below, the Precoding procession at this time is explained in detail.

1324In order to realize the Puri coding method of cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly n+1 different needed Precoding procession is set to F [0], *F [1], ..., F[i], ..., F [n-1], and F [n] (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., n-2, n-1, n (i is an integer below or more 0n)). At this time, F [0], *F [1], ..., F[i], ..., F [n-1], and F [n] are expressed for n+1 different Precoding procession based on a formula (#19) as follows.

1325<maths num="586"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0594.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1326However, it is referred to as i= 0, 1, 2, ..., n-2, n-1, and n (i is an integer below or more 0n). In n+1 different Precoding procession F [0] of a formula (#21), *F [1], ..., F[i], ..., F [n-1], and F [n], It is a thing using [ using F [0] once ] F [1] - F [n] twice respectively (F [n] is used twice, using ... and F [n-1] twice, using F [2] twice, using F [1] twice), It is considering it as the Puri coding method of cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The receiving set can obtain the receiving quality of good data like the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly at the time of making a cycle into odd number in Embodiment 9. at this time, data reception quality high also as a cycle of the minute of the cycle in Embodiment 9 half [ about ] may be able to be obtained, and since the Precoding procession to prepare can be lessened, the effect which can reduce the circuit scales of a sending set and a receiving set can be acquired. In order to make an above-mentioned effect higher, it is good to consider it as a sending set with the composition which has one coding machine and distributes coding data, for example as shown in Drawing 4, and the receiving set corresponding to this.

1327And they are lambda= 0 rad and theta especially._１１= When it is considered as zero rad, an upper type is expressed as follows.<br />

1328<maths num="587"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0595.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1329However, it is referred to as i= 0, 1, 2, ..., n-2, n-1, and n (i is an integer below or more 0n). In n+1 different Precoding procession F [0] of a formula (#22), *F [1], ..., F[i], ..., F [n-1], and F [n], It is a thing using [ using F [0] once ] F [1] - F [n] twice respectively (F [n] is used twice, using ... and F [n-1] twice, using F [2] twice, using F [1] twice), It is considering it as the Puri coding method of cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The receiving set can obtain the receiving quality of good data like the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly at the time of making a cycle into odd number in Embodiment 9. at this time, data reception quality high also as a cycle of the minute of the cycle in Embodiment 9 half [ about ] may be able to be obtained, and since the Precoding procession to prepare can be lessened, the effect which can reduce the circuit scales of a sending set and a receiving set can be acquired.<br />Lambda=pi Radian, theta_１１= When it is considered as zero rad, it is expressed as follows.

1330<maths num="588"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0596.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1331However, it is referred to as i= 0, 1, 2, ..., n-2, n-1, and n (i is an integer below or more 0n). In n+1 different Precoding procession F [0] of a formula (#23), *F [1], ..., F[i], ..., F [n-1], and F [n], It is a thing using [ using F [0] once ] F [1] - F [n] twice respectively (F [n] is used twice, using ... and F [n-1] twice, using F [2] twice, using F [1] twice), It is considering it as the Puri coding method of cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The receiving set can obtain the receiving quality of good data like the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly at the time of making a cycle into odd number in Embodiment 9. at this time, data reception quality high also as a cycle of the minute of the cycle in Embodiment 9 half [ about ] may be able to be obtained, and since the Precoding procession to prepare can be lessened, the effect which can reduce the circuit scales of a sending set and a receiving set can be acquired.

1332Like the relation between a formula (#19) and a formula (#20), if alpha= 1, a formula (#21) is expressed as follows.<br />

1333<maths num="589"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0597.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1334However, it is referred to as i= 0, 1, 2, ..., n-2, n-1, and n (i is an integer below or more 0n). In n+1 different Precoding procession F [0] of a formula (#24), *F [1], ..., F[i], ..., F [n-1], and F [n], It is a thing using [ using F [0] once ] F [1] - F [n] twice respectively (F [n] is used twice, using ... and F [n-1] twice, using F [2] twice, using F [1] twice), It is considering it as the Puri coding method of cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The receiving set can obtain the receiving quality of good data like the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly at the time of making a cycle into odd number in Embodiment 9. at this time, data reception quality high also as a cycle of the minute of the cycle in Embodiment 9 half [ about ] may be able to be obtained, and since the Precoding procession to prepare can be lessened, the effect which can reduce the circuit scales of a sending set and a receiving set can be acquired.

1335Similarly, in a formula (#22), if alpha= 1, it is expressed as follows.<br />

1336<maths num="590"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0598.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1337However, it is referred to as i= 0, 1, 2, ..., n-2, n-1, and n (i is an integer below or more 0n). n+1 different Pre-cody of a formula (#25)<br />In Ng procession F [0], *F [1], ..., F[i], ..., F [n-1], and F [n], It is a thing using [ using F [0] once ] F [1] - F [n] twice respectively (F [n] is used twice, using ... and F [n-1] twice, using F [2] twice, using F [1] twice), It is considering it as the Puri coding method of cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The receiving set can obtain the receiving quality of good data like the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly at the time of making a cycle into odd number in Embodiment 9. at this time, data reception quality high also as a cycle of the minute of the cycle in Embodiment 9 half [ about ] may be able to be obtained, and since the Precoding procession to prepare can be lessened, the effect which can reduce the circuit scales of a sending set and a receiving set can be acquired.

1338Similarly, in a formula (#23), if alpha= 1, it is expressed as follows.<br />

1339<maths num="591"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0599.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1340However, it is referred to as i= 0, 1, 2, ..., n-2, n-1, and n (i is an integer below or more 0n). In n+1 different Precoding procession F [0] of a formula (#26), *F [1], ..., F[i], ..., F [n-1], and F [n], It is a thing using [ using F [0] once ] F [1] - F [n] twice respectively (F [n] is used twice, using ... and F [n-1] twice, using F [2] twice, using F [1] twice), It is considering it as the Puri coding method of cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The receiving set can obtain the receiving quality of good data like the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly at the time of making a cycle into odd number in Embodiment 9. at this time, data reception quality high also as a cycle of the minute of the cycle in Embodiment 9 half [ about ] may be able to be obtained, and since the Precoding procession to prepare can be lessened, the effect which can reduce the circuit scales of a sending set and a receiving set can be acquired.

1341Although there is a method like Embodiment 18 as one suitable example of alpha in an above-mentioned example, it is not necessarily what was restricted to this.<br />With this embodiment, Precoding procession [ for the Precoding hopping method (Puri coding method of cycle / of N= 2n /+1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly) of cycle / of N= 2n /+1 ] W [0], *W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], *W [2n] (however) W [0], *W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], and *W [2n], It comprises F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [n-1], and F [n]. Although it will arrange in the direction of a time-axis (or frequency axis) in order of W [0], *W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], and *W [2n] at the time of a single career transmission method, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply Precoding procession W [0], *W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], and W [2n] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. Although explained as the Precoding hopping method of cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1, they are W [0], *W [1], ..., *. Even if it uses W [2n-1] and *W [2n] at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use W [0], *W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], and *W [2n] The so that it may have a regular cycle.

1342In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H makes above-mentioned cycle [ of the method which changes a Precoding procession regularly / of N= 2n ]+1 a bigger natural number), If n+1 different Precoding procession in this embodiment is included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high.<br />(Embodiment C3)<br />It is shown to nonpatent literature 12 - nonpatent literature 15 by this embodiment, QC (Quasi*Cyclic) LDPC (Low-Density*Prity-Check) numerals (However, they may be LDPC (block) numerals which are not QC-LDPC codes) Block numerals, such as connection numerals of an LDPC code and a BCH code (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghemcode), The time of using the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly especially described by Embodiment 26 and Embodiment C1 from Embodiment 16 when block numerals, such as turbo numerals, were used is explained in detail. Here, the case where two streams, s1 and s2, are transmitted is explained to an example as an example. However, when it codes using block numerals, and control information etc. are not required, the number of bits which constitutes the block after coding is in agreement with the number of bits (however, control information etc. which are indicated below may be included in this.) which constitutes block numerals. When it codes using block numerals and control information, including for example, CRC (cyclic*redundancy*check), a transmission parameter, etc., etc. are required, The number of bits which constitutes the block after coding may be the sum of the number of bits and the numbers of bits, such as control information, which constitutes block numerals.

1343Drawing 97 is a figure showing change of the number of symbols required for the block after one coding, and the number of slots, when block numerals are used. Drawing 97 is "a figure showing change of the number of symbols required for the block after one coding, and the number of slots when block numerals are used" as shown in the sending set of Drawing 4 for example, when two streams, s1 and s2, are transmitted and the sending set has one coding machine. (At this time, single career transmission, multicareer transmission like OFDM, and any may be used as a transmission method.)<br />As shown in Drawing 97, suppose that it is 6000 bits the number of bits which constitutes the block after one coding in block numerals. In order to transmit these 6000 bits, 1000 symbol is needed, when a modulation method is QPSK, it is 3000 symbol and 16QAM and it is 1500 symbol and 64QAM.<br />And since two streams will be simultaneously transmitted in the sending set of Drawing 4, when a modulation method is QPSK, they are the 3000 above-mentioned symbols, s1 -- 1500 symbols and s2 -- 1500 symbol quota Be -- in order to transmit 1500 symbols which transmit by s1 since it becomes things, and 1500 symbols which transmit by s2, 1500 slots (here, a "slot" is named.) are needed.<br />When it thinks the same way and a modulation method is 16QAM, in order to transmit all the bits which constitute the block after one coding, 750 slots are needed, and when a modulation method is 64QAM, 500 slots are needed in order to transmit all the bits which constitute 1 block.<br />Next, in the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, the relation between the slot which Above defined, and a Precoding procession is explained.<br />Here, the number of the Precoding processions prepared for the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly is set to 5. That is, five different Precoding processions shall be prepared for the dignity attachment synchronizer of the sending set of Drawing 4 (a dignity attachment synchronizer is each slot, chooses one Precoding procession from a plurality of Precoding processions, and performs Precoding.). these five different Precoding processions -- F [0], *F [1], *F [2], F [3], and *F [4]<br />It shall express.<br />In 1500 slots described by the above for transmitting 6000 bits of numbers of bits which constitute the block after one coding when a modulation method is QPSK, The slots which use Precoding procession F [0] are 300 slots, The slots which use Precoding procession F [1] are 300 slots, The slots for which the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession F [2] uses 300 slots and Precoding procession F [3] uses 300 slots and Precoding procession F [4] need to be 300 slots. This is because the influence of the Precoding procession which uses many numbers will serve as receiving quality of large data if the Precoding procession to be used has deviation.<br />In 750 slots described by the above for similarly transmitting 6000 bits of numbers of bits which constitute the block after one coding when a modulation method is 16QAM, The slots which use Precoding procession F [0] are 150 slots, The slots which use Precoding procession F [1] are 150 slots, The slots for which the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession F [2] uses 150 slots and Precoding procession F [3] uses 150 slots and Precoding procession F [4] need to be 150 slots.<br />In 500 slots described by the above for similarly transmitting 6000 bits of numbers of bits which constitute the block after one coding when a modulation method is 64QAM, The slots which use Precoding procession F [0] are 100 slots, The slots which use Precoding procession F [1] are 100 slots, The slots for which the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession F [2] uses 100 slots and Precoding procession F [3] uses 100 slots and Precoding procession F [4] need to be 100 slots.<br />As mentioned above, in the method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, When it is considered as N different Precoding processions (N different Precoding processions shall be expressed as F [0], *F [1], *F [2], ..., F[N-2] *, and *F [N-1]), It is K about the number of slots which uses Precoding procession F [0] when transmitting all the bits that constitute the block after one coding._０It is K about the number of slots which uses * Precoding procession F [1]._１、It is K about the number of slots which uses Precoding procession F[i]._iIt is K about the number of slots which uses (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)), and Precoding procession F[N-1] *._N-1When it carries out,<br /><br />&lt;Condition #107&gt;<br />K_０=K_１= ... =K_i= ... =K_N-1That is, K_a=K_b (fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (a and *b are the integers of 0 to N-1), a!=b)<br /><br />It is good to come out.<br />And when a communications system uses it, choosing from the modulation method which is supporting a plurality of modulation methods and it is supporting, in the modulation method currently supported, it will be good to materialize &lt;condition #107&gt;.<br />However, when a plurality of modulation methods are being supported, it is common that the numbers of bits which can transmit as one symbol with each modulation method differ (in the case). It can become the same. The modulation method which cannot fill &lt;condition #107&gt; depending on the case may exist. In this case, it is good to change to &lt;condition #107&gt; and to fulfill the following conditions.<br />&lt;Condition #108&gt;<br />K_aK_b0 or 1 [ a of difference / |K ], i.e.,_a- K_b| 0 or 1 (fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (a and b are the integers of 0 to N-1), a!=b)<br /><br />Drawing 98 is a figure showing change of the number of symbols required for the block after two coding, and the number of slots, when block numerals are used. Drawing 98 was shown in the sending set of Drawing 3, and the sending set of Drawing 13, It is "the figure showing change of the number of symbols required for the block after one coding, and the number of slots when block numerals are used" when two streams, s1 and s2, are transmitted and the sending set has two coding machines. (At this time, single career transmission, multicareer transmission like OFDM, and any may be used as a transmission method.)<br />As shown in Drawing 98, suppose that it is 6000 bits the number of bits which constitutes the block after one coding in block numerals. In order to transmit these 6000 bits, 1000 symbol is needed, when a modulation method is QPSK, it is 3000 symbol and 16QAM and it is 1500 symbol and 64QAM.<br />And in the sending set of Drawing 3, and the sending set of Drawing 13, since two streams will be transmitted simultaneously and two coding machines exist, a different numerals block will be transmitted at two streams. Therefore, from two coding blocks being transmitted by s1 and s2 in the same section, when a modulation method is QPSK, the block after the 1st coding is transmitted by s1, and it is by s2, for example, Since the 2nd coding block will be transmitted, 3000 slots are needed in order to transmit the block after the 1st and 2nd coding.<br />When it thinks the same way and a modulation method is 16QAM, in order to transmit all the bits which constitute the block after two coding, 1500 slots are needed, and when a modulation method is 64QAM, 1000 slots are needed in order to transmit all the bits which constitute 22 blocks.<br />Next, in the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, the relation between the slot which Above defined, and a Precoding procession is explained.<br />Here, the number of the Precoding processions prepared for the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly is set to 5. That is, five different Precoding processions shall be prepared for the dignity attachment synchronizer of the sending set of the sending set of Drawing 3, and the sending set of Drawing 13. (A dignity attachment synchronizer is each slot, chooses one Precoding procession from a plurality of Precoding processions, and performs Precoding.) These five different Precoding processions shall be expressed as F [0], *F [1], *F [2], F [3], and *F [4].<br />In 3000 slots described by the above for transmitting 6000x2 bits of numbers of bits which constitute the block after two coding when a modulation method is QPSK, The slots which use Precoding procession F [0] are 600 slots, The slots which use Precoding procession F [1] are 600 slots, The slots for which the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession F [2] uses 600 slots and Precoding procession F [3] uses 600 slots and Precoding procession F [4] need to be 600 slots. This is because the influence of the Precoding procession which uses many numbers will serve as receiving quality of large data if the Precoding procession to be used has deviation.<br />The slot which uses Precoding procession F [0] in order to transmit the 1st coding block is 600 times, The slots for which the slot which uses Precoding procession F [1] uses Precoding procession F [2] 600 times are 600 slots, In order for the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession F [3] uses Precoding procession F [4] 600 times to be 600 times and to transmit the 2nd coding block, The slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession F [0] uses Precoding procession F [1] 600 times is 600 times, The slot which uses Precoding procession F [2] is good in 600 slots and the slot for which the slot for which Precoding procession F [3] is used uses Precoding procession F [4] 600 times being 600 times.<br />In 1500 slots described by the above for similarly transmitting 6000x2 bits of numbers of bits which constitute the block after two coding when a modulation method is 16QAM, The slots which use Precoding procession F [0] are 300 slots, The slots which use Precoding procession F [1] are 300 slots, The slots for which the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession F [2] uses 300 slots and Precoding procession F [3] uses 300 slots and Precoding procession F [4] need to be 300 slots.<br />The slot which uses Precoding procession F [0] in order to transmit the 1st coding block is 300 times, The slots for which the slot which uses Precoding procession F [1] uses Precoding procession F [2] 300 times are 300 slots, In order for the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession F [3] uses Precoding procession F [4] 300 times to be 300 times and to transmit the 2nd coding block, The slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession F [0] uses Precoding procession F [1] 300 times is 300 times, The slot which uses Precoding procession F [2] is good in 300 slots and the slot for which the slot for which Precoding procession F [3] is used uses Precoding procession F [4] 300 times being 300 times.<br />In 1000 slots described by the above for similarly transmitting 6000x2 bits of numbers of bits which constitute the block after two coding when a modulation method is 64QAM, The slots which use Precoding procession F [0] are 200 slots, The slots which use Precoding procession F [1] are 200 slots, The slots for which the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession F [2] uses 200 slots and Precoding procession F [3] uses 200 slots and Precoding procession F [4] need to be 200 slots.<br />The slot which uses Precoding procession F [0] in order to transmit the 1st coding block is 200 times, The slots for which the slot which uses Precoding procession F [1] uses Precoding procession F [2] 200 times are 200 slots, In order for the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession F [3] uses Precoding procession F [4] 200 times to be 200 times and to transmit the 2nd coding block, The slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession F [0] uses Precoding procession F [1] 200 times is 200 times, The slot which uses Precoding procession F [2] is good in 200 slots and the slot for which the slot for which Precoding procession F [3] is used uses Precoding procession F [4] 200 times being 200 times.<br />As mentioned above, in the method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, When it is considered as N different Precoding processions (N different Precoding processions shall be expressed as F [0], *F [1], *F [2], ..., F[N-2] *, and *F [N-1]), It is K about the number of slots which uses Precoding procession F [0] when transmitting all the bits that constitute the block after two coding._０It is K about the number of slots which uses * Precoding procession F [1]._１、It is K about the number of slots which uses Precoding procession F[i]._iIt is K about the number of slots which uses (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)), and Precoding procession F[N-1] *._N-1When it carries out,<br /><br />&lt;Condition #109&gt;<br />K_０=K_１= ... =K_i= ... =K_N-1That is, K_a=K_b (fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (a and *b are the integers of 0 to N-1), a!=b)<br /><br />It is K about the number of times of using Precoding procession F [0] when transmitting all the bits that come out, exist and constitute the block after the 1st coding._０，１It is K about the number of times of using * Precoding procession F [1]._１，１、It is K about the number of times of using Precoding procession F[i]._i,1It is K about the number of times of using (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)), and Precoding procession F[N-1] *._N-1,1When it carries out,<br /><br />&lt;Condition #110&gt;<br />K_０，１=K_１，１= ... =K_i,1= ... =K_N-1,1That is, K_a,1=K_b,1It is K about the number of times of using Precoding procession F [0] when transmitting all the bits that are (fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (a and *b are the integers of 0 to N-1), a!=b), and constitute the block after the 2nd coding._０，２It is K about the number of times of using * Precoding procession F [1]._１，２、It is K about the number of times of using Precoding procession F[i]._i,2It is K about the number of times of using (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)), and Precoding procession F[N-1] *._N-1,2When it carries out,<br /><br />&lt;Condition #111&gt;<br />K_０，２=K_１，２= ... =K_i,2= ... =K_N-1,2That is, K_a,2=K_b,2It is good in their being (fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (a and *b are the integers of 0 to N-1), a!=b).<br />and -- in the modulation method currently supported when a communications system uses it, choosing from the modulation method which is supporting a plurality of modulation methods and it is supporting -- &lt;condition #109&gt; -- good [ to materialize &lt;condition #110 &lt;condition #111&gt;&gt; ].<br />However, when a plurality of modulation methods are being supported, it is common that the numbers of bits which can transmit as one symbol with each modulation method differ (in the case). it can become the same. a case -- &lt;condition #109&gt; -- the modulation method which cannot fill &lt;condition #110 &lt;condition #111&gt;&gt; may exist. &lt;condition #109&gt; -- &lt;condition #110 &lt;condition #111&gt;&gt; -- instead of -- the following -- it is good to fulfill conditions. [ in this case, ]<br /><br />&lt;Condition #112&gt;<br />K_aK_b0 or 1 [ a of difference / |K ], i.e.,_a- K_b| 0 or 1<br />(fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (a and *b are the integers of 0 to N-1), a!=b)<br /><br />&lt;Condition #113&gt;<br />K_a,1K_b,10 or 1 [ a of difference / |K ], i.e.,_a,1- K_b,1| 0 or 1<br />(fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (a and *b are the integers of 0 to N-1), a!=b)<br /><br />&lt;Condition #114&gt;<br />K_a,2K_b,20 or 1 [ a of difference / |K ], i.e.,_a,2- K_b,2| 0 or 1<br />(fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (a and *b are the integers of 0 to N-1), a!=b)<br /><br /><br />As mentioned above, by connecting the block after coding, and a Precoding procession, since deviation is lost in Precoding procession used in order to transmit a coding block, the effect that the receiving quality of data improves can be acquired in a receiving set.

1344According to this embodiment, in the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, N different Precoding processions are needed for the Precoding hopping method of cycle N. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] will be prepared as N different Precoding processions at this time, Although there is also the method of arranging in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] in the direction of a frequency axis, N different Precoding procession F [0] which is not necessarily what was restricted to this and generated by this embodiment, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol for F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] to a time-axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of cycle N, Even if it uses N different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use N different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle. When the conditions described by this embodiment are fulfilled at this time, a possibility of a receiving set that the receiving quality of good data can be obtained is high.

1345As Embodiment 15 explained, it is a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method, The MIMO transmission method of fixation of a Precoding procession, a space-time block encoding method, The mode of transmission and the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly exists only one stream, and a sending set (a broadcasting station, a base station) may enable it to choose one of transmission methods from these modes. At this time, only a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method, the MIMO transmission method of fixation of a Precoding procession, a space-time block encoding method, and one stream are set in the mode of transmission and the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, In the career (substitute) group which chose the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, it is good to carry out this embodiment.

1346(Embodiment C4)<br />It is shown to nonpatent literature 12 - nonpatent literature 15 by this embodiment, QC (Quasi*Cyclic) LDPC (Low-Density*Prity-Check) numerals (However, they may be LDPC (block) numerals which are not QC-LDPC codes) Block numerals, such as connection numerals of an LDPC code and a BCH code (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghemcode), The time of using the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly especially described by Embodiment C2 when block numerals, such as turbo numerals, were used is explained in detail. Here, the case where two streams, s1 and s2, are transmitted is explained to an example as an example. However, when it codes using block numerals, and control information etc. are not required, the number of bits which constitutes the block after coding is in agreement with the number of bits (however, control information etc. which are indicated below may be included in this.) which constitutes block numerals. When it codes using block numerals, it is control information (for example, CRC (cyclic*redundancy*)) etc. When check, a transmission parameter, etc. are required, the number of bits which constitutes the block after coding may be the sum of the number of bits and the numbers of bits, such as control information, which constitutes block numerals.

1347Drawing 97 is a figure showing change of the number of symbols required for the block after one coding, and the number of slots, when block numerals are used. Drawing 97 is "a figure showing change of the number of symbols required for the block after one coding, and the number of slots when block numerals are used" as shown in the sending set of Drawing 4 for example, when two streams, s1 and s2, are transmitted and the sending set has one coding machine. (At this time, single career transmission, multicareer transmission like OFDM, and any may be used as a transmission method.)<br />As shown in Drawing 97, suppose that it is 6000 bits the number of bits which constitutes the block after one coding in block numerals. In order to transmit these 6000 bits, 1000 symbol is needed, when a modulation method is QPSK, it is 3000 symbol and 16QAM and it is 1500 symbol and 64QAM.<br />And since two streams will be simultaneously transmitted in the sending set of Drawing 4, when a modulation method is QPSK, they are the 3000 above-mentioned symbols, s1 -- 1500 symbols and s2 -- 1500 symbol quota Be -- in order to transmit 1500 symbols which transmit by s1 since it becomes things, and 1500 symbols which transmit by s2, 1500 slots (here, a "slot" is named.) are needed.<br />When it thinks the same way and a modulation method is 16QAM, in order to transmit all the bits which constitute the block after one coding, 750 slots are needed, and when a modulation method is 64QAM, 500 slots are needed in order to transmit all the bits which constitute 1 block.<br />Next, in the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, the relation between the slot which Above defined, and a Precoding procession is explained.<br />Here, in Embodiment C2, five Precoding matrix for realizing the Puri coding method of cycle 5 which changes a Precoding procession regularly shall be expressed as W [0], *W [1], *W [2], W [3], and W [4]. (The dignity attachment synchronizer of a sending set is each slot, chooses one Precoding procession from a plurality of Precoding processions, and performs Precoding.)<br />In 1500 slots described by the above for transmitting 6000 bits of numbers of bits which constitute the block after one coding when a modulation method is QPSK, The slots which use Precoding procession W [0] are 300 slots, The slots which use Precoding procession W [1] are 300 slots, The slots for which the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [2] uses 300 slots and Precoding procession W [3] uses 300 slots and Precoding procession W [4] need to be 300 slots. This is because the influence of the Precoding procession which uses many numbers will serve as receiving quality of large data if the Precoding procession to be used has deviation.<br />In 750 slots described by the above for similarly transmitting 6000 bits of numbers of bits which constitute the block after one coding when a modulation method is 16QAM, The slots which use Precoding procession W [0] are 150 slots, The slots which use Precoding procession W [1] are 150 slots, The slots for which the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [2] uses 150 slots and Precoding procession W [3] uses 150 slots and Precoding procession W [4] need to be 150 slots.<br />In 500 slots described by the above for similarly transmitting 6000 bits of numbers of bits which constitute the block after one coding when a modulation method is 64QAM, The slots which use Precoding procession W [0] are 100 slots, The slots which use Precoding procession W [1] are 100 slots, The slots for which the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [2] uses 100 slots and Precoding procession W [3] uses 100 slots and Precoding procession W [4] need to be 100 slots.<br />As mentioned above, in the method of Embodiment C2 which changes a Precoding procession regularly, Precoding procession [ for realizing cycle / of N= 2n /+1 ] W [0], *W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], *W [2n] (However, W [0], *W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], and *W [2n] comprise F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [n-1], and F [n].) It is K about the number of slots which uses Precoding procession W [0] when it is considered as (embodiment C2 reference) and all the bits that constitute the block after one coding are transmitted._０It is K about the number of slots which uses * Precoding procession W [1]._１、It is K about the number of slots which uses Precoding procession W[i]._iIt is K about the number of slots which uses (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., 2n-1 or 2n (i is or more 0 integer of 2n or less)) and Precoding procession W[2n] *._2nWhen it carries out,<br /><br />&lt;Condition #115&gt;<br />K_０=K_１= ... =K_i= ... =K_2nThat is, K_a=K_b (fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., 2n-1 or 2 n (a and *b are 0 to 2-n integers), a!=b)<br /><br />It is good to come out.<br />In the method of Embodiment C2 which changes a Precoding procession regularly, It is G about the number of slots which uses Precoding procession F [0] when transmitting all the bits that constitute the block after one coding in Precoding procession F [0] from which it differs for realizing cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1, F [1], F [2], ..., F [n-1], and F [n]._０It is G about the number of slots which uses * Precoding procession F [1]._１、It is G about the number of slots which uses Precoding procession F[i]._iIt is G about the number of slots which uses (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., n-1, n), and Precoding procession F[n] *._nWhen it carries out, &lt;condition #115&gt; can be expressed as follows.<br /><br />&lt;Condition #116&gt;<br />2xG_０=G_１= ... =G_i= ... =G_nThat is, 2xG_０=G_a (fora however a*=1, 2, ..., n-1, n (a is an integer of 1 to n))<br /><br />And when a communications system uses it, choosing from the modulation method which is supporting a plurality of modulation methods and it is supporting, in the modulation method currently supported, it will be good to materialize &lt;condition #115&gt; (&lt;condition #116&gt;).<br />However, when a plurality of modulation methods are being supported, it is common that the numbers of bits which can transmit as one symbol with each modulation method differ (in the case). It can become the same. The modulation method which cannot fill &lt;condition #115&gt; (&lt;condition #116&gt;) depending on the case may exist. In this case, it is good to change to &lt;condition #115&gt; and to fulfill the following conditions.<br />&lt;Condition #117&gt;<br />K_aK_b0 or 1 [ a of difference / |K ], i.e.,_a- K_b| 0 or 1<br />(fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., 2n-1 or 2 n (a and *b are 0 to 2-n integers), a!=b)<br /><br />It will become the following conditions if &lt;condition #117&gt; is made another expression.<br /><br />&lt;Condition #118&gt;<br />G_aG_b0, or 1 or 2, i.e., a of difference is, [ |G ]_a- G_b| 0, or 1 or 2<br />(fora, b however a, *b=1, 2, ..., n-1, n (a and *b are the integers of 1 to n), a!=b)<br />It reaches.<br />2xG_０G_a0, or 1 or 2, i.e., a of difference is, [ |2xG ]_０- G_a| 0, or 1 or 2<br />(fora however a*=1, 2, ..., *n-1, n (a is an integer of 1 to n))<br /><br />Drawing 98 is a figure showing change of the number of symbols required for the block after two coding, and the number of slots, when block numerals are used. Drawing 98 was shown in the sending set of Drawing 3, and the sending set of Drawing 13, It is "the figure showing change of the number of symbols required for the block after one coding, and the number of slots when block numerals are used" when two streams, s1 and s2, are transmitted and the sending set has two coding machines. (At this time, single career transmission, multicareer transmission like OFDM, and any may be used as a transmission method.)<br />As shown in Drawing 98, suppose that it is 6000 bits the number of bits which constitutes the block after one coding in block numerals. In order to transmit these 6000 bits, 1000 symbol is needed, when a modulation method is QPSK, it is 3000 symbol and 16QAM and it is 1500 symbol and 64QAM.

1348And in the sending set of Drawing 3, and the sending set of Drawing 13, since two streams will be transmitted simultaneously and two coding machines exist, a different numerals block will be transmitted at two streams. Therefore, from two coding blocks being transmitted by s1 and s2 in the same section, when a modulation method is QPSK, the block after the 1st coding is transmitted by s1, and it is by s2, for example, Since the 2nd coding block will be transmitted, 3000 slots are needed in order to transmit the block after the 1st and 2nd coding.<br />When it thinks the same way and a modulation method is 16QAM, in order to transmit all the bits which constitute the block after two coding, 1500 slots are needed, and when a modulation method is 64QAM, 1000 slots are needed in order to transmit all the bits which constitute 2 blocks.<br />Next, in the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, the relation between the slot which Above defined, and a Precoding procession is explained.<br />Here, in Embodiment C2, five Precoding matrix for realizing the Puri coding method of cycle 5 which changes a Precoding procession regularly shall be expressed as W [0], *W [1], *W [2], W [3], and *W [4]. (The dignity attachment synchronizer of a sending set is each slot, chooses one Precoding procession from a plurality of Precoding processions, and performs Precoding.)<br />In 3000 slots described by the above for transmitting 6000x2 bits of numbers of bits which constitute the block after two coding when a modulation method is QPSK, The slots which use Precoding procession W [0] are 600 slots, The slots which use Precoding procession W [1] are 600 slots, The slots for which the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [2] uses 600 slots and Precoding procession W [3] uses 600 slots and Precoding procession W [4] need to be 600 slots. This is because the influence of the Precoding procession which uses many numbers will serve as receiving quality of large data if the Precoding procession to be used has deviation.<br />The slot which uses Precoding procession W [0] in order to transmit the 1st coding block is 600 times, The slots for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [1] uses Precoding procession W [2] 600 times are 600 slots, In order for the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [3] uses Precoding procession W [4] 600 times to be 600 times and to transmit the 2nd coding block, The slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [0] uses Precoding procession W [1] 600 times is 600 times, The slot which uses Precoding procession W [2] is good in 600 slots and the slot for which the slot for which Precoding procession W [3] is used uses Precoding procession W [4] 600 times being 600 times.<br />In 1500 slots described by the above for similarly transmitting 6000x2 bits of numbers of bits which constitute the block after two coding when a modulation method is 16QAM, The slots which use Precoding procession W [0] are 300 slots, The slots which use Precoding procession W [1] are 300 slots, The slots for which the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [2] uses 300 slots and Precoding procession W [3] uses 300 slots and Precoding procession W [4] need to be 300 slots.<br />The slot which uses Precoding procession W [0] in order to transmit the 1st coding block is 300 times, The slots for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [1] uses Precoding procession W [2] 300 times are 300 slots, In order for the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [3] uses Precoding procession W [4] 300 times to be 300 times and to transmit the 2nd coding block, The slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [0] uses Precoding procession W [1] 300 times is 300 times, The slot which uses Precoding procession W [2] is good in 300 slots and the slot for which the slot for which Precoding procession W [3] is used uses Precoding procession W [4] 300 times being 300 times.<br />In 1000 slots described by the above for similarly transmitting 6000x2 bits of numbers of bits which constitute the block after two coding when a modulation method is 64QAM, The slots which use Precoding procession W [0] are 200 slots, The slots which use Precoding procession W [1] are 200 slots, The slots for which the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [2] uses 200 slots and Precoding procession W [3] uses 200 slots and Precoding procession W [4] need to be 200 slots.<br />The slot which uses Precoding procession W [0] in order to transmit the 1st coding block is 200 times, The slots for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [1] uses Precoding procession W [2] 200 times are 200 slots, In order for the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [3] uses Precoding procession W [4] 200 times to be 200 times and to transmit the 2nd coding block, The slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [0] uses Precoding procession W [1] 200 times is 200 times, The slot which uses Precoding procession W [2] is good in 200 slots and the slot for which the slot for which Precoding procession W [3] is used uses Precoding procession W [4] 200 times being 200 times.<br />As mentioned above, in the method of Embodiment C2 which changes a Precoding procession regularly, Precoding procession [ for realizing cycle / of N= 2n /+1 ] W [0], *W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], *W [2n] (However, W [0], *W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], and *W [2n] comprise F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [n-1], and F [n].) It is K about the number of slots which uses Precoding procession W [0] when it is considered as (embodiment C2 reference) and all the bits that constitute the block after two coding are transmitted._０It is K about the number of slots which uses * Precoding procession W [1]._１、It is K about the number of slots which uses Precoding procession W[i]._iIt is K about the number of slots which uses (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., 2n-1 or 2n (i is or more 0 integer of 2n or less)) and Precoding procession W[2n] *._2nWhen it carries out,<br /><br />&lt;Condition #119&gt;<br />K_０=K_１= ... =K_i= ... =K_2nThat is, K_a=K_b (fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., 2n-1 or 2 n (a and *b are 0 to 2-n integers), a!=b)<br /><br />It is K about the number of times of using Precoding procession W [0] when transmitting all the bits that come out, exist and constitute the block after the 1st coding._０，１It is K about the number of times of using * Precoding procession W [1]._１，１、It is K about the number of times of using Precoding procession W[i]._i,1It is K about the number of times of using (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., 2n-1 or 2n (i is or more 0 integer of 2n or less)) and Precoding procession W[2n] *._2n,1When it carries out,<br /><br />&lt;Condition #120&gt;<br />K_０，１=K_１，１= ... =K_i,1= ... =K_2n,1That is, K_a,1=K_b,1<br /> (fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., 2n-1 or 2 n (a and *b are 0 to 2-n integers), a!=b)<br /><br />It is K about the number of times of using Precoding procession W [0] when transmitting all the bits that come out, exist and constitute the block after the 2nd coding._０，２It is K about the number of times of using * Precoding procession W [1]._１，２、It is K about the number of times of using Precoding procession W[i]._i,2It is K about the number of times of using (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., 2n-1 or 2n (i is or more 0 integer of 2n or less)) and Precoding procession W[2n] *._2n,2When it carries out,<br /><br />&lt;Condition #121&gt;<br />K_０，２=K_１，２= ... =K_i,2= ... =K_2n,2That is, K_a,2=K_b,2<br /> (fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., 2n-1 or 2 n (a and *b are 0 to 2-n integers), a!=b)<br /><br />It is good to come out.<br />In the method of Embodiment C2 which changes a Precoding procession regularly, It is G about the number of slots which uses Precoding procession F [0] when transmitting all the bits that constitute the block after two coding in Precoding procession F [0] from which it differs for realizing cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1, F [1], F [2], ..., F [n-1], and F [n]._０It is G about the number of slots which uses * Precoding procession F [1]._１、It is G about the number of slots which uses Precoding procession F[i]._iIt is G about the number of slots which uses (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., n-1, n), and Precoding procession F[n] *._nWhen it carries out, &lt;condition #119&gt; can be expressed as follows.<br /><br />&lt;Condition #122&gt;<br />2xG_０=G_１= ... =G_i= ... =G_nThat is, 2xG_０=G_a (fora however a*=1, 2, ..., n-1, n (a is an integer of 1 to n))<br /><br />It is G about the number of times of using Precoding procession F [0] when transmitting all the bits that come out, exist and constitute the block after the 1st coding._０，１It is K about the number of times of using * Precoding procession F [1]._１，１、It is G about the number of times of using Precoding procession F[i]._i,1It is G about the number of times of using (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., n-1, n), and Precoding procession F[n] *._n,1When it carries out,<br /><br />&lt;Condition #123&gt;<br />2xG_０，１=G_１，１= ... =G_i,1= ... =G_n,1That is, 2xG_０，１=G_a,1 (fora however a*=1, 2, ..., *n-1, n (a is an integer of 1 to n))<br /><br />It is G about the number of times of using Precoding procession F [0] when transmitting all the bits that come out, exist and constitute the block after the 2nd coding._０，２It is G about the number of times of using * Precoding procession F [1]._１，２、It is G about the number of times of using Precoding procession F[i]._i,2It is G about the number of times of using (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., n-1, n), and Precoding procession F[n] *._n,2When it carries out,<br /><br />&lt;Condition #124&gt;<br />2xG_０，２=G_１，２= ... =G_i,2= ... =G_n,2That is, 2xG_０，２=G_a,2 (fora however a*=1, 2, ..., *n-1, n (a is an integer of 1 to n))<br />It is good to come out.<br />And in the modulation method currently supported when a communications system uses it, choosing from the modulation method which is supporting a plurality of modulation methods and it is supporting, &lt;Condition #119&gt; It will be good to materialize &lt;condition #120 &lt;condition #121&gt; (&lt;condition #122&gt; &lt;condition #123 &lt;condition #124&gt;&gt;)&gt;.<br />However, when a plurality of modulation methods are being supported, it is common that the numbers of bits which can transmit as one symbol with each modulation method differ (in the case). it can become the same. a case -- &lt;condition #119&gt; -- the modulation method which cannot fill &lt;condition #120 &lt;condition #121&gt; (&lt;condition #122&gt; &lt;condition #123 &lt;condition #124&gt;&gt;)&gt; may exist. &lt;condition #119&gt; -- &lt;condition #120 &lt;condition #121&gt;&gt; -- instead of -- the following -- it is good to fulfill conditions. [ in this case, ]<br /><br />&lt;Condition #125&gt;<br />K_aK_b0 or 1 [ a of difference / |K ], i.e.,_a- K_b| 0 or 1<br />(fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., 2n-1 or 2 n (a and *b are 0 to 2-n integers), a!=b)<br /><br />&lt;Condition #126&gt;<br />K_a,1K_b,10 or 1 [ a of difference / |K ], i.e.,_a,1- K_b,1| 0 or 1<br />(fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., 2n-1 or 2 n (a and *b are 0 to 2-n integers), a!=b)<br /><br />&lt;Condition #127&gt;<br />K_a,2K_b,20 or 1 [ a of difference / |K ], i.e.,_a,2- K_b,2| 0 or 1<br />(fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., 2n-1 or 2 n (a and *b are 0 to 2-n integers), a!=b)<br /><br />&lt;Condition #125&gt; It will become the following conditions if &lt;condition #126 &lt;condition #127&gt;&gt; is made another expression.<br /><br />&lt;Condition #128&gt;<br />G_aG_b0, or 1 or 2, i.e., a of difference is, [ |G ]_a- G_b| 0, or 1 or 2<br />(fora, b however a, *b=1, 2, ..., n-1, n (a and *b are the integers of 1 to n), a!=b)<br />It reaches.<br />2xG_０G_a0, or 1 or 2, i.e., a of difference is, [ |2xG ]_０- G_a| 0, or 1 or 2<br />(fora however a*=1, 2, ..., *n-1, n (a is an integer of 1 to n))<br /><br />&lt;Condition #129&gt;<br />G_a,1G_b,10, or 1 or 2, i.e., a of difference is, [ |G ]_a,1- G_b,1| 0, or 1 or 2<br />(fora, b however a, *b=1, 2, ..., n-1, n (a and *b are the integers of 1 to n), a!=b)<br />It reaches.<br />2xG_０，１G_a,10, or 1 or 2, i.e., a of difference is, [ |2xG ]_０，１- G_a,1| 0, or 1 or 2<br />(fora however a*=1, 2, ..., *n-1, n (a is an integer of 1 to n))<br /><br />&lt;Condition #130&gt;<br />G_a,2G_b,20, or 1 or 2, i.e., a of difference is, [ |G ]_a,2- G_b,2| 0, or 1 or 2<br />(fora, b however a, *b=1, 2, ..., n-1, n (a and *b are the integers of 1 to n), a!=b)<br />It reaches.<br />2xG_０，２G_a,20, or 1 or 2, i.e., a of difference is, [ |2xG ]_０，２- G_a,2| 0, or 1 or 2<br />(fora however a*=1, 2, ..., *n-1, n (a is an integer of 1 to n))<br /><br />As mentioned above, by connecting the block after coding, and a Precoding procession, since deviation is lost in Precoding procession used in order to transmit a coding block, the effect that the receiving quality of data improves can be acquired in a receiving set.

1349With this embodiment, Precoding procession [ for the Precoding hopping method (Puri coding method of cycle / of N= 2n /+1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly) of cycle / of N= 2n /+1 described by Embodiment C2 ] W [0], *W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], *W [2n] (However, W [0], *W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], and *W [2n]) It comprises F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [n-1], and F [n]. Although it will arrange in the direction of a time-axis (or frequency axis) in order of W [0], *W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], and *W [2n] at the time of a single career transmission method, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply Precoding procession W [0], *W [1], ..., W [2n-1], and *W [2n] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1, Even if it uses W [0], *W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], and *W [2n] at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use W [0], W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], and *W [2n] The so that it may have a regular cycle. When the conditions described by this embodiment are fulfilled at this time, a possibility of a receiving set that the receiving quality of good data can be obtained is high.

1350In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H makes above-mentioned cycle [ of the method which changes a Precoding procession regularly / of N= 2n ]+1 a bigger natural number), If n+1 different Precoding procession in this embodiment is included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high.<br />As Embodiment 15 explained, it is a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method, The MIMO transmission method of fixation of a Precoding procession, a space-time block encoding method, The mode of transmission and the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly exists only one stream, and a sending set (a broadcasting station, a base station) may enable it to choose one of transmission methods from these modes. At this time, only a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method, the MIMO transmission method of fixation of a Precoding procession, a space-time block encoding method, and one stream are set in the mode of transmission and the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, In the career (substitute) group which chose the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, it is good to carry out this embodiment.<br /><br />(Embodiment C5)<br />It is shown to nonpatent literature 12 - nonpatent literature 15 by this embodiment, QC (Quasi*Cyclic) LDPC (Low-Density*Prity-Check) numerals (However, they may be LDPC (block) numerals which are not QC-LDPC codes) The case where Embodiment C3 when block numerals, such as block numerals, such as connection numerals of an LDPC code and a BCH code (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghemcode), and turbo numerals, are used, and Embodiment C4 are made to generalize is explained. Here, the case where two streams, s1 and s2, are transmitted is explained to an example as an example. However, when it codes using block numerals, and control information etc. are not required, the number of bits which constitutes the block after coding is in agreement with the number of bits (however, control information etc. which are indicated below may be included in this.) which constitutes block numerals. When it codes using block numerals and control information, including for example, CRC (cyclic*redundancy*check), a transmission parameter, etc., etc. are required, The number of bits which constitutes the block after coding may be the sum of the number of bits and the numbers of bits, such as control information, which constitutes block numerals.

1351Drawing 97 is a figure showing change of the number of symbols required for the block after one coding, and the number of slots, when block numerals are used. Drawing 97 is "a figure showing change of the number of symbols required for the block after one coding, and the number of slots when block numerals are used" as shown in the sending set of Drawing 4 for example, when two streams, s1 and s2, are transmitted and the sending set has one coding machine. (At this time, single career transmission, multicareer transmission like OFDM, and any may be used as a transmission method.)<br />As shown in Drawing 97, suppose that it is 6000 bits the number of bits which constitutes the block after one coding in block numerals. In order to transmit these 6000 bits, 1000 symbol is needed, when a modulation method is QPSK, it is 3000 symbol and 16QAM and it is 1500 symbol and 64QAM.<br />And since two streams will be simultaneously transmitted in the sending set of Drawing 4, when a modulation method is QPSK, they are the 3000 above-mentioned symbols, s1 -- 1500 symbols and s2 -- 1500 symbol quota Be -- in order to transmit 1500 symbols which transmit by s1 since it becomes things, and 1500 symbols which transmit by s2, 1500 slots (here, a "slot" is named.) are needed.<br />When it thinks the same way and a modulation method is 16QAM, in order to transmit all the bits which constitute the block after one coding, 750 slots are needed, and when a modulation method is 64QAM, 500 slots are needed in order to transmit all the bits which constitute 1 block.<br />Next, in the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, the relation between the slot which Above defined, and a Precoding procession is explained.<br />here -- the Precoding procession for the Puri coding method of cycle 5 which changes a Precoding procession regularly -- W [0], W [1], W [2], and W [3],<br />It is referred to as W [4]. However, at least two or more different Precoding processions should just be included in W [0], *W [1], *W [2], W [3], and W [4] (the same Precoding procession may be included in W [0], *W [1], W [2], W [3], and *W [4].). In the dignity attachment synchronizer of the sending set of Drawing 4, W [0], *W [1], *W [2], W [3], and *W [4] shall be used. (A dignity attachment synchronizer is each slot, chooses one Precoding procession from a plurality of Precoding processions, and performs Precoding.)<br />In 1500 slots described by the above for transmitting 6000 bits of numbers of bits which constitute the block after one coding when a modulation method is QPSK, The slots which use Precoding procession W [0] are 300 slots, The slots which use Precoding procession W [1] are 300 slots, The slots for which the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [2] uses 300 slots and Precoding procession W [3] uses 300 slots and Precoding procession W [4] need to be 300 slots. This is because the influence of the Precoding procession which uses many numbers will serve as receiving quality of large data if the Precoding procession to be used has deviation.<br />The for which similarly the slot which uses Precoding procession W [0] uses 150 slots and Precoding procession W [1] in 750 slots described by the above for transmitting 6000 bits of numbers of bits which constitute the block after one coding when a modulation method is 16QAM<br />The slots for which the slot for which the slot for which a lot uses 150 slots and Precoding procession W [2] uses 150 slots and Precoding procession W [3] uses 150 slots and Precoding procession W [4] need to be 150 slots.<br />In 500 slots described by the above for similarly transmitting 6000 bits of numbers of bits which constitute the block after one coding when a modulation method is 64QAM, The slots which use Precoding procession W [0] are 100 slots, The slots which use Precoding procession W [1] are 100 slots, The slots for which the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [2] uses 100 slots and Precoding procession W [3] uses 100 slots and Precoding procession W [4] need to be 100 slots.<br />As mentioned above, the Precoding procession in the method with which cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly shall be expressed as W [0], *W [1], *W [2], ..., W[N-2] *, and *W [N-1]. However, W [0], *W [1], *W [2], ..., *W[N-2] *, and *W [N-1] shall comprise at least two or more different Precoding processions. (The same Precoding procession may be included in W [0], *W [1], *W [2], ..., *W[N-2] *, and *W [N-1].) It is K about the number of slots which uses Precoding procession W [0] when transmitting all the bits that constitute the block after one coding._０It is K about the number of slots which uses * Precoding procession W [1]._１、It is K about the number of slots which uses Precoding procession W[i]._iIt is K about the number of slots which uses (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)), and Precoding procession W[N-1] *._N-1When it carries out,<br /><br />&lt;Condition #131&gt;<br />K_０=K_１= ... =K_i= ... =K_N-1That is, K_a=K_b, (fora and b -- however)<br />a, *b=0,1,2, ..., N-1 (a and *b are the integers of 0 to N-1), a!=b<br /><br />It is good to come out.<br />And when a communications system uses it, choosing from the modulation method which is supporting a plurality of modulation methods and it is supporting, in the modulation method currently supported, it will be good to materialize &lt;condition #94&gt;.<br />However, when a plurality of modulation methods are being supported, it is common that the numbers of bits which can transmit as one symbol with each modulation method differ (in the case). It can become the same. The modulation method which cannot fill &lt;condition #131&gt; depending on the case may exist. In this case, it is good to change to &lt;condition #131&gt; and to fulfill the following conditions.<br />&lt;Condition #132&gt;<br />K_aK_b0 or 1 [ a of difference / |K ], i.e.,_a- K_b| 0 or 1<br />(fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (a and *b are the integers of 0 to N-1), a!=b)<br /><br />Drawing 98 is a figure showing change of the number of symbols required for the block after two coding, and the number of slots, when block numerals are used. Drawing 98 was shown in the sending set of Drawing 3, and the sending set of Drawing 13, It is "the figure showing change of the number of symbols required for the block after one coding, and the number of slots when block numerals are used" when two streams, s1 and s2, are transmitted and the sending set has two coding machines. (At this time, single career transmission, multicareer transmission like OFDM, and any may be used as a transmission method.)<br />As shown in Drawing 98, suppose that it is 6000 bits the number of bits which constitutes the block after one coding in block numerals. In order to transmit these 6000 bits, 1000 symbol is needed, when a modulation method is QPSK, it is 3000 symbol and 16QAM and it is 1500 symbol and 64QAM.<br />And in the sending set of Drawing 3, and the sending set of Drawing 13, since two streams will be transmitted simultaneously and two coding machines exist, a different numerals block will be transmitted at two streams. Therefore, from two coding blocks being transmitted by s1 and s2 in the same section, when a modulation method is QPSK, the block after the 1st coding is transmitted by s1, and it is by s2, for example, Since the 2nd coding block will be transmitted, 3000 slots are needed in order to transmit the block after the 1st and 2nd coding.<br />When it thinks the same way and a modulation method is 16QAM, in order to transmit all the bits which constitute the block after two coding, 1500 slots are needed, and when a modulation method is 64QAM, 1000 slots are needed in order to transmit all the bits which constitute 22 blocks.<br />Next, in the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, the relation between the slot which Above defined, and a Precoding procession is explained.<br />here -- the Precoding procession for the Puri coding method of cycle 5 which changes a Precoding procession regularly -- W [0], W [1], W [2], and W [3],<br />It is referred to as W [4]. However, at least two or more different Precoding processions should just be included in W [0], *W [1], *W [2], W [3], and W [4] (the same Precoding procession may be included in W [0], *W [1], W [2], W [3], and *W [4].). For the dignity attachment synchronizer of the sending set of the sending set of Drawing 3, and the sending set of Drawing 13, W [0], *W [1], W [2], W [3], and *W [4] shall be used. (A dignity attachment synchronizer is each slot, chooses one Precoding procession from a plurality of Precoding processions, and performs Precoding.)<br />In 3000 slots described by the above for transmitting 6000x2 bits of numbers of bits which constitute the block after two coding when a modulation method is QPSK, The slots which use Precoding procession W [0] are 600 slots, The slots which use Precoding procession W [1] are 600 slots, The slots for which the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [2] uses 600 slots and Precoding procession W [3] uses 600 slots and Precoding procession W [4] need to be 600 slots. This is because the influence of the Precoding procession which uses many numbers will serve as receiving quality of large data if the Precoding procession to be used has deviation.<br />The slot which uses Precoding procession W [0] in order to transmit the 1st coding block is 600 times, The slots for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [1] uses Precoding procession W [2] 600 times are 600 slots, In order for the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [3] uses Precoding procession W [4] 600 times to be 600 times and to transmit the 2nd coding block, The slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [0] uses Precoding procession W [1] 600 times is 600 times, The slot which uses Precoding procession W [2] is good in 600 slots and the slot for which the slot for which Precoding procession W [3] is used uses Precoding procession W [4] 600 times being 600 times.<br />In 1500 slots described by the above for similarly transmitting 6000x2 bits of numbers of bits which constitute the block after two coding when a modulation method is 16QAM, The slots which use Precoding procession W [0] are 300 slots, The slots which use Precoding procession W [1] are 300 slots, The slots for which the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [2] uses 300 slots and Precoding procession W [3] uses 300 slots and Precoding procession W [4] need to be 300 slots.<br />The slot which uses Precoding procession W [0] in order to transmit the 1st coding block is 300 times, The slots for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [1] uses Precoding procession W [2] 300 times are 300 slots, In order for the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [3] uses Precoding procession W [4] 300 times to be 300 times and to transmit the 2nd coding block, The slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [0] uses Precoding procession W [1] 300 times is 300 times, The slot which uses Precoding procession W [2] is good in 300 slots and the slot for which the slot for which Precoding procession W [3] is used uses Precoding procession W [4] 300 times being 300 times.<br />In 1000 slots described by the above for similarly transmitting 6000x2 bits of numbers of bits which constitute the block after two coding when a modulation method is 64QAM, The slots which use Precoding procession W [0] are 200 slots, The slots which use Precoding procession W [1] are 200 slots, The slots for which the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [2] uses 200 slots and Precoding procession W [3] uses 200 slots and Precoding procession W [4] need to be 200 slots.<br />The slot which uses Precoding procession W [0] in order to transmit the 1st coding block is 200 times, The slots for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [1] uses Precoding procession W [2] 200 times are 200 slots, In order for the slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [3] uses Precoding procession W [4] 200 times to be 200 times and to transmit the 2nd coding block, The slot for which the slot which uses Precoding procession W [0] uses Precoding procession W [1] 200 times is 200 times, The slot which uses Precoding procession W [2] is good in 200 slots and the slot for which the slot for which Precoding procession W [3] is used uses Precoding procession W [4] 200 times being 200 times.<br />As mentioned above, the Precoding procession in the method with which cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly shall be expressed as W [0], *W [1], *W [2], ..., W[N-2] *, and *W [N-1].<br />However, W [0], *W [1], *W [2], ..., W [N-2]<br />*W [N-1] shall comprise at least two or more different Precoding processions. (W[0],W[1],<br />The same Precoding procession may be included in W [2], ..., *W[N-2] *, and *W [N-1]. It is K about the number of slots which uses Precoding procession W [0] when transmitting all the bits that constitute the block after two coding._０It is K about the number of slots which uses * Precoding procession W [1]._１、It is K about the number of slots which uses Precoding procession W[i]._iIt is K about the number of slots which uses (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)), and Precoding procession W[N-1] *._N-1When it carries out,<br /><br />&lt;Condition #133&gt;<br />K_０=K_１= ... =K_i= ... =K_N-1That is, K_a=K_b (fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (a and *b are the integers of 0 to N-1), a!=b)<br /><br />It is K about the number of times of using Precoding procession W [0] when transmitting all the bits that come out, exist and constitute the block after the 1st coding._０，１It is K about the number of times of using * Precoding procession W [1]._１，１、It is K about the number of times of using Precoding procession W[i]._i,1It is K about the number of times of using (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)), and * Precoding procession W[N-1] *._N-1,1When it carries out,<br /><br />&lt;Condition #134&gt;<br />K_０，１=K_１，１= ... =K_i,1= ... =K_N-1,1That is, K_a,1=K_b,1It is K about the number of times of using Precoding procession W [0] when transmitting all the bits that are (fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (a and *b are the integers of 0 to N-1), a!=b), and constitute the block after the 2nd coding._０，２It is K about the number of times of using * Precoding procession W [1]._１，２、It is K about the number of times of using Precoding procession W[i]._i,2It is K about the number of times of using (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)), and * Precoding procession W[N-1] *._N-1,2When it carries out,<br /><br />&lt;Condition #135&gt;<br />K_０，２=K_１，２= ... =K_i,2= ... =K_N-1,2That is, K_a,2=K_b,2It is good in their being (fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (a and *b are the integers of 0 to N-1), a!=b).<br />and -- in the modulation method currently supported when a communications system uses it, choosing from the modulation method which is supporting a plurality of modulation methods and it is supporting -- &lt;condition #133&gt; -- good [ to materialize &lt;condition #134 &lt;condition #135&gt;&gt; ].<br />However, when a plurality of modulation methods are being supported, it is common that the numbers of bits which can transmit as one symbol with each modulation method differ (in the case). it can become the same. a case -- &lt;condition #133&gt; -- the modulation method which cannot fill &lt;condition #134 &lt;condition #135&gt;&gt; may exist. &lt;condition #133&gt; -- &lt;condition #134 &lt;condition #135&gt;&gt; -- instead of -- the following -- it is good to fulfill conditions. [ in this case, ]<br />&lt;Condition #136&gt;<br />K_aK_b0 or 1 [ a of difference / |K ], i.e.,_a- K_b| 0 or 1<br />(fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (a and *b are the integers of 0 to N-1), a!=b)<br /><br />&lt;Condition #137&gt;<br />K_a,1K_b,10 or 1 [ a of difference / |K ], i.e.,_a,1- K_b,1| 0 or 1<br />(fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (a and *b are the integers of 0 to N-1), a!=b)<br /><br />&lt;Condition #138&gt;<br />K_a,2K_b,20 or 1 [ a of difference / |K ], i.e.,_a,2- K_b,2| 0 or 1<br />(fora, b however a, *b=0, 1, 2, ..., N-1 (a and *b are the integers of 0 to N-1), a!=b)<br /><br />As mentioned above, by connecting the block after coding, and a Precoding procession, since deviation is lost in Precoding procession used in order to transmit a coding block, the effect that the receiving quality of data improves can be acquired in a receiving set.

1352Although N Precoding procession W [0], W [1], W [2], ..., W [N-2], and W [N-1] will be prepared in the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly in this embodiment for the Precoding hopping method of cycle N, Although there is also the method of arranging in order of W [0], W [1], W [2], ..., W [N-2], and W [N-1] in the direction of a frequency axis, N Precoding procession W [0] which is not necessarily what was restricted to this and generated by this embodiment, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol for W [1], W [2], ..., W [N-2], and W [N-1] to a time-axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. Although explained as the Precoding hopping method of cycle N, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use N Precoding processions, even if it uses N Precoding processions at random so that it may have a regular cycle. When the conditions described by this embodiment are fulfilled at this time, a possibility of a receiving set that the receiving quality of good data can be obtained is high.

1353As Embodiment 15 explained, it is a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method, The MIMO transmission method of fixation of a Precoding procession, a space-time block encoding method, The mode of transmission and the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly exists only one stream, and a sending set (a broadcasting station, a base station) may enable it to choose one of transmission methods from these modes. At this time, only a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method, the MIMO transmission method of fixation of a Precoding procession, a space-time block encoding method, and one stream are set in the mode of transmission and the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, In the career (substitute) group which chose the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly, it is good to carry out this embodiment.<br /><br />(Other supplements)<br />The sending set is provided in this specification, For example, it is possible to be communication / broadcast apparatus, such as a broadcasting station, a base station, an access point, a terminal, and a mobile phone (mobile phone), and provides the receiving set at this time, It is possible to be communication equipment, such as television, radio, a terminal, a personal computer, a mobile phone, an access point, and a base station. A sending set in the present invention and a receiving set, It is apparatus which has a communication function and it is also considered that it is a form which the apparatus can connect to the device for performing applications, such as television, radio, a personal computer, and a mobile phone, via a certain interface (for example, USB).

1354In this embodiment, symbols (preamble, unique word, and post Ambur, a reference symbol, etc.) other than a data symbol, for example, pilot symbols, the symbol for control information, etc. may be arranged how at the frame. And although the pilot symbol and the symbol for control information are named, what kind of how to name may be performed and the function itself is important here.

1355The known symbol which modulated the pilot symbol, for example in the transceiver machine using PSK abnormal conditions Or it is a receiver when a receiver takes a synchronization, The symbol which the transmitter transmitted is known. It may be and is a receiver, Detection of a frequency synchronization, a time synchronization, channel estimation (each abnormal-conditions signal) (presumption of CSI (Channel State Information)), and a signal, etc. will be performed using this symbol.

1356In order that the symbol for control information may realize communication of those other than data (application etc.), It is a symbol for transmitting the information, including for example, the code rate of the modulation method, error correcting code-ized method, and error correcting code-ized method used for communication, the setting information on a higher rank layer, etc., which needs to be transmitted to a communication partner.<br />It is possible for the present invention not to be limited to the above-mentioned Embodiments 1-5, but to change variously, and to carry out. For example, although the above-mentioned embodiment explains the case where it carries out as a communication apparatus, it is also possible for it not to be restricted to this and to perform this correspondence procedure as software.

1357It is although the Precoding change method in the method of transmitting two abnormal-conditions signals from two antennas was explained above, Precoding is performed not to the thing restricted to this but to the signal after four mapping, The method, jam which generate four abnormal-conditions signals and transmit from four antennas, It can carry out similarly as the Precoding change method of performing Precoding, generating N abnormal-conditions signals to the signal after N mapping, and changing Precoding weight (procession) similarly in the method of transmitting from N antennas.<br /><br />Although terms, such as "Precoding", "Precoding weight", and a "Precoding procession", are used in this specification, What kind of thing may be sufficient as the called way itself (for example, you may also call it code book (codebook).), and it becomes important [ the signal processing itself ] in the present invention.<br /><br />It is although the receiving set explains in this specification using ML operation, APP, Max-logAPP, ZF, MMSE, etc., As a result, although the soft decision result (the logarithm likelihood, the logarithm likelihood ratio) and hard decision result ("0" or "1") of each bit of the data which the sending set transmitted will be obtained, these may also be generically called detection, a recovery, detection, presumption, and separation.<br /><br />Baseband signal s1(i) of two streams, s2(i) (baseband signal after mapping of a certain modulation method) (however, i (time)) Or in baseband signal z1(i) after Precoding which received expressing the turn of frequency (career) and was generated by performing Precoding which changes a Precoding procession regularly, and z2(i), It is I about the phase I ingredient of baseband signal z1(i) after Precoding._１(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_１(i) Carry out and it is I about the phase I ingredient of baseband signal z2(i) after Precoding._２(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_２(i) Carry out. A baseband ingredient is replaced at this time,<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange._１(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_２(i) the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange -- I_２(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_１(i)<br />It is from transmitting antenna 2 about the abnormal-conditions signal which is equivalent to baseband signal r2(i) after transmitting antenna 1 and exchange in the abnormal-conditions signal which carries out and is equivalent to baseband signal r1(i) after exchange, It is good, though the same frequency is used for the same time and it transmits to it from an antenna which is different in the abnormal-conditions signal equivalent to baseband signal r1(i) after exchange, and baseband signal r2(i) after exchange so that it may say that the same frequency is used for the same time and it transmits to it. moreover<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange._１(i) a rectangular ingredient -- I_２(i) the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange -- Q_１(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_２(i)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange._２(i) a rectangular ingredient -- I_１(i) the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange -- Q_１(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_２(i)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange._１(i) a rectangular ingredient -- I_２(i) the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange -- Q_２(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_１(i)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange._２(i) a rectangular ingredient -- I_１(i) the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange -- Q_２(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_１(i)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange._１(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_２(i) the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange -- Q_１(i) a rectangular ingredient -- I_２(i)<br />- It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange._２(i) a rectangular ingredient -- I_１(i) the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange -- I_２(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_１(i)<br />- It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange._２(i) a rectangular ingredient -- I_１(i) the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange -- Q_１(i) a rectangular ingredient -- I_２(i)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange._１(i) a rectangular ingredient -- I_２(i) the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange -- Q_１(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_２(i)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange._２(i) a rectangular ingredient -- I_１(i) the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange -- Q_１(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_２(i)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange._１(i) a rectangular ingredient -- I_２(i) the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange -- Q_２(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_１(i)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange._２(i) a rectangular ingredient -- I_１(i) the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange -- Q_２(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_１(i)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange._１(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_２(i) the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange -- I_２(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_１(i)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange._１(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_２(i) the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange -- Q_１(i) a rectangular ingredient -- I_２(i)<br />- It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange._２(i) a rectangular ingredient -- I_１(i) the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange -- I_２(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_１(i)<br />- It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange._２(i) a rectangular ingredient -- I_１(i) the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange -- Q_１(i) a rectangular ingredient -- I_２(i)<br /><br />It may carry out. It is although Precoding was performed to the signal of two streams and exchange of the in-phase component of the signal after Precoding and a rectangular ingredient was explained by Above, It is also possible to perform Precoding to many signals and to perform exchange of the in-phase component of the signal after Precoding and a rectangular ingredient not from the thing restricted to this but from two streams.<br />Although the above-mentioned example explains exchange of the baseband signal of the same time (the same frequency (substitute) (career)), it may not be exchange of the baseband signal of the same time. As an example, it can describe as follows.<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange._１It is Q about (i+v) and a rectangular ingredient._２It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after (i+w) and exchange._２It is Q about (i+w) and a rectangular ingredient._１(i+v)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange._１It is I about (i+v) and a rectangular ingredient._２It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after (i+w) and exchange._１It is Q about (i+v) and a rectangular ingredient._２(i+w)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange._２It is I about (i+w) and a rectangular ingredient._１It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after (i+v) and exchange._１It is Q about (i+v) and a rectangular ingredient._２(i+w)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange._１It is I about (i+v) and a rectangular ingredient._２It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after (i+w) and exchange._２It is Q about (i+w) and a rectangular ingredient._１(i+v)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange._２It is I about (i+w) and a rectangular ingredient._１It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after (i+v) and exchange._２It is Q about (i+w) and a rectangular ingredient._１(i+v)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange._１It is Q about (i+v) and a rectangular ingredient._２It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after (i+w) and exchange._１It is I about (i+v) and a rectangular ingredient._２(i+w)<br />- It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange._２It is I about (i+w) and a rectangular ingredient._１It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after (i+v) and exchange._２It is Q about (i+w) and a rectangular ingredient._１(i+v)<br />- It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange._２It is I about (i+w) and a rectangular ingredient._１It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after (i+v) and exchange._１It is I about (i+v) and a rectangular ingredient._２(i+w)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange._１It is I about (i+v) and a rectangular ingredient._２It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after (i+w) and exchange._１It is Q about (i+v) and a rectangular ingredient._２(i+w)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange._２It is I about (i+w) and a rectangular ingredient._１It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after (i+v) and exchange._１It is Q about (i+v) and a rectangular ingredient._２(i+w)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange._１It is I about (i+v) and a rectangular ingredient._２It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after (i+w) and exchange._２It is Q about (i+w) and a rectangular ingredient._１(i+v)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange._２It is I about (i+w) and a rectangular ingredient._１It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after (i+v) and exchange._２It is Q about (i+w) and a rectangular ingredient._１(i+v)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange._１It is Q about (i+v) and a rectangular ingredient._２It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after (i+w) and exchange._２It is Q about (i+w) and a rectangular ingredient._１(i+v)<br />- It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange._１It is Q about (i+v) and a rectangular ingredient._２It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after (i+w) and exchange._１(i+v),<br />It is I about a rectangular ingredient._２(i+w)<br />- It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange._２It is I about (i+w) and a rectangular ingredient._１It is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after (i+v) and exchange._２It is Q about (i+w) and a rectangular ingredient._１(i+v)<br />- It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange._２It is I about (i+w) and a rectangular ingredient._１It is Q about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after (i+v) and exchange._１It is I about (i+v) and a rectangular ingredient._２(i+w)<br />Drawing 96 is a figure for explaining the above-mentioned statement. As shown in Drawing 96, in baseband signal z1(i) after Precoding, and z2(i), it is I about the phase I ingredient of baseband signal z1(i) after Precoding._１(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_１(i) Carry out and it is I about the phase I ingredient of baseband signal z2(i) after Precoding._２(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_２(i) Carry out. And it is I about the in-phase component of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange._r1(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_r1(i) baseband signal [ after exchange ] r_２(i) It is I about an in-phase component._r2(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_r2(i) When it carries out, it is in-phase component I of baseband signal r1(i) after exchange._r1(i) rectangular ingredient Qr_１(i) in-phase component I of baseband signal r2(i) after exchange_r2(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_r2(i) It shall be expressed with either which was explained by Above. It is although this example explained exchange of the baseband signal after Precoding of the same time (the same frequency (substitute) (career)), As mentioned above, it may be exchange of the baseband signal after Precoding of different time (different frequency (substitute) (career)).<br />And it is from transmitting antenna 2 about the abnormal-conditions signal which is equivalent to baseband signal r2(i) after transmitting antenna 1 and exchange in the abnormal-conditions signal equivalent to baseband signal r1(i) after exchange, From an antenna which is different in the abnormal-conditions signal equivalent to baseband signal r1(i) after exchange, and baseband signal r2(i) after exchange, the same frequency will be used for the same time and it will transmit to it so that it may say that the same frequency is used for the same time and it transmits to it.<br /><br /><br />The transmitting antenna of a sending set, the receiving antenna of a receiving set, and one antenna both indicated with the drawing may be constituted by a plurality of antennas.<br /><br />In this specification, "" expresses the universal quantifier (universal*quantifier) and "" expresses the existential quantifier (existential*quantifier).

1358In this specification, a unit of the phase like the angle of deviation is made into "Radian (radian)" in the complex plane.<br />If a complex plane is used, it can display by polar form as a display by the polar coordinates of a complex number. If this point is expressed in polar coordinates as [r, *theta] * when point *(a, *b) * on a complex plane is made to correspond to complex number z*=*a*+*jb* (both a and b are the real numbers, and j is an imaginary unit),<br />a=rxcostheta,<br />b=rxsintheta

1359<maths num="592"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0600.tif" /></maths>

1360Established and r* are absolute value [ of *z* ] *(r*=*|z|) *, and theta* becomes angle of deviation * (argument). And z*=*a*+*jb is re.^jthetaIt is expressed.<br /><br /><br />In explanation of the present invention, although a baseband signal, and s1, s2, z1 and z2 become a complex signal, when a complex signal sets an in-phase signal to I and sets a rectangular signal to Q, a complex signal will be expressed as I*+*jQ (j is an imaginary unit). At this time, I may become zero and Q may become zero.<br /><br /><br />An example of the broadcasting system using the method of changing a Precoding procession regularly explained in this specification is shown in Drawing 59. In Drawing 59, video encoding part 5901 considers an image as an input, performs image coding, and outputs data 5902 after image coding. Audio coding section 5903 considers a sound as an input, performs speech coding, and outputs data 5904 after speech coding. Data coding part 5905 considers data as an input, codes data (for example, data compression), and outputs data 5906 after data coding. These are summarized to make sources-of-information coding part 5900.

1361Transmission section 5907 considers data 5902 after image coding, data 5904 after speech coding, and data 5906 after data coding as an input, and is either of these data, Or all these data is used as send data, error-correcting-code-izing, abnormal conditions, Precoding, etc. are processed (for example, signal processing in the sending set of Drawing 3), and 5908_N is outputted from transmitted signal 5908_1. And 5908_N is transmitted as an electric wave by 5909_N from antenna 5909_1 from transmitted signal 5908_1, respectively.

1362Receiving part 5912 considers 5911_M as an input from received signal 5911_1 received by 5910_M from antenna 5910_1, Frequency conversion, decoding of Precoding, logarithm likelihood ratio calculation, error correction decoding, etc. are processed (for example, processing in the receiving set of Drawing 7), and receiving data 5913, 5915, and 5917 is outputted. Sources-of-information decoding part 5919 considers receiving data 5913, 5915, and 5917 as an input, image decoding section 5914 considers receiving data 5913 as an input, decoding for images is performed, a picture signal is outputted, and an image is displayed on television and a display. Audio decoding section 5916 considers receiving data 5915 as an input, and is .. Decoding for sounds is performed, an audio signal is outputted, and a sound flows from a speaker. Data decryption-ized part 5918 considers receiving data 5917 as an input, performs decoding for data, and outputs the information on data.<br /><br />In the embodiment explaining the present invention, as explained above, in a multicareer transmission method like an OFDM method, the number of the coding machines which the sending set holds may be how many. Therefore, naturally it is also possible to apply how a sending set possesses one coding machine and distributes an output for example, as shown in Drawing 4 also to a multicareer transmission method like an OFDM method. At this time, wireless sections 310A and 310B of Drawing 4 will be transposed to OFDM method related treating parts 1301A and 1301B of Drawing 13. At this time, explanation of an OFDM method related treating part is as Embodiment 1.<br /><br />With the configuration method of the symbol described by Embodiment A5 and Embodiment 1 from Embodiment A1, As a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly using several different Precoding processions from the "method of changing a different Precoding procession" described on these specifications, it can carry out similarly. It is the same about other embodiments. Below, it explains supplementarily about several different Precoding processions.<br />the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly sake -- N Precoding to prepare -- F [0], *F [1], *F [2], and ... it shall express with F [N-3], F [N-2], and F [N-1] At this time, "a plurality of different Precoding processions" described above shall fulfill the following two conditions (condition *1 and condition *2).

1363<maths num="593"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0601.tif" /></maths>

1364"And (x is an integer of 0 to N-1, y is an integer of 0 to N-1, and it considers it as x!=y) F[x]!=F[y] shall be materialized to all the x which fills the above-mentioned, and all the y" will be said.

1365<maths num="594"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0602.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1366x is an integer of 0 to N-1, y is an integer of 0 to N-1, and k of the real number which fills an upper type, or a complex number exists to all the x when it is considered as x!=y, and no y.<br /><br />An example is supplemented in the procession of 2x2. Processions R and S of 2 x2 shall be expressed as follows.

1367<maths num="595"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0603.tif" /></maths>

1368<maths num="596"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0604.tif" /></maths><br /><br />

1369a=Ae^jdelta11b=Be^jdelta12c=Ce^jdelta21d=De^jdelta22And e=Ee^jgamma11f=Fe^jgamma12g=germanium^jgamma21h=helium^jgamma22It shall be come out and expressed. However, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H consider it as the zero or more real numbers, and are delta._１１delta_１２delta_２１delta_２２gamma_１１gamma_１２gamma_２１gamma_２２Units shall be denoted by Radian. When it uses that it is R!=S with (1) a!=e, (2) b!=f, (3) c!=g, and (4) d!=h at this time, at least one of (1), (2), (3), and (4) will be materialized.

1370In procession R, any one of a, b, c, and the d may use the procession which is "zero" as a Precoding procession. that is, (3) c of a, c, and d which is not zero is zero, (1) a is zero and a, b, and c are not [ (2) b of b, c and d which is not zero is zero, and / (4) d of a, b and d which is not zero is zero, and ] zero -- may come out and it may be.<br /><br />and -- although two abnormal-conditions signals were transmitted from two antennas and the communications system of the MIMO method which receives each with two antennas was indicated in the shown example of a system which was shown by explanation of the present invention Naturally the present invention is applicable also to the communications system of a MISO (Multiple*Input*Single*Output) method. In the case of a MISO method, in a sending set, the point which has applied the Puri coding method which changes a plurality of Precoding processions regularly is as old explanation. Although it is one side and a receiving set serves as composition which does not have antenna 701_Y, wireless section 703_Y, channel change estimating part 707_1 of abnormal-conditions signal z1, and channel change estimating part 707_2 of abnormal-conditions signal z2 among composition of being shown in Drawing 7, In this case, even if it is, the data which the sending set transmitted can be presumed by performing processing shown in this specification. It is a well-known thing (setting to 1 antenna reception) that a plurality of transmitted signals can be received and decoded with one antenna in the same frequency band and the same time. ML operation etc. should just be processed (Max-log*APP etc.). it is -- in the present invention, the recovery (detection) in consideration of the Puri coding method which was used at the transmitting side and which is changed regularly will be performed in signal processing part 711 of Drawing 7.<br /><br />For example, the program which performs the above-mentioned correspondence procedure is beforehand stored in ROM (Read OnlyMemory), and it may be made to operate the program by CPU (Central Processor Unit).

1371The program which stored the program which performs the above-mentioned correspondence procedure in the storage which can be read by computer, and was stored in the storage is recorded on RAM (Random Access Memory) of a computer, It may be made to operate a computer according to the program.<br />And each composition, such as each of above-mentioned embodiments, may be typically realized as LSI (Large Scale Integration) which is an integrated circuit. These may be individually formed into 1 chip, and they may be formed into 1 chip so that all the composition of each embodiment or a part of composition may be included. Here, although referred to as LSI, it may be called IC (Integrated Circuit), a system LSI, super LSI, and Ultra LSI by the difference in a degree of location. The technique of integrated-circuit-izing is not restricted to LSI, and may be realized by the dedicated communication circuit or a general-purpose processor. After LSI manufacture, the reconfigurable processor which can reconstruct connection and a setup of FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) which can be programmed, and the circuit cell inside LSI may be used.

1372As long as the art of integrated-circuit-izing of replacing LSI with another art which semiconductor technology progresses or derives appears, naturally a functional block may be integrated using the art. Adaptation of biotechnology, etc. can be made into possibility.<br /><br /><br />With the configuration method of the symbol described by Embodiment A5 and Embodiment 1 from Embodiment A1, As a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly using several different Precoding processions from the "method of changing a different Precoding procession" described on these specifications, it can carry out similarly. "Several different Precoding processions" is as above-mentioned explanation.

1373Above, "with the configuration method of the symbol described by Embodiment A5 and Embodiment 1 from Embodiment A1, as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly using several different Precoding processions from the "method of changing a different Precoding procession" described on these specifications, it can carry out similarly. " -- although indicated As "the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly using several different Precoding processions", N above-mentioned different Precoding processions are prepared, and it is good using this N different Precoding procession also as the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H is taken as a bigger natural number than N). (There is a method like Embodiment C2 as an example.)<br />In the configuration method of the symbol described by Embodiment 1, even if it uses the Puri coding method which was described by Embodiment C5 from Embodiment C1 and which changes a Precoding procession regularly, it can carry out similarly. Even if similarly it uses the Puri coding method which was described by Embodiment C5 from Embodiment C1 and which changes a Precoding procession regularly as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession from Embodiment A1 to an embodiment A5 rule target, it can carry out similarly.<br /><br />(Embodiment D1)<br />They are QC (Quasi*Cyclic) LDPC (Low-Density*Prity-Check) numerals (it is not QC-LDPC code) as shown in nonpatent literature 12 - nonpatent literature 15. it may be an LDPC code -- the connection numerals of an LDPC code and a BCH code (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem*code), How to change a Precoding procession regularly [ when block numerals using tail biting, such as turbo numerals or Duo-Binary*Turbo*Code, are used ] is explained in detail. How to change a Precoding procession regularly, This embodiment can be carried out even if it is which [ of the method of changing regularly the Precoding procession expressed by the complex number, and the method of changing regularly the Precoding procession expressed with the real number which explains by the following ] case.

1374Here, the case where two streams, s1 and s2, are transmitted is explained to an example as an example. However, when it codes using block numerals, and control information etc. are not required, the number of bits which constitutes the block after coding is in agreement with the number of bits (however, control information etc. which are indicated below may be included in this.) which constitutes block numerals. When it codes using block numerals and control information, including for example, CRC (cyclic*redundancy*check), a transmission parameter, etc., etc. are required, The number of bits which constitutes the block after coding may be the sum of the number of bits and the numbers of bits, such as control information, which constitutes block numerals.

1375Drawing 97 is a figure showing change of the number of symbols required for the block after one coding, and the number of slots, when block numerals are used. Drawing 97 is "a figure showing change of the number of symbols required for the block after one coding, and the number of slots when block numerals are used" as shown in the sending set of Drawing 4 for example, when two streams, s1 and s2, are transmitted and the sending set has one coding machine. (At this time, single career transmission, multicareer transmission like OFDM, and any may be used as a transmission method.)<br />As shown in Drawing 97, suppose that it is 6000 bits the number of bits which constitutes the block after one coding in block numerals. In order to transmit these 6000 bits, 1000 symbol is needed, when a modulation method is QPSK, it is 3000 symbol and 16QAM and it is 1500 symbol and 64QAM.

1376And since two streams will be simultaneously transmitted in the sending set of Drawing 4, when a modulation method is QPSK, they are the 3000 above-mentioned symbols, s1 -- 1500 symbols and s2 -- 1500 symbol quota Be -- in order to transmit 1500 symbols which transmit by s1 since it becomes things, and 1500 symbols which transmit by s2, 1500 slots (here, a "slot" is named.) are needed.

1377When it thinks the same way and a modulation method is 16QAM, in order to transmit all the bits which constitute the block after one coding, 750 slots are needed, and when a modulation method is 64QAM, 500 slots are needed in order to transmit all the bits which constitute 1 block.<br />In the case where it corresponds to a multicareer method like an OFDM method to the sending set of Drawing 4 in this embodiment in the case of the sending set of Drawing 4, The initialization method of a Precoding procession when the Precoding method which was explained in this specification and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is used is explained.

1378Next, a sending set considers the case where an abnormal-conditions signal is transmitted, with frame composition as shown in Drawing 99. Drawing 99 (a) shows the frame composition in the time and the frequency axis of abnormal-conditions signal z1 (it transmits with antenna 312A). Drawing 99 (b) shows the frame composition in the time and the frequency axis of abnormal-conditions signal z2 (it transmits with antenna 312B). At this time, frequency (belt) which abnormal-conditions signal z1 uses, and frequency (belt) which abnormal-conditions signal z2 uses will be made into the same thing, and abnormal-conditions signal z1 and abnormal-conditions signal z2 will exist in the same time.

1379As shown in Drawing 99 (a), as for the sending set, in section A, the information on the modulation method for being a symbol for having transmitted the preamble (control symbol) and transmitting control information to a communication partner, and transmitting the 1st and 2nd coding block especially here shall be included. A sending set is section B and will transmit the 1st coding block. A sending set is section C and will transmit the 2nd coding block.

1380As for the sending set, in section D, the information on the modulation method for being a symbol for having transmitted the preamble (control symbol) and transmitting control information to a communication partner, and transmitting the 3rd and 4th ... and a coding block especially here shall be included. A sending set is section E and will transmit the 3rd coding block. A sending set is section F and will transmit the 4th coding block.

1381As shown in Drawing 99 (b), as for the sending set, in section A, the information on the modulation method for being a symbol for having transmitted the preamble (control symbol) and transmitting control information to a communication partner, and transmitting the 1st and 2nd coding block especially here shall be included. A sending set is section B and will transmit the 1st coding block. A sending set is section C and will transmit the 2nd coding block.

1382As for the sending set, in section D, the information on the modulation method for being a symbol for having transmitted the preamble (control symbol) and transmitting control information to a communication partner, and transmitting the 3rd and 4th ... and a coding block especially here shall be included. A sending set is section E and will transmit the 3rd coding block. A sending set is section F and will transmit the 4th coding block.

1383As Drawing 100 shown in Drawing 97, when transmitting a coding block, especially, the number of slots used when 16QAM is used as a modulation method is shown, and in order to transmit the 1st coding block, 750 slots are needed by the 1st coding block.<br />Similarly, in the 2nd coding block, the number of slots used when QPSK is used as a modulation method is shown, and in order to transmit the 1st coding block, 1500 slots are needed.

1384As Drawing 101 shown in Drawing 97, when transmitting a coding block, especially, the number of slots used when QPSK is used as a modulation method is shown, and in order to transmit the 3rd coding block, 1500 slots are needed by the 3rd coding block.<br />And as this specification explained, to abnormal-conditions signal z1, i.e., the abnormal-conditions signal transmitted with antenna 312A, a phase change is not made but the case where a phase change is made is considered to abnormal-conditions signal z2, i.e., the abnormal-conditions signal transmitted with antenna 312B. At this time, Drawing 100 and Drawing 101 show how to change a Precoding procession regularly.

1385First, in order to change a Precoding procession regularly as a premise, seven Precoding processions are prepared and seven Precoding processions are named #0, #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, and #6. a Precoding procession and Is -- it shall use regularly and periodically That is, a Precoding procession shall change regularly and periodically like #0, #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #0, #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #0, #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, and ...

1386As shown in Drawing 100, by the 1st block coding block, it is first, Since 750 slot existence is recognized, when use is started from #0, it is set to #0, #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #0, #1, #2, ..., #4, #5, #6, and #0, and the 750th slot will end a Precoding procession using #0.<br />Next, a Precoding procession will be applied to each slot of the 2nd coding block. In this specification, since the case where it applies to multicasting communication and broadcast is assumed, a certain receiving terminal does not need the 1st coding block, but can consider the case where only the 2nd coding block is extracted. In this case, in order to transmit the 2nd coding block just because it used Precoding procession #0, in order to transmit the slot of the last of the 1st coding block, Precoding procession #1 should be used first. If it carries out,<br />(a) The above-mentioned terminal supervises which pattern a Precoding procession is to transmission of the slot of the last of how the 1st coding block was transmitted and surveillance, i.e., the 1st coding block, and presume the Precoding procession used for the slot of the beginning of the 2nd coding block,<br />In order not to perform (b) and (a), a sending set transmits the information on the Precoding procession used for the slot of the beginning of the 2nd coding block.<br />How to say can be considered. Since the terminal needs to supervise transmission of the 1st coding block in (a), when it is (b) in which power consumption increases, decline in the transmission efficiency of data will be caused.

1387Therefore, there is room for an improvement in assignment of the above Precoding processions. Then, the method of considering as fixation the Precoding procession used in order to transmit the slot of the beginning of each coding block is proposed. Therefore, the Precoding procession used in order to transmit the slot of the beginning of the 2nd coding block, as shown in Drawing 100 is set to #0 like the Precoding procession used in order to transmit the slot of the beginning of the 1st coding block.

1388The Precoding procession used in order to transmit the slot of the beginning of the 3rd coding block, as similarly shown in Drawing 101 is set to #0 like the Precoding procession used in order to transmit the slot of the beginning of the 1st and 2nd coding block rather than sets to #3.<br />The effect that the subject which occurs in (a) and (b) can be controlled by making it above can be acquired.

1389The method of initializing a Precoding procession for every coding block in this embodiment, i.e., the Precoding procession used for the slot of the beginning of which coding block, is although #0, fixation, and a method were described, As another method, it is also possible to carry out per frame. For example, in the symbol for transmitting a preamble and the information after control symbol transmission, the Precoding procession used by the first slot is good also as #0 and fixation.

1390For example, if it is interpreted as a frame being started from a preamble in Drawing 99, in the 1st frame, it is the first coding block, It is [ in / become the 1st coding block and / the 2nd frame ] the first numerals block, When it becomes the 3rd coding block and is made for Above to explain using Drawing 100 and Drawing 101, it is an above-mentioned example of "the Precoding procession used by the first slot is (#0) fixation per frame."

1391Next, the case where it applies to the broadcasting system using DVB-T2 standard is explained. It is as Embodiment A1 - Embodiment A3 having explained the frame composition of the broadcasting system using DVB-T2 standard. Embodiment A1 - Embodiment A3 explained using Drawing 61 and Drawing 70 -- as It is a transmission method of each PLP by P1 symbol, P2 symbol, and a control symbol group. (For example, the transmission method which transmits one abnormal-conditions signal, the transmission method using space-time block numerals, and the transmission method using the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly), and the information on a modulation method currently used are transmitted to a terminal. if a terminal starts only PLP required as information and recovery (signal separation and signal detection are included) and error correction decoding are performed at this time, the power consumption of a terminal will come out few and will end. Therefore, the Precoding procession used by the slot of the head of PLP transmitted as a transmission method like the time of explaining using Drawing 99 - Drawing 101 using the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly proposes the method of considering it as (#0) fixation.

1392For example, the broadcasting station should transmit each symbol by frame composition as shown in Drawing 61 or Drawing 70. At this time, the frame composition in a frequency-time-axis in case a broadcasting station transmits PLP(it changes with #1 to $1 in order to avoid confusion) $1, and PLP$K as an example using the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is shown in Drawing 102.

1393As a premise, as an example, seven Precoding processions are prepared and seven Precoding processions are named #0, #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, and #6 by the following explanation by the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly. a Precoding procession and Is -- it shall use regularly and periodically That is, a Precoding procession shall change regularly and periodically like #0, #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #0, #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #0, #1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, and ...

1394As shown in Drawing 102, PLP$1 makes the head of a slot time T and career 3 (10201 of Drawing 102), time T+4 and career 4 are made into the last (10202 of Drawing 102) of a slot, and the slot (symbol) exists (refer to Drawing 102).<br />That is, time T and career 3 are the 1st slot for PLP$1, The 2nd slot is time T and career 4, and the 3rd slot is time T, It is career 5 and ... and the 7th slot are time T+1 and career 1, The 9th slot is time T+1 and career 3, ... and the 14th slot are time T+1 and career 8, the 8th slot is time T+1 and career 2, and it becomes [ the 15th slot is time T+2 and career 0, and ] ...<br />And PLP$K makes the head of a slot time S and career 4 (10203 of Drawing 102), time S+8 and career 4 are made into the last (10204 of Drawing 102) of a slot, and the slot (symbol) exists (refer to Drawing 102).

1395That is, time S and career 4 are the 1st slot for PLP$K, The 2nd slot is time S and career 5, and the 3rd slot is time S, It is career 6 and ... and the 5th slot are time S and career 8, The 10th slot is time S+1 and career 2, ... and the 16th slot are time S+1 and career 8, the 9th slot is time S+1 and career 1, and it becomes [ the 17th slot is time S+2 and career 0, and ] ...

1396every -- every including the information on the slot (symbol) of the head of PLP, and the information on the last slot (symbol) -- the information on the slot which PLP is using will be transmitted by control symbols, such as P1 symbol, P2 symbol, and a control symbol group.<br />At this time, a slot shall perform Precoding for time T and career 3 (10201 of Drawing 102) which are the slots of the head of PLP$1 like the time of explaining using Drawing 99 - Drawing 101 using Precoding procession #0. Similarly, time S and career 3 (10205 of Drawing 102) which are the slots of the last of PLP$K-1 are used by the slot, Irrespective of the number of a Precoding procession, a slot shall perform Precoding for time S and career 4 (10203 of Drawing 102) which are the slots of the head of PLP$K using Precoding procession #0.

1397The slot of the head of other PLP(s) which transmit using the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly shall perform Precoding using Precoding procession #0.<br />The effect that the subject of (a) and (b) described by Above can be controlled by making it above can be acquired.

1398every which contains a receiving set in control symbols, such as P1 symbol, P2 symbol, and a control symbol group, although it naturally comes out -- PLP needed from the information on the slot which PLP is using will be extracted, and recovery (signal separation and signal detection are included) and error correction decoding will be performed. The receiving set is beforehand known about the rule of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly (when there are a plurality of rules), Transmitting the information on the rule which a sending set uses, a receiving set acquires the information, the rule currently used will be known. every -- based on the number of the slot of the head of PLP, the recovery (signal separation and signal detection are included) of an information symbol is attained by uniting the timing of the change rule of a Precoding procession.

1399next, frame composition as shown in Drawing 103 -- (-- the frame which comprises a symbol group of Drawing 103 is called a mainframe.) -- the case where a broadcasting station (base station) transmits an abnormal-conditions signal is considered. In Drawing 103, the same numerals are attached about what operates like Drawing 61. In a receiving set (terminal), in a mainframe, a characteristic point is a point divided into the subframe which transmits one abnormal-conditions signal, and the subframe which transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals so that it may be easy to adjust gain control of a received signal. Multiple same abnormal-conditions signals as the case where one abnormal-conditions signal "which transmits one abnormal-conditions signal" is transmitted from one antenna are generated, and also when transmitting these signals of a plurality of from several different antennas, it shall contain.

1400In Drawing 103, it is by PLP#1 (6105_1) - PLP#N (6105_N), While subframe 10300 which transmits one abnormal-conditions signal is constituted and subframe 10300 comprises only PLP, PLP which transmits with two or more abnormal-conditions signal does not exist. And while PLP$1 (10302_1) - PLP$M (10302_M) constitute subframe 10301 which transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals and subframe 10301 comprises only PLP, PLP which transmits one abnormal-conditions signal does not exist.

1401It sets on subframe 10301 like the time of explaining until now at this time, When the Puri coding method which was explained by Above and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is used, The slot of the head of PLP (PLP$1 (10302_1) - PLP$M (10302_M)) shall perform Precoding using Precoding procession #0 (it is called initialization of a Precoding procession). However, in PLP$1 (10302_1) - PLP$M (10302_M), another transmission method A1, for example, an embodiment, - Embodiment A3 explained -- as Initialization of the Precoding procession which described above PLP which uses the transmission method using the fixed Puri coding method, the transmission method using a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission method, or the transmission method using space-time block numerals will not be related.

1402As shown in Drawing 104, PLP$1 shall be PLP of the beginning of the subframe which transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals of the Xth mainframe, and PLP$1' shall be PLP of the beginning of the subframe which transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals of the Yth mainframe. and PLP$1 and PLP$1' -- suppose all that the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is used. In Drawing 104, the same thing as Drawing 102 attaches the same numerals.

1403At this time, the slot (10201 of Drawing 104 (time T, slot of career 3)) of the head of PLP$1 which is PLP of the beginning of the subframe which transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals of the Xth mainframe shall perform Precoding using Precoding procession #0.<br />Similarly, the slot (10401 of Drawing 104 (time T', slot of career 7)) of the head of PLP$1' which is PLP of the beginning of the subframe which transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals of the Yth mainframe shall perform Precoding using Precoding procession #0.

1404As mentioned above, in each mainframe, Precoding shall be performed using Precoding procession #0 in the slot of the beginning of PLP of the beginning of the subframe which transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals.<br />Doing in this way also becomes important in order to control the subject of (a) and (b) described by Above.

1405Although this embodiment, in addition, explained to the example the case where two streams, s1 and s2, were transmitted, and the sending set had one coding machine as shown in Drawing 97, and shown in the sending set of Drawing 4, It is possible to apply initialization of the Precoding procession explained by this embodiment also to the case where two streams, s1 and s2, are transmitted, and the sending set has two coding machines like the sending set of Drawing 3 as shown in Drawing 98.<br /><br />(Other supplements 2)<br />Although the dignity attachment synchronizer is expressing the Precoding procession used for Precoding by the complex number in each above-mentioned embodiment, a Precoding procession can also be expressed with the real number. (It is called "the Puri coding method which carried out real number representation".)<br />That is, for example, the baseband signal (used modulation method) after two mapping is made into s1(i) and s2(i) (however, i time or frequency), and the baseband signal after two Precoding obtained by Precoding is made into z1(i) and z2(i). And it is I about the in-phase component of s1(i) in the baseband signal (used modulation method) after mapping._s1(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_s1(i) the baseband signal (used modulation method) after mapping -- the in-phase component of s2(i) -- I_s2(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_s2(i) the baseband signal after Precoding -- the in-phase component of z1(i) -- I_z1(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_z1(i) the baseband signal after Precoding -- the in-phase component of z2(i) -- I_z2(i) a rectangular ingredient -- Q_z2(i) Precoding procession (Precoding procession which carried out real number representation) H which comprised the real number when carried out_rUse and the following expressions of relations are materialized.

1406<maths num="597"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0605.tif" /></maths>

1407However, Precoding procession H which comprised the real number_rIs -- it is expressed as follows.

1408<maths num="598"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0606.tif" /></maths>

1409At this time, it is a._１１a_１２a_１３a_１４a_２１a_２２a_２３a_２４a_３１a_３２a_３３a_３４a_４１a_４２a_４３a_４４It is Is a real number. However, {a_１１= 0 and a_１２= 0 and a_１３= 0 and a_１４= 0} must not be materialized and it is {a._２１= 0 and a_２２= 0 and a_２３= 0 and a_２４= 0} must not be materialized and it is {a._３１= 0 and a_３２= 0 and a_３３= 0 and a_３４= 0} must not be materialized and it is {a._４１= 0 and a_４２= 0 and a_４３= 0 and a_４４= 0} must not be materialized. And {a_１１= 0 and a_２１= 0 and a_３１= 0 and a_４１= 0} must not be materialized and it is {a._１２= 0 and a_２２= 0 and a_３２= 0 and a_４２= 0} must not be materialized and it is {a._１３= 0 and a_２３= 0 and a_３３= 0 and a_４３= 0} must not be materialized and it is {a._１４= 0 and a_２４= 0 and a_３４= 0 and a_４４= 0} must not be materialized.<br /><br />It can set for the example of application of the Puri coding method of the present invention, such as a configuration method etc. of the symbol described by Embodiment A5, Embodiment 7, and Embodiment 1 from Embodiment A1, having used "the method of changing a different Precoding procession" Also as the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly using the Precoding procession of different plurality which carried out real number representation in the "Puri coding method who did real number representation" explained by Above, Though natural, it can carry out similarly and the validity of a Precoding procession change of the present invention is the same as that of the time of using the Precoding procession of different plurality which carried out complex expression. "Several different Precoding processions" is as above-mentioned explanation.

1410Above -- "-- Embodiment A5 from Embodiment A1, and Embodiment 7 -- and having used the "method of changing a different Precoding procession" in the example of application of the Puri coding method of the present invention, such as a configuration method etc. of the symbol described by Embodiment 1 in the "Puri coding method who did real number representation" explained by Above, though natural also as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly using the Precoding procession of different plurality which carried out real number representation, it can carry out similarly. " -- although indicated As "the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly using the Precoding procession of different plurality which carried out real number representation", N different (real number representation was carried out) Precoding processions are prepared, and it is good using this N different (real number representation was carried out) Precoding procession also as the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H is taken as a bigger natural number than N). (There is a method like Embodiment C2 as an example.)<br />In the configuration method of the symbol described by Embodiment 1, even if it uses the Puri coding method which was described by Embodiment C5 from Embodiment C1 and which changes a Precoding procession regularly, it can carry out similarly. Even if similarly it uses the Puri coding method which was described by Embodiment C5 from Embodiment C1 and which changes a Precoding procession regularly as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession from Embodiment A1 to an embodiment A5 rule target, it can carry out similarly.<br /><br />(Embodiment F1)<br />The Puri coding method which was explained by Embodiment 1-26 and embodiment C1-C5 and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applicable to arbitrary baseband signals s1 and s2 mapped by the I-Q plane. Therefore, Embodiment 1-26 and embodiment C1-C5 does not explain baseband signals s1 and s2 in detail. The Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession on the other hand, for example, regularly, When applying to baseband signals s1 and s2 generated from the error-correcting-code-ized data, still better receiving quality may be obtained by controlling the average power of s1 and s2. This embodiment describes the setting method of the average power of s1 and s2 in the case of applying the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly to baseband signals s1 and s2 generated from the error-correcting-code-ized data.

1411In the modulation method of s1, as an example, QPSK and the modulation method of s2 explain as 16QAM.<br />Since the modulation method of s1 is QPSK, s1 will transmit 2 bits per symbol. These 2 bits to transmit are named b0 and b1. Since the modulation method of s2 is 16QAM, s2 will transmit 4 bits per symbol. These 4 bits to transmit are named b2, b3, b4, and b5. And a sending set will transmit per one slot which comprises one symbol of s1, and one symbol of s2, i.e., a slot, and 6 bits of b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, and b5.

1412In for example, Drawing 94 which is an example of signal point arrangement of 16QAM in an I-Q plane, (b2, b3, b4, b5) = (0, 0, 0, 0) = (I, Q) (3xg) To 3xg, = (b2, b3, b4, b5) (0, 0, 0, 1) is (I). Q) To = (3xg, 1xg), = (b2, b3, b4, b5) (0, 0, 1, 0) is (I). Q) To = (1xg, 3xg), = (b2, b3, b4, b5) (0, 0, 1, 1) is (I). Q) To = (1xg, 1xg), b2, b3, b4, and b5= (0, 1, 0, 0) are (I). Q) ... and = (b2, b3, b4, b5) (1, 1, 1, 0) are mapped by = (I, Q) (-1xg, -3xg), and = (b2, b3, b4, b5) (1, 1, 1, 1) is mapped by = (3xg, -3xg) at = (I, Q) (-1xg, -1xg).

1413In Drawing 95 which is an example of signal point arrangement of QPSK in an I-Q plane, (b0, b1) = (0, 0) to (1xh, 1xh) = (I, Q), (b0, b1) In = (I, Q) (1xh, -1xh), map = (0, 1), = (b0, b1) (1, 0) is mapped by = (I, Q) (-1xh, 1xh), and = (b0, b1) (1, 1) is mapped by = (I, Q) (-1xh, -1xh).

1414Here, when average power (average value) of s1 and average power (average value) of s2 are made equal that is, h is denoted by a formula (273) and g assumes the case where it is expressed with a formula (272). Drawing 105 shows the absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio of b0 to b5 which explained [ above-mentioned ], when a receiving set asks for a logarithm likelihood ratio.<br />In Drawing 105, as for 10500, 10501 are an absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio ofb0, and an absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio ofb1, 10502 is an absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio ofb2, an absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio of 10503b3, an absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio of 10504b4, and an absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio of 10505b5. The absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio of b0 and b1 which were transmitted by QPSK at this time, If the absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio of b2 to b5 transmitted by 16QAM is compared, it is an absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio of b0 and b1, It will be larger than the absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio of b2 to b5, that is, the reliability in the receiving set of b0 and b1 will be higher than the reliability in the receiving set of b2 to b5. When h is carried out as a formula (273) in Drawing 95, the minimum Euclid distance of the signal point in the I-Q plane of QPSK this,

1415<maths num="599"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0607.tif" /></maths>

1416While it came out, and it is, when g is carried out as a formula (272) in Drawing 94, the minimum Euclid distance of the signal point in the I-Q plane of 16QAM,

1417<maths num="600"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0608.tif" /></maths>

1418It is because it comes out.<br />A receiving set is error correction decoding (for example, when the communications system uses the LDPC code) in this situation. The case where reliability propagation decoding of sum-product decoding etc. is performed, "the absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio of b0 and b1, According to the difference of the reliability that it is larger than the absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio of b2 to b5", the subject that the receiving quality of the data of a receiving set deteriorates occurs in response to the influence of the absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio of b2 to b5.

1419In order to conquer this subject, as shown in Drawing 106, as compared with Drawing 105, it may carry out "it is small about the difference of the absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio of b0 and b1, and the absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio of b2 to b5."<br />The thing "the average power of s1 and the average power of s2 are made to differ" is considered. The example of the composition of a power changing part (here, although it is called the power changing part, you may also call it an amplitude changing part and a weighting section.), and the signal processing part relevant to a dignity attachment composition (Precoding) part is shown in Drawing 107 and Drawing 108. In Drawing 107, the same numerals were attached about what operates like Drawing 3 and Drawing 6. In Drawing 108, the same numerals were attached about what operates like Drawing 3, Drawing 6, and Drawing 107.<br />(Example 1)<br />First, an example of operation is explained using Drawing 107. s1 (t) considers it as the baseband signal (signal after mapping) of modulation method QPSK, the mapping method is as in Drawing 95, and h is as a formula (273). s2 (t) considers it as the baseband signal (signal after mapping) of modulation method 16QAM, the mapping method is as in Drawing 94, and g is as a formula (272). t is time and this embodiment explains the direction of a time-axis as an example.

1420A power changing part (10701B) is baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, and if the value for set-up power change is set to u based on a control signal (10700), the signal (10702B) which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM u times will be outputted. u considers it as the real number and is set to u&gt; 1.0. the Precoding procession in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly -- F [t] -- carrying out (since a Precoding procession is changed on time-axis t, it can express the function of t.) -- a following formula is materialized.

1421<maths num="601"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0609.tif" /></maths>

1422Therefore, the ratio of the average power of QPSK to the average power of 16QAM is 1:u.^２It will set up. Since it will be in the receiving state where the absolute value of the logarithm likelihood ratio shown in Drawing 106 is obtained by this, the receiving quality of the data in a receiving set can be raised.<br />For example, ratio of average power of QPSK to average power of 16QAM 1:u^２about -- u,

1423<maths num="602"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0610.tif" /></maths>

1424If it sets up, the minimum Euclid distance of the signal point in the I-Q plane of QPSK and the minimum Euclid distance of the signal point in the I-Q plane of 16QAM can be made equal, and good receiving quality may be obtained.<br />However, the conditions of making equal the minimum Euclid distance of the signal point in the I-Q plane of two different modulation methods are examples until the method of setting up the ratio of the average power of QPSK to the average power of 16QAM opens. For example, the conditions of others, such as numerals length of an error correcting code who uses for error correcting code-ization, and a code rate, The receiving quality it is better to set the value of value u for power change as a different value (a big value and a small value) from the value in which the minimum Euclid distance of the signal point in the I-Q plane of two different modulation methods becomes equal may be obtained.<br />moreover -- if it considers enlarging the shortest distance of the candidate signal point acquired at the time of reception -- for example

1425<maths num="603"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0611.tif" /></maths>

1426Although the method of setting up is considered to be an example, it will be suitably set up by the demand conditions searched for as a system. Conventionally, transmission power control is generally controlling transmission power based on the feedback information from a communication partner. By this embodiment, regardless of the feedback information from a communication partner, the point which is controlling transmission power serves as the feature of the present invention, and explains this point in detail.

1427Although Above described what "value u for power change is set up for with a control signal (10700)", below, a setup of value u for the power change by the control signal (10700) for raising the receiving quality of the data in a receiving set further is explained in detail.<br /><br />(Example 1-1)<br />Block length of plurality [ sending set ] (being the number of bits which constitutes 1 block after coding) When the error correcting code called numerals length is being supported, according to the block length of the error generation numerals given to the data used for generation of s1 and s2, how to set up the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 is explained.

1428the turbo numerals to which the error correcting code performed tail biting, for example or duo binary turbo numerals, an LDPC code, and of -- it is block numerals [ like ] and a plurality of block length is supported in many communications systems or a broadcasting system. The data after the coding to which block length's error correcting code-ization chosen from a plurality of block length currently supported was performed is distributed to two lines. The data after the coding distributed to two lines is modulated with the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2, respectively, and baseband signal (signal after mapping) (t) s1 and s2 (t) are generated.

1429A control signal (10700) is a signal which shows the block length of the above-mentioned selected error correcting code, and a power changing part (10701B) sets up value u for power change according to a control signal (10700).<br />The feature of Example 1-1 is that a power changing part (10701B) sets up value u for power change according to the selected block length whom a control signal (10700) shows.

1430Here, it is u about the value for the power change according to block length X._LXSuppose that it indicates in the form to say.<br />For example, when 1000 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._L1000When it sets up and 1500 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._L1500When it sets up and 3000 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._L3000It sets up. At this time, it is u, for example._L1000u_L1500u_L3000By considering it as a value different, respectively, it is sometimes possible to acquire high error correcting capability in the time of each numerals length. However, an effect may be unable to be acquired even if it changes the value for power change by some numerals length who sets up. Even if it changes numerals length then, it is not necessary to change the value for power change. (For example, u)_L1000=u_L1500It comes out and there is also a certain thing. An important thing (u),_L1000u_L1500u_L3000It is that two or more values exist in inside. By Above, Although the case of three numerals length was explained to the example, it is not what was restricted to this, and it sets to a sending set, When two or more setup of numerals length is possible, it is an important point that the sending set can choose the value for one of power change from the values for power change in which a plurality of setup is possible, and the value for power change which can be set up can make a power change when [ two or more ] it exists and numerals length is set up.

1431<br />(Example 1-2)<br />When the sending set is supporting the error correcting code of a plurality of code rates, according to the code rate of the error generation numerals given to the data used for generation of s1 and s2, how to set up the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 is explained.

1432the turbo numerals to which the error correcting code performed tail biting, for example or duo binary turbo numerals, an LDPC code, and of -- it is block numerals [ like ] and a plurality of code rates are supported in many communications systems or a broadcasting system. The data after the coding to which error correcting code-ization of the code rate chosen from a plurality of code rates currently supported was performed is distributed to two lines. The data after the coding distributed to two lines is modulated with the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2, respectively, and baseband signal (signal after mapping) (t) s1 and s2 (t) are generated.

1433A control signal (10700) is a signal which shows the code rate of the above-mentioned selected error correcting code, and a power changing part (10701B) sets up value u for power change according to a control signal (10700).<br />The feature of Example 1-2 is that a power changing part (10701B) sets up value u for power change according to the selected code rate which a control signal (10700) shows.

1434Here, it is u about the value for the power change according to code rate rx._rXSuppose that it indicates in the form to say.<br />For example, when r1 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._r1When it sets up and r2 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._r2When it sets up and r3 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._r3It sets up. At this time, it is u, for example._r1u_r2u_r3It is sometimes possible by considering it as But and a value different, respectively to acquire high error correcting capability in the time of each code rate. However, an effect may be unable to be acquired even if it changes the value for power change with some code rate to set up. Even if it changes a code rate then, it is not necessary to change the value for power change. (For example, u)_r1=u_r2It comes out and there is also a certain thing. An important thing (u),_r1u_r2u_r3It is that two or more values exist in inside. <br />As an example of above r1, r2, and r3, when an error correcting code is an LDPC code, it is possible to be code rates, such as 1/2, 2/3, and 3/4, respectively.<br />In Above, although the case of three code rates was explained to the example, it is not what was restricted to this, In a sending set, when two or more setup is possible for a code rate, the sending set can choose the value for one of power change from the values for power change in which a plurality of setup is possible, and the value for power change which can be set up can make a power change, when [ two or more ] it exists and a code rate is set up.<br />Things are important points.

1435<br />(Example 1-3)<br />It becomes important to carry out the following, in order for a receiving set to obtain the receiving quality of better data.<br />When the sending set is supporting a plurality of modulation methods, according to the modulation method used for generation of s1 and s2, how to set up the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 is explained.

1436Here, as an example, the modulation method of s1 shall be fixed to QPSK, and the case (or either setup of 16QAM and 64QAM is possible) where the modulation method of s2 is changed into 64QAM from 16QAM is considered with a control signal. When making the modulation method of s2 (t) into 64QAM, as the mapping method of s2 (t), it is as in Drawing 109, and it is k.

1437<maths num="604"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0612.tif" /></maths>

1438It gets down with of, and it comes out and considers it as a certain thing. If such mapping is performed, the time of making h into a formula (273) to Drawing 95 at the time of QPSK, the time of making g into a formula (272) to Drawing 94 at the time of 16QAM, and average power (average value) will become equal. From a 6-bit input, the value of I and Q will determine mapping of 64QAM and it can carry it out like explanation of mapping of QPSK and 16QAM about this point.

1439In that is, Drawing 109 which is an example of signal point arrangement of 64QAM in an I-Q plane, (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5) = (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0) (I) Q) To = (7xk, 7xk), = (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5) (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1) is (I). Q) To = (7xk, 5xk), = (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5) (0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0) is (I). Q) To = (5xk, 7xk), = (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5) (0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1) is (I). Q) To = (5xk, 5xk), = (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5) (0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 0) is (I). Q) To = (7xk, 1xk), .... and = (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5) (1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 0) are (I). Q) = (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5) (1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1) is mapped by = (-3xk, -1xk) at = (I, Q) (-3xk, -3xk).

1440<br />When the modulation method of s2 is 16QAM in Drawing 107, power changing part 10701B is u=u._１６It is u=u, when it sets up and the modulation method of s2 is 64QAM._６４It shall set up. At this time, it is u from the relation of the minimum Euclid distance._１６&lt;u_６４If it carries out, even if it is a case where the modulation methods of s2 are any among 16QAM and 64QAM, the receiving quality of data with an expensive receiving set can be obtained.

1441<br />In above-mentioned explanation, although explained as carrying out "it is fixation to QPSK about the modulation method of s1", what "the modulation method of s2 is fixed to QPSK for" can be considered. At this time, a power change shall not be made to a fixed modulation method (here QPSK), but a power change shall be made to the modulation method (here, they are 16QAM and 64QAM) in which a plurality of setup is possible. That is, a sending set serves as the composition of providing a power changing part in s1 (t) side except for power changing part 10701B from the composition shown in Drawing 107 instead of the composition shown in Drawing 107 in this case. Then, when a fixed modulation method (here QPSK) is set as s2, the following expressions of relations are materialized.

1442<maths num="605"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0613.tif" /></maths>

1443Then, it is u even if it carries out "considering the modulation method of s2 as QPSK and fixation, and changing the modulation method of s1 into 64QAM from 16QAM (it sets to either 16QAM or 64QAM)."_１６&lt;u_６４It is good to carry out. (In addition, the value multiplied for power change at the time of 16QAM is u.)_１６The value which came out, exists and was multiplied for power change at the time of 64QAM is u._６４It comes out, and it shall be and, as for QPSK, a power change shall not be made. <br />About the set of (the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2), when a setup of either (QPSK, 16QAM), (16QAM, QPSK), (QPSK, 64QAM) or (64QAM, QPSK) is possible, it is u._１６&lt;u_６４It is good to fill connection of.

1444Hereinafter, the case where the above-mentioned contents are generalized is explained.<br />The modulation method of s1 is considered as fixation, and the number of the signal points in an I-Q plane considers it as c modulation methods C. As a modulation method of s2, the number of the signal points in an I-Q plane uses that one a modulation methods A and the number of the signal points in an I-Q plane can be set up of b modulation methods B (a&gt;b&gt;c). (However, it is considered as what has an average power value at the s2 time of modulation method A (average value), and an equal average power value at the s2 time of modulation method B (average value).) It is u about the value for power change set up when modulation method A is set up as a modulation method of s2 at this time._aIt carries out. It is u about the value for power change set up as a modulation method of s2 when modulation method B is set up._bIt carries out. At this time, it is u._b&lt;u_aIf it carries out, the receiving quality of data with an expensive receiving set can be obtained.

1445To a fixed modulation method (here modulation method C), I do not make a power change but think that a power change is made to the modulation method (here, they are modulation method A and modulation method B) in which a plurality of setup is possible. Then, it is u even when carrying out "considering the modulation method of s2 as modulation method C and fixation, and changing the modulation method of s1 into modulation method B from modulation method A (modulation method A, modulation method B either setup)."_b&lt;u_aIt is good to carry out. About the set of (the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2), when a setup of either (modulation method C and modulation method A), (modulation method A and modulation method C), (modulation method C and modulation method B) or (modulation method B and modulation method C) is possible, it is u._b&lt;u_aIt is good to fill connection of.<br />(Example 2)<br />The example of operation which is different in Example 1 is explained using Drawing 107. s1 (t) considers it as the baseband signal (signal after mapping) of modulation method 64QAM, the mapping method is as in Drawing 109, and k is as a formula (481). s2 (t) considers it as the baseband signal (signal after mapping) of modulation method 16QAM, the mapping method is as in Drawing 94, and g is as a formula (272). t is time and this embodiment explains the direction of a time-axis as an example.<br />A power changing part (10701B) is baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, and if the value for set-up power change is set to u based on a control signal (10700), the signal (10702B) which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM u times will be outputted. u considers it as the real number and is set to u&lt; 1.0. A following formula will be materialized if the Precoding procession in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is set to F [t].

1446<maths num="606"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0614.tif" /></maths>

1447Therefore, the ratio of the average power of 64QAM to the average power of 16QAM is 1:u.^２It will set up. Since this will be in a receiving state as shown in Drawing 106, the receiving quality of the data in a receiving set can be raised.<br />Until now, transmission power control is generally controlling transmission power based on the feedback information from a communication partner. By this embodiment, regardless of the feedback information from a communication partner, the point which is controlling transmission power serves as the feature of the present invention, and explains this point in detail.

1448Although Above described what "value u for power change is set up for with a control signal (10700)", below, value u for the power change by the control signal (10700) for raising the receiving quality of the data in a receiving set further is explained in detail about a setup.<br /><br />(Example 2-1)<br />Block length of plurality [ sending set ] (being the number of bits which constitutes 1 block after coding) When the error correcting code called numerals length is being supported, according to the block length of the error correcting code given to the data used for generation of s1 and s2, how to set up the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 is explained.

1449the turbo numerals which performed tail biting as an error correcting code, for example or duo binary turbo numerals, an LDPC code, and of -- there are block numerals [ like ] and a plurality of block length is supported in many communications systems or a broadcasting system. The data after the coding to which block length's error correcting code-ization chosen from a plurality of block length currently supported was performed is distributed to two lines. The data after the coding distributed to two lines is modulated with the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2, respectively, and baseband signal (signal after mapping) (t) s1 and s2 (t) are generated.

1450A control signal (10700) is a signal which shows the block length of the above-mentioned selected error correcting code, and a power changing part (10701B) sets up value u for power change according to a control signal (10700).<br />The feature of the present invention is that a power changing part (10701B) sets up value u for power change according to the selected block length whom a control signal (10700) shows. Here, it is u about the value for the power change according to block length X._LXSuppose that it indicates in the form to say.

1451For example, when 1000 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._L1000When it sets up and 1500 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._L1500When it sets up and 3000 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._L3000It sets up. At this time, it is u, for example._L1000u_L1500u_L3000By considering it as a value different, respectively, it is sometimes possible to acquire high error correcting capability in the time of each numerals length. However, an effect may be unable to be acquired even if it changes the value for power change by some numerals length who sets up. Even if it changes numerals length then, it is not necessary to change the value for power change. (For example, u)_L1000=u_L1500It comes out and there is also a certain thing. An important thing (u),_L1000u_L1500u_L3000It is that two or more values exist in inside. By Above, Although the case of three numerals length was explained to the example, it is not what was restricted to this, and it sets to a sending set, When two or more setup of numerals length is possible, it is an important point that the sending set can choose the value for one of power change from the values for power change in which a plurality of setup is possible, and the value for power change which can be set up can make a power change when [ two or more ] it exists and numerals length is set up.

1452(Example 2-2)<br />When the sending set is supporting the error correcting code of a plurality of code rates, according to the code rate of the error correcting code given to the data used for generation of s1 and s2, how to set up the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 is explained.<br />the turbo numerals which performed tail biting as an error correcting code, for example or duo binary turbo numerals, an LDPC code, and of -- there are block numerals [ like ] and a plurality of code rates are supported in many communications systems or a broadcasting system. The data after the coding to which error correcting code-ization of the code rate chosen from a plurality of code rates currently supported was performed is distributed to two lines. The data after the coding distributed to two lines is modulated with the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2, respectively, and baseband signal (signal after mapping) (t) s1 and s2 (t) are generated.

1453A control signal (10700) is a signal which shows the code rate of the above-mentioned selected error correcting code, and a power changing part (10701B) sets up value u for power change according to a control signal (10700).<br />The feature of the present invention is that a power changing part (10701B) sets up value u for power change according to the selected code rate which a control signal (10700) shows. Here, it is u about the value for the power change according to code rate rx._rxSuppose that it indicates in the form to say.

1454For example, when r1 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._r1When it sets up and r2 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._r2When it sets up and r3 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._r3It sets up. At this time, it is u, for example._r1u_r2u_r3By considering it as a value different, respectively, it is sometimes possible to acquire high error correcting capability in the time of each code rate. However, an effect may be unable to be acquired even if it changes the value for power change with some code rate to set up. Even if it changes a code rate then, it is not necessary to change the value for power change. (For example, u)_r1=u_r2It comes out and there is also a certain thing. An important thing (u),_r1u_r2u_r3It is that two or more values exist in inside. <br />As an example of above r1, r2, and r3, when an error correcting code is an LDPC code, it is possible to be code rates, such as 1/2, 2/3, and 3/4, respectively. In Above, although the case of three code rates was explained to the example, it is not what was restricted to this, The value for power change which can be set up in a sending set when two or more setup is possible for a code rate is a sending set, when [ two or more ] it exists and a code rate is set up, It is an important point that the value for one of power change can be chosen from the values for power change in which a plurality of setup is possible, and a power change can be made.<br />(Example 2-3)<br />It becomes important to carry out the following, in order for a receiving set to obtain the receiving quality of better data.

1455When the sending set is supporting a plurality of modulation methods, according to the modulation method used for generation of s1 and s2, how to set up the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 is explained.<br />Here, as an example, the modulation method of s1 shall be fixed to 64QAM, and the case (or either setup of 16QAM and QPSK is possible) where the modulation method of s2 is changed into QPSK from 16QAM is considered with a control signal.<br />When making the modulation method of s1 into 64QAM, as the mapping method of s1 (t), it is as in Drawing 109 and k is a formula (481) in Drawing 109. When making the modulation method of s2 into 16QAM, it is as the mapping method of s2 (t), It is as in Drawing 94 and g is a formula (272) in Drawing 94, and when setting the modulation method of s2 (t) to QPSK, as the mapping method of s2 (t), it is as in Drawing 95 and h presupposes that it is a formula (273) in Drawing 95.

1456The case of 16QAM, and in the case of QPSK, average power will become equal if such mapping is performed.<br />When the modulation method of s2 is 16QAM in Drawing 107, power changing part 10701B is u=u._１６It is u=u, when it sets up and the modulation method of s2 is QPSK._４It shall set up. At this time, it is u from the relation of the minimum Euclid distance._４&lt;u_１６If it carries out, even if it is a case where the modulation methods of s2 are any among 16QAM and QPSK, the receiving quality of data with an expensive receiving set can be obtained.

1457It is u even if it carries out "considering the modulation method of s2 as 64QAM and fixation, and changing the modulation method of s1 into QPSK from 16QAM (it sets to 16QAM and either of the QPSK)", although explained as "fixing the modulation method of s1 with 64QAM" in above-mentioned explanation._４&lt;u_１６It is good to carry out (it may be considered explanation in Example 1-3 the same way.). (In addition, the value multiplied for power change at the time of 16QAM is u.)_１６The value which came out, exists and was multiplied for power change at the time of QPSK is u._４It comes out, and it shall be and, as for 64QAM, a power change shall not be made. Again, About the set of (the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2), when a setup of either (64QAM, 16QAM), (16QAM, 64QAM), (64QAM, QPSK) or (QPSK, 64QAM) is possible, it is u._４&lt;u_１６It is good to fill connection of.

1458Hereinafter, the case where the above-mentioned contents are generalized is explained.<br />The modulation method of s1 is considered as fixation, and the number of the signal points in an I-Q plane considers it as c modulation methods C. The number of the signal points in an I-Q plane uses that one a modulation methods A and the number of the signal points in an I-Q plane can be set up of b modulation methods B (c&gt;b&gt;a) as a modulation method of s2. (However, it is considered as what has an average power value at the s2 time of modulation method A (average value), and an equal average power value at the s2 time of modulation method B (average value).)<br />It is u about the value for power change set up when modulation method A is set up as a modulation method of s2 at this time._aIt carries out. It is u about the value for power change set up as a modulation method of s2 when modulation method B is set up._bIt carries out. At this time, it is u._a&lt;u_bIf it carries out, the receiving quality of data with an expensive receiving set can be obtained.

1459To a fixed modulation method (here modulation method C), I do not make a power change but think that a power change is made to the modulation method (here, they are modulation method A and modulation method B) in which a plurality of setup is possible. Then, it is u even when carrying out "fixing the modulation method of s2 to modulation method C, and changing the modulation method of s1 into modulation method B from modulation method A (modulation method A, modulation method B either setup)."_a&lt;u_bIt is good to carry out. About the set of (the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2), when a setup of either (modulation method C and modulation method A), (modulation method A and modulation method C), (modulation method C and modulation method B) or (modulation method B and modulation method C) is possible, it is u._a&lt;u_bIt is good to fill connection of.

1460<br />(Example 3)<br />The example of operation which is different in Example 1 is explained using Drawing 107. s1 (t) considers it as the baseband signal (signal after mapping) of modulation method 16QAM, the mapping method is as in Drawing 94, and g is as a formula (272). s2 (t) considers it as the baseband signal (signal after mapping) of modulation method 64QAM, the mapping method is as in Drawing 109, and k is as a formula (481). t is time and this embodiment explains the direction of a time-axis as an example.<br />A power changing part (10701B) is baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 64QAM, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, and if the value for set-up power change is set to u based on a control signal (10700), the signal (10702B) which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 64QAM u times will be outputted. u considers it as the real number and is set to u&gt; 1.0. A following formula will be materialized if the Precoding procession in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is set to F [t].

1461<maths num="607"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0615.tif" /></maths>

1462Therefore, the ratio of the average power of 16QAM to the average power of 64QAM is 1:u.^２It will set up. Since this will be in a receiving state as shown in Drawing 106, the receiving quality of the data in a receiving set can be raised.<br />Until now, transmission power control is generally controlling transmission power based on the feedback information from a communication partner. By this embodiment, regardless of the feedback information from a communication partner, the point which is controlling transmission power serves as the feature of the present invention, and explains this point in detail.

1463Although Above described what "value u for power change is set up for with a control signal (10700)", below, value u for the power change by the control signal (10700) for raising the receiving quality of the data in a receiving set further is explained in detail about a setup.<br />(Example 3-1)<br />Block length of plurality [ sending set ] (being the number of bits which constitutes 1 block after coding) When the error correcting code called numerals length is being supported, according to the block length of the error correcting code given to the data used for generation of s1 and s2, how to set up the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 is explained.

1464the turbo numerals which performed tail biting as an error correcting code, for example or duo binary turbo numerals, an LDPC code, and of -- there are block numerals [ like ] and a plurality of block length is supported in many communications systems or a broadcasting system. The data after the coding to which block length's error correcting code-ization chosen from a plurality of block length currently supported was performed is distributed to two lines. The data after the coding distributed to two lines is modulated with the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2, respectively, and baseband signal (signal after mapping) (t) s1 and s2 (t) are generated.

1465A control signal (10700) is a signal which shows the block length of the above-mentioned selected error correcting code, and a power changing part (10701B) sets up value u for power change according to a control signal (10700).<br />The feature of the present invention is that a power changing part (10701B) sets up value u for power change according to the selected block length whom a control signal (10700) shows. Here, it is u about the value for the power change according to block length X._LXSuppose that it indicates in the form to say.

1466For example, when 1000 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._L1000When it sets up and 1500 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._L1500When it sets up and 3000 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._L3000It sets up. At this time, it is u, for example._L1000u_L1500u_L3000By considering it as a value different, respectively, it is sometimes possible to acquire high error correcting capability in the time of each numerals length. However, an effect may be unable to be acquired even if it changes the value for power change by some numerals length who sets up. Even if it changes numerals length then, it is not necessary to change the value for power change. (For example, u)_L1000=u_L1500It comes out and there is also a certain thing. An important thing (u),_L1000u_L1500u_L3000It is that two or more values exist in inside. By Above, Although the case of three numerals length was explained to the example, it is not what was restricted to this, and it sets to a sending set, When two or more setup of numerals length is possible, it is an important point that the sending set can choose the value for one of power change from the values for power change in which a plurality of setup is possible, and the value for power change which can be set up can make a power change when [ two or more ] it exists and numerals length is set up.<br />(Example 3-2)<br />When the sending set is supporting the error correcting code of a plurality of code rates, according to the code rate of the error correcting code given to the data used for generation of s1 and s2, how to set up the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 is explained.

1467the turbo numerals which performed tail biting as an error correcting code, for example or duo binary turbo numerals, an LDPC code, and of -- there are block numerals [ like ] and a plurality of code rates are supported in many communications systems or a broadcasting system. The data after the coding to which error correcting code-ization of the code rate chosen from a plurality of code rates currently supported was performed is distributed to two lines. The data after the coding distributed to two lines is modulated with the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2, respectively, and baseband signal (signal after mapping) (t) s1 and s2 (t) are generated.

1468A control signal (10700) is a signal which shows the code rate of the above-mentioned selected error correcting code, and a power changing part (10701B) sets up value u for power change according to a control signal (10700).<br />The feature of the present invention is that a power changing part (10701B) sets up value u for power change according to the selected code rate which a control signal (10700) shows. Here, it is u about the value for the power change according to code rate rx._rxSuppose that it indicates in the form to say.

1469For example, when r1 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._r1When it sets up and r2 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._r2When it sets up and r3 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._r3It sets up. At this time, it is u, for example._r1u_r2u_r3By considering it as a value different, respectively, it is sometimes possible to acquire high error correcting capability in the time of each code rate. However, an effect may be unable to be acquired even if it changes the value for power change with some code rate to set up. Even if it changes a code rate then, it is not necessary to change the value for power change. (For example, u)_r1=u_r2It comes out and there is also a certain thing. An important thing (u),_r1u_r2u_r3It is that two or more values exist in inside. <br />As an example of above r1, r2, and r3, when an error correcting code is an LDPC code, it is possible to be code rates, such as 1/2, 2/3, and 3/4, respectively. In Above, although the case of three code rates was explained to the example, it is not what was restricted to this, The value for power change which can be set up in a sending set when two or more setup is possible for a code rate is a sending set, when [ two or more ] it exists and a code rate is set up, It is an important point that the value for one of power change can be chosen from the values for power change in which a plurality of setup is possible, and a power change can be made.<br />(Example 3-3)<br />It becomes important to carry out the following, in order for a receiving set to obtain the receiving quality of better data.

1470When the sending set is supporting a plurality of modulation methods, according to the modulation method used for generation of s1 and s2, how to set up the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 is explained.<br />Here, as an example, the modulation method of s1 shall be fixed to 16QAM, and the case (or either setup of 64QAM and QPSK is possible) where the modulation method of s2 is changed into QPSK from 64QAM is considered with a control signal.

1471When making the modulation method of s1 into 16QAM, as the mapping method of s2 (t), it is as in Drawing 94 and g is a formula (272) in Drawing 94. When making the modulation method of s2 into 64QAM, it is as the mapping method of s1 (t), It is as in Drawing 109 and k is a formula (481) in Drawing 109, and when setting the modulation method of s2 (t) to QPSK, as the mapping method of s2 (t), it is as in Drawing 95 and h presupposes that it is a formula (273) in Drawing 95.

1472The case of 16QAM, and in the case of QPSK, average power will become equal if such mapping is performed.<br />It is u=u when the modulation method of s2 is 64QAM in Drawing 107._６４It is u=u, when it sets up and the modulation method of s2 is QPSK._４It shall set up. At this time, it is u from the relation of the minimum Euclid distance._４&lt;u_６４When -- if it carries out -- the modulation method of s2 -- 16QAM and 64QAM -- also when it is any, the receiving quality of data with an expensive receiving set can be obtained.

1473It is u even if it is a case where "fixing the modulation method of s2 to 16QAM, and changing the modulation method of s1 into QPSK from 64QAM (it sets to 64QAM and either of the QPSK)" is carried out, although it explained in above-mentioned explanation having carried out "it is fixation to 16QAM about the modulation method of s1."_４&lt;u_６４It is good to carry out (it may be considered explanation in Example 1-3 the same way.). (In addition, the value multiplied for power change at the time of 64QAM is u.)_６４The value which came out, exists and was multiplied for power change at the time of QPSK is u._４It comes out, and it shall be and, as for 16QAM, a power change shall not be made. Again, About the set of (the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2), when a setup of either (16QAM, 64QAM), (64QAM, 16QAM), (16QAM, QPSK) or (QPSK, 16QAM) is possible, it is u._４&lt;u_６４It is good to fill connection of.

1474Hereinafter, the case where the above-mentioned contents are generalized is explained.<br />The modulation method of s1 is considered as fixation, and the number of the signal points in an I-Q plane considers it as c modulation methods C. The number of the signal points in an I-Q plane uses that one a modulation methods A and the number of the signal points in an I-Q plane can be set up of b modulation methods B (c&gt;b&gt;a) as a modulation method of s2. (However, it is considered as what has an average power value at the s2 time of modulation method A (average value), and an equal average power value at the s2 time of modulation method B (average value).)<br />It is u about the value for power change set up when modulation method A is set up as a modulation method of s2 at this time._aIt carries out. It is u about the value for power change set up as a modulation method of s2 when modulation method B is set up._bIt carries out. At this time, it is u._a&lt;u_bIf it carries out, the receiving quality of data with an expensive receiving set can be obtained.

1475To a fixed modulation method (here modulation method C), I do not make a power change but think that a power change is made to the modulation method (here, they are modulation method A and modulation method B) in which a plurality of setup is possible. Then, it is u even when carrying out "fixing the modulation method of s2 to modulation method C, and changing the modulation method of s1 into modulation method B from modulation method A (modulation method A, modulation method B either setup)."_a&lt;u_bIt is good to carry out. About the set of (the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2), when a setup of either (modulation method C and modulation method A), (modulation method A and modulation method C), (modulation method C and modulation method B) or (modulation method B and modulation method C) is possible, it is u._a&lt;u_bIt is good to fill connection of.<br />(Example 4)<br />Although Above described the case where one power was changed among s1 and s2, the case where the power of both s1 and s2 is changed is explained here.

1476An example of operation is explained using Drawing 108. s1 (t) considers it as the baseband signal (signal after mapping) of modulation method QPSK, the mapping method is as in Drawing 95, and h is as a formula (273). s2 (t) considers it as the baseband signal (signal after mapping) of modulation method 16QAM, the mapping method is as in Drawing 94, and g is as a formula (272). t is time and this embodiment explains the direction of a time-axis as an example.

1477A power changing part (10701A) is baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of modulation method QPSK, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, and if the value for set-up power change is set to v based on a control signal (10700), the signal (10702A) which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of modulation method QPSK v times will be outputted.<br />A power changing part (10701B) is baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, and if the value for set-up power change is set to u based on a control signal (10700), the signal (10702B) which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM u times will be outputted. And it is considered as u=vxw (w&gt; 1.0).

1478If the Precoding procession in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is set to F [t], a following formula (485) will be materialized.<br />

1479<maths num="608"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0616.tif" /></maths><br />

1480Therefore, the ratio of the average power of QPSK to the average power of 16QAM is v.^２:u^２=v^２:v^２xw^２=1:w^２It will set up. Since this will be in a receiving state as shown in Drawing 106, the receiving quality of the data in a receiving set can be raised.<br />When a formula (479) and a formula (480) are taken into consideration, the ratio of the average power of QPSK to the average power of 16QAM is v.^２:u^２=v^２:v^２xw^２=1:w^２= The ratio of the average power of 1:5 or QPSK to the average power of 16QAM is v.^２:u^２=v^２:v^２xw^２=1:w^２= Although 1:2 is considered as an effective example, it is possible to set up suitably according to the demand conditions searched for as a system.

1481Conventionally, transmission power control is generally controlling transmission power based on the feedback information from a communication partner. By this embodiment, regardless of the feedback information from a communication partner, the point which is controlling transmission power serves as the feature of the present invention, and explains this point in detail.<br />Although Above described what "values v and u for power change are set up for with a control signal (10700)", below, values v and u for the power change by the control signal (10700) for raising the receiving quality of the data in a receiving set further are explained in detail about a setup.<br />(Example 4-1)<br />Block length of plurality [ sending set ] (being the number of bits which constitutes 1 block after coding) When the error correcting code called numerals length is being supported, according to the block length of the error correcting code given to the data used for generation of s1 and s2, how to set up the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 is explained.

1482the turbo numerals which performed tail biting as an error correcting code, for example or duo binary turbo numerals, an LDPC code, and of -- there are block numerals [ like ] and a plurality of block length is supported in many communications systems or a broadcasting system. The data after the coding to which block length's error correcting code-ization chosen from a plurality of block length currently supported was performed is distributed to two lines. The data after the coding distributed to two lines is modulated with the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2, respectively, and baseband signal (signal after mapping) (t) s1 and s2 (t) are generated.

1483A control signal (10700) is a signal which shows the block length of the above-mentioned selected error correcting code, and a power changing part (10701A) sets up value v for power change according to a control signal (10700). A power changing part (10701B) sets up value u for power change according to a control signal (10700) similarly.<br />The feature of the present invention is that a power changing part (10701A, 10701B) sets up values v and u for power change according to the selected block length whom a control signal (10700) shows. Here, it is v about the value for the power change according to block length X, respectively._LXu_LXSuppose that it indicates in the form to say.

1484For example, when 1000 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701A) is value v for power change._L1000When it sets up and 1500 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701A) is value v for power change._L1500When it sets up and 3000 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701A) is value v for power change._L3000It sets up.

1485On the other hand, when 1000 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._L1000When it sets up and 1500 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._L1500When it sets up and 3000 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._L3000It sets up.

1486At this time, it is v, for example._L1000v_L1500v_L3000By considering it as a value different, respectively, it is sometimes possible to acquire high error correcting capability in the time of each numerals length. Similarly, it is u._L1000u_L1500u_L3000By considering it as a value different, respectively, it is sometimes possible to acquire high error correcting capability in the time of each numerals length. However, an effect may be unable to be acquired even if it changes the value for power change by some numerals length who sets up. Even if it changes numerals length then, it is not necessary to change the value for power change. (For example, u)_L1000=u_L1500It comes out, and there is also a certain thing, and it is v._L1000=v_L1500It comes out and there is also a certain thing. An important thing (v),_L1000v_L1500v_L3000It is that two or more values exist in a set. moreover (u)_L1000u_L1500u_L3000It is that two or more values exist in a set. In addition, it is v._LXu_LXThe ratio of But and an average power value, 1:w^２Meet -- a having mentioned above passage is set up like.<br />Value u for power change which is not what was restricted to this although the case of three numerals length was explained to the example, and can be set up in a sending set in Above when two or more setup of numerals length is possible_LXWhen [ of two or more But ] it exists and numerals length is set up, a sending set is value u for power change in which a plurality of setup is possible._LXValue v for power change which it is one important point that the value for one of power change can be chosen from of, and a power change can be made, and can be set up in a sending set when two or more setup of numerals length is possible_LXWhen [ of two or more But ] it exists and numerals length is set up, a sending set is value v for power change in which a plurality of setup is possible._LXIt is also an important point that the value for one of power change can be chosen from of, and a power change can be made.<br />(Example 4-2)<br />When the sending set is supporting the error correcting code of a plurality of code rates, according to the code rate of the error correcting code given to the data used for generation of s1 and s2, how to set up the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 is explained.

1487the turbo numerals which performed tail biting as an error correcting code, for example or duo binary turbo numerals, an LDPC code, and of -- there are block numerals [ like ] and a plurality of code rates are supported in many communications systems or a broadcasting system. The data after the coding to which error correcting code-ization of the code rate chosen from a plurality of code rates currently supported was performed is distributed to two lines. The data after the coding distributed to two lines is modulated with the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2, respectively, and baseband signal (signal after mapping) (t) s1 and s2 (t) are generated.

1488A control signal (10700) is a signal which shows the code rate of the above-mentioned selected error correcting code, and a power changing part (10701A) sets up value v for power change according to a control signal (10700). A power changing part (10701B) sets up value u for power change according to a control signal (10700).<br />The feature of the present invention is that a power changing part (10701A, 10701B) sets up values v and u for power change according to the selected code rate which a control signal (10700) shows. Here, it is v about the value for the power change according to code rate rx, respectively._rxu_rxSuppose that it indicates in the form to say.

1489For example, when r1 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701A) is value v for power change._r1When it sets up and r2 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701A) is value v for power change._r2When it sets up and r3 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701A) is value v for power change._r3It sets up.<br />When r1 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._r1When it sets up and r2 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._r2When it sets up and r3 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._r3It sets up.

1490At this time, it is v, for example._r1v_r2v_r3By considering it as a value different, respectively, it is sometimes possible to acquire high error correcting capability in the time of each code rate. Similarly, it is u._r1u_r2u_r3By considering it as a value different, respectively, it is sometimes possible to acquire high error correcting capability in the time of each code rate. However, an effect may be unable to be acquired even if it changes the value for power change with some code rate to set up. Even if it changes a code rate then, it is not necessary to change the value for power change. (For example, v)_r1=v_r2It comes out, and there is also a certain thing, and it is u._r1=u_r2It comes out and there is also a certain thing. An important thing (v),_r1v_r2v_r3It is that two or more values exist in a set. moreover (u)_r1u_r2u_r3It is that two or more values exist in a set. In addition, it is v._rXu_rXThe ratio of But and an average power value, 1:w^２Meet -- a having mentioned above passage is set up like.

1491As an example of above r1, r2, and r3, when an error correcting code is an LDPC code, it is possible to be code rates, such as 1/2, 2/3, and 3/4, respectively.<br />Value u for power change which is not what was restricted to this although the case of three code rates was explained to the example, and can be set up in a sending set in Above when two or more setup is possible for a code rate_rxWhen [ of two or more But ] it exists and a code rate is set up, a sending set is value u for power change in which a plurality of setup is possible._rxValue v for power change which it is an important point that the value for one of power change can be chosen from of, and a power change can be made, and can be set up in a sending set when two or more setup is possible for a code rate_rXWhen [ of two or more But ] it exists and a code rate is set up, a sending set is value v for power change in which a plurality of setup is possible._rXIt is also an important point that the value for one of power change can be chosen from of, and a power change can be made.<br />(Example 4-3)<br />It becomes important to carry out the following, in order for a receiving set to obtain the receiving quality of better data.

1492When the sending set is supporting a plurality of modulation methods, according to the modulation method used for generation of s1 and s2, how to set up the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 is explained.<br />Here, as an example, the modulation method of s1 is considered as fixation at QPSK, and the case (or either setup of 16QAM and 64QAM is possible) where the modulation method of s2 is changed into 64QAM from 16QAM is considered with a control signal. When setting the modulation method of s1 to QPSK, as the mapping method of s1 (t), it is as in Drawing 95 and h is a formula (273) in Drawing 95. When making the modulation method of s2 into 16QAM, it is as the mapping method of s2 (t), It is as in Drawing 94 and g is a formula (272) in Drawing 94, and when making the modulation method of s2 (t) into 64QAM, as the mapping method of s2 (t), it is as in Drawing 109 and k presupposes that it is a formula (481) in Drawing 109.

1493When the modulation method of s1 is set to QPSK and the modulation method of s2 considers it as 16QAM in Drawing 108, it is considered as v=alpha, and it is u=alphaxw._１６It shall set up. At this time, the ratio of the average power of QPSK to the average power of 16QAM is v.^２:u^２= alpha^２: alpha^２xw_１６^２=1:w_１６^２It becomes.<br />And when the modulation method of s1 is set to QPSK and the modulation method of s2 considers it as 64QAM in Drawing 108, it is considered as v=beta, and it is u=betaxw._６４It shall set up. At this time, the ratio of the average power of QPSK to the average power of 64QAM is v:u=beta.^２: beta^２xw_６４^２=1:w_６４^２It becomes. At this time, it is 1.0&lt;w from the relation of the minimum Euclid distance._１６&lt;w_６４When -- if it carries out -- the modulation method of s2 -- 16QAM and 64QAM -- also when it is any, the receiving quality of data with an expensive receiving set can be obtained.

1494In above-mentioned explanation, although explained having carried out "it is fixation to QPSK about the modulation method of s1", what "the modulation method of s2 is fixed to QPSK for" can be considered. At this time, a power change shall not be made to a fixed modulation method (here QPSK), but a power change shall be made to the modulation method (here, they are 16QAM and 64QAM) in which a plurality of setup is possible. Then, when a fixed modulation method (here QPSK) is set as s2, the following expressions of relations (486) are materialized.

1495<maths num="609"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0617.tif" /></maths><br />

1496Then, it is 1.0&lt;w even if it carries out "considering the modulation method of s2 as QPSK and fixation, and changing the modulation method of s1 into 64QAM from 16QAM (it sets to either 16QAM or 64QAM)."_１６&lt;w_６４It is good to carry out. (In addition, the value multiplied for power change at the time of 16QAM is u=alphaxw.)_１６The value which came out, exists and was multiplied for power change at the time of 64QAM is u=betaxw._６４Come out, and it is and is a value for power change of QPSK, When the modulation method in which a plurality of setup is possible is 16QAM, it is v=alpha, and it becomes v=beta when the modulation method in which a plurality of setup is possible is 64QAM. Again, About the set of (the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2), when a setup of either (QPSK, 16QAM), (16QAM, QPSK), (QPSK, 64QAM) or (64QAM, QPSK) is possible, it is 1.0&lt;w._１６&lt;w_６４It is good to fill connection of.

1497Hereinafter, the case where the above-mentioned contents are generalized is explained.<br />When it becomes common, the modulation method of s1 is considered as fixation, and the number of the signal points in an I-Q plane considers it as c modulation methods C. As a modulation method of s2, the number of the signal points in an I-Q plane uses that one a modulation methods A and the number of the signal points in an I-Q plane can be set up of b modulation methods B (a&gt;b&gt;c). At this time, it is 1:w about the ratio of that average power when the modulation method of s1 sets up modulation method A as that average power and a modulation method of s2 with modulation method C._a^２It carries out.<br />. It is 1:w about the ratio of the average power when the modulation method of s1 sets up modulation method B as the average power and a modulation method of s2 with modulation method C._b^２It carries out. At this time, it is w._b&lt;w_aIf it carries out, the receiving quality of data with an expensive receiving set can be obtained.

1498Therefore, although explained in the above-mentioned example having carried out "it is fixation to modulation method C about the modulation method of s1", even if it is a case where "fixing the modulation method of s2 to modulation method C, and changing the modulation method of s1 into modulation method B from modulation method A (modulation method A, modulation method B either setup)" is carried out, it is related with average power, and it is w._b&lt;w_aIt is good to carry out. (When average power of modulation method C is set to 1 like Above at this time, the average power of modulation method A is w.)_a^２Come out, it is and the average power of modulation method B is w._b^２It comes out. The set of (the modulation method of s1 and the modulation method of s2) is related with average power, when a setup of either (modulation method C and modulation method A), (modulation method A and modulation method C), (modulation method C and modulation method B) or (modulation method B and modulation method C) is possible, and it is w again._b&lt;w_aIt is good to fill connection of.

1499<br />(Example 5)<br />The example of operation which is different in Example 4 is explained using Drawing 108. s1 (t) considers it as the baseband signal (signal after mapping) of modulation method 64QAM, the mapping method is as in Drawing 109, and k is as a formula (481). s2 (t) considers it as the baseband signal (signal after mapping) of modulation method 16QAM, the mapping method is as in Drawing 94, and g is as a formula (272). t is time and this embodiment explains the direction of a time-axis as an example.

1500A power changing part (10701A) is baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of modulation method 64QAM, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, and if the value for set-up power change is set to v based on a control signal (10700), the signal (10702A) which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of modulation method 64QAM v times will be outputted.<br />A power changing part (10701B) is baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, and if the value for set-up power change is set to u based on a control signal (10700), the signal (10702B) which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM u times will be outputted. And it is considered as u=vxw (w&lt; 1.0).

1501If the Precoding procession in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is set to F [t], an above-mentioned formula (86) will be materialized.<br />Therefore, the ratio of the average power of 64QAM to the average power of 16QAM is v.^２:u^２=v^２:v^２xw^２=1:w^２It will set up. Since this will be in a receiving state as shown in Drawing 106, the receiving quality of the data in a receiving set can be raised.

1502Conventionally, transmission power control is generally controlling transmission power based on the feedback information from a communication partner. By this embodiment, regardless of the feedback information from a communication partner, the point which is controlling transmission power serves as the feature of the present invention, and explains this point in detail.<br />Although Above described what "values v and u for power change are set up for with a control signal (10700)", below, values v and u for the power change by the control signal (10700) for raising the receiving quality of the data in a receiving set further are explained in detail about a setup.

1503<br />(Example 5-1)<br />Block length of plurality [ sending set ] (being the number of bits which constitutes 1 block after coding) When the error correcting code called numerals length is being supported, according to the block length of the error correcting code given to the data used for generation of s1 and s2, how to set up the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 is explained.

1504the turbo numerals which performed tail biting as an error correcting code, for example or duo binary turbo numerals, an LDPC code, and of -- there are block numerals [ like ] and a plurality of block length is supported in many communications systems or a broadcasting system. The data after the coding to which block length's error correcting code-ization chosen from a plurality of block length currently supported was performed is distributed to two lines. The data after the coding distributed to two lines is modulated with the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2, respectively, and baseband signal (signal after mapping) (t) s1 and s2 (t) are generated.

1505A control signal (10700) is a signal which shows the block length of the above-mentioned selected error correcting code, and a power changing part (10701A) sets up value v for power change according to a control signal (10700). A power changing part (10701B) sets up value u for power change according to a control signal (10700) similarly.<br />The feature of the present invention is that a power changing part (10701A, 10701B) sets up values v and u for power change according to the selected block length whom a control signal (10700) shows. Here, it is v about the value for the power change according to block length X, respectively._LXu_LXSuppose that it indicates in the form to say.

1506For example, when 1000 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701A) is value v for power change._L1000When it sets up and 1500 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701A) is value v for power change._L1500When it sets up and 3000 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701A) is value v for power change._L3000It sets up.

1507On the other hand, when 1000 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._L1000When it sets up and 1500 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._L1500When it sets up and 3000 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._L3000It sets up.

1508At this time, it is v, for example._L1000v_L1500v_L3000By considering it as a value different, respectively, it is sometimes possible to acquire high error correcting capability in the time of each numerals length. Similarly, it is u._L1000u_L1500u_L3000By considering it as a value different, respectively, it is sometimes possible to acquire high error correcting capability in the time of each numerals length. However, an effect may be unable to be acquired even if it changes the value for power change by some numerals length who sets up. Even if it changes numerals length then, it is not necessary to change the value for power change. (For example, u)_L1000=u_L1500It comes out, and there is also a certain thing, and it is v._L1000=v_L1500It comes out and there is also a certain thing. An important thing (v),_L1000v_L1500v_L3000It is that two or more values exist in a set. moreover (u)_L1000u_L1500u_L3000It is that two or more values exist in a set. In addition, it is v._LXu_LXThe ratio of But and an average power value, 1:w^２Meet -- a having mentioned above passage is set up like.<br />Value u for power change which is not what was restricted to this although the case of three numerals length was explained to the example, and can be set up in a sending set in Above when two or more setup of numerals length is possible_LXWhen [ of two or more But ] it exists and numerals length is set up, a sending set is value u for power change in which a plurality of setup is possible._LXValue v for power change which it is one important point that the value for one of power change can be chosen from of, and a power change can be made, and can be set up in a sending set when two or more setup of numerals length is possible_LXWhen [ of two or more But ] it exists and numerals length is set up, a sending set is value v for power change in which a plurality of setup is possible._LXIt is also an important point that the value for one of power change can be chosen from of, and a power change can be made.<br />(Example 5-2)<br />When the sending set is supporting the error correcting code of a plurality of code rates, according to the code rate of the error correcting code given to the data used for generation of s1 and s2, how to set up the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 is explained.

1509the turbo numerals which performed tail biting as an error correcting code, for example or duo binary turbo numerals, an LDPC code, and of -- there are block numerals [ like ] and a plurality of code rates are supported in many communications systems or a broadcasting system. The data after the coding to which error correcting code-ization of the code rate chosen from a plurality of code rates currently supported was performed is distributed to two lines. The data after the coding distributed to two lines is modulated with the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2, respectively, and baseband signal (signal after mapping) (t) s1 and s2 (t) are generated.

1510A control signal (10700) is a signal which shows the code rate of the above-mentioned selected error correcting code, and a power changing part (10701A) sets up value v for power change according to a control signal (10700). A power changing part (10701B) sets up value u for power change according to a control signal (10700).<br />The feature of the present invention is that a power changing part (10701A, 10701B) sets up values v and u for power change according to the selected code rate which a control signal (10700) shows. Here, it is v about the value for the power change according to code rate rx, respectively._rxu_rxSuppose that it indicates in the form to say.

1511For example, when r1 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701A) is value v for power change._r1When it sets up and r2 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701A) is value v for power change._r2When it sets up and r3 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701A) is value v for power change._r3It sets up.<br />When r1 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._r1When it sets up and r2 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._r2When it sets up and r3 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._r3It sets up.

1512At this time, it is v, for example._r1v_r2v_r3By considering it as a value different, respectively, it is sometimes possible to acquire high error correcting capability in the time of each code rate. Similarly, it is u._r1u_r2u_r3By considering it as a value different, respectively, it is sometimes possible to acquire high error correcting capability in the time of each code rate. However, an effect may be unable to be acquired even if it changes the value for power change with some code rate to set up. Even if it changes a code rate then, it is not necessary to change the value for power change. (For example, v)_r1=v_r2It comes out, and there is also a certain thing, and it is u._r1=u_r2It comes out and there is also a certain thing. An important thing (v),_r1v_r2v_r3It is that two or more values exist in a set. moreover (u)_r1u_r2u_r3It is that two or more values exist in a set. In addition, it is v._rXu_rXThe ratio of But and an average power value, 1:w^２Meet -- a having mentioned above passage is set up like.

1513As an example of above r1, r2, and r3, when an error correcting code is an LDPC code, it is possible to be code rates, such as 1/2, 2/3, and 3/4, respectively.<br />Value u for power change which is not what was restricted to this although the case of three code rates was explained to the example, and can be set up in a sending set in Above when two or more setup is possible for a code rate_rxWhen [ of two or more But ] it exists and a code rate is set up, a sending set is value u for power change in which a plurality of setup is possible._rxValue v for power change which it is an important point that the value for one of power change can be chosen from of, and a power change can be made, and can be set up in a sending set when two or more setup is possible for a code rate_rXWhen [ of two or more But ] it exists and a code rate is set up, a sending set is value v for power change in which a plurality of setup is possible._rXIt is also an important point that the value for one of power change can be chosen from of, and a power change can be made.<br />(Example 5-3)<br />It becomes important to carry out the following, in order for a receiving set to obtain the receiving quality of better data.

1514When the sending set is supporting a plurality of modulation methods, according to the modulation method used for generation of s1 and s2, how to set up the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 is explained.<br />Here, as an example, the modulation method of s1 is considered as fixation at 64QAM, and the case (or either setup of 16QAM and QPSK is possible) where the modulation method of s2 is changed into QPSK from 16QAM is considered with a control signal. When making the modulation method of s1 into 64QAM, as the mapping method of s1 (t), it is as in Drawing 109 and k is a formula (481) in Drawing 109. When making the modulation method of s2 into 16QAM, it is as the mapping method of s2 (t), It is as in Drawing 94 and g is a formula (272) in Drawing 94, and when setting the modulation method of s2 (t) to QPSK, as the mapping method of s2 (t), it is as in Drawing 95 and h presupposes that it is a formula (273) in Drawing 95.

1515When the modulation method of s1 is made into 64QAM and the modulation method of s2 considers it as 16QAM in Drawing 108, it is considered as v=alpha, and it is u=alphaxw._１６It shall set up. At this time, the ratio of the average power of 64QAM to the average power of 16QAM is v.^２:u^２= alpha^２: alpha^２xw_１６^２=1:w_１６^２It becomes.<br />And when the modulation method of s1 is made into 64QAM and the modulation method of s2 sets to QPSK in Drawing 108, it is considered as v=beta, and it is u=betaxw._４It shall set up. At this time, the ratio of the average power of 64QAM to the average power of QPSK is v.^２:u^２= beta^２: beta^２xw_４^２=1:w_４^２It becomes. At this time, it is w from the relation of the minimum Euclid distance._４&lt;w_１６if &lt;1.0 -- the modulation method of s2 -- 16QAM and QPSK -- also when it is any, the receiving quality of data with an expensive receiving set can be obtained.

1516It is w even if it carries out "fixing the modulation method of s2 to 64QAM, and changing the modulation method of s1 into QPSK from 16QAM (it sets to 16QAM and either of the QPSK)", although it explained in above-mentioned explanation having carried out "it is fixation to 64QAM about the modulation method of s1."_４&lt;w_１６It is good to be referred to as &lt;1.0. (It may be considered explanation in Example 4-3 the same way.). (In addition, the value multiplied for power change at the time of 16QAM is u=alphaxw.)_１６The value which came out, exists and was multiplied for power change at the time of QPSK is u=betaxw._４Come out, and it is and is a value for power change of 64QAM, When the modulation method in which a plurality of setup is possible is 16QAM, it is v=alpha, and it becomes v=beta when the modulation method in which a plurality of setup is possible is QPSK. Again, About the set of (the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2), when a setup of either (64QAM, 16QAM), (16QAM, 64QAM), (64QAM, QPSK) or (QPSK, 64QAM) is possible, it is w._４&lt;w_１６It is good to fill the relation of &lt;1.0.

1517Hereinafter, the case where the above-mentioned contents are generalized is explained.<br />When it becomes common, the modulation method of s1 is considered as fixation, and the number of the signal points in an I-Q plane considers it as c modulation methods C. As a modulation method of s2, the number of the signal points in an I-Q plane uses that one a modulation methods A and the number of the signal points in an I-Q plane can be set up of b modulation methods B (c&gt;b&gt;a). At this time, it is 1:w about the ratio of that average power when the modulation method of s1 sets up modulation method A as that average power and a modulation method of s2 with modulation method C._a^２It carries out. It is 1:w about the ratio of the average power when the modulation method of s1 sets up modulation method B as the average power and a modulation method of s2 with modulation method C._b^２It carries out. At this time, it is w._a&lt;w_bIf it carries out, the receiving quality of data with an expensive receiving set can be obtained.

1518Therefore, although explained having carried out "it is fixation to modulation method C about the modulation method of s1", even if it is a case where "fixing the modulation method of s2 to modulation method C, and changing the modulation method of s1 into modulation method B from modulation method A (modulation method A, modulation method B either setup)" is carried out, it is related with average power, and it is w._a&lt;w_bIt is good to carry out. (When average power of modulation method C is set to 1 like Above at this time, the average power of modulation method A is w.)_a^２Come out, it is and the average power of modulation method B is w._b^２It comes out. The set of (the modulation method of s1 and the modulation method of s2) is related with average power, when a setup of either (modulation method C and modulation method A), (modulation method A and modulation method C), (modulation method C and modulation method B) or (modulation method B and modulation method C) is possible, and it is w again._a&lt;w_bIt is good to fill connection of.<br />(Example 6)<br />The example of operation which is different in Example 4 is explained using Drawing 108. s1 (t) considers it as the baseband signal (signal after mapping) of modulation method 16QAM, the mapping method is as in Drawing 94, and g is as a formula (272). s2 (t) considers it as the baseband signal (signal after mapping) of modulation method 64QAM, the mapping method is as in Drawing 109, and k is as a formula (481). t is time and this embodiment explains the direction of a time-axis as an example.

1519A power changing part (10701A) is baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of modulation method 16QAM, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, and if the value for set-up power change is set to v based on a control signal (10700), the signal (10702A) which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of modulation method 16QAM v times will be outputted.<br />A power changing part (10701B) is baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 64QAM, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, and if the value for set-up power change is set to u based on a control signal (10700), the signal (10702B) which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 64QAM u times will be outputted. And it is considered as u=vxw (w&lt; 1.0).

1520If the Precoding procession in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is set to F [t], an above-mentioned formula (86) will be materialized.<br />Therefore, the ratio of the average power of 64QAM to the average power of 16QAM is v.^２:u^２=v^２:v^２xw^２=1:w^２It will set up. Since this will be in a receiving state as shown in Drawing 106, the receiving quality of the data in a receiving set can be raised.

1521Conventionally, transmission power control is generally controlling transmission power based on the feedback information from a communication partner. By this embodiment, regardless of the feedback information from a communication partner, the point which is controlling transmission power serves as the feature of the present invention, and explains this point in detail.<br />Although Above described what "values v and u for power change are set up for with a control signal (10700)", below, values v and u for the power change by the control signal (10700) for raising the receiving quality of the data in a receiving set further are explained in detail about a setup.

1522<br />(Example 6-1)<br />Block length of plurality [ sending set ] (being the number of bits which constitutes 1 block after coding) When the error correcting code called numerals length is being supported, according to the block length of the error correcting code given to the data used for generation of s1 and s2, how to set up the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 is explained.

1523the turbo numerals which performed tail biting as an error correcting code, for example or duo binary turbo numerals, an LDPC code, and of -- there are block numerals [ like ] and a plurality of block length is supported in many communications systems or a broadcasting system. The data after the coding to which block length's error correcting code-ization chosen from a plurality of block length currently supported was performed is distributed to two lines. The data after the coding distributed to two lines is modulated with the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2, respectively, and baseband signal (signal after mapping) (t) s1 and s2 (t) are generated.

1524A control signal (10700) is a signal which shows the block length of the above-mentioned selected error correcting code, and a power changing part (10701A) sets up value v for power change according to a control signal (10700). A power changing part (10701B) sets up value u for power change according to a control signal (10700) similarly.<br />The feature of the present invention is that a power changing part (10701A, 10701B) sets up values v and u for power change according to the selected block length whom a control signal (10700) shows. Here, it is v about the value for the power change according to block length X, respectively._LXu_LXSuppose that it indicates in the form to say.

1525For example, when 1000 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701A) is value v for power change._L1000When it sets up and 1500 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701A) is value v for power change._L1500When it sets up and 3000 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701A) is value v for power change._L3000It sets up.

1526On the other hand, when 1000 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._L1000When it sets up and 1500 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._L1500When it sets up and 3000 is chosen as block length, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._L3000It sets up.

1527At this time, it is v, for example._L1000v_L1500v_L3000By considering it as a value different, respectively, it is sometimes possible to acquire high error correcting capability in the time of each numerals length. Similarly, it is u._L1000u_L1500u_L3000By considering it as a value different, respectively, it is sometimes possible to acquire high error correcting capability in the time of each numerals length. However, an effect may be unable to be acquired even if it changes the value for power change by some numerals length who sets up. Even if it changes numerals length then, it is not necessary to change the value for power change. (For example, u)_L1000=u_L1500It comes out, and there is also a certain thing, and it is v._L1000=v_L1500It comes out and there is also a certain thing. An important thing (v),_L1000v_L1500v_L3000It is that two or more values exist in a set. moreover (u)_L1000u_L1500u_L3000It is that two or more values exist in a set. In addition, it is v._LXu_LXThe ratio of But and an average power value, 1:w^２Meet -- a having mentioned above passage is set up like.<br />Value u for power change which is not what was restricted to this although the case of three numerals length was explained to the example, and can be set up in a sending set in Above when two or more setup of numerals length is possible_LXWhen [ of two or more But ] it exists and numerals length is set up, a sending set is value u for power change in which a plurality of setup is possible._LXValue v for power change which it is one important point that the value for one of power change can be chosen from of, and a power change can be made, and can be set up in a sending set when two or more setup of numerals length is possible_LXWhen [ of two or more But ] it exists and numerals length is set up, a sending set is value v for power change in which a plurality of setup is possible._LXIt is also an important point that the value for one of power change can be chosen from of, and a power change can be made.

1528<br />(Example 6-2)<br />When the sending set is supporting the error correcting code of a plurality of code rates, according to the code rate of the error correcting code given to the data used for generation of s1 and s2, how to set up the average power of s1 and s2 is explained.

1529the turbo numerals which performed tail biting as an error correcting code, for example or duo binary turbo numerals, an LDPC code, and of -- there are block numerals [ like ] and a plurality of code rates are supported in many communications systems or a broadcasting system. The data after the coding to which error correcting code-ization of the code rate chosen from a plurality of code rates currently supported was performed is distributed to two lines. The data after the coding distributed to two lines is modulated with the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2, respectively, and baseband signal (signal after mapping) (t) s1 and s2 (t) are generated.

1530A control signal (10700) is a signal which shows the code rate of the above-mentioned selected error correcting code, and a power changing part (10701A) sets up value v for power change according to a control signal (10700). A power changing part (10701B) sets up value u for power change according to a control signal (10700).<br />The feature of the present invention is that a power changing part (10701A, 10701B) sets up values v and u for power change according to the selected code rate which a control signal (10700) shows. Here, it is v about the value for the power change according to code rate rx, respectively._rxu_rxSuppose that it indicates in the form to say.

1531For example, when r1 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701A) is value v for power change._r1When it sets up and r2 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701A) is value v for power change._r2When it sets up and r3 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701A) is value v for power change._r3It sets up.<br />When r1 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._r1When it sets up and r2 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._r2When it sets up and r3 is chosen as a code rate, a power changing part (10701B) is value u for power change._r3It sets up.

1532At this time, it is v, for example._r1v_r2v_r3By considering it as a value different, respectively, it is sometimes possible to acquire high error correcting capability in the time of each code rate. Similarly, it is u._r1u_r2u_r3By considering it as a value different, respectively, it is sometimes possible to acquire high error correcting capability in the time of each code rate. However, an effect may be unable to be acquired even if it changes the value for power change with some code rate to set up. Even if it changes a code rate then, it is not necessary to change the value for power change. (For example, v)_r1=v_r2It comes out, and there is also a certain thing, and it is u._r1=u_r2It comes out and there is also a certain thing. An important thing (v),_r1v_r2v_r3It is that two or more values exist in a set. moreover (u)_r1u_r2u_r3It is that two or more values exist in a set. In addition, it is v._rXu_rXThe ratio of But and an average power value, 1:w^２Meet -- a having mentioned above passage is set up like.

1533As an example of above r1, r2, and r3, when an error correcting code is an LDPC code, it is possible to be code rates, such as 1/2, 2/3, and 3/4, respectively.<br />Value u for power change which is not what was restricted to this although the case of three code rates was explained to the example, and can be set up in a sending set in Above when two or more setup is possible for a code rate_rxWhen [ of two or more But ] it exists and a code rate is set up, a sending set is value u for power change in which a plurality of setup is possible._rxValue v for power change which it is an important point that the value for one of power change can be chosen from of, and a power change can be made, and can be set up in a sending set when two or more setup is possible for a code rate_rXWhen [ of two or more But ] it exists and a code rate is set up, a sending set is value v for power change in which a plurality of setup is possible._rXIt is also an important point that the value for one of power change can be chosen from of, and a power change can be made.<br />(Example 6-3)<br />It becomes important to carry out the following, in order for a receiving set to obtain the receiving quality of better data.

1534When the sending set is supporting a plurality of modulation methods, according to the modulation method used for generation of s1 and s2, how to set up the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 is explained.<br />Here, as an example, the modulation method of s1 is considered as fixation at 16QAM, and the case (or either setup of 16QAM and QPSK is possible) where the modulation method of s2 is changed into QPSK from 64QAM is considered with a control signal. When making the modulation method of s1 into 16QAM, as the mapping method of s1 (t), it is as in Drawing 94 and g is a formula (272) in Drawing 94. When making the modulation method of s2 into 64QAM, it is as the mapping method of s2 (t), It is as in Drawing 109 and k is a formula (481) in Drawing 109, and when setting the modulation method of s2 (t) to QPSK, as the mapping method of s2 (t), it is as in Drawing 95 and h presupposes that it is a formula (273) in Drawing 95.

1535When the modulation method of s1 is made into 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 considers it as 64QAM in Drawing 108, it is considered as v=alpha, and it is u=alphaxw._６４It shall set up. At this time, the ratio of the average power of 64QAM to the average power of 16QAM is v.^２:u^２= alpha^２: alpha^２xw_６４^２=1:w_６４^２It becomes.<br />And when the modulation method of s1 is made into 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 sets to QPSK in Drawing 108, it is considered as v=beta, and it is u=betaxw._４It shall set up. At this time, the ratio of the average power of 64QAM to the average power of QPSK is v.^２:u^２= beta^２: beta^２xw_４^２=1:w_４^２It becomes. At this time, it is w from the relation of the minimum Euclid distance._４&lt;w_６４Also when it carries out and the modulation methods of s2 are any of 64QAM and QPSK, the receiving quality of data with an expensive receiving set can be obtained.

1536It is w even if it carries out "fixing the modulation method of s2 to 16QAM, and changing the modulation method of s1 into QPSK from 64QAM (it sets to 16QAM and either of the QPSK)", although it explained in above-mentioned explanation having carried out "it is fixation to 16QAM about the modulation method of s1."_４&lt;w_６４It is good to carry out. (It may be considered explanation in Example 4-3 the same way.). (In addition, the value multiplied for power change at the time of 16QAM is u=alphaxw.)_１６The value which came out, exists and was multiplied for power change at the time of QPSK is u=betaxw._４Come out, and it is and is a value for power change of 64QAM, When the modulation method in which a plurality of setup is possible is 16QAM, it is v=alpha, and it becomes v=beta when the modulation method in which a plurality of setup is possible is QPSK. Again, About the set of (the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2), when a setup of either (16QAM, 64QAM), (64QAM, 16QAM), (16QAM, QPSK) or (QPSK, 16QAM) is possible, it is w._４&lt;w_６４It is good to fill connection of.

1537Hereinafter, the case where the above-mentioned contents are generalized is explained.<br />When it becomes common, the modulation method of s1 is considered as fixation, and the number of the signal points in an I-Q plane considers it as c modulation methods C. As a modulation method of s2, the number of the signal points in an I-Q plane uses that one a modulation methods A and the number of the signal points in an I-Q plane can be set up of b modulation methods B (c&gt;b&gt;a). At this time, it is 1:w about the ratio of that average power when the modulation method of s1 sets up modulation method A as that average power and a modulation method of s2 with modulation method C._a^２It carries out. It is 1:w about the ratio of the average power when the modulation method of s1 sets up modulation method B as the average power and a modulation method of s2 with modulation method C._b^２It carries out. At this time, it is w._a&lt;w_bIf it carries out, the receiving quality of data with an expensive receiving set can be obtained.

1538Therefore, although explained having carried out "it is fixation to modulation method C about the modulation method of s1", even if it is a case where "fixing the modulation method of s2 to modulation method C, and changing the modulation method of s1 into modulation method B from modulation method A (modulation method A, modulation method B either setup)" is carried out, it is related with average power, and it is w._a&lt;w_bIt is good to carry out. (When average power of modulation method C is set to 1 like Above at this time, the average power of modulation method A is w.)_a^２Come out, it is and the average power of modulation method B is w._b^２It comes out. The set of (the modulation method of s1 and the modulation method of s2) is related with average power, when a setup of either (modulation method C and modulation method A), (modulation method A and modulation method C), (modulation method C and modulation method B) or (modulation method B and modulation method C) is possible, and it is w again._a&lt;w_bIt is good to fill connection of.

1539<br />(about electric power)<br />In this specification containing "Embodiment 8", "Embodiment 9", "Embodiment 10", "Embodiment 18", "Embodiment 19", "Embodiment C1", and "Embodiment C2", In the formula of the Precoding procession used for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, When it sets to alpha= 1 and the modulation method of "s1 differs from the modulation method of s2 as mentioned above, PAPR of the transmission power amplifier which the average power of z1 and z2 average power become equal also as making the average power (average value) of s1, and the average power (average value) of s2 differ", and a sending set possesses (Peak-to-Average*Power*) Since enlarging Ratio (peak power versus average power ratio) is not connected, the effect that power consumption of a sending set can be lessened can be acquired. For example, the Precoding procession used for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, It is good to set to the formula (#3) of Embodiment C1, a formula (#14), a formula (#15), a formula (#16), the formula (#20) of Embodiment C2, a formula (#24), a formula (#25), and a formula (#26). The Precoding procession used for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, for example, The formula (268) of Embodiment 18, a formula (269), the formula of Embodiment C1 (#1), A formula (#2), a formula (#9), a formula (#10), a formula (#12), a formula (#13), It becomes common like the formula (#18) of Embodiment C2, a formula (#19), a formula (#21), a formula (#22), and a formula (#23), and when expressed, it may be referred to as alpha= 1 and is the same about other embodiments about this point. (In addition, a cycle is not what was restricted to odd number) "<br /><br />However, the Precoding procession which uses alpha!=1 for the Puri coding method with little influence on PAPR which changes a Precoding procession regularly exists. For example, when the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is realized using the Precoding procession denoted by the formula (279) and formula (280) in Embodiment 19, the influence of PAPR has little alpha!=1. (In addition also in Embodiment 10, the Puri coding method relevant to Embodiment 19 which changes a Precoding procession regularly is described.) Also in Embodiment 13 and Embodiment 20, there is little influence on PAPR also as alpha!=1. <br /><br />(Receiving set)<br />In the case of Example 1, Example 2, and Example 3, the following relations can lead from Drawing 5.

1540<maths num="610"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0618.tif" /></maths>

1541It may become the following relations as Example 1, Example 2, and Example 3 explained.

1542<maths num="611"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0619.tif" /></maths>

1543A receiving set becomes what it restores to (the bit which the sending set transmitted is presumed) (detection) using the above-mentioned relation (it will carry out like explanation in A5 grade from Embodiment 1 and Embodiment A1).<br /><br />In the case of Example 4, Example 5, and Example 6, the following relations can lead from Drawing 5.

1544<maths num="612"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0620.tif" /></maths>

1545It may become the following relations as Example 4, Example 5, and Example 6 explained.

1546<maths num="613"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0621.tif" /></maths>

1547A receiving set becomes what it restores to (the bit which the sending set transmitted is presumed) (detection) using the above-mentioned relation (it will carry out like explanation in A5 grade from Embodiment 1 and Embodiment A1).<br /><br />About the relation between power change and mapping:<br /><br />As Example 1, Example 2, and Example 3 explained, and especially shown in the formula (487), mapping part 306B of Drawing 3 and Drawing 4 may output uxs2 (t), and may omit a power changing part. In this case, the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly will be applied to signal s1 after mapping (t), and signal uxs2 after mapping (t).

1548<br />And as Example 1, Example 2, and Example 3 explained, and especially shown in the formula (488), mapping part 306A of Drawing 3 and Drawing 4 may output uxs1 (t), and may omit a power changing part. In this case, the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly will be applied to signal uxs1 after mapping (t), and signal s2 after mapping (t).

1549<br /><br />In the case of Example 4, Example 5, and Example 6, as especially shown in the formula (489), mapping part 306A of Drawing 3 and Drawing 4 outputs vxs1 (t), mapping part 306B may output uxs2 (t), and all may omit a power changing part. In this case, the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly will be applied to signal vxs1 after mapping (t), and signal uxs2 after mapping (t).

1550<br />And in the case of Example 4, Example 5, and Example 6, as especially shown in the formula (490), mapping part 306A of Drawing 3 and Drawing 4 outputs uxs1 (t), mapping part 306B may output vxs2 (t), and all may omit a power changing part. In this case, the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly will be applied to signal uxs1 after mapping (t), and signal vxs2 after mapping (t).

1551<br />That is, F [t] in this embodiment, It is a Precoding procession in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, and F [t] is, The Puri coding method with which either according to the formula (#3) of Embodiment C1, a formula (#14), a formula (#15), a formula (#16), the formula (#20) of Embodiment C2, a formula (#24), a formula (#25), and a formula (#26) changes a Precoding procession regularly is considered as an example. For example, F [t] is a formula (268) of Embodiment 18, and a formula (269), The formula (#1) of Embodiment C1, a formula (#2), a formula (#9), a formula (#10), A formula (#12), a formula (#13), the formula (#18) of Embodiment C2, a formula (#19), a formula (#21), a formula (#22), and the Puri coding method with which either as for which a formula (#23) applies changes a Precoding procession regularly are considered as an example. (In addition, a cycle is not what was restricted to odd number)<br /><br />F [t] is good also as a Puri coding method using the Precoding procession denoted by the formula (279) and formula (280) in Embodiment 19 which changes a Precoding procession regularly. (The Puri coding method relevant to Embodiment 19 in addition which changes a Precoding procession regularly) Embodiment 10, Embodiment 13, and Embodiment 20 are described, and F [t] is good also as a Puri coding method which is stated to Embodiment 10, Embodiment 13, and Embodiment 20 and which changes a Precoding procession regularly. <br /><br />F [t] is the Precoding procession used for time t, when the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applied. A receiving set will get over using the relation between r1 (t), r2 (t), and s1 (t) and s2 (t) shown by Above (it will carry out like explanation in A5 grade from Embodiment 1 and Embodiment A1). (detection) However, distortion ingredients, such as a noise ingredient, frequency offset, and a channel estimation error, are not expressed to a formula, but it is a form containing these and a recovery (detection) will be performed at a ceremony shown by Above. Or [ that a sending set transmits the information about these about the value of u and v which are used in order that a sending set may make a power change ], Or the information on the transmitting modes (a transmission method, a modulation method, an error correction method, etc.) to be used is transmitted, and by acquiring the information, the receiving set can know the value of u and v which the sending set used, and will get over by this drawing the expression of relations shown by Above (detection).

1552<br />Although this embodiment explained as an example the case where a Precoding procession was changed in the direction of a time-axis, Like explanation of other embodiments, when multicareer transmission like an OFDM method is used, it can carry out similarly about the case where a Precoding procession is changed in the direction of a frequency axis. At this time, t used by this embodiment will be transposed to f (frequency (substitute) (career)).

1553Therefore, when changing a Precoding procession in the direction of a time-axis, in z1 (t) and z2 (t), z1 (t) of the same time and z2 (t) will be transmitted from a different antenna using the same frequency. And when changing a Precoding procession in the direction of a frequency axis, in z1 (f) and z2 (f), z1 (f) of the same frequency (the same subcarrier) and z2 (f) will be transmitted from a different antenna using the same time.

1554It is possible to carry out in a similar manner in the direction of a time-frequency axis, as other embodiments also described the case where a Precoding procession was changed. The Puri coding method in this embodiment which changes a Precoding procession regularly is not limited to the Puri coding method which was explained in this specification and which changes a Precoding procession regularly. And the method of fixation of a Precoding procession (therefore, Precoding procession F (t)) Even if it applies a setup of the average power of s1 (t) of this embodiment, and the average power of s2 (t) to the method which is not a function of t (or f), the effect that the receiving quality of data improves can be acquired in a receiving set.

1555<br /><br />(Embodiment G1)<br />When the modulation methods used for generation of above s1 and s2 differ in this embodiment, The case where the Precoding procession using the unitary matrix based on Embodiment 9 which explained the setting method which changes the average power of s1 and s2 by Embodiment 18 is used in combination with the Puri coding method changed regularly is described. In the way cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly as Embodiment 8 described, the Precoding procession modeled after a formula (82) - a formula (85) prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula.

1556<maths num="614"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0622.tif" /></maths><br />

1557It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. (It shall be alpha&gt; 0) At this embodiment, since a unitary matrix is treated, the Precoding procession of a formula (268) can be denoted by a following formula.

1558<maths num="615"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0623.tif" /></maths><br />

1559It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. (It shall be alpha&gt; 0) At this time, the following conditions become important from conditions 5 of (several 106) of Embodiment 3, and conditions 6 of (several 107), in order to obtain the receiving quality of good data.

1560<maths num="616"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0624.tif" /></maths><br />

1561<maths num="617"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0625.tif" /></maths><br />

1562It means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [N-1] was generated based on the formula (269) (F [0] the Precoding procession of -F [N-1] may use it, ranking with what kind of turn to cycle N.). And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number nickel, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number nickel+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number Nxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly)<br />As an example of a Precoding procession based on the formula (269) prepared for cycle N, when referred to as N= 5, the following processions can be considered.

1563<maths num="618"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0626.tif" /></maths><br />

1564<maths num="619"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0627.tif" /></maths><br />

1565<maths num="620"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0628.tif" /></maths><br />

1566<maths num="621"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0629.tif" /></maths><br />

1567<maths num="622"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0630.tif" /></maths><br />

1568Thus, it is [ in / in order to lessen the operation scale by the above-mentioned Precoding of a sending set / a formula (269) ] theta._１１(i)= it is good to set it as zero rad and lambda= 0 rad. However, in a formula (269), lambda may be good also as a value which changes with i, and may be the same value. That is, in a formula (269), lambda (x!=y) in lambda and F [i=y] in F [i=x] may be the same value, and may be a different value.<br />Although it becomes an effective value whose preset value described by Above is one as a preset value of alpha, it is not what was restricted to this, and as Embodiment 17 described, alpha may be set up for every value of i of procession F[i], for example. (It is got blocked and alpha in F[i] does not always have to be taken as a steady value in i.)<br />This embodiment explained the constitution method of N different Precoding processions for the Precoding hopping method of time period N. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] will be prepared as N different Precoding processions at this time, Although it will arrange in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] in the direction of a time-axis (or it is also possible to arrange on a frequency axis in the case of multicareer) at the time of a single career transmission method, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply N different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of cycle N, Even if it uses N different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use N different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

1569In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H is taken as a bigger natural number than cycle N of the method which changes a Precoding procession to the above-mentioned rule target), If N different Precoding processions in this embodiment are included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high. At this time, &lt;condition #55 &lt;condition #56&gt;&gt; can be transposed to the following conditions. (A cycle is considered as N.)

1570<maths num="623"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0631.tif" /></maths><br />

1571<maths num="624"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0632.tif" /></maths><br />

1572It is although the case where it sets to lambda= 0 rad as an example of the Precoding procession at the time of treating lambda as a fixed value is mentioned as an example and this embodiment explains it, When mapping of a modulation method is taken into consideration, they are lambda=pi/2rad, and lambda=pi Radian, It may set to a value fixed at either lambda = (3 pi) / 2 rad (for example, in the Precoding procession of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, it is considered as lambda=pi Radian.). Reduction of circuit scales can be aimed at like the case where this sets to lambda= 0 rad.

1573Below, the setting method (for details, it has indicated to Embodiment F1.) of the average power of s1 and s2 in case the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2 is explained to the Puri coding method which makes Embodiment 18 an example and which changes a Precoding procession regularly.<br />"The setting method of the average power of s1 and s2 in case the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2" can be applied to all the Puri coding methods that were explained in this specification and that change a Precoding procession regularly. At this time, it is an important point,<br />- Turbo numerals or duo binary turbo numerals which performed tail biting as an error correcting code, for example, and an LDPC code and of -- using block numerals [ like ] and supporting a plurality of block length (number of bits which constitutes 1 block) (numerals length) When a sending set chooses one block length of a plurality of above-mentioned block length, it performs selection block length's error correcting code-ization and the modulation method of s1 and the modulation method of s2 change with block length who chooses, the setting method of the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 may be changed. - The code rate chosen when a plurality of code rates are supported as an error correcting code, a sending set chooses one code rate of a plurality of above-mentioned code rates and it performs error correcting code-ization of a selection code rate, When the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2, the setting method of the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 may be changed.<br />- When the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2, change the setting method of the average power (average value) of the setting method of the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 with the modulation method with which two or more support cage and the sending set used the selectable modulation method for s2 for generation of s2.<br />- When the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2, change the setting method of the average power (average value) of the setting method of the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 with the modulation method with which two or more support cage and the sending set used the selectable modulation method for s1 for generation of s1.

1574"A setting method of the average power of s1 and s2 in case the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2" explained by this embodiment, Not only the example of the Puri coding method which was shown on these specifications and which changes a Precoding procession regularly but the thing which will be applied if it is the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is possible.<br />Although this embodiment explains as an example the case where a Precoding procession is changed in the direction of a time-axis, Like explanation of other embodiments, when multicareer transmission like an OFDM method is used, it can carry out similarly about the case where a Precoding procession is changed in the direction of a frequency axis. At this time, t used by this embodiment will be transposed to f (frequency (substitute) (career)). It is possible to carry out similarly about the case where a Precoding procession is changed, in the direction of a time-frequency axis.<br />(Embodiment G2)<br />When the modulation methods used for generation of above s1 and s2 differ in this embodiment, The case where the Precoding procession using the unitary matrix based on Embodiment 10 which explained the setting method which changes the average power of s1 and s2 by Embodiment 19 is used in combination with the Puri coding method changed regularly is described.

1575In the method of cycle 2N which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle 2N is denoted by a following formula.

1576<maths num="625"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0633.tif" /></maths>

1577<maths num="626"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0634.tif" /></maths>

1578At this time, the following conditions become important from conditions 5 of (several 106) of Embodiment 3, and conditions 6 of (several 107), in order to obtain the receiving quality of good data.

1579<maths num="627"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0635.tif" /></maths>

1580<maths num="628"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0636.tif" /></maths>

1581And it considers adding the following conditions.

1582<maths num="629"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0637.tif" /></maths>

1583It means that the Precoding procession of F [0] - F [2N-1] was generated based on a formula (279) and (280) (F [0] the Precoding procession of -F [2N-1] may use it, ranking with what kind of turn to cycle 2N.). And for example, Precoding is performed using the time F [0] of symbol number 2nickel, It becomes what Precoding is performed using the time F [1] of symbol number 2nickel+1, and Precoding is performed for using the time F [h] of ... and symbol number 2 Nxi+h (h= 0, 1, 2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1). (Here, as the former embodiment described, it is not necessary to necessarily change a Precoding procession regularly)<br />As an example of a Precoding procession based on the formula (279) prepared for cycle 2N, and a formula (280), when referred to as N= 15, the following processions can be considered.

1584<maths num="630"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0638.tif" /></maths>

1585<maths num="631"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0639.tif" /></maths>

1586<maths num="632"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0640.tif" /></maths>

1587<maths num="633"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0641.tif" /></maths>

1588<maths num="634"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0642.tif" /></maths>

1589<maths num="635"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0643.tif" /></maths>

1590<maths num="636"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0644.tif" /></maths>

1591<maths num="637"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0645.tif" /></maths>

1592<maths num="638"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0646.tif" /></maths>

1593<maths num="639"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0647.tif" /></maths>

1594<maths num="640"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0648.tif" /></maths>

1595<maths num="641"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0649.tif" /></maths>

1596<maths num="642"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0650.tif" /></maths>

1597<maths num="643"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0651.tif" /></maths>

1598<maths num="644"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0652.tif" /></maths>

1599<maths num="645"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0653.tif" /></maths>

1600<maths num="646"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0654.tif" /></maths>

1601<maths num="647"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0655.tif" /></maths>

1602<maths num="648"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0656.tif" /></maths>

1603<maths num="649"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0657.tif" /></maths>

1604<maths num="650"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0658.tif" /></maths>

1605<maths num="651"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0659.tif" /></maths>

1606<maths num="652"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0660.tif" /></maths>

1607<maths num="653"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0661.tif" /></maths>

1608<maths num="654"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0662.tif" /></maths>

1609<maths num="655"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0663.tif" /></maths>

1610<maths num="656"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0664.tif" /></maths>

1611<maths num="657"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0665.tif" /></maths>

1612<maths num="658"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0666.tif" /></maths>

1613<maths num="659"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0667.tif" /></maths>

1614Thus, it is [ in / in order to lessen the operation scale by the above-mentioned Precoding of a sending set / a formula (279) ] theta._１１(i)= setting it as zero rad and lambda= 0 rad, and setting at a ceremony (280) -- theta_２１(i)= it is good to set it as zero rad and lambda= 0 rad.<br />However, in a formula (279) and a formula (280), lambda may be good also as a value which changes with i, and may be the same value. That is, in a formula (279) and a formula (280), lambda (x!=y) in lambda and F [i=y] in F [i=x] may be the same value, and may be a different value. In a formula (279), it is good as another method also as a value which considers it as the value of fixation of lambda, and considers it as the value of fixation of lambda in a formula (280), and is different in the value of fixed lambda in a formula (279), and the value of fixed lambda in a formula (280). (How to make it into the value of fixed lambda in a formula (279) and the value of fixed lambda in a formula (280) as another technique may be used.)<br />Although it becomes an effective value whose preset value described by Above is one as a preset value of alpha, it is not what was restricted to this, and as Embodiment 17 described, alpha may be set up for every value of i of procession F[i], for example. (It is got blocked and alpha in F[i] does not always have to be taken as a steady value in i.)<br />This embodiment explained the constitution method of a 2N piece different Precoding procession for the Precoding hopping method of time period 2N. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] will be prepared as a 2N piece different Precoding procession at this time, Although it will arrange in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] in the direction of a time-axis (or it is also possible to arrange on a frequency axis in the case of multicareer) at the time of a single career transmission method, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply 2N piece different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of cycle 2N, Even if it uses 2N piece different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use 2N piece different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

1615In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H is taken as a bigger natural number than cycle 2N of the method which changes a Precoding procession to the above-mentioned rule target), If a 2N piece [ in this embodiment ] different Precoding procession is included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high.<br />It is although the case where it sets to lambda= 0 rad as an example of the Precoding procession at the time of treating lambda as a fixed value is mentioned as an example and this embodiment explains it, When mapping of a modulation method is taken into consideration, they are lambda=pi/2rad, and lambda=pi Radian, It may set to a value fixed at either lambda = (3 pi) / 2 rad (for example, in the Precoding procession of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, it is considered as lambda=pi Radian.). Reduction of circuit scales can be aimed at like the case where this sets to lambda= 0 rad.

1616Below, the setting method (for details, it has indicated to Embodiment F1.) of the average power of s1 and s2 in case the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2 is explained to the Puri coding method which makes Embodiment 19 an example and which changes a Precoding procession regularly.<br />"The setting method of the average power of s1 and s2 in case the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2" can be applied to all the Puri coding methods that were explained in this specification and that change a Precoding procession regularly. At this time, it is an important point,<br />- Turbo numerals or duo binary turbo numerals which performed tail biting as an error correcting code, for example, and an LDPC code and of -- using block numerals [ like ] and supporting a plurality of block length (number of bits which constitutes 1 block) (numerals length) When a sending set chooses one block length of a plurality of above-mentioned block length, it performs selection block length's error correcting code-ization and the modulation method of s1 and the modulation method of s2 change with block length who chooses, the setting method of the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 may be changed. - The code rate chosen when a plurality of code rates are supported as an error correcting code, a sending set chooses one code rate of a plurality of above-mentioned code rates and it performs error correcting code-ization of a selection code rate, When the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2, the setting method of the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 may be changed.<br />- When the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2, change the setting method of the average power (average value) of the setting method of the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 with the modulation method with which two or more support cage and the sending set used the selectable modulation method for s2 for generation of s2.<br />- When the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2, change the setting method of the average power (average value) of the setting method of the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 with the modulation method with which two or more support cage and the sending set used the selectable modulation method for s1 for generation of s1.

1617"A setting method of the average power of s1 and s2 in case the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2" explained by this embodiment, Not only the example of the Puri coding method which was shown on these specifications and which changes a Precoding procession regularly but the thing which will be applied if it is the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is possible.<br />Although this embodiment explains as an example the case where a Precoding procession is changed in the direction of a time-axis, Like explanation of other embodiments, when multicareer transmission like an OFDM method is used, it can carry out similarly about the case where a Precoding procession is changed in the direction of a frequency axis. At this time, t used by this embodiment will be transposed to f (frequency (substitute) (career)). It is possible to carry out similarly about the case where a Precoding procession is changed, in the direction of a time-frequency axis.<br />(Embodiment G3)<br />By this embodiment, when the modulation methods used for generation of above s1 and s2 differ, the case where the setting method which changes the average power of s1 and s2 is applied to Embodiment C1 is explained. This Embodiment C1 is a form at the time of applying to the case where Embodiment 2 (Example (Example 1) 2) is generalized.

1618In the way cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula.

1619<maths num="660"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0668.tif" /></maths>

1620It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. (It shall be alpha&gt; 0) A unitary matrix is treated and a following formula expresses the Precoding procession of a formula (#1) in this embodiment.

1621<maths num="661"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0669.tif" /></maths>

1622It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. ((It shall be alpha&gt; 0) If simplification of mapping in a sending set and a receiving set is taken into consideration) It is good to consider it as lambda= 0 rad, pi/2rad, pi Radian, and (3 pi) / 2 rad, and it good to consider it as one fixed value of these three values. It is treating as alpha= 1 and a formula (#2) is expressed especially with Embodiment 2 as follows.

1623<maths num="662"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0670.tif" /></maths>

1624Like Embodiment 2, in order to arrange a receiving inferior point so that it may become uniform distribution to a phase on a complex plane, in a formula (#1) or a formula (#2), &lt;condition #101&gt; or &lt;condition #102&gt; are given.

1625<maths num="663"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0671.tif" /></maths>

1626<maths num="664"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0672.tif" /></maths>

1627In particular, it is theta._１１(i) When it does not depend on i but is considered as a fixed value, &lt;condition #103&gt; or &lt;condition #104&gt; can be given.<br />

1628<maths num="665"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0673.tif" /></maths>

1629<maths num="666"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0674.tif" /></maths>

1630Similarly, it is theta._２１(i) When it does not depend on i but is considered as a fixed value, &lt;condition #105&gt; or &lt;condition #106&gt; can be given.<br />

1631<maths num="667"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0675.tif" /></maths>

1632<maths num="668"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0676.tif" /></maths>

1633next, method Hey to which cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly -- it stated above<br />The example of the Precoding procession using a unitary matrix is given. The Precoding procession based on a formula (#2) prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula. (In a formula (#2), they are zero rad and theta about lambda.)_１１(i) It may be zero rad. <br />

1634<maths num="669"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0677.tif" /></maths>

1635At this time, it is i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) (it shall be alpha&gt; 0), and &lt;condition #103&gt; or &lt;condition #104&gt; will be filled. theta_２１A certain value may be set up for (i= 0) like zero rad.<br />method Hey to which cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly as another different example from Above -- the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula. (In a formula (#2), they are pi Radian and theta about lambda.)_１１(i) It may be zero rad. <br />

1636<maths num="670"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0678.tif" /></maths>

1637At this time, it is i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) (it shall be alpha&gt; 0), and &lt;condition #103&gt; or &lt;condition #104&gt; will be filled. theta_２１A certain value may be set up for (i= 0) like zero rad.<br />As another different example, Above expresses with a following formula the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N. (In a formula (#2), they are zero rad and theta about lambda.)_２１(i) It may be zero rad.

1638<maths num="671"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0679.tif" /></maths>

1639At this time, it is i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) (it shall be alpha&gt; 0), and &lt;condition #105&gt; or &lt;condition #106&gt; will be filled. theta_１１A certain value may be set up for (i= 0) like zero rad.<br />As another different example, Above expresses with a following formula the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N. (In a formula (#2), they are pi Radian and theta about lambda.)_２１(i) It may be zero rad. <br />

1640<maths num="672"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0680.tif" /></maths>

1641At this time, it is i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) (it shall be alpha&gt; 0), and &lt;condition #105&gt; or &lt;condition #106&gt; will be filled. theta_１１A certain value may be set up for (i= 0) like zero rad.<br />When it thinks in the example of Embodiment 2, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula as another example. (In a formula (#3), they are zero rad and theta about lambda.)_１１(i) It may be zero rad. <br />

1642<maths num="673"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0681.tif" /></maths>

1643At this time, it is i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), and &lt;condition #103&gt; or &lt;condition #104&gt; will be filled. theta_２１A certain value may be set up for (i= 0) like zero rad.<br />method Hey to which cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly as another different example from Above -- the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula. (In a formula (#3), they are pi Radian and theta about lambda.)_１１(i) It may be zero rad.

1644<maths num="674"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0682.tif" /></maths>

1645At this time, it is i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), and &lt;condition #103&gt; or &lt;condition #104&gt; will be filled. theta_２１A certain value may be set up for (i= 0) like zero rad.<br />As another different example, Above expresses with a following formula the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N. (In a formula (#3), they are zero rad and theta about lambda.)_２１(i) It may be zero rad. <br />

1646<maths num="675"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0683.tif" /></maths>

1647At this time, it is i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), and &lt;condition #105&gt; or &lt;condition #106&gt; will be filled. theta_１１A certain value may be set up for (i= 0) like zero rad.<br />As another different example, Above expresses with a following formula the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N. (In a formula (#3), they are pi Radian and theta about lambda.)_２１(i) It may be zero rad. <br />

1648<maths num="676"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0684.tif" /></maths>

1649At this time, it is i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1), and &lt;condition #105&gt; or &lt;condition #106&gt; will be filled. theta_１１A certain value may be set up for (i= 0) like zero rad.<br />When it compares with the Puri coding method which was explained by Embodiment 9 and which changes a Precoding procession regularly, it is the Puri coding method of this embodiment, data reception quality high also as a cycle of the minute of the cycle in Embodiment 9 half [ about ] may be able to be obtained, and since the Precoding procession to prepare can be lessened, the effect which can reduce the circuit scales of a sending set and a receiving set can be acquired. In order to make an above-mentioned effect higher, it is good to consider it as a sending set with the composition which has one coding machine and distributes coding data, for example as shown in Drawing 4, and the receiving set corresponding to this.

1650Although there is a method like Embodiment 18 as one suitable example of alpha in an above-mentioned example, it is not necessarily what was restricted to this.<br />This embodiment explained the constitution method of N different Precoding processions for the Precoding hopping method of time period N. Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] will be prepared as N different Precoding processions at this time, Although it will arrange in the direction of a time-axis (or frequency axis) in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] at the time of a single career transmission method, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply N different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. It is although explained as the Precoding hopping method of cycle N, Even if it uses N different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use N different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

1651In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H is taken as a bigger natural number than cycle N of the method which changes a Precoding procession to the above-mentioned rule target), If N different Precoding processions in this embodiment are included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high.<br />Below, the setting method (for details, it has indicated to Embodiment F1.) of the average power of s1 and s2 in case the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2 is explained to the Puri coding method which makes Embodiment C1 an example and which changes a Precoding procession regularly.<br />"The setting method of the average power of s1 and s2 in case the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2" can be applied to all the Puri coding methods that were explained in this specification and that change a Precoding procession regularly. At this time, it is an important point,<br />- Turbo numerals or duo binary turbo numerals which performed tail biting as an error correcting code, for example, and an LDPC code and of -- using block numerals [ like ] and supporting a plurality of block length (number of bits which constitutes 1 block) (numerals length) When a sending set chooses one block length of a plurality of above-mentioned block length, it performs selection block length's error correcting code-ization and the modulation method of s1 and the modulation method of s2 change with block length who chooses, the setting method of the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 may be changed. - The code rate chosen when a plurality of code rates are supported as an error correcting code, a sending set chooses one code rate of a plurality of above-mentioned code rates and it performs error correcting code-ization of a selection code rate, When the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2, the setting method of the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 may be changed.<br />- When the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2, change the setting method of the average power (average value) of the setting method of the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 with the modulation method with which two or more support cage and the sending set used the selectable modulation method for s2 for generation of s2.<br />- When the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2, change the setting method of the average power (average value) of the setting method of the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 with the modulation method with which two or more support cage and the sending set used the selectable modulation method for s1 for generation of s1.

1652"A setting method of the average power of s1 and s2 in case the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2" explained by this embodiment, Not only the example of the Puri coding method which was shown on these specifications and which changes a Precoding procession regularly but the thing which will be applied if it is the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is possible.<br />Although this embodiment explains as an example the case where a Precoding procession is changed in the direction of a time-axis, Like explanation of other embodiments, when multicareer transmission like an OFDM method is used, it can carry out similarly about the case where a Precoding procession is changed in the direction of a frequency axis. At this time, t used by this embodiment will be transposed to f (frequency (substitute) (career)). It is possible to carry out similarly about the case where a Precoding procession is changed, in the direction of a time-frequency axis.<br />(Embodiment G4)<br />By this embodiment, when the modulation methods used for generation of above s1 and s2 differ, the case where the setting method which changes the average power of s1 and s2 is applied to Embodiment C2 is explained. In the Puri coding method 9 with which Embodiment C2 differs from Embodiment C1 with which Embodiment C1 and Embodiment 9 were united and which changes a Precoding procession regularly, i.e., an embodiment, It is the method of realizing Embodiment C1 using the case where a cycle is made into odd number.

1653In the way cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula.

1654<maths num="677"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0685.tif" /></maths>

1655It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. (It shall be alpha&gt; 0) A unitary matrix is treated and a following formula expresses the Precoding procession of a formula (#1) in this embodiment.

1656<maths num="678"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0686.tif" /></maths>

1657It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. ((It shall be alpha&gt; 0) If simplification of mapping in a sending set and a receiving set is taken into consideration) It is good to consider it as lambda= 0 rad, pi/2rad, pi Radian, and (3 pi) / 2 rad, and it good to consider it as one fixed value of these three values. Especially, it is treating as alpha= 1 and a formula (#19) is expressed as follows.

1658<maths num="679"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0687.tif" /></maths>

1659Although the Precoding procession of the Puri coding method in this embodiment which changes a Precoding procession regularly is denoted by above-mentioned form, It becomes the feature that cycle N of the Puri coding method in this embodiment which changes a Precoding procession regularly is expressed as odd number, i.e., N=2n+1. And a different Precoding procession (in addition about different Precoding, explanation is given behind.) prepared in order to realize cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1 will be n+1 piece. And n Precoding processions are used twice within 1 cycle among n+1 different Precoding, respectively, one Precoding is used once and cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1 is realized. Below, the Precoding procession at this time is explained in detail.

1660In order to realize the Puri coding method of cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly n+1 different needed Precoding procession is set to F [0], *F [1], ..., F[i], ..., F [n-1], and F [n] (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., n-2, n-1, n (i is an integer below or more 0n)). At this time, F [0], *F [1], ..., F[i], ..., F [n-1], and F [n] are expressed for n+1 different Precoding procession based on a formula (#19) as follows.

1661<maths num="680"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0688.tif" /></maths>

1662However, it is referred to as i= 0, 1, 2, ..., n-2, n-1, and n (i is an integer below or more 0n). In n+1 different Precoding procession F [0] of a formula (#21), *F [1], ..., F[i], ..., F [n-1], and F [n], It is a thing using [ using F [0] once ] F [1] - F [n] twice respectively (F [n] is used twice, using ... and F [n-1] twice, using F [2] twice, using F [1] twice), It is considering it as the Puri coding method of cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The receiving set can obtain the receiving quality of good data like the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly at the time of making a cycle into odd number in Embodiment 9. at this time, data reception quality high also as a cycle of the minute of the cycle in Embodiment 9 half [ about ] may be able to be obtained, and since the Precoding procession to prepare can be lessened, the effect which can reduce the circuit scales of a sending set and a receiving set can be acquired. In order to make an above-mentioned effect higher, it is good to consider it as a sending set with the composition which has one coding machine and distributes coding data, for example as shown in Drawing 4, and the receiving set corresponding to this.

1663And they are lambda= 0 rad and theta especially._１１= When it is considered as zero rad, an upper type is expressed as follows.<br />

1664<maths num="681"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0689.tif" /></maths>

1665However, it is referred to as i= 0, 1, 2, ..., n-2, n-1, and n (i is an integer below or more 0n). In n+1 different Precoding procession F [0] of a formula (#22), *F [1], ..., F[i], ..., F [n-1], and F [n], It is a thing using [ using F [0] once ] F [1] - F [n] twice respectively (F [n] is used twice, using ... and F [n-1] twice, using F [2] twice, using F [1] twice), It is considering it as the Puri coding method of cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The receiving set can obtain the receiving quality of good data like the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly at the time of making a cycle into odd number in Embodiment 9. at this time, data reception quality high also as a cycle of the minute of the cycle in Embodiment 9 half [ about ] may be able to be obtained, and since the Precoding procession to prepare can be lessened, the effect which can reduce the circuit scales of a sending set and a receiving set can be acquired.<br />Lambda=pi Radian, theta_１１= When it is considered as zero rad, it is expressed as follows.

1666<maths num="682"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0690.tif" /></maths>

1667However, it is referred to as i= 0, 1, 2, ..., n-2, n-1, and n (i is an integer below or more 0n). In n+1 different Precoding procession F [0] of a formula (#23), *F [1], ..., F[i], ..., F [n-1], and F [n], It is a thing using [ using F [0] once ] F [1] - F [n] twice respectively (F [n] is used twice, using ... and F [n-1] twice, using F [2] twice, using F [1] twice), It is considering it as the Puri coding method of cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The receiving set can obtain the receiving quality of good data like the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly at the time of making a cycle into odd number in Embodiment 9. at this time, data reception quality high also as a cycle of the minute of the cycle in Embodiment 9 half [ about ] may be able to be obtained, and since the Precoding procession to prepare can be lessened, the effect which can reduce the circuit scales of a sending set and a receiving set can be acquired.

1668Like the relation between a formula (#19) and a formula (#20), if alpha= 1, a formula (#21) is expressed as follows.<br />

1669<maths num="683"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0691.tif" /></maths>

1670However, it is referred to as i= 0, 1, 2, ..., n-2, n-1, and n (i is an integer below or more 0n). In n+1 different Precoding procession F [0] of a formula (#24), *F [1], ..., F[i], ..., F [n-1], and F [n], It is a thing using [ using F [0] once ] F [1] - F [n] twice respectively (F [n] is used twice, using ... and F [n-1] twice, using F [2] twice, using F [1] twice), It is considering it as the Puri coding method of cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The receiving set can obtain the receiving quality of good data like the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly at the time of making a cycle into odd number in Embodiment 9. at this time, data reception quality high also as a cycle of the minute of the cycle in Embodiment 9 half [ about ] may be able to be obtained, and since the Precoding procession to prepare can be lessened, the effect which can reduce the circuit scales of a sending set and a receiving set can be acquired.

1671Similarly, in a formula (#22), if alpha= 1, it is expressed as follows.<br />

1672<maths num="684"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0692.tif" /></maths>

1673However, it is referred to as i= 0, 1, 2, ..., n-2, n-1, and n (i is an integer below or more 0n). In n+1 different Precoding procession F [0] of a formula (#25), *F [1], ..., F[i], ..., F [n-1], and F [n], It is a thing using [ using F [0] once ] F [1] - F [n] twice respectively (F [n] is used twice, using ... and F [n-1] twice, using F [2] twice, using F [1] twice), It is considering it as the Puri coding method of cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The receiving set can obtain the receiving quality of good data like the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly at the time of making a cycle into odd number in Embodiment 9. at this time, data reception quality high also as a cycle of the minute of the cycle in Embodiment 9 half [ about ] may be able to be obtained, and since the Precoding procession to prepare can be lessened, the effect which can reduce the circuit scales of a sending set and a receiving set can be acquired.

1674Similarly, in a formula (#23), if alpha= 1, it is expressed as follows.<br />

1675<maths num="685"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0693.tif" /></maths>

1676However, it is referred to as i= 0, 1, 2, ..., n-2, n-1, and n (i is an integer below or more 0n). In n+1 different Precoding procession F [0] of a formula (#26), *F [1], ..., F[i], ..., F [n-1], and F [n], It is a thing using [ using F [0] once ] F [1] - F [n] twice respectively (F [n] is used twice, using ... and F [n-1] twice, using F [2] twice, using F [1] twice), It is considering it as the Puri coding method of cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The receiving set can obtain the receiving quality of good data like the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly at the time of making a cycle into odd number in Embodiment 9. at this time, data reception quality high also as a cycle of the minute of the cycle in Embodiment 9 half [ about ] may be able to be obtained, and since the Precoding procession to prepare can be lessened, the effect which can reduce the circuit scales of a sending set and a receiving set can be acquired.

1677Although there is a method like Embodiment 18 as one suitable example of alpha in an above-mentioned example, it is not necessarily what was restricted to this.<br />With this embodiment, Precoding procession [ for the Precoding hopping method (Puri coding method of cycle / of N= 2n /+1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly) of cycle / of N= 2n /+1 ] W [0], *W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], *W [2n] (however) W [0], *W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], and *W [2n], It comprises F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [n-1], and F [n]. Although it will arrange in the direction of a time-axis (or frequency axis) in order of W [0], *W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], and *W [2n] at the time of a single career transmission method, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply Precoding procession W [0], *W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], and *W [2n] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. Although explained as the Precoding hopping method of cycle [ of N= 2n ]+1, they are W [0], *W [1], ..., *. Even if it uses W [2n-1] and *W [2n] at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use W [0], *W [1], ..., *W [2n-1], and *W [2n] The so that it may have a regular cycle.

1678In the Precoding procession change method of cycle H (H makes above-mentioned cycle [ of the method which changes a Precoding procession regularly / of N= 2n ]+1 a bigger natural number), If n+1 different Precoding procession in this embodiment is included, a possibility of giving good receiving quality will become high.<br />Below, the setting method (for details, it has indicated to Embodiment F1.) of the average power of s1 and s2 in case the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2 is explained to the Puri coding method which makes Embodiment C2 an example and which changes a Precoding procession regularly.

1679"The setting method of the average power of s1 and s2 in case the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2" can be applied to all the Puri coding methods that were explained in this specification and that change a Precoding procession regularly. At this time, it is an important point,<br />- Turbo numerals or duo binary turbo numerals which performed tail biting as an error correcting code, for example, and an LDPC code and of -- using block numerals [ like ] and supporting a plurality of block length (number of bits which constitutes 1 block) (numerals length) When a sending set chooses one block length of a plurality of above-mentioned block length, it performs selection block length's error correcting code-ization and the modulation method of s1 and the modulation method of s2 change with block length who chooses, the setting method of the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 may be changed. - The code rate chosen when a plurality of code rates are supported as an error correcting code, a sending set chooses one code rate of a plurality of above-mentioned code rates and it performs error correcting code-ization of a selection code rate, When the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2, the setting method of the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 may be changed.<br />- When the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2, change the setting method of the average power (average value) of the setting method of the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 with the modulation method with which two or more support cage and the sending set used the selectable modulation method for s2 for generation of s2.<br />- When the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2, change the setting method of the average power (average value) of the setting method of the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 with the modulation method with which two or more support cage and the sending set used the selectable modulation method for s1 for generation of s1.

1680"A setting method of the average power of s1 and s2 in case the modulation method of s1 differs from the modulation method of s2" explained by this embodiment, Not only the example of the Puri coding method which was shown on these specifications and which changes a Precoding procession regularly but the thing which will be applied if it is the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is possible.<br />Although this embodiment explains as an example the case where a Precoding procession is changed in the direction of a time-axis, Like explanation of other embodiments, when multicareer transmission like an OFDM method is used, it can carry out similarly about the case where a Precoding procession is changed in the direction of a frequency axis. At this time, t used by this embodiment will be transposed to f (frequency (substitute) (career)). It is possible to carry out similarly about the case where a Precoding procession is changed, in the direction of a time-frequency axis.<br /><br />(Embodiment H1)<br />When the abnormal-conditions signal which mapped QPSK, and the abnormal-conditions signal which gave mapping of 16QAM are transmitted as an example in this embodiment, A different method from Embodiment F1 of the method of setting up to differ the average power of the abnormal-conditions signal which mapped QPSK, and the average power of the abnormal-conditions signal which gave mapping of 16QAM is explained.

1681As Embodiment F1 explained, it is a modulation method of QPSK and the abnormal-conditions signal of s2 about the modulation method of the abnormal-conditions signal of s1 16QAM Or the modulation method of 16QAM and the abnormal-conditions signal of s2 is set to QPSK for the modulation method of the abnormal-conditions signal of s1, When it sets up to differ the average power of the abnormal-conditions signal which mapped QPSK, and the average power of the abnormal-conditions signal which gave mapping of 16QAM, The Puri coding method which a sending set uses and which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The subject that PAPR (Peak-to-Average*Power*Ratio) (peak power versus average power ratio) of the transmission power amplifier which a sending set possesses becomes large, and the power consumption of a sending set becomes large may occur.

1682In this specification which specifically contains "Embodiment 8", "Embodiment 9", "Embodiment 18", "Embodiment 19", "Embodiment C1", and "Embodiment C2", In the formula of the Precoding procession used for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, When it sets to alpha!=1, the average power of z1 comes to differ from z2 average power, PAPR of the transmission power amplifier which a sending set possesses may be affected, and the subject that the power consumption of a sending set becomes large may occur. (However, the Precoding procession which uses alpha!=1 for the Puri coding method with little influence on PAPR which changes a Precoding procession regularly exists as above-mentioned).

1683In this specification which contains "Embodiment 8", "Embodiment 9", "Embodiment 18", "Embodiment 19", "Embodiment C1", and "Embodiment C2" in this embodiment, In the formula of the Precoding procession used for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Puri coding method with little influence on PAPR also as alpha!=1 which changes a Precoding procession regularly is described.

1684<br />According to this embodiment, the time of the modulation method of s1 and s2 being either QPSK or 16QAM is explained as an example.<br />First, mapping of QPSK and the mapping method of 16QAM are explained. It shall be a signal based on either mapping of QPSK which describes s1 and s2 in this embodiment below, or mapping of 16QAM.

1685First, mapping of 16QAM is explained using Drawing 94. Drawing 94 shows the example of signal point arrangement of 16QAM in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane. As for signal point 9400 of Drawing 94, when the bit (input bit) which transmits is set to b0-b3, the bit which transmits is = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (1, 0, 0, 0), for example (this value). It is the value indicated in Drawing 94. It solves, and the coordinates in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane are = (I, Q) (-3xg, 3xg), and the value of this I and Q serves as a signal after mapping. Also when the bits (b0, b1, b2, b3) which transmit are other values, based on (b0, b1, b2, b3), the set of (I, Q) is determined and the value of I and Q serves as a signal (s1 and s2) after mapping from Drawing 94.

1686Next, mapping of QPSK is explained using Drawing 95. Drawing 95 shows the example of signal point arrangement of QPSK in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane. As for signal point 9500 of Drawing 95, when the bit (input bit) which transmits is set to b0 and b1, the bit which transmits is = (b0, b1) (1, 0), for example (this value). It is the value indicated in Drawing 95. It solves, and the coordinates in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane are = (I, Q) (-1xh, 1xh), and the value of this I and Q serves as a signal after mapping. Also when the bits (b0, b1) which transmit are other values, based on (b0, b1), the set of (I, Q) is determined and the value of I and Q serves as a signal (s1 and s2) after mapping from Drawing 95.<br />When the modulation method of s1 and s2 is either QPSK or 16QAM, in order to make equal average power of QPSK, and average power of 16QAM, h becomes a formula (273) and g becomes a formula (272).

1687<br />When the signal processing part of the Precoding relation shown in Drawing 108 is used, the example of the changing method in the time-axis (or a frequency axis, time, and a frequency axis) of a modulation method, a power change value, and a Precoding procession is shown in Drawing 110 and Drawing 111.<br />The example of Drawing 110 shows as a table the modulation method in t= 11 which each time sets up, the power change value, and the Precoding procession from time t= 0. In z1 (t) and z2 (t), z1 (t) of the same time and z2 (t) will be transmitted from a different antenna using the same frequency. (Although the time-axis has indicated, when using a multicareer transmission method like an OFDM method, it is the direction of a time-axis, and various methods are not changed, but it is the direction of a frequency (subcarrier) axis, and it is also possible in Drawing 110 to change various methods.) Therefore, t= 0 may be replaced with f=f0, t= 1 may be replaced with f=f1 and ..., and it may think as shown in Drawing 110. (f shows frequency (subcarrier) and f0, f1, and ... show the frequency (subcarrier) to be used.) At this time In z1 (f) and z2 (f), z1 (f) of the same frequency (the same subcarrier) and z2 (f) will be transmitted from a different antenna using the same time. <br />As shown in Drawing 110, when a modulation method is QPSK, to the abnormal-conditions signal of QPSK, a will be multiplied by a power changing part (here, although it is called the power changing part, you may also call it an amplitude changing part and a weighting section.) (a is the real number). And when a modulation method is 16QAM, to the abnormal-conditions signal of 16QAM, b will be multiplied by a power changing part (here, although it is called the power changing part, you may also call it an amplitude changing part and a weighting section.) (b is the real number).

1688In Drawing 110, as a Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, three kinds, F [0], F [1], and F [2], are prepared, and the change cycle as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly becomes 3. (The cycle is formed by t0-t2, t3-t5, and ...)<br />And the modulation method of s1 (t) is 16QAM and ... by QPSK, t3-t5 t0-t2, and the modulation method of s2 (t) serves as 16QAM in t0-t2, and it has become QPSK and ... in t3-t5. Therefore, the modulation method of (s1(t) and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) serve as (QPSK, 16QAM), or (16QAM, QPSK).

1689The point which becomes important at this time,<br />"When performing Precoding by F [0] (modulation method of s1 (t)) The sets of the modulation method of s2 (t) are (QPSK, 16QAM) (16QAM), When it is the point that both of QPSK exist and Precoding is similarly performed by F [1] (modulation method of s1 (t)) The sets of the modulation method of s2 (t) are (QPSK, 16QAM) (16QAM), Both of QPSK exist and, in the modulation method of (s1(t) at the time of performing Precoding by F [2], and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)), both (QPSK, 16QAM), and (16QAM, QPSK) exist similarly. "<br />It comes out.

1690When the modulation method of s1 (t) is QPSK, a power changing part (10701A) will multiply a to s1 (t), will output axs1 (t), when the modulation method of s1 (t) is 16QAM, will multiply b to s1 (t), and will output bxs1 (t).<br />When the modulation method of s2 (t) is QPSK, a power changing part (10701B) will multiply a to s2 (t), will output axs2 (t), when the modulation method of s2 (t) is 16QAM, will multiply b to s2 (t), and will output bxs2 (t).

1691It is as Embodiment F1 having explained the method in the case of setting up to differ the average power of the abnormal-conditions signal which mapped QPSK, and the average power of the abnormal-conditions signal which gave mapping of 16QAM.<br />Therefore, if the modulation method of (s1(t) and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) are taken into consideration, be shown in Drawing 110, When a Precoding procession and a modulation method change are taken into consideration, a cycle is 6= 3x2 (3 : setting in the number of the Precoding processions prepared as a Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, and 2:each Precoding procession), The modulation method of (s1(t) and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) are that both (QPSK, 16QAM), and (16QAM, QPSK) exist.

1692As mentioned above, the modulation method of (s1(t) and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) (QPSK), making it 16QAM, and (16QAM, QPSK) exist -- and In each Precoding procession of the Precoding procession prepared as a Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The modulation method of (s1(t) and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) are making both (QPSK, 16QAM), and (16QAM, QPSK) exist, Even if it sets up so that the average power of QPSK may differ from the average power of 16QAM, while being able to lessen influence which can lessen influence which it has on PAPR of the transmission power amplifier which a sending set possesses, and it has on the power consumption of a sending set, As this specification explained, the effect that the receiving quality of the data in the receiving set in the LOS environment is improvable can be acquired.

1693Although it explained in still more nearly above-mentioned explanation by the case where the modulation method of (s1(t) and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) are (QPSK, 16QAM), and (16QAM, QPSK), Not the thing restricted to this but the modulation method of (s1(t) and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) (QPSK), 64QAM, (64QAM, QPSK) (modulation method of s1 (t)), The sets of the modulation method of s2 (t) are (16QAM, 64QAM) (64QAM), 16QAM, the modulation method of (s1(t), and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) (128QAM), 64QAM, (64QAM, 128QAM) (modulation method of s1 (t)), The sets of the modulation method of s2 (t) may be (256QAM, 64QAM (64QAM, 256QAM)), etc., that is, two different modulation methods are prepared, and if it sets up to differ the modulation method of s1 (t), and the modulation method of s2 (t), it can carry out similarly.

1694<br /><br />Drawing 111 shows as a table the modulation method in t= 11 which each time sets up, the power change value, and the Precoding procession from time t= 0. In z1 (t) and z2 (t), z1 (t) of the same time and z2 (t) will be transmitted from a different antenna using the same frequency. (Although the time-axis has indicated, when using a multicareer transmission method like an OFDM method, it is the direction of a time-axis, and various methods are not changed, but it is the direction of a frequency (subcarrier) axis, and it is also possible in Drawing 111 to change various methods.) Therefore, t= 0 may be replaced with f=f0, t= 1 may be replaced with f=f1 and ..., and it may think as shown in Drawing 111. (f shows frequency (subcarrier) and f0, f1, and ... show the frequency (subcarrier) to be used.) At this time In z1 (f) and z2 (f), z1 (f) of the same frequency (the same subcarrier) and z2 (f) will be transmitted from a different antenna using the same time. In addition, Drawing 111 shows an example by which the requirements explained in Drawing 110 are satisfied and which is different in Drawing 110.

1695As shown in Drawing 111, when a modulation method is QPSK, to the abnormal-conditions signal of QPSK, a will be multiplied by a power changing part (here, although it is called the power changing part, you may also call it an amplitude changing part and a weighting section.) (a is the real number). And when a modulation method is 16QAM, to the abnormal-conditions signal of 16QAM, b will be multiplied by a power changing part (here, although it is called the power changing part, you may also call it an amplitude changing part and a weighting section.) (b is the real number).

1696In Drawing 111, as a Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, three kinds, F [0], F [1], and F [2], are prepared, and the change cycle as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly becomes 3. (The cycle is formed by t0-t2, t3-t5, and ...)<br />And in a time-axis, 16QAM is set to QPSK by turns, and the modulation method of s1 (t) is the same also about s2 (t) about this point. And the modulation method of (s1(t) and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) serve as (QPSK, 16QAM), or (16QAM, QPSK).

1697The point which becomes important at this time,<br />"When performing Precoding by F [0] (modulation method of s1 (t)) The sets of the modulation method of s2 (t) are (QPSK, 16QAM) (16QAM), When it is the point that both of QPSK exist and Precoding is similarly performed by F [1] (modulation method of s1 (t)) The sets of the modulation method of s2 (t) are (QPSK, 16QAM) (16QAM), In an existence bookmark, the modulation method of (s1(t) at the time of performing Precoding by F [2] similarly, and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)), both (QPSK, 16QAM), and (16QAM, QPSK) exist [ both of QPSK ]. "<br />It comes out.

1698When the modulation method of s1 (t) is QPSK, a power changing part (10701A) will multiply a to s1 (t), will output axs1 (t), when the modulation method of s1 (t) is 16QAM, will multiply b to s1 (t), and will output bxs1 (t).<br />When the modulation method of s2 (t) is QPSK, a power changing part (10701B) will multiply a to s2 (t), will output axs2 (t), when the modulation method of s2 (t) is 16QAM, will multiply b to s2 (t), and will output bxs2 (t).

1699Therefore, if the modulation method of (s1(t) and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) are taken into consideration, be shown in Drawing 111, When a Precoding procession and a modulation method change are taken into consideration, a cycle is 6= 3x2 (3 : setting in the number of the Precoding processions prepared as a Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, and 2:each Precoding procession), The modulation method of (s1(t) and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) are that both (QPSK, 16QAM), and (16QAM, QPSK) exist.

1700As mentioned above, the modulation method of (s1(t) and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) (QPSK), making it 16QAM, and (16QAM, QPSK) exist -- and In each Precoding procession of the Precoding procession prepared as a Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The modulation method of (s1(t) and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) are making both (QPSK, 16QAM), and (16QAM, QPSK) exist, Even if it sets up so that the average power of QPSK may differ from the average power of 16QAM, while being able to lessen influence which can lessen influence which it has on PAPR of the transmission power amplifier which a sending set possesses, and it has on the power consumption of a sending set, As this specification explained, the effect that the receiving quality of the data in the receiving set in the LOS environment is improvable can be acquired.

1701Although it explained in still more nearly above-mentioned explanation by the case where the modulation method of (s1(t) and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) are (QPSK, 16QAM), and (16QAM, QPSK), Not the thing restricted to this but the modulation method of (s1(t) and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) (QPSK), 64QAM, (64QAM, QPSK) (modulation method of s1 (t)), The sets of the modulation method of s2 (t) are (16QAM, 64QAM) (64QAM), 16QAM, the modulation method of (s1(t), and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) (128QAM), 64QAM, (64QAM, 128QAM) (modulation method of s1 (t)), The sets of the modulation method of s2 (t) may be (256QAM, 64QAM (64QAM, 256QAM)), etc., that is, two different modulation methods are prepared, and if it sets up to differ the modulation method of s1 (t), and the modulation method of s2 (t), it can carry out similarly.

1702The relation of the modulation method which each time (each frequency) sets up, a power change value, and a Precoding procession is not what was restricted to Drawing 110 and Drawing 111.<br /><br /><br />The following points will become important if the above is summarized.

1703It is made for (modulation method A, modulation method B), and (modulation method B and modulation method A) to exist in the modulation method of (s1(t), and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)), and it sets up so that the average power of modulation method A may differ from the average power of modulation method B.<br />And when the modulation method of s1 (t) is modulation method A, a power changing part (10701A) will multiply a to s1 (t), will output axs1 (t), when the modulation method of s1 (t) is modulation method B, multiplies b to s1 (t), and outputs bxs1 (t). Similarly, when the modulation method of s2 (t) is modulation method A, a power changing part (10701B) will multiply a to s2 (t), will output axs2 (t), when the modulation method of s2 (t) is modulation method B, multiplies b to s2 (t), and outputs bxs2 (t).

1704As the Precoding procession prepared as a Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, F [0], F [1], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] (k is [ in / get it blocked and / F [k] ] 0 or more and N-1 or less) shall exist. And in the modulation method of (s1(t), and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)), in F [k], both (modulation method A, modulation method B), and (modulation method B and modulation method A) shall exist. this time -- "-- setting to F [k] by all k (modulation method of s1 (t)) The set of the modulation method of s2 (t) is good also as both (modulation method A, modulation method B), and (modulation method B and modulation method A) existing", and sets to "F [k], It is good also as k in which both (modulation method A, modulation method B), and (modulation method B and modulation method A) exist in the modulation method of (s1(t) and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) existing". <br />As mentioned above, the modulation method of (s1(t) and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) (modulation method A), making it modulation method B, and (modulation method B and modulation method A) exist -- and In each Precoding procession of the Precoding procession prepared as a Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The modulation method of (s1(t) and the set of s2 (the modulation method of t)) are making both (modulation method A, modulation method B), and (modulation method B and modulation method A) exist, Even if it sets up so that the average power of modulation method A may differ from the average power of modulation method B, while being able to lessen influence which can lessen influence which it has on PAPR of the transmission power amplifier which a sending set possesses, and it has on the power consumption of a sending set, As this specification explained, the effect that the receiving quality of the data in the receiving set in the LOS environment is improvable can be acquired.

1705<br />Below in relation to the above, the generation method of s1 (t) and s2 (t) is explained. As shown in Drawing 3 and Drawing 4, s1 (t) is generated by mapping part 306A, and s2 (t) is generated by mapping part 306B. Therefore, in the above-mentioned example, mapping parts 306A and 307B will perform the change in the case where QPSK is mapped, and the case of performing mapping of 16QAM according to Drawing 110 and Drawing 111.

1706It is although the mapping part for generating the mapping part for generating s1 (t) and s2 (t) is separately provided in Drawing 3 and Drawing 4, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and as shown in Drawing 112, it is a mapping part (11202), for example, Digital data (11201) is considered as an input, for example, according to Drawing 110 and Drawing 111, s1 (t) and s2 (t) are generated, and s1 (t) is outputted as signal 307A after mapping, and s2 (t) is outputted as signal 307B after mapping.

1707<br />Drawing 113 shows an example of different composition of the dignity attachment synchronizer (Precoding part) circumference in Drawing 108 and Drawing 112. In Drawing 113, the same numerals are attached about what operates like Drawing 3 and Drawing 107. And Drawing 114 shows as a table the modulation method in t= 11 which each time sets up, the power change value, and the Precoding procession from time t= 0 to Drawing 113. In z1 (t) and z2 (t), z1 (t) of the same time and z2 (t) will be transmitted from a different antenna using the same frequency. (Although the time-axis has indicated, when using a multicareer transmission method like an OFDM method, it is the direction of a time-axis, and various methods are not changed, but it is the direction of a frequency (subcarrier) axis, and it is also possible in Drawing 114 to change various methods.) Therefore, t= 0 may be replaced with f=f0, t= 1 may be replaced with f=f1 and ..., and it may think as shown in Drawing 114. (f shows frequency (subcarrier) and f0, f1, and ... show the frequency (subcarrier) to be used.) At this time In z1 (f) and z2 (f), z1 (f) of the same frequency (the same subcarrier) and z2 (f) will be transmitted from a different antenna using the same time. <br />As shown in Drawing 114, when a modulation method is QPSK, to the abnormal-conditions signal of QPSK, a will be multiplied by a power changing part (here, although it is called the power changing part, you may also call it an amplitude changing part and a weighting section.) (a is the real number). And when a modulation method is 16QAM, to the abnormal-conditions signal of 16QAM, b will be multiplied by a power changing part (here, although it is called the power changing part, you may also call it an amplitude changing part and a weighting section.) (b is the real number).

1708In Drawing 114, as a Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, three kinds, F [0], F [1], and F [2], are prepared, and the change cycle as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly becomes 3. (The cycle is formed by t0-t2, t3-t5, and ...)<br />And the modulation method of s1 (t) is fixed by QPSK, and the modulation method of s2 (t) is fixed by 16QAM. And the signal exchange part (11301) of Drawing 113, Signals 307A and 307B after mapping and a control signal (10700) are considered as an input, Based on a control signal (10700), to signals 307A and 307B after mapping, it changes (it may not change) and outputs the signal (11302 A:ohm 1 (t)) after exchange, and the signal (11302 B:ohm 2 (t)) after exchange.

1709The point which becomes important at this time,<br />"When performing Precoding by F [0] (modulation method of omega 1 (t)) The sets of the modulation method of omega 2 (t) are (QPSK, 16QAM) (16QAM), When it is the point that both of QPSK exist and Precoding is similarly performed by F [1] (modulation method of omega 1 (t)) The sets of the modulation method of omega 2 (t) are (QPSK, 16QAM) (16QAM), In an existence bookmark, the modulation method of (omega1(t) at the time of performing Precoding by F [2] similarly, and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)), both (QPSK, 16QAM), and (16QAM, QPSK) exist [ both of QPSK ]. "<br />It comes out.

1710When the modulation method of omega 1 (t) is QPSK, a power changing part (10701A) will multiply a to omega 1 (t), will output axomega 1 (t), when the modulation method of omega 1 (t) is 16QAM, will multiply b to omega 1 (t), and will output bxomega 1 (t).

1711When the modulation method of omega 2 (t) is QPSK, a power changing part (10701B) will multiply a to omega 2 (t), will output axomega 2 (t), when the modulation method of omega 2 (t) is 16QAM, will multiply b to omega 2 (t), and will output bxomega 2 (t).<br />It is as Embodiment F1 having explained the method in the case of setting up to differ the average power of the abnormal-conditions signal which mapped QPSK, and the average power of the abnormal-conditions signal which gave mapping of 16QAM.

1712Therefore, if the modulation method of (omega1(t) and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)) are taken into consideration, be shown in Drawing 114, When a Precoding procession and a modulation method change are taken into consideration, a cycle is 6= 3x2 (3 : setting in the number of the Precoding processions prepared as a Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, and 2:each Precoding procession), The modulation method of (omega1(t) and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)) are that both (QPSK, 16QAM), and (16QAM, QPSK) exist.

1713As mentioned above, the modulation method of (omega1(t) and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)) (QPSK), making it 16QAM, and (16QAM, QPSK) exist -- and In each Precoding procession of the Precoding procession prepared as a Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The modulation method of (omega1(t) and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)) are making both (QPSK, 16QAM), and (16QAM, QPSK) exist, Even if it sets up so that the average power of QPSK may differ from the average power of 16QAM, while being able to lessen influence which can lessen influence which it has on PAPR of the transmission power amplifier which a sending set possesses, and it has on the power consumption of a sending set, As this specification explained, the effect that the receiving quality of the data in the receiving set in the LOS environment is improvable can be acquired.

1714Although it explained in still more nearly above-mentioned explanation by the case where the modulation method of (omega1(t) and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)) are (QPSK, 16QAM), and (16QAM, QPSK), Not the thing restricted to this but the modulation method of (omega1(t) and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)) (QPSK), 64QAM, (64QAM, QPSK) (modulation method of omega 1 (t)), The sets of the modulation method of omega 2 (t) are (16QAM, 64QAM) (64QAM), 16QAM, the modulation method of (omega1(t), and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)) (128QAM), 64QAM, (64QAM, 128QAM) (modulation method of omega 1 (t)), The sets of the modulation method of omega 2 (t) may be (256QAM, 64QAM (64QAM, 256QAM)), etc., that is, two different modulation methods are prepared, and if it sets up to differ the modulation method of omega 1 (t), and the modulation method of omega 2 (t), it can carry out similarly.

1715Drawing 115 shows as a table the modulation method in t= 11 which each time sets up, the power change value, and the Precoding procession from time t= 0 to Drawing 113, and is a different table from Drawing 114. In z1 (t) and z2 (t), z1 (t) of the same time and z2 (t) will be transmitted from a different antenna using the same frequency. (Although the time-axis has indicated, when using a multicareer transmission method like an OFDM method, it is the direction of a time-axis, and various methods are not changed, but it is the direction of a frequency (subcarrier) axis, and it is also possible in Drawing 115 to change various methods.) Therefore, t= 0 may be replaced with f=f0, t= 1 may be replaced with f=f1 and ..., and it may think as shown in Drawing 115. (f shows frequency (subcarrier) and f0, f1, and ... show the frequency (subcarrier) to be used.) At this time In z1 (f) and z2 (f), z1 (f) of the same frequency (the same subcarrier) and z2 (f) will be transmitted from a different antenna using the same time. <br />As shown in Drawing 115, when a modulation method is QPSK, to the abnormal-conditions signal of QPSK, a will be multiplied by a power changing part (here, although it is called the power changing part, you may also call it an amplitude changing part and a weighting section.) (a is the real number). And when a modulation method is 16QAM, to the abnormal-conditions signal of 16QAM, b will be multiplied by a power changing part (here, although it is called the power changing part, you may also call it an amplitude changing part and a weighting section.) (b is the real number).

1716In Drawing 115, as a Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, three kinds, F [0], F [1], and F [2], are prepared, and the change cycle as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly becomes 3. (The cycle is formed by t0-t2, t3-t5, and ...)<br />And the modulation method of s1 (t) is fixed by QPSK, and the modulation method of s2 (t) is fixed by 16QAM. And the signal exchange part (11301) of Drawing 113, Signals 307A and 307B after mapping and a control signal (10700) are considered as an input, Based on a control signal (10700), to signals 307A and 307B after mapping, it changes (it may not change) and outputs the signal (11302 A:ohm 1 (t)) after exchange, and the signal (11302 B:ohm 2 (t)) after exchange.

1717The point which becomes important at this time,<br />"When performing Precoding by F [0] (modulation method of omega 1 (t)) The sets of the modulation method of omega 2 (t) are (QPSK, 16QAM) (16QAM), When it is the point that both of QPSK exist and Precoding is similarly performed by F [1] (modulation method of omega 1 (t)) The sets of the modulation method of omega 2 (t) are (QPSK, 16QAM) (16QAM), In an existence bookmark, the modulation method of (omega1(t) at the time of performing Precoding by F [2] similarly, and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)), both (QPSK, 16QAM), and (16QAM, QPSK) exist [ both of QPSK ]. "<br />It comes out.

1718When the modulation method of omega 1 (t) is QPSK, a power changing part (10701A) will multiply a to omega 1 (t), will output axomega 1 (t), when the modulation method of omega 1 (t) is 16QAM, will multiply b to omega 1 (t), and will output bxomega 1 (t).<br />When the modulation method of omega 2 (t) is QPSK, a power changing part (10701B) will multiply a to omega 2 (t), will output axomega 2 (t), when the modulation method of omega 2 (t) is 16QAM, will multiply b to omega 2 (t), and will output bxomega 2 (t).

1719It is as Embodiment F1 having explained the method in the case of setting up to differ the average power of the abnormal-conditions signal which mapped QPSK, and the average power of the abnormal-conditions signal which gave mapping of 16QAM.<br />Therefore, if the modulation method of (omega1(t) and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)) are taken into consideration, be shown in Drawing 115, When a Precoding procession and a modulation method change are taken into consideration, a cycle is 6= 3x2 (3 : setting in the number of the Precoding processions prepared as a Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, and 2:each Precoding procession), The modulation method of (omega1(t) and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)) are that both (QPSK, 16QAM), and (16QAM, QPSK) exist.

1720As mentioned above, the modulation method of (omega1(t) and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)) (QPSK), making it 16QAM, and (16QAM, QPSK) exist -- and In each Precoding procession of the Precoding procession prepared as a Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The modulation method of (omega1(t) and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)) are making both (QPSK, 16QAM), and (16QAM, QPSK) exist, Even if it sets up so that the average power of QPSK may differ from the average power of 16QAM, while being able to lessen influence which can lessen influence which it has on PAPR of the transmission power amplifier which a sending set possesses, and it has on the power consumption of a sending set, As this specification explained, the effect that the receiving quality of the data in the receiving set in the LOS environment is improvable can be acquired.

1721Although it explained in still more nearly above-mentioned explanation by the case where the modulation method of (omega1(t) and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)) are (QPSK, 16QAM), and (16QAM, QPSK), Not the thing restricted to this but the modulation method of (omega1(t) and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)) (QPSK), 64QAM, (64QAM, QPSK) (modulation method of omega 1 (t)), The sets of the modulation method of omega 2 (t) are (16QAM, 64QAM) (64QAM), 16QAM, the modulation method of (omega1(t), and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)) (128QAM), 64QAM, (64QAM, 128QAM) (modulation method of omega 1 (t)), The sets of the modulation method of omega 2 (t) may be (256QAM, 64QAM (64QAM, 256QAM)), etc., that is, two different modulation methods are prepared, and if it sets up to differ the modulation method of omega 1 (t), and the modulation method of omega 2 (t), it can carry out similarly.

1722The relation of the modulation method which each time (each frequency) sets up, a power change value, and a Precoding procession is not what was restricted to Drawing 114 and Drawing 115.<br /><br />The following points will become important if the above is summarized.<br />It is made for (modulation method A, modulation method B), and (modulation method B and modulation method A) to exist in the modulation method of (omega1(t), and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)), and it sets up so that the average power of modulation method A may differ from the average power of modulation method B.<br />And when the modulation method of omega 1 (t) is modulation method A, a power changing part (10701A) will multiply a to omega 1 (t), will output axomega 1 (t), when the modulation method of omega 1 (t) is modulation method B, multiplies b to omega 1 (t), and outputs bxomega 1 (t). Similarly, when the modulation method of omega 2 (t) is modulation method A, a power changing part (10701B) will multiply a to omega 2 (t), will output axomega 2 (t), when the modulation method of omega 2 (t) is modulation method B, multiplies b to omega 2 (t), and outputs bxomega 2 (t).

1723As the Precoding procession prepared as a Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, F [0], F [1], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] (k is [ in / get it blocked and / F [k] ] 0 or more and N-1 or less) shall exist. And in the modulation method of (omega1(t), and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)), in F [k], both (modulation method A, modulation method B), and (modulation method B and modulation method A) shall exist. this time -- "-- setting to F [k] by all k (modulation method of omega 1 (t)) The set of the modulation method of omega 2 (t) is good also as both (modulation method A, modulation method B), and (modulation method B and modulation method A) existing", and sets to "F [k], It is good also as k in which both (modulation method A, modulation method B), and (modulation method B and modulation method A) exist in the modulation method of (omega1(t) and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)) existing". <br />As mentioned above, the modulation method of (omega1(t) and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)) (modulation method A), making it modulation method B, and (modulation method B and modulation method A) exist -- and In each Precoding procession of the Precoding procession prepared as a Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The modulation method of (omega1(t) and the set of omega 2 (the modulation method of t)) are making both (modulation method A, modulation method B), and (modulation method B and modulation method A) exist, Even if it sets up so that the average power of modulation method A may differ from the average power of modulation method B, while being able to lessen influence which can lessen influence which it has on PAPR of the transmission power amplifier which a sending set possesses, and it has on the power consumption of a sending set, As this specification explained, the effect that the receiving quality of the data in the receiving set in the LOS environment is improvable can be acquired.

1724Next, operation of a receiving set is explained. About operation of the receiving set, it is as A5 grade having explained from Embodiment 1 and Embodiment A1, for example, the composition of the receiving set is shown in Drawing 7, Drawing 8, Drawing 9, Drawing 56, Drawing 73, Drawing 74, and Drawing 75.<br />Received signal r1 from the relation of Drawing 5 (t) and r2 (t) are a channel change value and h._１１(t), h_１２(t), h_２１(t), h_２２When (t) was used and a sending set transmits an abnormal-conditions signal as shown in Drawing 110, Drawing 111, Drawing 114, and Drawing 115, one relation of the following two formulas is materialized.

1725<maths num="686"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0694.tif" /></maths>

1726<maths num="687"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0695.tif" /></maths><br />

1727However, F [t] is the Precoding procession used for time t, when the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applied. A receiving set will get over using the relation of the two above-mentioned formulas (it will carry out like explanation in A5 grade from Embodiment 1 and Embodiment A1). (detection) However, distortion ingredients, such as a noise ingredient, frequency offset, and a channel estimation error, are not expressed to a formula, but it is a form containing these and a recovery (detection) will be performed at two above-mentioned ceremony. Or [ that a sending set transmits the information about these about the value of u and v which are used in order that a sending set may make a power change ], Or the information on the transmitting modes (a transmission method, a modulation method, an error correction method, etc.) to be used is transmitted, and by acquiring the information, the receiving set can know the value of u and v which the sending set used, and will get over by drawing the two above-mentioned expressions of relations by this (detection).

1728Although this embodiment explains as an example the case where a Precoding procession is changed in the direction of a time-axis, Like explanation of other embodiments, when multicareer transmission like an OFDM method is used, it can carry out similarly about the case where a Precoding procession is changed in the direction of a frequency axis. At this time, t used by this embodiment will be transposed to f (frequency (substitute) (career)). It is possible to carry out similarly about the case where a Precoding procession is changed, in the direction of a time-frequency axis. The Puri coding method in this embodiment which changes a Precoding procession regularly, Even if it applies this embodiment to the method of fixation of a Precoding procession again, not the thing limited to the Puri coding method which was explained in this specification, and which changes a Precoding procession regularly but the effect to PAPR that there is little influence can be acquired.

1729(Embodiment H2)<br />In a broadcast (or communication) system, at this embodiment, the modulation method of s1 is QPSK, When the case where the modulation method of s2 is 16QAM, and the modulation method of s1 are supporting the case where 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM, the Puri coding method which can reduce circuit scales and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is explained.

1730First, the modulation method of s1 describes the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ].<br />As the example of the Puri coding method with which the modulation method of s1 changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ], The Puri coding method which was described in Embodiment 9, Embodiment 10, Embodiment 18, and the embodiment 19 grade and which changes a Precoding procession regularly shall be applied. (However, the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly) It is not what was not necessarily restricted to Embodiment 9, Embodiment 10, Embodiment 18, and Embodiment 19. For example, The Precoding procession (F[i]) for cycle N is expressed in the Puri coding method which was described by Embodiment 8 and Embodiment 18 and which changes a Precoding procession regularly by the following formula.

1731<maths num="688"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0696.tif" /></maths><br />

1732It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. theta_１１(i) theta_２１About alpha, lambda, and delta, it is the same as that of explanation of Embodiment 8 and Embodiment 18 (theta described in addition by Embodiment 8 and Embodiment 18)._１１(i) theta_２１It is one good example to fulfill the conditions of alpha, lambda, and delta. . And a unitary matrix shall be especially used as a Precoding procession for cycle N. Therefore, the Precoding procession (F[i]) for cycle N is denoted by a following formula.

1733<maths num="689"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0697.tif" /></maths><br />

1734Below, the modulation method of s1 explains to an example the case where 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 use a formula (H4) as a Precoding procession of the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly in the case of being 16QAM. It is although this embodiment explains a formula (H4) to an example, As a concrete example, it may be the Puri coding method using the formula (#1) indicated to Embodiment C1, a formula (#2), a formula (#9), a formula (#10), a formula (#12), a formula (#13), or a formula (#17) which changes a Precoding procession regularly. It may be the Puri coding method which is defined by both the formula (279) shown in Embodiment 19, and the formula (280) and which changes a Precoding procession regularly.

1735First, Drawing 116 expresses the composition of the dignity attachment composition (Precoding) part circumference when the case where the modulation methods of s1 are [ QPSK and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM and the modulation method of s1 in this embodiment are supporting the case where 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM. In Drawing 116, about what operates like Drawing 3, Drawing 6, and Drawing 107, the same numerals are attached and explanation is omitted here.

1736Baseband signal exchange part 11601 of Drawing 116, Signal 309A (z1 (t)) after Precoding, and signal 309B (z2 (t)) after Precoding, When control signal 10700 is considered as an input and control signal 10700 shows "not replacing a signal", Signal 309A (z1 (t)) after Precoding is outputted as signal 11602A (z1' (t)), and signal 309B (z2 (t)) after Precoding is outputted as signal 11602B (z2' (t)).<br />And when control signal 10700 shows "a signal is replaced", baseband signal exchange part 11601 is,<br />At the time of time 2k (k is an integer)<br />As signal 11602A (z1' (2k)), signal 309A (z1 (2k)) after Precoding is outputted, and signal 309B (z2 (2k)) after Precoding is considered as an output as signal 11602B (z2' (2k)),<br />At the time of time 2k+1 (k is an integer)<br />Signal 309B (z2 (2k+1)) after Precoding is outputted as signal 11602A (z1' (2k+1)), and signal 309A (z1 (2k+1)) after Precoding is outputted as signal 11602B (z2' (2k+1)).<br />moreover<br />At the time of time 2k (k is an integer)<br />Signal 309B (z2 (2k)) after Precoding is outputted as signal 11602A (z1' (2k)), and signal 309A (z1 (2k)) after Precoding is considered as an output as signal 11602B (z2' (2k)),<br />At the time of time 2k+1 (k is an integer)<br />As signal 11602A (z1' (2k+1)), signal 309A (z1 (2k+1)) after Precoding is outputted, and signal 309B (z2 (2k+1)) after Precoding is outputted as signal 11602B (z2' (2k+1)). (However, exchange of an above-mentioned signal is one example, is not what was restricted to this, and when it is "Replacing a signal", it becomes important [ that a signal may be replaced ].)<br />This is a modification of Embodiment H1, and is this signal exchange, It shall not be applied to the symbol (for example, control information symbol) for transmitting the information which is performed to the symbol which is performing Precoding and does not perform Precoding, other the symbol inserted, for example, pilot symbol. It is although Above explains the case where the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applied in the direction of a time-axis, In not the thing restricted to this but a frequency axis, Or it is although this embodiment can be applied similarly and signal exchange is also explained by the time-axis method by Above, even when applying the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly in a time-frequency axis, In a frequency axis, signal exchange may be performed in a time-frequency axis.

1737Next, the modulation method of s1 explains operation of each part of Drawing 116 in case 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM.<br />Since s1 (t) and s2 (t) are the baseband signals (signal after mapping) of modulation method 16QAM, the mapping method is as in Drawing 94, and g is as a formula (272).

1738A power changing part (10701A) is baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of modulation method 16QAM, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, and if the value for set-up power change is set to v based on a control signal (10700), the signal (the signal after power change: 10702A) which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of modulation method 16QAM v times will be outputted.

1739A power changing part (10701B) is baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, and if the value for set-up power change is set to u based on a control signal (10700), the signal (the signal after power change: 10702B) which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM u times will be outputted.

1740At this time, it is v=u=omega and v.^２:u^２= It is referred to as 1:1. By this, the receiving set can obtain the receiving quality of high data.<br />Dignity attachment synchronizer 600, Signal 10702A (signal which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of modulation method 16QAM v times) after power change, and signal 10702B (signal which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM u times) after power change, Information 315 about a dignity attachment synthesizing method is considered as an input, and it is based on the information on information 315 about a dignity attachment synthesizing method, Precoding based on the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is performed, and signal 309A (z1 (t)) after Precoding and signal 309B (z2 (t)) after Precoding are outputted. If the Precoding procession in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is set to F [t] at this time, the following expressions of relations will be materialized.

1741<maths num="690"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0698.tif" /></maths><br />

1742When the modulation methods of s1 are [ 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM, When Precoding procession F [t] when the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly was applied is denoted by a formula (H4), as Embodiment 18 showed, it becomes the value for which the formula (270) was suitable as alpha. the time of alpha being denoted by a formula (270) -- z1 (t) and z2 (t) -- in an I-Q plane, all serve as a baseband signal equivalent to one signal point of 256 points, as shown in Drawing 117. Drawing 117 shows an example and may serve as formal signal point arrangement of 256 points which rotated the phase focusing on the starting point.<br />Since the modulation methods of s1 are [ 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM, Although z1 (t) which is the signal by which dignity attachment composition was carried out, and z2 (t) all become 256 signal points as shown in Drawing 117 since 4 bits a total of 8 bits are transmitted by 4 bits and 16QAM by 16QAM, At this time, since the minimum Euclid distance of a signal point is large, the receiving quality of better data will be obtained in a receiving set.<br />Baseband signal exchange parts 11601 are signal 309A (z1 (t)) after Precoding, and signal 309B (z2 (t)) after Precoding, Since control signal 10700 is considered as an input and the modulation methods of s1 are [ 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM, Control signal 10700 shows "not replacing a signal", Therefore, signal 309A (z1 (t)) after Precoding is outputted as signal 11602A (z1' (t)), and signal 309B (z2 (t)) after Precoding is outputted as signal 11602B (z2' (t)).

1743Next, the modulation method of s1 explains operation of each part of Drawing 116 in case QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM.<br />s1 (t) considers it as the baseband signal (signal after mapping) of modulation method QPSK, the mapping method is as in Drawing 95, and h is as a formula (273). Since s2 (t) is a baseband signal (signal after mapping) of modulation method 16QAM, the mapping method is as in Drawing 94, and g is as a formula (272).

1744A power changing part (10701A) is baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of modulation method QPSK, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, and if the value for set-up power change is set to v based on a control signal (10700), the signal (the signal after power change: 10702A) which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of modulation method QPSK v times will be outputted.

1745A power changing part (10701B) is baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, and if the value for set-up power change is set to u based on a control signal (10700), the signal (the signal after power change: 10702B) which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM u times will be outputted.

1746At this time, set to Embodiment H1. "the ratio of the average power of QPSK to the average power of 16QAM is v.^２:u^２= When 1:5" was used, it was shown that it is one good example. (The receiving set can obtain the receiving quality of high data by this.) The Puri coding method which changes the regular Precoding procession at this time is explained below.<br />Dignity attachment synchronizer 600, Signal 10702A (signal which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of modulation method QPSK v times) after power change, and signal 10702B (signal which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM u times) after power change, Information 315 about a dignity attachment synthesizing method is considered as an input, and it is based on the information on information 315 about a dignity attachment synthesizing method, Precoding based on the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is performed, and signal 309A (z1 (t)) after Precoding and signal 309B (z2 (t)) after Precoding are outputted. If the Precoding procession in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is set to F [t] at this time, the following expressions of relations will be materialized.

1747<maths num="691"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0699.tif" /></maths><br />

1748When Precoding procession F [t] when QPSK and the modulation method of s2 were 16QAM and the modulation method of s1 applied the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is denoted by a formula (H4), As Embodiment 18 showed, the modulation method of s1 serves as a value for which the formula (270) was suitable like the time of 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 being 16QAM as alpha. The reason is explained.

1749Drawing 118 shows the relation of the position of 16 signal points in the I-Q plane of 16QAM in an above-mentioned transmitting state, and four signal points in the I-Q plane of QPSK, O is a signal point of 16QAM and - is a signal point of QPSK. As shown in Drawing 118, 4 of 16 signal points of 16QAM and four signal points of QPSK will be in the state of overlapping. Precoding procession F [t] when the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applied in such a situation is denoted by a formula (H4), and it is as alpha, the case where it is considered as a formula (270) -- z1 (t) and z2 (t) -- it becomes a baseband signal equivalent to the signal point which carried out 64 point sampling also of any to 256 signal points of Drawing 117 in case the modulation methods of s1 are [ 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM. Drawing 117 shows an example and may serve as formal signal point arrangement of 256 points which rotated the phase focusing on the starting point.<br />Although z1 (t) whose modulation method of s1 is the signal by which dignity attachment composition was carried out since QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM, and z2 (t) become 64 signal points since 4 bits a total of 6 bits are transmitted by 2 bits of QPSK, and 16QAM, Since it becomes 64 signal points that it explained by Above, at this time, and the minimum Euclid distance of a signal point is large, the receiving quality of better data will be obtained in a receiving set.<br />Baseband signal exchange parts 11601 are signal 309A (z1 (t)) after Precoding, and signal 309B (z2 (t)) after Precoding, since control signal 10700 is considered as an input, QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM and the modulation method of s1 shows "a signal is replaced" in control signal 10700 -- baseband signal exchange part 11601 -- for example<br />At the time of time 2k (k is an integer)<br />As signal 11602A (z1' (2k)), signal 309A (z1 (2k)) after Precoding is outputted, and signal 309B (z2 (2k)) after Precoding is considered as an output as signal 11602B (z2' (2k)),<br />At the time of time 2k+1 (k is an integer)<br />Signal 309B (z2 (2k+1)) after Precoding is outputted as signal 11602A (z1' (2k+1)), and signal 309A (z1 (2k+1)) after Precoding is outputted as signal 11602B (z2' (2k+1)).<br />moreover<br />At the time of time 2k (k is an integer)<br />Signal 309B (z2 (2k)) after Precoding is outputted as signal 11602A (z1' (2k)), and signal 309A (z1 (2k)) after Precoding is considered as an output as signal 11602B (z2' (2k)),<br />At the time of time 2k+1 (k is an integer)<br />As signal 11602A (z1' (2k+1)), signal 309A (z1 (2k+1)) after Precoding is outputted, and signal 309B (z2 (2k+1)) after Precoding is outputted as signal 11602B (z2' (2k+1)).<br />In Above, the modulation method of s1 shall perform signal exchange, when QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM. By doing in this way, as Embodiment F1 indicated, since reduction of PAPR(s) is possible, the effect that the power consumption of a sending set can be stopped can be acquired. However, when not making power consumption of a sending set into a problem, the modulation method of s1 may presuppose that a signal is not replaced like the time of 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 being 16QAM.

1750The modulation method of s1 is v when QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM.^２:u^２= Since the case where it was referred to as 1:5 was a good example, this time was explained to the example, but it is v.^２&lt;u^２The Puri coding method with which the modulation method of s1 changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ] on the conditions to say, and the modulation method of s1 are 16QAM, In both case, good receiving quality may be able to be obtained, being able to use as the same the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case the modulation method of s2 is 16QAM ]. Therefore, v^２:u^２= It is not what was restricted to 1:5.<br />As mentioned above, the Puri coding method with which the modulation method of s1 changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ], and the modulation method of s1 are 16QAM, It is making into the same method the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case the modulation method of s2 is 16QAM ], Although it will be based on a formula (H5), a formula (H6), and the signal exchange method and a receiving set will get over, while the circuit scales of a sending set are reducible, As mentioned above, since it becomes sharable [ the operation part which searches for a receiving candidate signal point ] since the signal point is shared, the effect that circuit scales are reducible can be acquired in a receiving set.<br />Although this embodiment explained to the example the Puri coding method with which a formula (H4) changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is not what was restricted to this.<br />The point used as the present invention and a point is as follows.<br />- The modulation method of s1 makes the same the Puri coding method which is used in both case and for which a Precoding procession is changed regularly, when the case where QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM, and the modulation method of s1 are supporting the case where 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM. - When [ v ] the modulation methods of s1 are [ 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM^２=u^２It is v, when come out, it is and the modulation methods of s1 are [ QPSK and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM.^２&lt;u^２Conditions is filled.<br />It will say.<br />As the good example which can obtain good receiving quality in a receiving set,<br />Example 1 (the following two items are fulfilled.):<br />- When [ v ] the modulation methods of s1 are [ 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM^２=u^２It is v, when come out, it is and the modulation methods of s1 are [ QPSK and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM.^２:u^２= Fulfill the conditions of 1:5.<br />- The modulation method of s1 uses the Puri coding method for which the same regular Precoding procession is changed, also when 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM, QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are [ the modulation methods of s1 ] 16QAM and it is any.<br />Example 2 (the following two items are fulfilled.):<br />- When [ v ] the modulation methods of s1 are [ 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM^２=u^２It is v, when come out, it is and the modulation methods of s1 are [ QPSK and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM.^２&lt;u^２Conditions is filled.

1751- The case where the modulation methods of s1 are [ QPSK and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM, and the modulation method of s1 are 16QAM, When the case where the modulation method of s2 is 16QAM is being supported, the Puri coding method which is used in both case and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is the same, and is denoted by a formula (H4). It is although this embodiment explained by the case where it is expressed with a formula (H4), as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, It may be the Puri coding method using the formula (#1) indicated to Embodiment C1, a formula (#2), a formula (#9), a formula (#10), a formula (#12), a formula (#13), or a formula (#17) which changes a Precoding procession regularly. It may be the Puri coding method which is defined by both the formula (279) shown in Embodiment 19, and the formula (280) and which changes a Precoding procession regularly. (It is indicated for details in Embodiment 9, Embodiment 10, Embodiment 18, and the embodiment 19 grade.)<br />Example 3 (the following two items are fulfilled.):<br />- When [ v ] the modulation methods of s1 are [ 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM^２=u^２It is v, when come out, it is and the modulation methods of s1 are [ QPSK and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM.^２&lt;u^２Conditions is filled.<br />- The case where the modulation methods of s1 are [ QPSK and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM, and the modulation method of s1 are 16QAM, When the case where the modulation method of s2 is 16QAM is being supported, the Puri coding method which is used in both case and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is the same, it is expressed with a formula (H4), and alpha is denoted by a formula (270). It is although this embodiment explained by the case where it is expressed with a formula (H4), as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, It may be the Puri coding method using the formula (#1) indicated to Embodiment C1, a formula (#2), a formula (#9), a formula (#10), a formula (#12), a formula (#13), or a formula (#17) which changes a Precoding procession regularly. The formula (279) shown in Embodiment 19, It may be the Puri coding method which is defined by both of a formula (280) and which changes a Precoding procession regularly (indicated for details in Embodiment 9, Embodiment 10, Embodiment 18, and the embodiment 19 grade.), and, in any case, to be expressed with a formula (270) is [ alpha ] good.<br />Example 4 (the following two items are fulfilled.):<br />- When [ v ] the modulation methods of s1 are [ 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM^２=u^２It is v, when come out, it is and the modulation methods of s1 are [ QPSK and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM.^２:u^２= Fulfill the conditions of 1:5.

1752- The case where the modulation methods of s1 are [ QPSK and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM, and the modulation method of s1 are 16QAM, When the case where the modulation method of s2 is 16QAM is being supported, the Puri coding method which is used in both case and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is the same, it is expressed with a formula (H4), and alpha is denoted by a formula (270). It is although this embodiment explained by the case where it is expressed with a formula (H4), as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, It may be the Puri coding method using the formula (#1) indicated to Embodiment C1, a formula (#2), a formula (#9), a formula (#10), a formula (#12), a formula (#13), or a formula (#17) which changes a Precoding procession regularly. The formula (279) shown in Embodiment 19, It may be the Puri coding method which is defined by both of a formula (280) and which changes a Precoding procession regularly (indicated for details in Embodiment 9, Embodiment 10, Embodiment 18, and the embodiment 19 grade.), and, in any case, to be expressed with a formula (270) is [ alpha ] good.

1753This embodiment is not what restricted the modulation method to this although the time of QPSK and 16QAM was explained to the example. Therefore, if this embodiment is extended, it can think as follows. There are modulation method A and modulation method B, the number of signal points [ in / for the signal mark in the I-Q plane of modulation method A / a and the I-Q plane of modulation method B ] is set to b, and it is considered as a&lt;b. Then, the point of the present invention can be given as follows.

1754The following two items are fulfilled.<br />- The modulation method of s1 makes the same the Puri coding method which is used in both case and for which a Precoding procession is changed regularly, when the case where modulation method A and the modulation method of s2 are modulation methods B, and the modulation method of s1 are supporting the case where modulation method B and the modulation method of s2 are modulation methods B.<br />- When [ v ] the modulation methods of s1 are [ modulation method B and the modulation method of s2 ] modulation methods B^２=u^２It is v, when come out, it is and the modulation methods of s1 are [ modulation method A and the modulation method of s2 ] modulation methods B.^２&lt;u^２Conditions is filled.<br />The baseband signal exchange explained using Drawing 116 may be carried out, and it is not necessary to carry it out at this time. However, when modulation method A and the modulation method of s2 are modulation methods B and the modulation method of s1 takes the influence of PAPR into consideration, it is good to carry out the baseband signal exchange described above.<br />Or the following two items are fulfilled.<br />- The case where the modulation methods of s1 are [ modulation method A and the modulation method of s2 ] modulation methods B, and the modulation method of s1 are modulation methods B, When the case where the modulation method of s2 is modulation method B is being supported, the Puri coding method which is used in both case and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is the same, and is denoted by a formula (H4). It is although this embodiment explained by the case where it is expressed with a formula (H4), as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, It may be the Puri coding method using the formula (#1) indicated to Embodiment C1, a formula (#2), a formula (#9), a formula (#10), a formula (#12), a formula (#13), or a formula (#17) which changes a Precoding procession regularly. It may be the Puri coding method which is defined by both the formula (279) shown in Embodiment 19, and the formula (280) and which changes a Precoding procession regularly. (It is indicated for details in Embodiment 9, Embodiment 10, Embodiment 18, and the embodiment 19 grade.)<br />- When [ v ] the modulation methods of s1 are [ modulation method B and the modulation method of s2 ] modulation methods B^２=u^２It is v, when come out, it is and the modulation methods of s1 are [ modulation method A and the modulation method of s2 ] modulation methods B.^２&lt;u^２Conditions is filled.<br />The baseband signal exchange explained using Drawing 116 may be carried out, and it is not necessary to carry it out at this time. However, when modulation method A and the modulation method of s2 are modulation methods B and the modulation method of s1 takes the influence of PAPR into consideration, it is good to carry out the baseband signal exchange described above.

1755As a set of modulation method A and modulation method B, (modulation method A and modulation method B) have (QPSK, 16QAM), (16QAM, 64QAM), (64QAM, 128QAM (64QAM, 256QAM)), etc.<br />Although this embodiment explains as an example the case where a Precoding procession is changed in the direction of a time-axis, Like explanation of other embodiments, when multicareer transmission like an OFDM method is used, it can carry out similarly about the case where a Precoding procession is changed in the direction of a frequency axis. At this time, t used by this embodiment will be transposed to f (frequency (substitute) (career)). It is possible to carry out similarly about the case where a Precoding procession is changed, in the direction of a time-frequency axis. The Puri coding method in this embodiment which changes a Precoding procession regularly is not limited to the Puri coding method which was explained in this specification and which changes a Precoding procession regularly.<br />Also in any of the setting pattern of two modulation methods [ in / in a receiving set / this embodiment ], recovery and detection will be performed using the receiving method described by Embodiment F1.<br />(Embodiment H3)<br />In a broadcast (or communication) system, at this embodiment, the modulation method of s1 is QPSK, The case where the modulation method of s2 is 16QAM, and the modulation method of s1 are 16QAM, as the Puri coding method which can reduce circuit scales when the case where the modulation method of s2 is 16QAM is being supported and which changes a Precoding procession regularly -- Embodiment H2 -- things -- a method is explained.

1756First, the modulation method of s1 describes the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ].<br />As the Puri coding method with which the modulation method of s1 changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ], The Puri coding method which was described by Embodiment 8 and Embodiment 18 and which changes a Precoding procession regularly shall be applied. Therefore, the Precoding procession (F[i]) for cycle N is expressed in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly by the following formula.<br />Ru.

1757<maths num="692"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0700.tif" /></maths><br />

1758It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. theta_１１(i) theta_２１About alpha, lambda, and delta, it is the same as that of explanation of Embodiment 8 and Embodiment 18. (theta described in addition by Embodiment 8 and Embodiment 18)_１１(i) theta_２１It is one good example to fulfill the conditions of alpha, lambda, and delta. And a unitary matrix shall be especially used as a Precoding procession for cycle N. Therefore, the Precoding procession (F[i]) for cycle N is denoted by a following formula (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)).

1759<maths num="693"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0701.tif" /></maths>

1760The case where the modulation methods of s1 are [ QPSK and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM and the modulation method of s1 in this embodiment comprise Drawing 108 and Drawing 112 in the composition of the dignity attachment composition (Precoding) part circumference in the case of supporting the case where 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM. (Other embodiments are explaining operation of Drawing 108 and Drawing 112.)<br />The modulation method of s1 explains s1 (t) in case 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM, and s2 (t).<br />Since s1 (t) and s2 (t) are the baseband signals (signal after mapping) of modulation method 16QAM, the mapping method is as in Drawing 94, and g is as a formula (272).<br />Next, operation of each part of Drawing 108 and Drawing 112 is explained.

1761A power changing part (10701A) is baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of modulation method 16QAM, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, and if the value for set-up power change is set to v based on a control signal (10700), the signal (the signal after power change: 10702A) which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of modulation method 16QAM v times will be outputted.

1762A power changing part (10701B) is baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, and if the value for set-up power change is set to u based on a control signal (10700), the signal (the signal after power change: 10702B) which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM u times will be outputted.

1763At this time, it is v=u=omega and v.^２:u^２= It is referred to as 1:1. By this, the receiving set can obtain the receiving quality of high data.<br />Dignity attachment synchronizer 600, Signal 10702A (signal which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of modulation method 16QAM v times) after power change, and signal 10702B (signal which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM u times) after power change, Information 315 about a dignity attachment synthesizing method is considered as an input, and it is based on the information on information 315 about a dignity attachment synthesizing method, Precoding based on the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is performed, and signal 309A (z1 (t)) after Precoding and signal 309B (z2 (t)) after Precoding are outputted. If the Precoding procession in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is set to F [t] at this time, the following expressions of relations will be materialized.

1764<maths num="694"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0702.tif" /></maths><br />

1765When the modulation methods of s1 are [ 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM, When Precoding procession F [t] when the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly was applied is denoted by a formula (H8), as Embodiment 18 showed, it becomes the value for which the formula (270) was suitable as alpha. the time of alpha being denoted by a formula (270) -- z1 (t) and z2 (t) -- in an I-Q plane, all serve as a baseband signal equivalent to one signal point of 256 points, as shown in Drawing 117. Drawing 117 shows an example and may serve as formal signal point arrangement of 256 points which rotated the phase focusing on the starting point.<br />Since the modulation methods of s1 are [ 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM, Although z1 (t) which is the signal by which dignity attachment composition was carried out, and z2 (t) all become 256 signal points as shown in Drawing 117 since 4 bits a total of 8 bits are transmitted by 4 bits and 16QAM by 16QAM, At this time, since the minimum Euclid distance of a signal point is large, the receiving quality of better data will be obtained in a receiving set.

1766Next, the modulation method of s1 explains s1 (t) in case QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM, and s2 (t).<br />s1 (t) considers it as the baseband signal (signal after mapping) of modulation method QPSK, the mapping method is as in Drawing 95, and h is as a formula (273). Since s2 (t) is a baseband signal (signal after mapping) of modulation method 16QAM, the mapping method is as in Drawing 94, and g is as a formula (272).<br />Next, operation of each part of Drawing 108 and Drawing 112 is explained.

1767A power changing part (10701A) is baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of modulation method QPSK, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, and if the value for set-up power change is set to v based on a control signal (10700), the signal (the signal after power change: 10702A) which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of modulation method QPSK v times will be outputted.

1768A power changing part (10701B) is baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, and if the value for set-up power change is set to u based on a control signal (10700), the signal (the signal after power change: 10702B) which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM u times will be outputted.

1769At this time, set to Embodiment H1. "the ratio of the average power of QPSK to the average power of 16QAM is v.^２:u^２= When 1:5" was used, it was shown that it is one good example. (The receiving set can obtain the receiving quality of high data by this.) The Puri coding method which changes the regular Precoding procession at this time is explained below.<br />The modulation method of s1 adds to N Precoding processions of the formula (H8) which the modulation method of s1 uses as QPSK and a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ the modulation method of s2 / 16QAM ] when 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM,<br />The following N Precoding processions are added and it is considered as the Puri coding method of cycle 2N which changes a Precoding procession regularly.

1770<maths num="695"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0703.tif" /></maths>

1771It is set to i=N, N+1, N+2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1 (as for i, more than N is an integer not more than 2N-1) at this time. (theta described in addition by Embodiment 10 and Embodiment 19)_１１(i) theta_２１It is one good example to fulfill the conditions of alpha, lambda, and delta. <br />Although indicated again, "The modulation method of s1 uses it as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ], The Precoding procession of the Puri coding method of cycle 2N which changes a Precoding procession regularly is denoted by the formula (H8) and a formula (10). And the modulation method of s1 uses a formula (H8) as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ], It is a Precoding procession of the Puri coding method with which cycle N changes a Precoding procession regularly. Therefore, the modulation method of s1 uses it as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ], Also in the Puri coding method with which the modulation method of s1 changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ], a Precoding procession is used regularly [ cycle N ]. "<br />Dignity attachment synchronizer 600, Signal 10702A (signal which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of modulation method QPSK v times) after power change, and signal 10702B (signal which increased baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of modulation method 16QAM u times) after power change, Information 315 about a dignity attachment synthesizing method is considered as an input, and it is based on the information on information 315 about a dignity attachment synthesizing method, Precoding based on the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is performed, and signal 309A (z1 (t)) after Precoding and signal 309B (z2 (t)) after Precoding are outputted. If the Precoding procession in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is set to F [t] at this time, the following expressions of relations will be materialized.

1772<maths num="696"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0704.tif" /></maths><br />

1773Precoding procession [ when QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM and the modulation method of s1 applies the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly ] F [t], When expressed with a formula (H8) and a formula (10), as Embodiment 18 showed, the modulation method of s1 serves as a value for which the formula (270) was suitable like the time of 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 being 16QAM as alpha. The reason is explained.

1774Drawing 118 shows the relation of the position of 16 signal points in the I-Q plane of 16QAM in an above-mentioned transmitting state, and four signal points in the I-Q plane of QPSK, O is a signal point of 16QAM and - is a signal point of QPSK. As shown in Drawing 118, 4 of 16 signal points of 16QAM and four signal points of QPSK will be in the state of overlapping. Precoding procession F [t] when the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applied in such a situation is denoted by the formula (H8) and a formula (10), and it is as alpha, the case where it is considered as a formula (270) -- z1 (t) and z2 (t) -- it becomes a baseband signal equivalent to the signal point which carried out 64 point sampling also of any to 256 signal points of Drawing 117 in case the modulation methods of s1 are [ 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM. Drawing 117 shows an example and may serve as formal signal point arrangement of 256 points which rotated the phase focusing on the starting point.<br />Although z1 (t) whose modulation method of s1 is the signal by which dignity attachment composition was carried out since QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM, and z2 (t) become 64 signal points since 4 bits a total of 6 bits are transmitted by 2 bits of QPSK, and 16QAM, Since it becomes 64 signal points that it explained by Above, at this time, and the minimum Euclid distance of a signal point is large, the receiving quality of better data will be obtained in a receiving set.<br />The modulation method of s1 is v when QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM.^２:u^２= Since the case where it was referred to as 1:5 was a good example, this time was explained to the example, but it is v.^２&lt;u^２In QPSK and the modulation method of s2, at the conditions to say, the modulation methods of s1 are a formula (H8) and a formula (10) as a Puri coding method to which a Precoding procession is changed regularly in the case of being 16QAM, In both case, if the modulation method of s1 considers it as a formula (H8) as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ], good receiving quality may be able to be obtained. Therefore, v^２:u^２= It is not what was restricted to 1:5.<br />And it is v, when QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are [ the modulation methods of s1 ] 16QAM and the Puri coding method which was described by Above and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is used, as Embodiment F1 described.^２&lt;u^２Although it comes out, the average power (average value) of z1 (t) and the average power (average value) of z2 (t) become equal, and since reduction of PAPR(s) is possible, they can acquire the effect that the power consumption of a sending set can be stopped.<br />The Puri coding method with which the modulation method of s1 changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ], and the modulation method of s1 are 16QAM, In the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case the modulation method of s2 is 16QAM ], the circuit scales of a sending set are reducible by communalizing a part of Precoding procession to be used. And it is although a receiving set will get over based on a formula (H8) and/or a formula (H10), As mentioned above, since it becomes sharable [ the operation part which searches for a receiving candidate signal point ] since the signal point is shared, the effect that circuit scales are reducible can be acquired in a receiving set.<br />Although this embodiment explained to the example the Puri coding method with which a formula (H8) and/or a formula (H10) change a Precoding procession regularly, the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is not what was restricted to this.<br />The point used as the present invention and a point is as follows.<br />- The case where the modulation methods of s1 are [ QPSK and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM, and the modulation method of s1 are 16QAM, When the case where the modulation method of s2 is 16QAM is being supported, the modulation method of s1 is QPSK, The Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case the modulation method of s2 is 16QAM ], and the modulation method of s1 are 16QAM, In the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case the modulation method of s2 is 16QAM ], a part of Precoding procession to be used is communalized.<br />- When [ v ] the modulation methods of s1 are [ 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM^２=u^２It is v, when come out, it is and the modulation methods of s1 are [ QPSK and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM.^２&lt;u^２It will be said that Conditions is filled.<br />As the good example which can obtain good receiving quality in a receiving set,<br />Example 1 (the following two items are fulfilled.):<br />- When [ v ] the modulation methods of s1 are [ 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM^２=u^２It is v, when come out, it is and the modulation methods of s1 are [ QPSK and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM.^２:u^２= Fulfill the conditions of 1:5.<br />- The case where the modulation methods of s1 are [ QPSK and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM, and the modulation method of s1 are 16QAM, When the case where the modulation method of s2 is 16QAM is being supported, the modulation method of s1 is QPSK, The Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case the modulation method of s2 is 16QAM ], and the modulation method of s1 are 16QAM, In the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case the modulation method of s2 is 16QAM ], a part of Precoding procession to be used is communalized.<br />Example 2 (the following two items are fulfilled.):<br />- When [ v ] the modulation methods of s1 are [ 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM^２=u^２It is v, when come out, it is and the modulation methods of s1 are [ QPSK and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM.^２&lt;u^２Conditions is filled.<br />- They are a formula (H8) and a formula (10) as a Puri coding method with which the modulation method of s1 changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ], The modulation method of s1 considers it as a formula (H8) as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ].<br />Example 3 (the following two items are fulfilled.):<br />- When [ v ] the modulation methods of s1 are [ 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM^２=u^２It is v, when come out, it is and the modulation methods of s1 are [ QPSK and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM.^２:u^２= Fulfill the conditions of 1:5.<br />- They are a formula (H8) and a formula (10) as a Puri coding method with which the modulation method of s1 changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ], The modulation method of s1 considers it as a formula (H8) as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ].<br />Example 4 (the following two items are fulfilled.):<br />- When [ v ] the modulation methods of s1 are [ 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM^２=u^２It is v, when come out, it is and the modulation methods of s1 are [ QPSK and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM.^２&lt;u^２Conditions is filled.<br />- They are a formula (H8) and a formula (10) as a Puri coding method with which the modulation method of s1 changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ], The modulation method of s1 considers it as a formula (H8) as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ]. And alpha of a formula (H8) and a formula (10) is denoted by a formula (270).<br />Example 5 (the following two items are fulfilled.):<br />- When [ v ] the modulation methods of s1 are [ 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM^２=u^２It is v, when come out, it is and the modulation methods of s1 are [ QPSK and the modulation method of s2 ] 16QAM.^２:u^２= Fulfill the conditions of 1:5.<br />- They are a formula (H8) and a formula (10) as a Puri coding method with which the modulation method of s1 changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case QPSK and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ], The modulation method of s1 considers it as a formula (H8) as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case 16QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 16QAM ]. And alpha of a formula (H8) and a formula (10) is denoted by a formula (270).

1775This embodiment is not what restricted the modulation method to this although the time of QPSK and 16QAM was explained to the example. Therefore, if this embodiment is extended, it can think as follows. There are modulation method A and modulation method B, the number of signal points [ in / for the signal mark in the I-Q plane of modulation method A / a and the I-Q plane of modulation method B ] is set to b, and it is considered as a&lt;b. Then, the point of the present invention can be given as follows.

1776The following two items are fulfilled.<br />- The case where the modulation methods of s1 are [ modulation method A and the modulation method of s2 ] modulation methods B, and the modulation method of s1 are modulation methods B, When the case where the modulation method of s2 is modulation method B is being supported, the modulation method of s1 is modulation method A, The Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case the modulation method of s2 is modulation method B ], and the modulation method of s1 are modulation methods B, In the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case the modulation method of s2 is modulation method B ], a part of Precoding procession to be used is communalized.<br />- When [ v ] the modulation methods of s1 are [ modulation method B and the modulation method of s2 ] modulation methods B^２=u^２It is v, when come out, it is and the modulation methods of s1 are [ modulation method A and the modulation method of s2 ] modulation methods B.^２&lt;u^２Conditions is filled.<br />Or the following two items are fulfilled.<br />- They are a formula (H8) and a formula (10) as a Puri coding method with which the modulation method of s1 changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case modulation method A and the modulation method of s2 are modulation methods B ], The modulation method of s1 considers it as a formula (H8) as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case modulation method B and the modulation method of s2 are modulation methods B ].<br />- When [ v ] the modulation methods of s1 are [ modulation method B and the modulation method of s2 ] modulation methods B^２=u^２It is v, when come out, it is and the modulation methods of s1 are [ modulation method A and the modulation method of s2 ] modulation methods B.^２&lt;u^２Conditions is filled.

1777As an example of the set of modulation method A and modulation method B, (modulation method A and modulation method B) have (QPSK, 16QAM), (16QAM, 64QAM), (64QAM, 128QAM (64QAM, 256QAM)), etc.<br />In the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, When not sharing a Precoding procession but fulfilling the following conditions, the receiving quality of higher data may be able to be obtained in a receiving set, without giving priority to reducing the circuit scales of transceiving equipment.<br />- They are a formula (H8) and a formula (10) as a Puri coding method with which the modulation method of s1 changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case modulation method A and the modulation method of s2 are modulation methods B ], The modulation method of s1 considers it as a formula (H8) as a Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case modulation method B and the modulation method of s2 are modulation methods B ]. However, the value of alpha of the Precoding procession of the formula (H8) in the Puri coding method with which the modulation method of s1 changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case modulation method A and the modulation method of s2 are modulation methods B ], and a formula (10), The value of alpha of the Precoding procession of the formula (H8) in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case modulation method B and the modulation method of s2 are modulation methods B ] differs in the modulation method of s1.<br />- The cycle of the Puri coding method for which the modulation method of s1 changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case modulation method B and the modulation method of s2 are modulation methods B ] is N, The cycle of the Puri coding method with which the modulation method of s1 changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case modulation method A and the modulation method of s2 are modulation methods B ] is 2N.<br />- When [ v ] the modulation methods of s1 are [ modulation method B and the modulation method of s2 ] modulation methods B^２=u^２It is v, when come out, it is and the modulation methods of s1 are [ modulation method A and the modulation method of s2 ] modulation methods B.^２&lt;u^２Conditions is filled.

1778At this time, (modulation method A and modulation method B) have (QPSK, 16QAM), (16QAM, 64QAM), (64QAM, 128QAM (64QAM, 256QAM)), etc. as an example of the set of modulation method A and modulation method B.<br /><br /><br />Although this embodiment explains as an example the case where a Precoding procession is changed in the direction of a time-axis, Like explanation of other embodiments, when multicareer transmission like an OFDM method is used, it can carry out similarly about the case where a Precoding procession is changed in the direction of a frequency axis. At this time, t used by this embodiment will be transposed to f (frequency (substitute) (career)). It is possible to carry out similarly about the case where a Precoding procession is changed, in the direction of a time-frequency axis. The Puri coding method in this embodiment which changes a Precoding procession regularly is not limited to the Puri coding method which was explained in this specification and which changes a Precoding procession regularly.<br />Also in any of the setting pattern of two modulation methods [ in / in a receiving set / this embodiment ], recovery and detection will be performed using the receiving method described by Embodiment F1.<br /><br />(Embodiment I1)<br />By this embodiment, a different modulation method of the abnormal-conditions signal of s1 from Embodiment F1 and the modulation method of s2 are made into a different modulation method, and the Puri coding method with little influence on PAPR which changes a Precoding procession regularly is described.<br />When the abnormal-conditions signal which mapped QPSK, and the abnormal-conditions signal which gave mapping of 16QAM are henceforth transmitted as an example, The Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ when it carries out as / differ / the average power of the abnormal-conditions signal which mapped QPSK, and the average power of the abnormal-conditions signal which gave mapping of 16QAM ] is explained.

1779As Embodiment F1 explained, it is a modulation method of QPSK and the abnormal-conditions signal of s2 about the modulation method of the abnormal-conditions signal of s1 16QAM Or the modulation method of 16QAM and the abnormal-conditions signal of s2 is set to QPSK for the modulation method of the abnormal-conditions signal of s1, When it sets up to differ the average power of the abnormal-conditions signal which mapped QPSK, and the average power of the abnormal-conditions signal which gave mapping of 16QAM, The Puri coding method which a sending set uses and which changes a Precoding procession regularly, The subject that PAPR (Peak-to-Average*Power*Ratio) (peak power versus average power ratio) of the transmission power amplifier which a sending set possesses becomes large, and the power consumption of a sending set becomes large may occur.

1780In this specification which contains "Embodiment 8", "Embodiment 9", "Embodiment 18", "Embodiment 19", "Embodiment C1", and "Embodiment C2" in Embodiment F1 to this subject, In the formula of the Precoding procession used for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, it was said that it is good to set to alpha= 1.<br />By this embodiment, in the Precoding procession used for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, when referred to as alpha= 1, an example of a method which improves the receiving quality of the data in a receiving set is explained.

1781As the Precoding procession here used for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, In this specification containing "Embodiment 8", "Embodiment 9", "Embodiment 10", "Embodiment 18", "Embodiment 19", "Embodiment C1", and "Embodiment C2", In the formula of the Precoding procession used for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, the Precoding procession set to alpha= 1 shall be used.

1782For example, the Precoding procession used for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, It is good to set to the formula (#3) of Embodiment C1, a formula (#14), a formula (#15), a formula (#16), the formula (#20) of Embodiment C2, a formula (#24), a formula (#25), and a formula (#26). The Precoding procession used for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, for example, The formula (268) of Embodiment 18, a formula (269), the formula of Embodiment C1 (#1), It becomes common like a formula (#2), a formula (#9), a formula (#10), a formula (#12), a formula (#13), the formula (#18) of Embodiment C2, a formula (#19), a formula (#21), a formula (#22), and a formula (#23), and it may be referred to as alpha= 1 when expressed. (In addition, a cycle is not what was restricted to odd number)<br />Drawing 119 shows the composition of the dignity attachment synchronizer (Precoding part) circumference in this embodiment, and attaches the same numerals about what operates like Drawing 3 and Drawing 107. Before explaining Drawing 119 itself, signals 307A and 307B after mapping are explained.

1783In Drawing 119, the modulation method of s2 (t) whose modulation method of s1 (t) which is signal 307A after mapping is signal 307B after QSPK and mapping shall be 16QAM. Below, mapping of QPSK and the mapping method of 16QAM are explained.<br />Mapping of QPSK is explained using Drawing 95. Drawing 95 shows the example of signal point arrangement of QPSK in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane. As for signal point 9500 of Drawing 95, when the bit (input bit) which transmits is set to b0 and b1, the bit which transmits is = (b0, b1) (1, 0), for example (this value). It is the value indicated in Drawing 95. It solves, and the coordinates in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane are = (I, Q) (-1xh, 1xh), and the value of this I and Q serves as signal 307A (s1 (t)) after mapping. Also when the bits (b0, b1) which transmit are other values, based on (b0, b1), the set of (I, Q) is determined and the value of I and Q serves as signal 307A (s1 (t)) after mapping from Drawing 95.

1784Next, mapping of 16QAM is explained using Drawing 94. Drawing 94 shows the example of signal point arrangement of 16QAM in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane. As for signal point 9400 of Drawing 94, when the bit (input bit) which transmits is set to b0-b3, the bit which transmits is = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (1, 0, 0, 0), for example (this value). It is the value indicated in Drawing 94. It solves, and the coordinates in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane are = (I, Q) (-3xg, 3xg), and the value of this I and Q serves as signal 307B (s2 (t)) after mapping. Also when the bits (b0, b1, b2, b3) which transmit are other values, based on (b0, b1, b2, b3), the set of (I, Q) is determined and the value of I and Q serves as signal 307B (s2 (t)) after mapping from Drawing 94.

1785Here, in order to make equal average power of QPSK, and average power of 16QAM, h becomes a formula (273) and g becomes a formula (272).<br />In Drawing 119, it is a phase changing part (11901), Abnormal-conditions signal 307A (s1 (t): modulation method QPSK) after mapping and a control signal (10700) are considered as an input, phase change is given to abnormal-conditions signal 307A after mapping based on a control signal (10700), and the signal (11902A) after phase change is outputted. At this time, it is e about a phase change value.^jthetasWhen expressed, the signal (11902A) after phase change is s1(t) xe.^jthetasIt is expressed. (theta)_sUnits is taken as Radian. <br />A power changing part (10701A) considers the signal (11902A) after phase change, and a control signal (10700) as an input, changes power to the signal (11902A) after phase change based on a control signal (10700), and outputs the signal (10702A) after power change. When the value for power change is set to v at this time, the signal (10702A) after power change is s1(t) xe.^jthetasIt is expressed xv. (v is taken as the larger real number than 0.) 0rad&lt;=theta_s&lt;2pi Radian<br />A power changing part (10701B) is abnormal-conditions signal 307B (s2 (t): modulation method 16QAM) after mapping, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, power is changed to abnormal-conditions signal 307B after mapping based on a control signal (10700), and the signal (10702B) after power change is outputted. When the value for power change is set to u at this time, the signal (10702B) after power change is expressed as s2(t) xu. (u is taken as the larger real number than 0.)<br />Dignity attachment synchronizer 600 is based on information 315 about a weighting method, Precoding based on the Puri coding method which makes an example the method indicated on these specifications and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is given to an input signal, and signals 309A and 309B after Precoding are outputted.

1786A phase changing part [ in / in Drawing 120 / Drawing 119 ] (11901) receives signal 307A of QPSK after mapping, The relation of the transmission bit (b0, b1) and signal point in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane when a phase change is made is shown, and O (white circle) of four points is, It is a signal point before phase change, - (black dot) of four points is a signal point after phase change, and the coordinates in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane are as having been shown in Drawing 120.<br />the line segment formed in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane at the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 0), the signal point after phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 0), and the starting point as shown in Drawing 120, and the phase come out of and formed -- theta_４It is theta when it carries out._s= theta_４It Established. However, the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 0) considers it as the line segment of a standard, and it is 0rad&lt;=theta._４It becomes &lt;2pi Radian. The length of the line segment formed at the length of the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 0), the signal point after phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 0), and the starting point is equal.

1787the line segment which similarly is formed at the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 1), the signal point after phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 1), and the starting point, and the phase come out of and formed -- theta_４It is theta when it carries out._s= theta_４It Established. However, the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 1) considers it as the line segment of a standard, and it is 0rad&lt;=theta._４It becomes &lt;2pi Radian. The length of the line segment formed at the length of the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 1), the signal point after phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 1), and the starting point is equal.

1788And about Above, it is the same also at = (b0, b1) (1, 0) and the time of (1, 1).<br />Drawing 121 shows composition of the dignity attachment synchronizer (Precoding part) circumference which is different in Drawing 119, and attaches the same numerals about what operates like Drawing 3 and Drawing 107. First, signals 307A and 307B after mapping are explained.

1789The modulation method of s2 (t) whose modulation method of s1 (t) which is signal 307A after mapping is signal 307B after QSPK and mapping shall be 16QAM. Below, mapping of QPSK and the mapping method of 16QAM are explained.<br />Mapping of QPSK is explained using Drawing 95. Drawing 95 shows the example of signal point arrangement of QPSK in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane. As for signal point 9500 of Drawing 95, when the bit (input bit) which transmits is set to b0 and b1, the bit which transmits is = (b0, b1) (1, 0), for example (this value). It is the value indicated in Drawing 95. It solves, and the coordinates in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane are = (I, Q) (-1xh, 1xh), and the value of this I and Q serves as signal 307A (s1 (t)) after mapping. Also when the bits (b0, b1) which transmit are other values, based on (b0, b1), the set of (I, Q) is determined and the value of I and Q serves as signal 307A (s1 (t)) after mapping from Drawing 95.

1790Next, mapping of 16QAM is explained using Drawing 94. Drawing 94 shows the example of signal point arrangement of 16QAM in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane. As for signal point 9400 of Drawing 94, when the bit (input bit) which transmits is set to b0-b3, the bit which transmits is = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (1, 0, 0, 0), for example (this value). It is the value indicated in Drawing 94. It solves, and the coordinates in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane are = (I, Q) (-3xg, 3xg), and the value of this I and Q serves as signal 307B (s2 (t)) after mapping. Also when the bits (b0, b1, b2, b3) which transmit are other values, based on (b0, b1, b2, b3), the set of (I, Q) is determined and the value of I and Q serves as signal 307B (s2 (t)) after mapping from Drawing 94.

1791Here, in order to make equal average power of QPSK, and average power of 16QAM, h becomes a formula (273) and g becomes a formula (272).<br />A power changing part (10701A) is signal 307A (s1 (t), (modulation method QPSK)) after mapping, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, power is changed to signal 307A (s1 (t)) after mapping based on a control signal (10700), and the signal (10702A) after power change is outputted. When the value for power change is set to v at this time, the signal (10702A) after power change is expressed as s1(t) xv (v is taken as the larger real number than 0).<br />A power changing part (10701B) is abnormal-conditions signal 307B (s2 (t): modulation method 16QAM) after mapping, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, power is changed to abnormal-conditions signal 307B after mapping based on a control signal (10700), and the signal (10702B) after power change is outputted. When the value for power change is set to u at this time, the signal (10702B) after power change is expressed as s2(t) xu (u is taken as the larger real number than 0.).<br />A phase changing part (12101) is a signal (10702A) (s1(t) xv: modulation method QPSK) after power change, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, phase change is given to the signal (10702A) after power change based on a control signal (10700), and the signal (12102A) after phase change is outputted. At this time, it is e about a phase change value.^jthetasWhen expressed, the signal (12102A) after phase change is s1(t) xvxe.^jthetasIt is expressed (theta)._sUnits considers it as Radian and is 0rad&lt;=theta._sIt is considered as &lt;2pi Radian. .<br />Dignity attachment synchronizer 600 is based on information 315 about a weighting method, Precoding based on the Puri coding method which makes an example the method indicated on these specifications and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is given to an input signal, and signals 309A and 309B after Precoding are outputted.

1792A phase changing part [ in / in Drawing 122 / Drawing 121 ] (12101) receives the signal (10702A) (s1(t) xv: modulation method QPSK) after power change, The relation of the transmission bit (b0, b1) and signal point in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane when a phase change is made is shown, and O (white circle) of four points is, It is a signal point before phase change, - (black dot) of four points is a signal point after phase change, and the coordinates in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane are as having been shown in Drawing 122.

1793the line segment formed in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane at the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 0), the signal point after phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 0), and the starting point as shown in Drawing 122, and the phase come out of and formed -- theta_４It is theta when it carries out._s= theta_４It Established. However, the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 0) considers it as the line segment of a standard, and it is 0rad&lt;=theta._４It becomes &lt;2pi Radian. The length of the line segment formed at the length of the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 0), the signal point after phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 0), and the starting point is equal.

1794the line segment which similarly is formed at the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 1), the signal point after phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 1), and the starting point, and the phase come out of and formed -- theta_４It is theta when it carries out._s= theta_４It Established. However, the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 1) considers it as the line segment of a standard, and it is 0rad&lt;=theta._４It becomes &lt;2pi Radian. The length of the line segment formed at the length of the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 1), the signal point after phase change of = (b0, b1) (0, 1), and the starting point is equal.

1795And about Above, it is the same also at = (b0, b1) (1, 0) and the time of (1, 1). The coordinates in the I-Q plane of a signal point differ between Drawing 120 and Drawing 122.<br />(Next, how, i.e., theta, to give phase change of phase changing part 11901 of Drawing 119, and phase changing part 12101 of Drawing 121 at the time of 16QAM, as for the modulation method of s2 (t) whose modulation method of s1 (t) which is signal 307A after mapping is signal 307B after QSPK and mapping)_４How to set is explained.

1796At the time of operation like explanation of above-mentioned Drawing 119 and Drawing 121, as Above described, the value multiplied for the power change to the abnormal-conditions signal of QPSK is v, and the value multiplied for the power change to the abnormal-conditions signal of 16QAM is u. It is v in order to make equal the minimum Euclid distance of QPSK in an I-Q plane, and the minimum Euclid distance of 16QAM in an I-Q plane in Embodiment F1.^２:u^２= How to set to 1:5 was described. Henceforth, it is v as an example.^２:u^２= theta when referred to as 1:5_４How to set is explained.

1797As the Precoding procession used for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly at this time, In this specification containing "Embodiment 8", "Embodiment 9", "Embodiment 10", "Embodiment 18", "Embodiment 19", "Embodiment C1", and "Embodiment C2", It is theta when the Precoding procession set to alpha= 1 shall be used in the formula of the Precoding procession used for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly._４= the case where it sets to zero rad, pi/2rad, pi Radian, or (3xpi) / 2 rad -- z1 (t) and z2 (t), in an I-Q plane as shown in Drawing 123, all serve as a baseband signal equivalent to one signal point of 25 points.

1798z1 (t) and z2 (t) -- since the modulation methods are [ the signal of QPSK and the signal of 16QAM ] signals by which dignity attachment composition was carried out in each case If it thinks that 2 bits is transmitted by QPSK and 4 bits a total of 6 bits are transmitted by 16QAM, when a signal point does not overlap, 64 signal points will exist, but since a signal point overlaps, it is degenerating to 25 points in Drawing 123.<br />z1 (t) and z2 (t) consider a situation which the signal transmitted by either between two transmitting antennas does not spread in the receiving set of a terminal at this time, although transmitted from an antenna which is different as shown in Drawing 5. When it transmits in the signal point situation in an I-Q plane as shown in Drawing 123 at this time, the bit from which the absolute value of a logarithm likelihood ratio is set to 0 among a total of 6 bits which transmitted will exist (since the signal point is degenerating from 64 points to 25 points).<br />Then, in a receiving set, even if it performs error correction decoding, the receiving quality of data will be [ in / an error correction may not be performed and / a receiving set ] bad. z1 (t), z2 (t), and all are [ in / in order to solve this subject / an I-Q plane ] 64 (=2).^６A point exists and it is necessary to make it z1 (t), z2 (t), and all serve as a baseband signal equivalent to one signal point of 64 points.

1799Then, theta_４pi/6rad, or pi/3rad, Or (2xpi) / 3 rad, or (5xpi) / 6 rad, Or (7xpi) / 6 rad, or (4xpi) / 3 rad, or the case where it sets to either (5xpi) / 3 rad or (11xpi) / 6 rad -- z1 (t) and z2 (t), in an I-Q plane as shown in Drawing 124, all serve as a baseband signal equivalent to one signal point of 64 points.

1800It is theta when it becomes common._４It will set to either pi / 6+ nxpi Radian, pi / 3+ nxpi Radian, (2xpi) / 3+ nxpi Radian or (5xpi) / 6+ nxpi Radian (n is an integer).<br />When it does in this way, it is the average power (on average value and the conditions which set constant average power (average value) of z2 (t), the minimum Euclid distance in 64 signal points serves as the maximum in an I-Q plane.) of z1 (t).

1801Therefore, theta_４Since a possibility that distinction of 64 signal points can be performed will become high also in a situation which the signal transmitted by either does not spread in a receiving set if it sets to a value as shown above, a possibility that the receiving quality of high data can be obtained becomes high. By above-mentioned explanation, it is v as an example.^２:u^２= Although a possibility that the receiving quality of high data can be obtained in a situation which the signal transmitted by either does not spread in a receiving set although the time of 1:5 was explained to the example is high, in other electric wave propagation environment, it is v.^２&lt;u^２It is v although it comes out.^２:u^２= A possibility that the way at the time of not being 1:5 can obtain the receiving quality of high data is sometimes high. Therefore, it is v when a plurality of electric wave propagation environment is taken into consideration.^２&lt;u^２It Meet and is theta._４pi/6rad, pi/3rad, (2xpi) / 3 rad, (5xpi) / 6 rad, (7xpi) / 6 rad, (4xpi) / 3 rad, (5xpi) / 3 rad, or (11xpi) / 6 rad (theta)_４pi / 6+ nxpi Radian, or pi / 3+ nxpi Radian, Or it is setting to either which Especially (n is an integer) sets to either (2xpi) / 3+ nxpi Radian or (5xpi) / 6+ nxpi Radian, and a plurality of electric wave propagation environment, and a possibility that the receiving quality of high data can be obtained is high. However, theta_４The value which can obtain the receiving quality of the data which was excellent except four values (zero rad, 3pi/2rad, pi Radian, and (3 pi) / 2 rad) may exist.

1802In this specification containing "Embodiment 8", "Embodiment 9", "Embodiment 10", "Embodiment 18", "Embodiment 19", "Embodiment C1", and "Embodiment C2", In the formula of the Precoding procession used for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, it sets to alpha!=1, and is v.^２&lt;u^２It Meet and is theta._４The value which can obtain the receiving quality of the data which was excellent except four values (zero rad, 3pi/2rad, pi Radian, and (3 pi) / 2 rad) may exist.

1803<br />Although Above described the case where a phase change was made, to the abnormal-conditions signal of QPSK, a phase change may be made to the abnormal-conditions signal of 16QAM. Henceforth, the case where a phase change is made is explained to the abnormal-conditions signal of 16QAM.<br />Drawing 125 shows the composition of the dignity attachment synchronizer (Precoding part) circumference in this embodiment, and attaches the same numerals about what operates like Drawing 3 and Drawing 107.

1804In Drawing 125, the modulation method of s2 (t) whose modulation method of s1 (t) which is signal 307A after mapping is signal 307B after QSPK and mapping shall be 16QAM. About s1 at this time (t), and s2 (t), since it is the same as that of the time of explanation of Drawing 119, explanation is omitted.<br />In Drawing 125, it is a phase changing part (11901), Abnormal-conditions signal 307B (s2 (t): modulation method 16QAM) after mapping and a control signal (10700) are considered as an input, phase change is given to abnormal-conditions signal 307B after mapping based on a control signal (10700), and the signal (11902B) after phase change is outputted. At this time, it is e about a phase change value.^jthetasWhen expressed, the signal (11902B) after phase change is s2(t) xe.^jthetasIt is expressed. (theta)_sUnits is taken as Radian. <br />A power changing part (10701A) considers the abnormal-conditions signal (307A) after mapping, and a control signal (10700) as an input, changes power to the abnormal-conditions signal (307A) after mapping based on a control signal (10700), and outputs the signal (10702A) after power change. When the value for power change is set to v at this time, the signal (10702A) after power change is expressed as s1(t) xv. (v is taken as the larger real number than 0.)<br />A power changing part (10701B) considers the signal (11902B) after phase change, and a control signal (10700) as an input, changes power to the signal (11902B) after phase change based on a control signal (10700), and outputs the signal (10702B) after power change. When the value for power change is set to u at this time, the signal (10702B) after power change is s2(t) xe.^jthetasIt is expressed xu. (u is taken as the larger real number than 0.) 0rad&lt;=theta_s&lt;2pi Radian<br />Dignity attachment synchronizer 600 is based on information 315 about a weighting method, Precoding based on the Puri coding method which makes an example the method indicated on these specifications and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is given to an input signal, and signals 309A and 309B after Precoding are outputted.

1805A phase changing part [ in / in Drawing 126 / Drawing 125 ] (11901) receives signal 307B of 16QAM after mapping, The relation of the transmission bit (b0, b1, b2, b3) and signal point in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane when a phase change is made is shown, and O (white circle) of 16 points is, It is a signal point before phase change, - (black dot) of 16 points is a signal point after phase change, and the coordinates in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane are as having been shown in Drawing 126.

1806The line segment formed in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane at the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 0), the signal point after phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 0), and the starting point as shown in Drawing 126, It is theta about the phase come out of and formed._１６It is theta when it carries out._s= theta_１６It Established. However, the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 0) considers it as the line segment of a standard, and it is 0rad&lt;=theta._１６It becomes &lt;2pi Radian. The length of the line segment formed at the length of the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 0), the signal point after phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 0), and the starting point is equal.

1807the line segment which similarly is formed at the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 1), the signal point after phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 1), and the starting point, and the phase come out of and formed -- theta_１６It is theta when it carries out._s= theta_１６It Established. However, the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 1) considers it as the line segment of a standard, and it is 0rad&lt;=theta._１６It becomes &lt;2pi Radian. The length of the line segment formed at the length of the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 1), the signal point after phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 1), and the starting point is equal.

1808And about Above, it is the same also at = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 1, 0) - (1, 1, 1, 1) the time.<br />Drawing 127 shows composition of the dignity attachment synchronizer (Precoding part) circumference which is different in Drawing 125, and attaches the same numerals about what operates like Drawing 3 and Drawing 107. Since it is the same as that of Above about signals 307A and 307B after mapping, explanation is omitted.

1809A power changing part (10701A) is signal 307A (s1 (t), (modulation method QPSK)) after mapping, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, power is changed to signal 307A (s1 (t)) after mapping based on a control signal (10700), and the signal (10702A) after power change is outputted. When the value for power change is set to v at this time, the signal (10702A) after power change is expressed as s1(t) xv. (v is taken as the larger real number than 0)<br />A power changing part (10701B) is abnormal-conditions signal 307B (s2 (t): modulation method 16QAM) after mapping, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, power is changed to abnormal-conditions signal 307B after mapping based on a control signal (10700), and the signal (10702B) after power change is outputted. When the value for power change is set to u at this time, the signal (10702B) after power change is expressed as s2(t) xu. (u is taken as the larger real number than 0.)<br />A phase changing part (12101) is a signal (10702B) (s2(t) xu: modulation method 16QAM) after power change, A control signal (10700) is considered as an input, phase change is given to the signal (10702B) after power change based on a control signal (10700), and the signal (12102B) after phase change is outputted. At this time, it is e about a phase change value.^jthetasWhen expressed, the signal (12102B) after phase change is s2(t) xuxe.^jthetasIt is expressed. (theta)_sUnits considers it as Radian and is 0rad&lt;=theta._sIt is considered as &lt;2pi Radian. <br />Dignity attachment synchronizer 600 is based on information 315 about a weighting method, Precoding based on the Puri coding method which makes an example the method indicated on these specifications and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is given to an input signal, and signals 309A and 309B after Precoding are outputted.

1810A phase changing part [ in / in Drawing 128 / Drawing 125 ] (12101) receives the signal (10702B) (s2(t) xu: modulation method 16QAM) after power change, The relation of the transmission bit (b0, b1, b2, b3) and signal point in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane when a phase change is made is shown, and O (white circle) of 16 points is, It is a signal point before phase change, - (black dot) of 16 points is a signal point after phase change, and the coordinates in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane are as having been shown in Drawing 128.

1811The line segment formed in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane at the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 0), the signal point before phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 0), and the starting point as shown in Drawing 128, It is theta about the phase come out of and formed._１６It is theta when it carries out._s= theta_１６It Established. However, the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 0) considers it as the line segment of a standard, and it is 0rad&lt;=theta._１６It becomes &lt;2pi Radian. The length of the line segment formed at the length of the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 0), the signal point before phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 0), and the starting point is equal.

1812the line segment which similarly is formed at the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 1), the signal point after phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 1), and the starting point, and the phase come out of and formed -- theta_１６It is theta when it carries out._s= theta_１６It Established. However, the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 1) considers it as the line segment of a standard, and it is 0rad&lt;=theta._１６It becomes &lt;2pi Radian. The length of the line segment formed at the length of the line segment formed at the signal point and the starting point before phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 1), the signal point after phase change of = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 0, 1), and the starting point is equal.

1813And about Above, it is the same also at = (b0, b1, b2, b3) (0, 0, 1, 0) - (1, 1, 1, 1) the time. The coordinates in the I-Q plane of a signal point differ between Drawing 126 and Drawing 128.<br />(Next, how, i.e., theta, to give phase change of phase changing part 11901 of Drawing 125, and phase changing part 12101 of Drawing 127 at the time of 16QAM, as for the modulation method of s2 (t) whose modulation method of s1 (t) which is signal 307A after mapping is signal 307B after QSPK and mapping)_１６How to set is explained.

1814At the time of operation like explanation of above-mentioned Drawing 125 and Drawing 127, as Above described, the value multiplied for the power change to the abnormal-conditions signal of QPSK is v, and the value multiplied for the power change to the abnormal-conditions signal of 16QAM is u. It is v in order to make equal the minimum Euclid distance of QPSK in an I-Q plane, and the minimum Euclid distance of 16QAM in an I-Q plane in Embodiment F1.^２:u^２= How to set to 1:5 was described. Henceforth, it is v as an example.^２:u^２= theta when referred to as 1:5_１６How to set is explained.

1815As the Precoding procession used for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly at this time, In this specification containing "Embodiment 8", "Embodiment 9", "Embodiment 10", "Embodiment 18", "Embodiment 19", "Embodiment C1", and "Embodiment C2", It is theta when the Precoding procession set to alpha= 1 shall be used in the formula of the Precoding procession used for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly._１６= the case where it sets to zero rad, pi/2rad, pi Radian, or (3xpi) / 2 rad -- z1 (t) and z2 (t), in an I-Q plane as shown in Drawing 123, all serve as a baseband signal equivalent to one signal point of 25 points.

1816z1 (t) and z2 (t) -- since the modulation methods are [ the signal of QPSK and the signal of 16QAM ] signals by which dignity attachment composition was carried out in each case If it thinks that 2 bits is transmitted by QPSK and 4 bits a total of 6 bits are transmitted by 16QAM, when a signal point does not overlap, 64 signal points will exist, but since a signal point overlaps, it is degenerating to 25 points in Drawing 123.<br />z1 (t) and z2 (t) consider a situation which the signal transmitted by either between two transmitting antennas does not spread in the receiving set of a terminal at this time, although transmitted from an antenna which is different as shown in Drawing 5. When it transmits in the signal point situation in an I-Q plane as shown in Drawing 123 at this time, the bit from which the absolute value of a logarithm likelihood ratio is set to 0 among a total of 6 bits which transmitted will exist (since the signal point is degenerating from 64 points to 25 points).<br />Then, in a receiving set, even if it performs error correction decoding, the receiving quality of data will be [ in / an error correction may not be performed and / a receiving set ] bad. z1 (t), z2 (t), and all are [ in / in order to solve this subject / an I-Q plane ] 64 (=2).^６A point exists and it is necessary to make it z1 (t), z2 (t), and all serve as a baseband signal equivalent to one signal point of 64 points.

1817Then, theta_１６pi/6rad, or pi/3rad, Or (2xpi) / 3 rad, or (5xpi) / 6 rad, Or (7xpi) / 6 rad, or (4xpi) / 3 rad, or the case where it sets to either (5xpi) / 3 rad or (11xpi) / 6 rad -- z1 (t) and z2 (t), in an I-Q plane as shown in Drawing 124, all serve as a baseband signal equivalent to one signal point of 64 points.<br />It is theta when it becomes common._４It will set to either pi / 6+ nxpi Radian, pi / 3+ nxpi Radian, (2xpi) / 3+ nxpi Radian or (5xpi) / 6+ nxpi Radian (n is an integer).

1818When it does in this way, it is the average power (on average value and the conditions which set constant average power (average value) of z2 (t), the minimum Euclid distance in 64 signal points serves as the maximum in an I-Q plane.) of z1 (t).<br />Therefore, theta_１６Since a possibility that distinction of 64 signal points can be performed will become high also in a situation which the signal transmitted by either does not spread in a receiving set if it sets to a value as shown above, a possibility that the receiving quality of high data can be obtained becomes high. By above-mentioned explanation, it is v as an example.^２:u^２= Although a possibility that the receiving quality of high data can be obtained in a situation which the signal transmitted by either does not spread in a receiving set although the time of 1:5 was explained to the example is high, in other electric wave propagation environment, it is v.^２&lt;u^２It is v although it comes out.^２:u^２= A possibility that the way at the time of not being 1:5 can obtain the receiving quality of high data is sometimes high. Therefore, it is v when a plurality of electric wave propagation environment is taken into consideration.^２&lt;u^２It Meet and is theta._１６pi/6rad, pi/3rad, (2xpi) / 3 rad, (5xpi) / 6 rad, (7xpi) / 6 rad, (4xpi) / 3 rad, (5xpi) / 3 rad, or (11xpi) / 6 rad (theta)_４pi / 6+ nxpi Radian, or pi / 3+ nxpi Radian, Or it is setting to either which Especially (n is an integer) sets to either (2xpi) / 3+ nxpi Radian or (5xpi) / 6+ nxpi Radian, and a plurality of electric wave propagation environment, and a possibility that the receiving quality of high data can be obtained is high. However, theta_１６The value which can obtain the receiving quality of the data which was excellent except four values (zero rad, 3pi/2rad, pi Radian, and (3 pi) / 2 rad) may exist.

1819In this specification containing "Embodiment 8", "Embodiment 9", "Embodiment 10", "Embodiment 18", "Embodiment 19", "Embodiment C1", and "Embodiment C2", In the formula of the Precoding procession used for the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, it sets to alpha!=1, and is v.^２&lt;u^２It Meet and is theta._１６The value which can obtain the receiving quality of the data which was excellent except four values (zero rad, 3pi/2rad, pi Radian, and (3 pi) / 2 rad) may exist.

1820Next, operation of the receiving set in this embodiment is explained.<br />When the Puri coding method of Drawing 119 and Drawing 121 which was explained by Above and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applied, the following relations can be drawn from Drawing 5.<br />

1821<maths num="697"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0705.tif" /></maths>

1822When the Puri coding method of Drawing 125 and Drawing 127 which was explained by Above and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applied, the following relations can be drawn from Drawing 5.<br />

1823<maths num="698"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0706.tif" /></maths>

1824F [t] is the Precoding procession used for time t, when the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applied. A receiving set will get over using the relation between r1 (t), r2 (t), and s1 (t) and s2 (t) shown by Above (it will carry out like explanation in A5 grade from Embodiment 1 and Embodiment A1). (detection) However, distortion ingredients, such as a noise ingredient, frequency offset, and a channel estimation error, are not expressed to a formula, but it is a form containing these and a recovery (detection) will be performed at a ceremony shown by Above. Or [ that a sending set transmits the information about these about the value of u and v which are used in order that a sending set may make a power change ], Or the information on the transmitting modes (a transmission method, a modulation method, an error correction method, etc.) to be used is transmitted, and by acquiring the information, the receiving set can know the value of u and v which the sending set used, and will get over by this drawing the expression of relations shown by Above (detection).

1825Although this embodiment explained as an example the case where a Precoding procession was changed in the direction of a time-axis, Like explanation of other embodiments, when multicareer transmission like an OFDM method is used, it can carry out similarly about the case where a Precoding procession is changed in the direction of a frequency axis. At this time, t used by this embodiment will be transposed to f (frequency (substitute) (career)).

1826Therefore, when changing a Precoding procession in the direction of a time-axis, in z1 (t) and z2 (t), z1 (t) of the same time and z2 (t) will be transmitted from a different antenna using the same frequency. And when changing a Precoding procession in the direction of a frequency axis, in z1 (f) and z2 (f), z1 (f) of the same frequency (the same subcarrier) and z2 (f) will be transmitted from a different antenna using the same time.

1827It is possible to carry out in a similar manner in the direction of a time-frequency axis, as other embodiments also described the case where a Precoding procession was changed. The Puri coding method in this embodiment which changes a Precoding procession regularly is not limited to the Puri coding method which was explained in this specification and which changes a Precoding procession regularly. And the method of fixation of a Precoding procession (therefore, Precoding procession F (t)) Even if it applies making a phase change to the method which is not a function of t (or f) to a setup of the average power of s1 (t) of this embodiment, and the average power of s2 (t), and the mapped signal, The effect that the receiving quality of data improves may be able to be acquired in a receiving set.

1828In this embodiment, in Drawing 119 and Drawing 125, although the phase changing part was indicated, in Drawing 119 and Drawing 125, phase change may not be installed but the mapping part shown in Drawing 3, Drawing 4, Drawing 13, and figure 40 grade may output the signal after mapping after the operation after phase change. It is as Embodiment 1 having indicated this point.<br />When the cycle for the Precoding hopping method (Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly) in this embodiment is set to N, Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] will be prepared as N different Precoding processions, Although it will arrange in the direction of a time-axis in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] at the time of a single career transmission method, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply N different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. Even if it uses N different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use N different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.<br />(Embodiment I2)<br />Embodiment F1 and Embodiment I1 explained the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2 about QPSK and the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly at the time of 16QAM (or 16QAM, QPSK), respectively. As the case where it becomes a data-communications speed equivalent to the time of making the modulation method of s1, and the modulation method of s2 into QPSK and 16QAM, respectively in this embodiment, The Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ when the modulation method of both s1 and s2 is set to 8QAM (8*Quadrature*Amplitude*Modulation) ] is explained.

1829This embodiment shall apply the Puri coding method which was explained by Embodiment 9 and Embodiment 18 and which changes a Precoding procession regularly. According to this embodiment, in explanation of Embodiment 9 and Embodiment 18, 8QAM and the modulation method of s2 are set to 8QAM for the modulation method of s1. Signal point arrangement of 8QAM in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane is shown in Drawing 129. In Drawing 129, when setting average transmission power to z, the value of u in Drawing 129 is given with a following formula.

1830<maths num="699"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0707.tif" /></maths>

1831The coefficient used when average power is set to z at the time of QPSK is shown in the formula (273), The coefficient used when average power is set to z at the time of 16QAM is shown in the formula (272), As for the coefficient used when average power is set to z at the time of 64QAM, it is shown in the formula (481) and a sending set is as a modulation method, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, and 8QAM are selectable, and in order to be the same as that of the average power of 8QAM, and the average power of QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM, a formula (#I3) serves as an important value.

1832In Drawing 129, when b0, b1, and b2 which are 3 bits which transmits are "b1 bb02" = "000", as a signal point, 12901 is chosen and I and Q (I=1xu, Q=1xu) equivalent to signal point 12901 become in-phase component (I) of 8QAM, and a rectangular ingredient (Q). In-phase component (I) of 8QAM and a rectangular ingredient (Q) are similarly generated for "b0 b1 b2" at the time of "001" to "111."

1833Next, the modulation method of s1 explains the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case 8QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 8QAM ]. (In addition, the Puri coding method in this embodiment which changes a Precoding procession regularly is stated to Embodiment 9 and Embodiment 18.)<br />In the way cycle N (N is a natural number) changes a Precoding procession regularly as Embodiment 8 described, Precoding procession F[i] (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)) modeled after a formula (82) - a formula (85) prepared for cycle N is denoted by a following formula.

1834<maths num="700"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0708.tif" /></maths>

1835It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. (It shall be alpha&gt; 0) At this embodiment, since a unitary matrix is treated, the Precoding procession of a formula (#I4) can be denoted by a following formula.

1836<maths num="701"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0709.tif" /></maths>

1837It is set to i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, and N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1) at this time. (It shall be alpha&gt; 0) as Embodiment 18 described, in order to obtain the receiving quality of good data -- &lt;condition #53 &lt;condition #54&gt;&gt; -- good [ to fill &lt;condition #55 &lt;condition #56&gt;&gt; ] (it is not necessary to necessarily fill all).

1838Next, when the Precoding procession in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is expressed like a formula (#I5), an example of the value of suitable alpha is explained.<br />As Embodiment I1 explained, it expresses signal z1 after Precoding obtained after Precoding (t), and z2 (t) and (t:time). At this time, z1 (t) and z2 (t) are transmitted from an antenna which is a signal of the same frequency (the same (substitute) career), and is different (although the signal of a time-axis is explained in addition to an example as an example here). As Embodiment I1 explained, z1(f) z2(f) (f may be career (substitute)). At this time, z1 (f) and z2 (f) are the signals of the same time, and are transmitted from a different antenna. <br />z1 (t) and z2 (t) -- all will exist [ 64 signal points ], when a signal point will not overlap, if a modulation method thinks that 3 bits is transmitted by 8QAM and a total of 6 bits is transmitted by two lines since the signal of 8QAM and the signal of 8QAM are signals by which dignity attachment composition was carried out.

1839alpha whose Drawing 130 shows an example of the value of suitable alpha in a formula (#I5) = an example of signal z1 (t) after Precoding when it is considered as 3/2 (or 2/3), and the signal point in the said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane of z2 (t) is shown. As shown in Drawing 130, if alpha=3 / 2 (or 2/3), 64 signal points will be arranged [ in / the distance of the signal point of the adjoining signal point is equal in many cases, and / a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane ] densely by this.

1840Here, z1 (t) and z2 (t) consider a situation which the signal transmitted by either between two transmitting antennas does not spread in the receiving set of a terminal at this time, although transmitted from an antenna which is different as shown in Drawing 5. In Drawing 130, degeneration of a signal point which was explained by Embodiment I1 does not occur, and 64 signal points set at a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane, Since it is arranged densely, as a result of performing detection and error correction decoding, in a receiving set, the effect that the receiving quality of high data can be obtained can be acquired.

1841Next, 8QAM of different signal point arrangement from Drawing 129 is explained. The Puri coding method which was explained by Embodiment 9 and Embodiment 18 and which changes a Precoding procession regularly shall be applied, and 8QAM and the modulation method of s2 are set to 8QAM for the modulation method of s1. Signal point arrangement of 8QAM in a different said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane is shown in Drawing 131 in Drawing 129. In Drawing 131, when setting average transmission power to z, the value of v in Drawing 131 is given with a following formula.

1842<maths num="702"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0710.tif" /></maths>

1843The coefficient used when average power is set to z at the time of QPSK is shown in the formula (273), The coefficient used when average power is set to z at the time of 16QAM is shown in the formula (272), As for the coefficient used when average power is set to z at the time of 64QAM, it is shown in the formula (481) and a sending set is as a modulation method, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, and 8QAM are selectable, and in order to be the same as that of the average power of 8QAM, and the average power of QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM, a formula (#I6) serves as an important value.

1844<br />In Drawing 131, when b0, b1, and b2 which are 3 bits which transmits are "b1 bb02" = "000", as a signal point, 13101 is chosen and I and Q (I=2xv, Q=2xv) equivalent to signal point 13101 become in-phase component (I) of 8QAM, and a rectangular ingredient (Q). In-phase component (I) of 8QAM and a rectangular ingredient (Q) are similarly generated for "b0 b1 b2" at the time of "001" to "111."

1845Next, the modulation method of s1 explains the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case 8QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 8QAM ]. (In addition, the Puri coding method in this embodiment which changes a Precoding procession regularly is stated to Embodiment 9 and Embodiment 18.)<br />In the way cycle N (N is a natural number) changes a Precoding procession regularly as Embodiment 8 described, Precoding procession F[i] (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., N-2, N-1 (i is or more 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)) modeled after a formula (82) - a formula (85) prepared for cycle N is denoted by a formula (#I4) as mentioned above.

1846At this embodiment, since a unitary matrix is treated, the Precoding procession of a formula (#I4) can be denoted by a formula (#I5).<br />as Embodiment 18 described, in order to obtain the receiving quality of good data -- &lt;condition #53 &lt;condition #54&gt;&gt; -- good [ to fill &lt;condition #55 &lt;condition #56&gt;&gt; ] (it is not necessary to necessarily fill all).

1847Next, when the Precoding procession in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is expressed like a formula (#I5), an example of the value of suitable alpha is explained.<br />As Embodiment I1 explained, it expresses signal z1 after Precoding obtained after Precoding (t), and z2 (t) and (t:time). At this time, z1 (t) and z2 (t) are transmitted from an antenna which is a signal of the same frequency (the same (substitute) career), and is different (although the signal of a time-axis is explained in addition to an example as an example here). As Embodiment I1 explained, z1(f) z2(f) (f may be career (substitute)). At this time, z1 (f) and z2 (f) are the signals of the same time, and are transmitted from a different antenna. <br />z1 (t) and z2 (t) -- all will exist [ 64 signal points ], when a signal point will not overlap, if a modulation method thinks that 3 bits is transmitted by 8QAM and a total of 6 bits is transmitted by two lines since the signal of 8QAM and the signal of 8QAM are signals by which dignity attachment composition was carried out.

1848alpha whose Drawing 132 shows an example of the value of suitable alpha in a formula (#I5) = an example of signal z1 (t) after Precoding when it is considered as 3/2 (or 2/3), and the signal point in the said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane of z2 (t) is shown. As shown in Drawing 132, if alpha=3 / 2 (or 2/3), 64 signal points will be arranged [ in / the distance of the signal point of the adjoining signal point is equal in many cases, and / a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane ] densely by this.

1849Here, z1 (t) and z2 (t) consider a situation which the signal transmitted by either between two transmitting antennas does not spread in the receiving set of a terminal at this time, although transmitted from an antenna which is different as shown in Drawing 5. In Drawing 132, degeneration of a signal point which was explained by Embodiment I1 does not occur, and 64 signal points set at a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane, Since it is arranged densely, as a result of performing detection and error correction decoding, in a receiving set, the effect that the receiving quality of high data can be obtained can be acquired.

1850Next, operation of the receiving set in this embodiment is explained.<br />When the Puri coding method which was explained by Above and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applied, the following relations can be drawn from Drawing 5.<br />

1851<maths num="703"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0711.tif" /></maths>

1852F [t] is the Precoding procession used for time t, when the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applied. A receiving set will get over using the relation between r1 (t), r2 (t), and s1 (t) and s2 (t) shown by Above (it will carry out like explanation in A5 grade from Embodiment 1 and Embodiment A1). (detection) However, distortion ingredients, such as a noise ingredient, frequency offset, and a channel estimation error, are not expressed to a formula, but it is a form containing these and a recovery (detection) will be performed at a ceremony shown by Above.

1853<br />Therefore, a recovery (detection) will be performed based on a received signal, a channel estimation value, and a Precoding procession. what is obtained as a result of detecting electricity -- a hard value (result of "0" and "1"), and a soft value (a logarithm likelihood or a logarithm likelihood ratio) -- it may be any, and as a result of being detected electricity and obtained, error correction decoding will be performed based on a thing.

1854Although this embodiment explained as an example the case where a Precoding procession was changed in the direction of a time-axis, Like explanation of other embodiments, when multicareer transmission like an OFDM method is used, it can carry out similarly about the case where a Precoding procession is changed in the direction of a frequency axis. At this time, t used by this embodiment will be transposed to f (frequency (substitute) (career)).

1855Therefore, when changing a Precoding procession in the direction of a time-axis, in z1 (t) and z2 (t), z1 (t) of the same time and z2 (t) will be transmitted from a different antenna using the same frequency. And when changing a Precoding procession in the direction of a frequency axis, in z1 (f) and z2 (f), z1 (f) of the same frequency (the same subcarrier) and z2 (f) will be transmitted from a different antenna using the same time. It is possible to carry out in a similar manner in the direction of a time-frequency axis, as other embodiments also described the case where a Precoding procession was changed.

1856When the cycle for the Precoding hopping method (Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly) in this embodiment is set to N, Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] will be prepared as N different Precoding processions, Although it will arrange in the direction of a time-axis in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] at the time of a single career transmission method, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply N different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [N-2], and F [N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. Even if it uses N different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use N different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

1857That is, as the form 15 grade indicated as for Embodiment 1, Embodiment 5, and operation (refer to Drawing 14, Drawing 23, and Drawing 54), it is signal z1 after Precoding (t), and z2 (t). Or it may rearrange to z1 (f), z2 (f), or z1 (t, f) and z2 (t, f) (in for example, symbol unit).<br />(Embodiment I3)<br />At this embodiment, it is 8QAM (8*Quadrature) about the modulation method of both s1 and s2.<br />A Puri coding method which is different from Embodiment I2 about the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ when referred to as AmplitudeModulation ] and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is explained.

1858This embodiment shall apply the Puri coding method which was explained by Embodiment 10 and Embodiment 19 and which changes a Precoding procession regularly. According to this embodiment, in explanation of Embodiment 10 and Embodiment 19, 8QAM and the modulation method of s2 are set to 8QAM for the modulation method of s1. Signal point arrangement of 8QAM in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane is shown in Drawing 129. In Drawing 129, when setting average transmission power to z, the value of u in Drawing 129 is given by a formula (#I3). In-phase component (I) of 8QAM and a rectangular ingredient (Q) are the same as that of Embodiment I2 about a generation method.

1859The coefficient used when average power is set to z at the time of QPSK is shown in the formula (273), The coefficient used when average power is set to z at the time of 16QAM is shown in the formula (272), As for the coefficient used when average power is set to z at the time of 64QAM, it is shown in the formula (481) and a sending set is as a modulation method, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, and 8QAM are selectable, and in order to be the same as that of the average power of 8QAM, and the average power of QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM, a formula (#I3) serves as an important value.

1860<br />Next, the modulation method of s1 explains the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case 8QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 8QAM ]. (In addition, the Puri coding method in this embodiment which changes a Precoding procession regularly is stated to Embodiment 10 and Embodiment 19.)<br />As Embodiment 10 described, Precoding procession F[i] (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1 (i is or more [ 2 ] 0 an integer less than or equal to N-1)) prepared for cycle 2N is denoted by a following formula.

1861<maths num="704"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0712.tif" /></maths>

1862It shall be alpha&gt; 0 and shall be a fixed (not based on i) value.

1863<maths num="705"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0713.tif" /></maths>

1864It shall be alpha&gt; 0 and shall be a fixed (not based on i) value. (alpha of a formula (#I8) and alpha of a formula (#I9) shall be the same values) (it may be alpha&lt; 0.)<br /><br />an embodiment -- 19 -- having stated -- as -- being good -- data -- reception -- quality -- obtaining -- a sake -- In -- &lt; -- conditions -- # -- 57 -- &gt; -- &lt; -- conditions -- # -- 58 -- &gt; -- &lt; -- conditions -- # -- 59 -- &gt; -- &lt; -- conditions -- # -- 60 -- &gt; -- &lt; -- conditions -- # -- 61 -- &gt; -- &lt; -- conditions -- # -- 62 -- &gt; -- &lt; -- conditions -- # -- 63 -- &gt; -- filling -- if -- it is good (it is not necessary to necessarily fill all).

1865Next, when the Precoding procession in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is expressed like a formula (#I8) and a formula (#I9), an example of the value of suitable alpha is explained.<br />As Embodiment I1 and Embodiment I2 explained, it expresses signal z1 after Precoding obtained after Precoding (t), and z2 (t) and (t:time). At this time, z1 (t) and z2 (t) are transmitted from an antenna which is a signal of the same frequency (the same (substitute) career), and is different (although the signal of a time-axis is explained in addition to an example as an example here). As Embodiment I1 explained, z1(f) z2(f) (f may be career (substitute)). At this time, z1 (f) and z2 (f) are the signals of the same time, and are transmitted from a different antenna. <br />z1 (t) and z2 (t) -- all will exist [ 64 signal points ], when a signal point will not overlap, if a modulation method thinks that 3 bits is transmitted by 8QAM and a total of 6 bits is transmitted by two lines since the signal of 8QAM and the signal of 8QAM are signals by which dignity attachment composition was carried out.

1866alpha whose Drawing 130 shows an example of the value of suitable alpha in a formula (#I8) and a formula (#I9) = an example of signal z1 (t) after Precoding when it is considered as 3/2 (or 2/3), and the signal point in the said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane of z2 (t) is shown. As shown in Drawing 130, if alpha=3 / 2 (or 2/3), 64 signal points will be arranged [ in / the distance of the signal point of the adjoining signal point is equal in many cases, and / a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane ] densely by this.

1867Here, z1 (t) and z2 (t) consider a situation which the signal transmitted by either between two transmitting antennas does not spread in the receiving set of a terminal at this time, although transmitted from an antenna which is different as shown in Drawing 5. In Drawing 130, degeneration of a signal point which was explained by Embodiment I1 does not occur, and 64 signal points set at a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane, Since it is arranged densely, as a result of performing detection and error correction decoding, in a receiving set, the effect that the receiving quality of high data can be obtained can be acquired.

1868Next, 8QAM of different signal point arrangement from Drawing 129 is explained. The Puri coding method which was explained by Embodiment 10 and Embodiment 19 and which changes a Precoding procession regularly shall be applied, and 8QAM and the modulation method of s2 are set to 8QAM for the modulation method of s1. Signal point arrangement of 8QAM in a different said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane is shown in Drawing 131 in Drawing 129. In Drawing 131, when setting average transmission power to z, the value of v in Drawing 131 is given by a formula (#I6). In-phase component (I) of 8QAM and a rectangular ingredient (Q) are the same as that of Embodiment I2 about a generation method.

1869The coefficient used when average power is set to z at the time of QPSK is shown in the formula (273), The coefficient used when average power is set to z at the time of 16QAM is shown in the formula (272), As for the coefficient used when average power is set to z at the time of 64QAM, it is shown in the formula (481) and a sending set is as a modulation method, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, and 8QAM are selectable, and in order to be the same as that of the average power of 8QAM, and the average power of QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM, a formula (#I6) serves as an important value.

1870Next, the modulation method of s1 explains the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly [ in case 8QAM and the modulation method of s2 are 8QAM ]. (In addition, the Puri coding method in this embodiment which changes a Precoding procession regularly is stated to Embodiment 10 and Embodiment 19.)<br />As Embodiment 10 described, it sets to the method of cycle 2N (N is a natural number) which changes a Precoding procession regularly, Precoding procession F[i] (i= 0, 1, 2, ..., 2N-2, and 2N-1) prepared for cycle 2N is expressed like a formula (#I8) and a formula (#I9) as mentioned above.

1871an embodiment -- 19 -- having stated -- as -- being good -- data -- reception -- quality -- obtaining -- a sake -- In -- &lt; -- conditions -- # -- 57 -- &gt; -- &lt; -- conditions -- # -- 58 -- &gt; -- &lt; -- conditions -- # -- 59 -- &gt; -- &lt; -- conditions -- # -- 60 -- &gt; -- &lt; -- conditions -- # -- 61 -- &gt; -- &lt; -- conditions -- # -- 62 -- &gt; -- &lt; -- conditions -- # -- 63 -- &gt; -- filling -- if -- it is good (it is not necessary to necessarily fill all).<br />Next, when the Precoding procession in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is expressed like a formula (#I8) and a formula (#I9), an example of the value of suitable alpha is explained.

1872As Embodiment I1 and Embodiment I2 explained, it expresses signal z1 after Precoding obtained after Precoding (t), and z2 (t) and (t:time). At this time, z1 (t) and z2 (t) are transmitted from an antenna which is a signal of the same frequency (the same (substitute) career), and is different (although the signal of a time-axis is explained in addition to an example as an example here). As Embodiment I1 explained, z1(f) z2(f) (f may be career (substitute)). At this time, z1 (f) and z2 (f) are the signals of the same time, and are transmitted from a different antenna. <br />z1 (t) and z2 (t) -- all will exist [ 64 signal points ], when a signal point will not overlap, if a modulation method thinks that 3 bits is transmitted by 8QAM and a total of 6 bits is transmitted by two lines since the signal of 8QAM and the signal of 8QAM are signals by which dignity attachment composition was carried out.

1873alpha whose Drawing 132 shows an example of the value of suitable alpha in a formula (#I8) and a formula (#I9) = an example of signal z1 (t) after Precoding when it is considered as 3/2 (or 2/3), and the signal point in the said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane of z2 (t) is shown. As shown in Drawing 130, if alpha=3 / 2 (or 2/3), 64 signal points will be arranged [ in / the distance of the signal point of the adjoining signal point is equal in many cases, and / a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane ] densely by this.

1874Here, z1 (t) and z2 (t) consider a situation which the signal transmitted by either between two transmitting antennas does not spread in the receiving set of a terminal at this time, although transmitted from an antenna which is different as shown in Drawing 5. In Drawing 132, degeneration of a signal point which was explained by Embodiment I1 does not occur, and 64 signal points set at a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane, Since it is arranged densely, as a result of performing detection and error correction decoding, in a receiving set, the effect that the receiving quality of high data can be obtained can be acquired.

1875Next, operation of the receiving set in this embodiment is explained.<br />When the Puri coding method which was explained by Above and which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applied, the relation below a formula (#I7) can be drawn from Drawing 5. F [t] is the Precoding procession used for time t, when the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applied. A receiving set will get over using the relation between r1 (t), r2 (t), and s1 (t) and s2 (t) shown by Above (it will carry out like explanation in A5 grade from Embodiment 1 and Embodiment A1). (detection) However, distortion ingredients, such as a noise ingredient, frequency offset, and a channel estimation error, are not expressed to a formula, but it is a form containing these and a recovery (detection) will be performed at a ceremony shown by Above.

1876Therefore, a recovery (detection) will be performed based on a received signal, a channel estimation value, and a Precoding procession. what is obtained as a result of detecting electricity -- a hard value (result of "0" and "1"), and a soft value (a logarithm likelihood or a logarithm likelihood ratio) -- it may be any, and as a result of being detected electricity and obtained, error correction decoding will be performed based on a thing.

1877Although this embodiment explained as an example the case where a Precoding procession was changed in the direction of a time-axis, Like explanation of other embodiments, when multicareer transmission like an OFDM method is used, it can carry out similarly about the case where a Precoding procession is changed in the direction of a frequency axis. At this time, t used by this embodiment will be transposed to f (frequency (substitute) (career)).

1878Therefore, when changing a Precoding procession in the direction of a time-axis, in z1 (t) and z2 (t), z1 (t) of the same time and z2 (t) will be transmitted from a different antenna using the same frequency. And when changing a Precoding procession in the direction of a frequency axis, in z1 (f) and z2 (f), z1 (f) of the same frequency (the same subcarrier) and z2 (f) will be transmitted from a different antenna using the same time. It is possible to carry out in a similar manner in the direction of a time-frequency axis, as other embodiments also described the case where a Precoding procession was changed.

1879When the cycle for the Precoding hopping method (Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly) in this embodiment is set to 2N, Although F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] will be prepared as a 2N piece different Precoding procession, Although it will arrange in the direction of a time-axis in order of F [0], F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] at the time of a single career transmission method, It is not necessarily what was restricted to this, and can also apply 2N piece different Precoding procession F [0] generated by this embodiment, F [1], F [2], ..., F [2N-2], and F [2N-1] to multicareer transmission methods, such as an OFDM transmission method. About the application method in this case, Precoding weight can be changed by arranging a symbol to a frequency axis and a frequency-time-axis like Embodiment 1. Even if it uses 2N piece different Precoding processions at random, the same effect can be acquired, that is, it is not necessarily necessary to use 2N piece different Precoding processions so that it may have a regular cycle.

1880That is, as the form 15 grade indicated as for Embodiment 1, Embodiment 5, and operation (refer to Drawing 14, Drawing 23, and Drawing 54), it is signal z1 after Precoding (t), and z2 (t). Or it may rearrange to z1 (f), z2 (f), or z1 (t, f) and z2 (t, f) (in for example, symbol unit).<br /><br />Although modulation methods, such as BPSK, QPSK, 8QAM, 16QAM, and 64QAM, were explained to the example in this specification, A modulation method is not what was restricted to this, and it may use Pulse Amplitude Modulation (Pulse*Amplitude*Modulatio), 2 in an I-Q plane, four pieces, eight pieces, 16 pieces, 64 pieces, 128 pieces, The configuration method (modulation method with signal points, such as two pieces, four pieces, eight pieces, 16 pieces, 64 pieces, 128 pieces, 256 pieces, and 1024 etc. pieces) of signal points, such as 256 pieces and 1024 etc. pieces, is not what was restricted to the methods (for example, signal point arrangement of QPSK, signal point arrangement of 16QAM, etc.) shown on these specifications. therefore, the thing for which the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly after that by the function to output an in-phase component and a rectangular ingredient based on a plurality of bits turning into a function in a mapping part is enforced -- the present invention -- it becomes an effective function 1 rope.

1881(cyclic*Q*delay)<br />Application of Cyclic*Q*Delay indicated in this specification is described. The outline of Cyclic*Q*Delay (cyclic Q delay) is indicated in nonpatent literature 10. Below, the concrete example of the generation method of s1 and s2 when Cyclic*Q*Delay is used is explained.<br />　<br />Drawing 133 shows an example of arrangement of the signal point in a said phase I-rectangular cross Q plane in case a modulation method is 16QAM. When an input bit is set to b0, b1, b2, and b3, b0 b1 b2 b3 becomes either of the values of 0000 to 1111 and b0 b1 b2 b3 is denoted by 0000, for example, The signal point of 13301 of Drawing 133 is chosen, make the value of the in-phase component based on 13301 into the in-phase component of a baseband signal, and let the value of a rectangular ingredient based on 13301 be a rectangular ingredient of a baseband signal. When b0 b1 b2 b3 are other values, the in-phase component and the rectangular ingredient of a baseband signal are generated similarly.<br />From data (binary) when Drawing 134 applies cyclic Q delay to abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) (t: time) Or s1 (f), f: An example of the composition of the signal generating part for generating frequency and s2 (t) (t: time) (or s2 (f), f: frequency) is shown.

1882Mapping part 13402 considers data 13401 and control signal 13406 as an input, When 16QAM is chosen as the modulation method based on control signal 13406, for example, a modulation method, in accordance with the rule of Drawing 133, it maps and outputs in-phase component of baseband signal after mapping 13403_A, and rectangular ingredient 13403_B. A modulation method is not what was restricted to 16QAM, and, in other modulation methods, can carry out similarly.<br />At this time, the data of 1 shall be denoted by b01, b11, b21, and b31 the time of corresponding to b0, b1, b2, and b3 in Drawing 133. Mapping part 13402 outputs in-phase component I1 and rectangular ingredient Q1 of a baseband signal at the time 1 for the data at the time 1 based on b01, b11, b21, and b31. Similarly, mapping part 13402 is described time 2 and outputs in-phase component I2 of - Sband signal, rectangular ingredient Q2, and ...<br />Memory and signal exchange part 13404 are in-phase component of baseband signal 13403_A, and rectangular ingredient 13403_B, Control signal 13406 is considered as an input, memory and recombination of a signal are performed for in-phase component of baseband signal 13403_A, and rectangular ingredient 13403_B based on control signal 13406, and abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t), (13405_A), and abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t) and (13405_B) are outputted. Abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and the generation method of s2 (t) are explained in detail below.

1883As the specification indicated, the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly will be applied to abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and s2 (t). At this time, as this specification showed, signal processing, such as phase change, power change, and signal exchange, may be given in one of stages. And abnormal-conditions signal r1 (t) acquired by applying the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly to abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and s2 (t), and r2 (t) use the same frequency band for the same (common) time, and are transmitted to it.<br />By Above, although time-axis t explained, when multicareer transmission methods, such as OFDM, are used, s1 (t) and s2 (t) can be considered to be s1 (f), s2 (f), and (f:(substitute) career). Abnormal-conditions signal r1 (f) and r2 which were obtained by applying the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly to abnormal-conditions signal s1 (f) and s2 (f) at this time (f), It is transmitted to the same (common) time (naturally r1 (f) and r2 (f) are the signals of the same frequency band.). As this specification showed, s1 (t) and s2 (t) can also be considered to be s1 (t, f) and s2 (t, f).<br />Next, abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and the generation method of s2 (t) are explained. Drawing 135 shows the 1st example of s1 (t) when cyclic Q delay is used, and the generation method of s2 (t).

1884Drawing 135 (a) shows the in-phase component and the rectangular ingredient of the baseband signal which were obtained by mapping part 13402 of Drawing 134. Mapping part 13402 of Drawing 134 was explained as shown in Drawing 135 (a), a time -- in-phase component I1 of the baseband signal of 1, and rectangular ingredient Q1 -- stating time 2 -- in-phase component I2 of - Sband signal, and rectangular ingredient Q2 -- stating time 3 -- in-phase component I3 of - Sband signal, rectangular ingredient Q3, and the order of ..., Mapping part 13402 outputs the in-phase component and the rectangular ingredient of a baseband signal.<br />Drawing 135 (b) shows the example of the set of the in-phase component of a baseband signal when signal exchange is performed, and a rectangular ingredient in memory of Drawing 134, and signal exchange part 13404. In Drawing 135 (b), time 1, time 2 and 3, time 4 and 5, and 6, i.e., time 2i+, 1 and time 2i+2 (i is an integer greater than or equal to 0) are considered as a set, and the rectangular ingredient of the baseband signal is replaced in the inside of a set, at for example, time 1 and 2.<br />Therefore, since the in-phase component of the baseband signal is not replacing the signal, as for the in-phase component of the baseband signal at I1 and the time 2, in the in-phase component of the baseband signal at the time 1, the in-phase component of the baseband signal at I2 and the time 3 is I3 and ...<br />and -- the rectangular ingredient of a baseband signal is a set -- since it is secret and the signal is replaced a time -- 1 -- as for Q1 and the rectangular ingredient of the baseband signal at the time 3, as for the rectangular ingredient of a baseband signal, in Q2 and the rectangular ingredient of the baseband signal at the time 2, Q4 and the rectangular ingredient of the baseband signal at the time 4 become Q3 and ...

1885Drawing 135 (c) shows abnormal-conditions signal s1 in front of Precoding (t), and an example of the composition of s2 (t), when [ in which the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is applied ] carrying out. For example, as shown in Drawing 135 (c), the baseband signal generated as shown in Drawing 135 (b) is assigned by turns to s1 (t) and s2 (t). Therefore, as for the 1st slot of s1 (t), the 1st slot of (I1, Q2), and s2 (t) is set to (I2, Q1). As for the 2nd slot of s1 (t), the 2nd slot of (I3, Q4), and s2 (t) becomes (I4, Q3), and ...<br />Although the direction of a time-axis is explained to an example, Drawing 135 can be similarly carried out, even if it is the direction of a frequency axis (it is as Above having explained). At this time, it will be described as s1 (f) and s2 (f).<br />And Precoding in the Puri coding method which changes the Puri coding method to s1 (t) of the Nth slot regularly to s2 (t) of the Nth slot is performed, and it becomes obtaining signal r1 after Precoding of the Nth slot (t), and r2 (t). It is as having explained this point in this specification.

1886Drawing 136 shows a different constitution method in Drawing 134 for obtaining s1 (t) of the Nth slot of Drawing 135, and s2 (t). Mapping part 13602 considers data 13601 and control signal 13604 as an input, Mapping which took exchange of Drawing 135 into consideration based on the modulation method based on control signal 13604 is performed, The signal (the in-phase component and the rectangular ingredient of a baseband signal) after mapping is generated, and abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t), (13603_A), and abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t) and (13603_B) are generated and outputted from the signal after mapping. Abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and (13603_A) is the same as that of abnormal-conditions signal 13405_A of Drawing 134, and abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t) and (13603_B) is the same as that of abnormal-conditions signal 13405_B of Drawing 134, and it is as having been shown in Drawing 135 (c). Therefore, the 1st slot of abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and (13603_A) is (I1, Q2), The 1st slot of abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t) and (13603_B) is set to (I2, Q1), and, as for the 2nd slot of abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and (13603_A), the 2nd slot of (I3, Q4), abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t), and (13603_B) becomes (I4, Q3), and ...<br />For a supplement, the generation method of the 1st slot (I1, Q2) of abnormal-conditions signal s1 in mapping part 13602 of Drawing 136 (t) and (13603_A) and the 1st slot (I2, Q1) of abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t) and (13603_B) is explained.<br />In Drawing 136, although 13601 becomes data, the data at b01, b11, b21, b31, and the time 2 is set to b02, b12, b22, and b32 for the data in time 1. Mapping part 13602 of Drawing 136 generates I1, Q1, I2, and Q2 which were explained by the above from b01, b11, b21, b31, and b02, b12, b22 and b32. And mapping part 13602 of Drawing 136 can generate abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and s2 (t) from I1, Q1, I2, and Q2.

1887Drawing 137 shows a different constitution method in Drawing 134 for obtaining s1 (t) of the Nth slot of Drawing 135, and s2 (t), and Drawing 136. Mapping part 13701_A considers data 13601 and control signal 13604 as an input, Mapping which took exchange of Drawing 135 into consideration based on the modulation method based on control signal 13604 is performed, the signal (the in-phase component and the rectangular ingredient of a baseband signal) after mapping is generated, and abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and (13603_A) is generated and outputted from the signal after mapping. Mapping part 13701_B considers data 13601 and control signal 13604 as an input, Mapping which took exchange of Drawing 135 into consideration based on the modulation method based on control signal 13604 is performed, the signal (the in-phase component and the rectangular ingredient of a baseband signal) after mapping is generated, and abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t) and (13603_B) is generated and outputted from the signal after mapping.<br />Naturally data 13601 which is an input of mapping part 13701_A, and data 13601 which is the inputs of mapping part 13701_B are the same data. Abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and (13603_A) is the same as that of abnormal-conditions signal 13405_A of Drawing 134, and abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t) and (13603_B) is the same as that of abnormal-conditions signal 13405_B of Drawing 134, and it is as having been shown in Drawing 135 (c).

1888Therefore, the 1st slot of abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and (13603_A) is (I1, Q2), The 1st slot of abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t) and (13603_B) is set to (I2, Q1), and, as for the 2nd slot of abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and (13603_A), the 2nd slot of (I3, Q4), abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t), and (13603_B) becomes (I4, Q3), and ...<br />For a supplement, the generation method of the 1st slot (I1, Q2) of abnormal-conditions signal s1 in mapping part 13701_A of Drawing 137 (t) and (13603_A) is explained. In Drawing 137, although 13601 becomes data, the data at b01, b11, b21, b31, and the time 2 is set to b02, b12, b22, and b32 for the data in time 1. Mapping part 13701_A of Drawing 137 generates I1 and Q2 which were explained by the above from b01, b11, b21, b31, and b02, b12, b22 and b32. And mapping part 13701_A of Drawing 137 can generate abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) from I1 and Q2.

1889The generation method of the 1st slot (I2, Q1) of abnormal-conditions signal s2 in mapping part 13701_B of Drawing 137 (t) and (13603_B) is explained. In Drawing 137, although 13601 becomes data, the data at b01, b11, b21, b31, and the time 2 is set to b02, b12, b22, and b32 for the data in time 1. Mapping part 13701_B of Drawing 137 generates I2 and Q1 which were explained by the above from b01, b11, b21, b31, and b02, b12, b22 and b32. And mapping part 13701_B of Drawing 137 can generate I2 and Q1 to s2 (t).<br />Next, the 2nd different example is shown in Drawing 138 in Drawing 135 of s1 (t) when cyclic Q delay is used, and the generation method of s2 (t). In Drawing 138, the same sign is attached about the same thing (the in-phase component and the rectangular ingredient of a baseband signal) as Drawing 135.

1890Drawing 138 (a) shows the in-phase component and the rectangular ingredient of the baseband signal which were obtained by mapping part 13402 of Drawing 134. Since Drawing 138 (a) is the same as Drawing 135 (a), explanation is omitted.<br />Drawing 138 (b) shows the composition of the in-phase component of s1 (t) before performing signal exchange, and the baseband signal of s2 (t), and the rectangular ingredient, and is in Drawing 138 (b), a time -- 2i+1 -- a baseband signal is assigned to s1 (t) and the baseband signal of time 2i+2 is assigned to s2 (t) (i is an integer greater than or equal to 0).<br />Drawing 138 (c) shows the example of the set of the in-phase component of a baseband signal when signal exchange is performed, and a rectangular ingredient in memory of Drawing 134, and signal exchange part 13404. The feature (a different point from Drawing 135) of Drawing 138 (c) is the point that perform signal exchange within s1 (t), and it is performing signal exchange within s2 (t).

1891Therefore, to Drawing 138 (b), in s1 (t), Q1 and Q3 are replaced, Q5 and Q7 are replaced, and the same exchange as henceforth is performed in Drawing 138 (c). To Drawing 138 (b), in s2 (t), Q2 and Q4 are replaced, Q6 and Q8 are replaced, and the same exchange as henceforth is performed in Drawing 138 (c).<br />Therefore, the in-phase component of the baseband signal of the 1st slot of s1 (t) is set to I1, a rectangular ingredient is set to Q3, the in-phase component of the baseband signal of the 1st slot of s2 (t) is set to I2, and a rectangular ingredient is set to Q4. The in-phase component of the baseband signal of the 2nd slot of s1 (t) is set to I3, a rectangular ingredient is set to Q1, the in-phase component of the baseband signal of the 2nd slot of s2 (t) is set to I4, and a rectangular ingredient is set to Q2. The 3rd and 4th slot of Drawing 138 (c) will be expressed like, and subsequent slots also become the same.

1892And Precoding in the Puri coding method which changes the Puri coding method to s1 (t) of the Nth slot regularly to s2 (t) of the Nth slot is performed, and it becomes obtaining signal r1 after Precoding of the Nth slot (t), and r2 (t). It is as having explained this point in this specification.<br />Drawing 139 shows a different constitution method in Drawing 134 for obtaining s1 (t) of the Nth slot of Drawing 138, and s2 (t). Mapping part 13602 considers data 13601 and control signal 13604 as an input, Mapping which took exchange of Drawing 138 into consideration based on the modulation method based on control signal 13604 is performed, The signal (the in-phase component and the rectangular ingredient of a baseband signal) after mapping is generated, and abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t), (13603_A), and abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t) and (13603_B) are generated and outputted from the signal after mapping. Abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and (13603_A) is the same as that of abnormal-conditions signal 13405_A of Drawing 134, and abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t) and (13603_B) is the same as that of abnormal-conditions signal 13405_B of Drawing 134, and it is as having been shown in Drawing 138 (c). Therefore, the 1st slot of abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and (13603_A) is (I1, Q3), The 1st slot of abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t) and (13603_B) is set to (I2, Q4), and, as for the 2nd slot of abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and (13603_A), the 2nd slot of (I3, Q1), abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t), and (13603_B) becomes (I4, Q2), and ...

1893The 1st slot of abnormal-conditions signal [ in / for a supplement / mapping part 13602 of Drawing 139 ] s1 (t) and (13603_A) is (I1, Q3), As for the 1st slot of abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t) and (13603_B), the 1st slot of (I3, Q1), abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t), and (13603_B) explains the 2nd slot of (I2, Q4), abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t), and (13603_A) about the generation method of I4 and (Q2) ,.<br />Although 13601 becomes data in Drawing 139, a time -- 1 -- it can set -- data -- b01, b11, b21, b31, and time 2 -- the data at b03, b13, b23, b33, and the time 4 is set [ data ] to b04, b14, b24, and b34 for the data at b02, b12, b22, b32, and the time 3. mapping part 13602 of Drawing 139 -- from b01, b11, b21, b31, b02, b12, b22 and b32, b03, b13, b23 and b33, and b04, b14, b24 and b34 I1, Q1, I2, Q2, I3, Q3, I4, and Q4 which were explained above are generated. And mapping part 13602 of Drawing 139 can generate abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and s2 (t) from I1, Q1, I2, Q2, I3, Q3, I4, and Q4.

1894Drawing 140 shows a different constitution method in Drawing 134 for obtaining s1 (t) of the Nth slot of Drawing 138, and s2 (t), and Drawing 139. Distribution part 14001 considers data 13601 and control signal 13604 as an input, distributes data based on control signal 13604, and outputs 1st data 14002_A and 2nd data 14002_B. Mapping part 13701_A considers 1st data 14002_A and control signal 13604 as an input, Mapping which took exchange of Drawing 138 into consideration based on the modulation method based on control signal 13604 is performed, the signal (the in-phase component and the rectangular ingredient of a baseband signal) after mapping is generated, and abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and (13603_A) is generated and outputted from the signal after mapping. Mapping part 13701_B considers 2nd data 14002_B and control signal 13604 as an input, Mapping which took exchange of Drawing 138 into consideration based on the modulation method based on control signal 13604 is performed, the signal (the in-phase component and the rectangular ingredient of a baseband signal) after mapping is generated, and abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t) and (13603_B) is generated and outputted from the signal after mapping.<br />The 1st slot of abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and (13603_A) is (I1, Q3), The 1st slot of abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t) and (13603_B) is set to (I2, Q4), and, as for the 2nd slot of abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) and (13603_A), the 2nd slot of (I3, Q1), abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t), and (13603_B) becomes (I4, Q2), and ...<br />For a supplement, the generation method of the 1st slot (I1, Q3) of abnormal-conditions signal s1 in mapping part 13701_A of Drawing 140 (t) and (13603_A) and the 2nd slot (I3, Q1) is explained. Although 13601 becomes data in Drawing 140, a time -- 1 -- it can set -- data -- b01, b11, b21, b31, and time 2 -- the data at b03, b13, b23, b33, and the time 4 is set [ data ] to b04, b14, b24, and b34 for the data at b02, b12, b22, b32, and the time 3. Distribution part 14001 outputs [ the data in time 1 ] b03, b13, b23, and b33 for the data of 3 as 1st data 14002_A at b01, b11, b21, b31, and the time, a time -- 2 -- b04, b14, b24, and b34 are outputted [ data ] for the data of 4 as 2nd data 802_B at b02, b12, b22, b32, and the time. As for mapping part 13701_A of Drawing 140, the b01, b11, b21, b31, and b03, b13, b23 and b33 to 1st slot will generate (I1, Q3), and the 2nd slot (I3, Q1). Operation that the 3rd slot or subsequent ones is the same is performed.

1895The generation method of the 1st slot (I2, Q4) of abnormal-conditions signal s2 in mapping part 13701_B of Drawing 140 (t) and (13603_B) and the 2nd slot (I4, Q2) is explained. Mapping part 13701_B of Drawing 140 will generate the data of 4 for the data at the time 2, and the b04, b14, b24, and b34 to 1st slot will generate (I2, Q4), and the 2nd slot (I4, Q2) at b02, b12, b22, b32, and the time. Operation that the 3rd slot or subsequent ones is the same is performed.<br />As mentioned above, it is although the method of two cyclic Q delay was explained, As shown in Drawing 135, when signal exchange is performed within a slot, since the number of candidate signal points can be suppressed, in the recovery (detection) part of a receiving set, there is an advantage that an operation scale (circuit scale) can be lessened. Although the number of candidate signal points increases in the recovery (detection) part of a receiving set on the other hand when signal exchange is performed within the signal of s1 (t), and the signal of s2 (t) as shown in Drawing 138, A time diversity gain (when it changes on a frequency axis, it is a frequency diversity gain) can be obtained, and there is an advantage that the receiving quality of data may further improve.

1896Although above-mentioned explanation explains the time of making a modulation method into 16QAM to the example, it is not what was restricted to this and can carry out similarly about the case of modulation methods, such as QPSK, 8QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, and 256QAM.<br />The method of cyclic Q delay is not what was restricted to two above-mentioned methods. For example, in two above-mentioned examples, each may replace an in-phase component, although changed about the rectangular ingredient of the baseband signal. it changes at the two times -- Have (for example, the rectangular ingredient of a baseband signal is replaced at the time 1 and 2) -- although carried out, when it is plurality, signal exchange of the in-phase component of a baseband signal or ("and " -- it may be) a rectangular ingredient may be performed. As Gag carried out, as shown in Drawing 135 (a), the in-phase component and the rectangular ingredient of a baseband signal are generated, When cyclic Q delay is performed, the in-phase component of the baseband signal after the cyclic Q delay of i is Ii at the "time, The symbol which can express the rectangular ingredient of the baseband signal after the cyclic Q delay which it is at the time i as Qj (i!=j) exists," Or the in-phase component of the baseband signal after the cyclic Q delay of i is Ij at the "time, The symbol which can express the rectangular ingredient of the baseband signal after the cyclic Q delay which it is at the time i as Qi (i!=j) exists," or -- "-- a time -- i -- cyclic -- Q -- delay -- the back -- a baseband signal -- an in-phase component -- Ij -- a time -- i -- cyclic -- Q -- delay -- the back -- a baseband signal -- a rectangular cross -- an ingredient -- Qk (i!=j, i!=k, j!=k) -- it can express -- a symbol -- existing -- " -- it becomes especially.

1897And abnormal-conditions signal s1 (t) acquired by giving cyclic Q delay described by Above Or the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly will be applied to s1 (f) or s1 (t, f), and abnormal-conditions signal s2 (t) (or s2 (f) or s2 (t, f)). (However, as this specification showed, signal processing, such as phase change, power change, and signal exchange, may be given in one of stages.) At this time As the Puri coding method which is applied to the abnormal-conditions signal acquired by giving cyclic Q delay and which changes a Precoding procession regularly, It is possible to apply all the Puri coding methods which were explained in this specification and which change a Precoding procession regularly.<br />

1898&lt;Embodiment M&gt;<br />According to this embodiment, as this specification indicated, a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals acquired by using the Puri coding method with which a broadcasting station changes a Precoding procession regularly are transmitted from a plurality of antennas, for example (the same frequency band is used and it is at the same time), The example of how to draw the signal into the home at the time of receiving a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals which the broadcasting station transmitted is explained. the Precoding procession which wrote the Precoding procession in this specification in addition -- also when a Precoding procession which may be any and is different from this specification is used, it is possible to enforce how to draw the signal into the home of this embodiment. In addition, it is although this specification explains the transmission method using the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, How to draw the signal into the home explained by this embodiment can be carried out also with the case where Precoding is not given, when giving Precoding, without changing a Precoding procession regularly. <br />Receiving system 14101 shown in Drawing 141 comprises relay device 14102 and domestic televisions 14103 and 14105, and relay device 14102 turns into a device for receiving and distributing the abnormal-conditions signal which the broadcasting station transmitted to a plurality of residences especially. Here, although television is explained to an example as an example, it is not what was restricted to television, and if it is a terminal which needs information, it can carry out in a similar manner.

1899Relay device 14102 is provided with the function to receive a broadcast wave (a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals which the broadcasting station transmitted), and relay device 14102 is, To television 14103, it becomes the feature to have both the function to send the signal received through one cable 14104, and the function to send the signal received through two cables 14106a and 14106b to television 14105.<br />Under the influence of a skyscraper etc., relay device 14102 has the installation method of being built on the roof of a skyscraper, etc. for the housing high density place where electric wave reception is difficult, and, thereby, can obtain good receiving quality in each residence to the abnormal-conditions signal which the broadcasting station transmitted, for example. And since a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals which the broadcasting station transmitted using the same frequency can be acquired in each residence, the effect that the access speed of data improves can be acquired.<br />When a broadcasting station transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals of the same frequency band using a different antenna as this specification explains, a relay device receives a plurality of above-mentioned abnormal-conditions signals, and explains the detailed operation at the time of using and relaying one signal wire to a home (residence) using Drawing 142.

1900Next, the details in the case of drawing into a home by one signal are explained using Drawing 142.<br />As shown in Drawing 142, relay device 14102 receives a broadcast wave (a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals which the broadcasting station transmitted) using two antenna #1 and antenna #2.<br />Frequency conversion part 14211 changes into intermediate frequency #1 the received signal received by antenna #1 (this signal is called the signal of intermediate frequency #1).<br />Frequency conversion part 14212 changes into intermediate frequency #2 (a frequency band differs from intermediate frequency #1) the received signal received by antenna #2 (this signal is called the signal of intermediate frequency #2).<br />And adding machine 14213 adds the signal of intermediate frequency #1, and the signal of intermediate frequency #2. Therefore, the received signal received by antenna #1 and the received signal received by antenna #2 will be transmitted by performing frequency division.

1901In television 14103, the signal from one signal wire is branched to two by point and crossing 14223.<br />And frequency conversion part 14221 performs frequency conversion about intermediate frequency #1, and obtains baseband signal #1. Therefore, baseband signal #1 becomes a signal equivalent to the received signal received by antenna #1.<br />Frequency conversion part 14222 performs frequency conversion about intermediate frequency #2, and obtains baseband signal #2. Therefore, baseband signal #2 becomes a signal equivalent to the received signal received by antenna #2.<br />Intermediate frequency #1 and #2 which are used for drawing in into a home, The frequency band beforehand decided between a relay device and television may be used, and the information about intermediate frequency #1 and #2 which relay device 14102 used may be transmitted using a certain communication media to television 14103. Television 14103 may transmit intermediate frequency #1 and #2 I want you to use to relay device 14102 using a certain communication media (directions).

1902MIMO detection section 14224 performs detection for MIMO(s), such as MLD (maximum likelihood detection, Maximum*Likelihood*Detection), and obtains the logarithm likelihood ratio of each bit. ((It is as other embodiments having explained this point.) Here, although it is called the MIMO detection section, since signal processing of detection serves as the same operation as the MIMO detection section generally known, it is calling it the MIMO detection section.) However, the transmission method of drawing in into a home is transmitting the received signal which was received by antenna #1 unlike the common MIMO system, and the received signal received by antenna #2 using a frequency division system. Henceforth, a "detection section" may be considered although it is called a MIMO detection section also about such a case. <br />As this specification indicated, when the broadcasting station had transmitted a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals acquired by the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly from a plurality of antennas, other embodiments explained, MIMO detection section 14224 will detect electricity by making the change of a Precoding procession reflect, for example, will output the logarithm likelihood ratio of each bit.

1903Then, the example in the case of drawing into a home by two signals (method 1 - method 2) is explained using Drawing 143.<br />(Method 1: Intermediate frequency drawing in)<br />As method 1 is shown in Drawing 143, the received signal received by antenna #1 is changed into the signal of intermediate frequency #1, The received signal received by antenna #2 is changed into the signal of intermediate frequency #2, and it is a separate signal wire (14106a and 1506b), and draws the signal of intermediate frequency #1, and the signal of intermediate frequency #2 in domestic television 14105. In this case, intermediate frequency #1 and intermediate frequency #2 may be the same frequency, and they may be different frequency.<br />(It is drawing in at method 2:RF frequency)<br />Method 2 is drawn in a home, while both the received signal received by antenna #1 and the received signal received by antenna #2 have been the frequency (RF frequency) which the relay device received. Namely, the received signal received by antenna #1 in relay device 14102 as shown in Drawing 144 and the received signal received by antenna #2, Respectively, it passes through cable (signal wire) 14106a and cable (signal wire) 14106b via relay parts 14411 and 14412 which do not have a frequency conversion function. Therefore, the received signal received by antenna #1 and the received signal received by antenna #2 will be drawn in domestic television 14105 with RF frequency. In relay parts 14411 and 14412, waveform shaping (a band limit, noise rejection, etc.) may be performed.

1904In the signal drawing-in method into a home, it judges whether the received signal relayed by the television side uses the intermediate frequency, or RF frequency is used, and the composition which changes operation suitably is also considered by the frequency currently used.<br />Television 14501 is provided with judgment part 14531 as shown in Drawing 145. Judgment part 14531 is monitoring the received receiving signal level, and judges whether the received signal is using the intermediate frequency or RF frequency is used.<br />If judging it with using the intermediate frequency, with control signal 14532, it points to judgment part 14531 so that frequency conversion about intermediate frequency #1 may be performed to frequency conversion part 14221, and it directs to perform frequency conversion about intermediate frequency #2 to frequency conversion part 14222.<br />If judging it with using RF frequency, judgment part 14531 directs to perform frequency conversion about RF frequency to frequency conversion parts 14221 and 14222 with control signal 14532.<br />And the signal after frequency conversion will be automatically detected by MIMO detection section 14224.<br /><br />Not the automatic judgment by judgment part 14531 but the switch (for example, switch) with which television 14501 is provided, You may enable it to perform a setup ("whether are you making the signal wire into one, or are making the signal wire into two or more", whether "whether are you using RF frequency or to use the intermediate frequency", etc.) about how into a home to draw.

1905Although how to draw a signal wire in a home was explained via the relay device when a broadcasting station transmitted a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals of the same frequency band using a plurality of antennas using Drawing 145 from Drawing 141, this specification explained -- as -- a broadcasting station -- "the transmission method which transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals of the same frequency band using a plurality of antennas" -- "-- one abnormal-conditions signal -- one antenna Or the transmission method which transmits using a plurality of antennas" is changed suitably, Or frequency division is performed, for example, "the transmission method which transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals of the same frequency band using a plurality of antennas" is used in frequency band A, By frequency band B, the case where an abnormal-conditions signal is transmitted can be considered like "the transmission method which transmits one abnormal-conditions signal using one antenna (or a plurality of antennas)."<br />a broadcasting station -- "the transmission method which transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals of the same frequency band using a plurality of antennas" -- "-- one abnormal-conditions signal -- one antenna In the case where or the transmission method which transmits using a plurality of antennas" is changed suitably, when "the transmission method which transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals of the same frequency band using a plurality of antennas" was used, Above explained -- as -- the inside of a home -- "signal wire -- one Or the television can obtain the data which the broadcasting station transmitted with either of the methods of drawing a signal wire by two or more."

1906and -- "-- one abnormal-conditions signal -- one antenna When or the transmission method which transmits using a plurality of antennas" is used, the television can obtain similarly the data which the broadcasting station transmitted with either of the methods of drawing in a home by "it is [ two or more ] about 1 or a signal wire in a signal wire." When the signal wire is being made into one, in Drawing 142, it is antenna #1, antenna #2, and both, and may receive a signal. (If MIMO detection section 14224 of television 14105 performs the maximum ratio composition at this time, the receiving quality of high data can be obtained.) Only the received signal received with one antenna may be transmitted in a home again. Adding machine 14213 makes one signal passed as it is at this time, without carrying out operation of addition. (At this time, MIMO detection section 14224 of television 14105 will not perform detection for MIMO, but general detection (recovery) when one abnormal-conditions signal is transmitted and it receives will be performed.)<br />Frequency division is performed, for example, "the transmission method which transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals of the same frequency band using a plurality of antennas" is used in frequency band A, In frequency band B, when transmitting an abnormal-conditions signal like "the transmission method which transmits one abnormal-conditions signal using one antenna (or a plurality of antennas)", detection (recovery) which stated television by Above for every frequency band will be performed. That is, when television restores to the abnormal-conditions signal of frequency band A, detection (recovery) which was explained using Drawing 145 from Drawing 142 will be performed. And when restoring to the abnormal-conditions signal of frequency band B, detection (recovery) at the time of "the transmission method which transmits one abnormal-conditions signal using one antenna (or a plurality of antennas)" explained by Above will be performed. Even if frequency bands other than frequency bands A and B exist, it can carry out similarly.

1907The relay system of Drawing 141 shows the relay system at the time of a plurality of residences using a common antenna as an example. Therefore, although the received signal received with the antenna is distributed to a plurality of residences, each residence may hold the relay system equivalent to Drawing 141 individually as the method of another operation. Although Drawing 141 shows an image figure where wiring reaches each residence via the translator device at this time, when each residence holds the relay system individually, it will wire only in that residence. And the number of wiring may be one and may be plural.<br /><br />The relay device which added new composition is shown in Drawing 146 to the relay system in Drawing 141.<br />Received signal 14601_1 received with antenna 14600_1 for relay device 14610 to receive the electric wave of ground (terrestrial) digital television broadcasting, Received signal 14601_2 received with antenna 14600_2 for receiving the electric wave of ground (terrestrial) digital television broadcasting, Received signal 14601_3 received with BS (Broadcasting*Satellite) antenna (business) 14600_3 for receiving the electric wave of satellite broadcasting is considered as an input, and composite signal 14608 is outputted. Relay device 14610 is constituted including filter 14603, frequency conversion part 14604 for two or more abnormal-conditions signal existence, and synchronizer 14607.

1908The abnormal-conditions signal which the broadcasting station corresponding to the received signal (14601_1, 14601_2) received with antenna 14601_1 and antenna 14601_2 transmits can be typically shown like Drawing 147 (a). In Drawing 147 (a) and (b), a horizontal axis is frequency and it means that the transmitted signal exists in the frequency band of the portion of a square.<br />With the frequency band in which channel 1 (CH_1) exists in Drawing 147 (a), Since other transmitted signals do not exist in the same frequency band, the broadcasting station which transmits a terrestrial electric wave means transmitting only the abnormal-conditions signal of channel (one) 1 (CH_1) from an antenna. Similarly, by the frequency band in which channel L (CH_L) exists, since other transmitted signals have not transmitted to the same frequency band, the broadcasting station which transmits a terrestrial electric wave means transmitting only the abnormal-conditions signal of channel (one) (CH_L) L from an antenna.<br />On the other hand, in Drawing 147 (a), two abnormal-conditions signals exist in the same frequency band by the frequency band in which channel K (CH_K) exists. (Therefore, in Drawing 147 (a), two squares exist in the same frequency band.) It is described as stream (Stream)1 and stream (Stream)2. The abnormal-conditions signal of stream 1 and the abnormal-conditions signal of stream 2 are transmitted to the same time from an antenna different, respectively at this time. Stream 1 and stream 2 may be the abnormal-conditions signals acquired by the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, as stated above, It may be the abnormal-conditions signal acquired by performing Precoding, without changing a Precoding procession regularly, and may be the abnormal-conditions signal acquired without performing Precoding. Similarly, in the frequency band in which channel M (CH_M) exists, two abnormal-conditions signals exist in the same frequency band. (Therefore, in Drawing 147 (a), two squares exist in the same frequency band.) It is described as stream (Stream)1 and stream (Stream)2. At this time, the abnormal-conditions signal of stream 1 and the abnormal-conditions signal of stream 2 are transmitted to the same time from an antenna different, respectively. Stream 1 and stream 2 may be the abnormal-conditions signals acquired by the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, as stated above, It may be the abnormal-conditions signal acquired by performing Precoding, without changing a Precoding procession regularly, and may be the abnormal-conditions signal acquired without performing Precoding.

1909The abnormal-conditions signal which the broadcasting station (satellite) corresponding to received signal 14601_3 received with BS antenna 14600_3 transmits can be typically shown like Drawing 147 (b).<br />With the frequency band in which BS channel 1 (CH1) exists in Drawing 147 (b), Since other transmitted signals do not exist in the same frequency band, the broadcasting station which transmits the electric wave of satellite broadcasting means transmitting only the abnormal-conditions signal of channel (one) 1 (CH1) from an antenna. Similarly, by the frequency band in which BS channel 2 (CH2) exists, since other transmitted signals do not exist in the same frequency band, the broadcasting station which transmits the electric wave of satellite broadcasting means transmitting only the abnormal-conditions signal of channel (one) (CH2) L from an antenna.<br />Drawing 147 (a) and Drawing 147 (b) show frequency assignment of the same frequency band.<br />In Drawing 146, the abnormal-conditions signal and BS which a terrestrial (terrestrial) broadcasting station transmits transmit.<br />It is not what restricted the abnormal-conditions signal to this although indicated as an example, the abnormal-conditions signal which CS (communicationssatellite) transmits may exist, and the abnormal-conditions signal which other different broadcasting systems transmit may exist. At this time, the receiving part for receiving the abnormal-conditions signal which each broadcasting system transmits will exist in Drawing 146.<br />Filter 14603 which received received signal 14601_1 omits "the signal of the frequency band in which a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals exist" included in received signal 14601_1, and outputs signal 14605 after filtering.<br />For example, supposing frequency assignment of received signal 14601_1 is Drawing 147 (a), filter 14603 will output signal 14605 with which the signal of the frequency band of channel K and channel M was removed, as shown in Drawing 148 (b).

1910Frequency conversion part 14604 for abnormal-conditions signal existence has multiple functions of the device explained as a relay device (14102nd grade) by Above in this embodiment. The signal of a frequency band specifically transmitted to the same frequency band at the broadcasting station at the same time using an antenna which is different in a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals is detected, and frequency conversion is performed to the detected signal. That is, frequency conversion part 14604 for two or more abnormal-conditions signal existence changes so that "the signal of a frequency band with which a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals exist" may exist in two different frequency bands.<br /><br />For example, frequency conversion part 14604 for two or more abnormal-conditions signal existence is provided with the composition shown in Drawing 142, and frequency conversion part 14604 for two or more abnormal-conditions signal existence is, It has composition changed into a frequency band which changes "the signal of a frequency band with which a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals exist" into two intermediate frequencies among the received signals received with two antennas, and is different from the original frequency band as a result.<br /><br />Frequency conversion part 14604 for two or more abnormal-conditions signal existence of Drawing 146, Received signal 14601_1 is considered as the input, and be shown in Drawing 149, The signal of frequency band K(CH_K) 14901 in which a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals (a plurality of streams) exist, i.e., a channel, and channel M(CH_M) 14902 is extracted, and each abnormal-conditions signal of these two frequency bands is changed into a different frequency band. Therefore, the signal of channel K(CH_K) 14901 is changed into the signal of frequency band 14903 as shown in Drawing 149 (b), and the signal of channel M(CH_M) 14902 is changed into the signal of frequency band 14904 as shown in Drawing 149 (b).<br />In addition, frequency conversion part 14604 for two or more abnormal-conditions signal existence of Drawing 146, Received signal 14601_2 is considered as the input, and be shown in Drawing 149, The signal of frequency band K(CH_K) 14901 in which a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals (a plurality of streams) exist, i.e., a channel, and channel M(CH_M) 14902 is extracted, and each abnormal-conditions signal of these two frequency bands is changed into a different frequency band. Therefore, the signal of channel K(CH_K) 14901 is changed into the signal of frequency band 14905 as shown in Drawing 149 (b), and it is channel M (CH_M).<br />The signal of 14902 is changed into the signal of frequency band 14906 as shown in Drawing 149 (b).

1911And frequency conversion part 14604 for two or more abnormal-conditions signal existence of Drawing 146 outputs the signal containing the ingredient of four frequency bands shown in (b) of Drawing 149.<br />In Drawing 149, the horizontal axis of Drawing 149 (a) and Drawing 149 (b) is frequency, and Drawing 149 (a) and Drawing 149 (b) show frequency assignment of the same frequency band. The frequency band in which the signal which Drawing 149 (a) shows exists, and the frequency band in which the signal of Drawing 149 (b) exists shall not overlap.<br />The signal (14605) with which filter 14603 outputted synchronizer 14607 of Drawing 146, The signal (14606) which frequency conversion part 14604 for abnormal-conditions signal existence outputted, and the signal (14601_3) inputted from BS antenna 14600_3 are considered as an input, and composition on a frequency axis is performed. Therefore, synchronizer 14607 of Drawing 146 acquires and outputs a signal (14608) with the frequency component of Drawing 151. Television 14609 will consider this signal (14608) as an input. Therefore, it can view and listen to television in the receiving quality of high data by drawing one signal wire.<br />

1912Next, frequency conversion part 14604 for two or more abnormal-conditions signal existence is provided with the composition shown in Drawing 142 as another example, and frequency conversion part 14604 for two or more abnormal-conditions signal existence is, How to make "the signal of a frequency band with which a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals exist" a frequency band as it is and one intermediate frequency zone among the received signals received with two antennas is explained.<br />Frequency conversion part 14604 for two or more abnormal-conditions signal existence of Drawing 146, Received signal 14601_1 is considered as the input, and be shown in Drawing 150, The signal of frequency band K(CH_K) 15001 in which a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals (a plurality of streams) exist, i.e., a channel, and channel M(CH_M) 15002 is extracted, and each abnormal-conditions signal of these two frequency bands is changed into a different frequency band. Therefore, it is changed into the signal of frequency band 15003, and the signal of channel K(CH_K) 15001 is channel M(CH_M) 1500, as shown in Drawing 150 (b).<br />The signal of 2 is changed into the signal of frequency band 15004 as shown in Drawing 150 (b).<br />In addition, frequency conversion part 14604 for two or more abnormal-conditions signal existence of Drawing 146, Received signal 14601_2 is considered as the input, and be shown in Drawing 150, The signal of frequency band K(CH_K) 15001 in which a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals (a plurality of streams) exist, i.e., a channel, and channel M(CH_M) 15002 is extracted, and it arranges to the same frequency band as the original frequency band, respectively. Therefore, the signal of channel K(CH_K) 15001 turns into a signal of frequency band 15005, as shown in Drawing 150 (b), and the signal of channel M(CH_M) 15002 turns into a signal of frequency band 15006, as shown in Drawing 150 (b).<br />And frequency conversion part 14604 for two or more abnormal-conditions signal existence of Drawing 146 outputs the signal containing the ingredient of four frequency bands shown in (b) of Drawing 150.

1913In Drawing 150, the horizontal axis of Drawing 150 (a) and Drawing 150 (b) is frequency, and Drawing 150 (a) and Drawing 150 (b) show frequency assignment of the same frequency band. 15001 and 15005 are the same frequency bands, and 15002 and 15006 become the same frequency band.<br />The signal (14605) with which filter 14603 outputted synchronizer 14607 of Drawing 146, The signal (14606) which frequency conversion part 14604 for abnormal-conditions signal existence outputted, and the signal (14601_3) inputted from BS antenna 14600_3 are considered as an input, and composition on a frequency axis is performed. Therefore, synchronizer 14607 of Drawing 146 acquires and outputs a signal (14608) with the frequency component of Drawing 152. Television 14609 will consider this signal (14608) as an input. Therefore, it can view and listen to television in the receiving quality of high data by drawing one signal wire.<br />Therefore, it is with a plurality of antennas (using the same frequency band) about a plurality of abnormal-conditions signal among the signals which the broadcasting station in a frequency axis transmits. By drawing the signal wire into the home indicated above to the frequency band which is using the transmission method which transmits at the same time, the television (terminal) can obtain the receiving quality of high data, and has the advantage that wiring of the signal wire in a home can be lessened. At this time, the frequency band using the transmission method with which a broadcasting station transmits one abnormal-conditions signal using one or more antennas may exist as mentioned above.

1914In this embodiment, as shown in Drawing 141 (Drawing 153 (a)), the example which arranges a relay device on the roof of collective housing, etc. was explained. However, the locating position of a relay device may be composition which takes lessons from 1 individual residence and is allotted one, when drawing a signal in the television of each home, etc. as shown in Drawing 153 (b) as it does not restrict to this and being mentioned above for example. Or as shown in Drawing 153 (c), when re-distributing the broadcast wave which the cable-TV-industry company received the broadcast wave (a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals which the broadcasting station transmitted), and received at each home with a cable (cable), it may be used as some a cable entrepreneur's relay systems.<br />Namely, each relay device of Drawing 142, Drawing 143, Drawing 144 and Drawing 145 which were shown in this embodiment, and Drawing 146, as shown in Drawing 153 (a), it may arrange on the roof of collective housing, etc. -- it carries out and is shown in Drawing 153 (b) -- as good, though lessons is taken from 1 individual residence and one is allotted, when drawing a signal in the television of each home, etc. -- it carries out and is shown in Drawing 153 (c) -- as When re-distributing the broadcast wave which the cable-TV-industry company received the broadcast wave (a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals which the broadcasting station transmitted), and received at each home with a cable (cable), it may be used as some a cable entrepreneur's relay systems.

1915&lt;Embodiment N&gt;<br />The embodiment indicated on these specifications was shown in this embodiment, A plurality of abnormal-conditions signals simultaneously transmitted to the same frequency band from a plurality of antennas using the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly are received, and the system re-distributed with cable TV (cable) is explained. (The change pattern of a Precoding procession used in the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession still more regularly) Also when the change pattern of a Precoding procession which may be any of the change pattern of the Precoding procession written in this specification, and is different from this specification is used, it is possible to carry out this embodiment. In addition, it is although this specification explains the case where the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is used, The method explained by this embodiment can be carried out also with the case where the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is not used.

1916The cable-TV-industry company holds the device which receives the electric wave of the broadcast wave transmitted on radio, For example, a broadcast wave does not arrive easily, with the cable, data (for example, an animation, a sound, data information, etc.) is re-distributed to each home, and the connection service of the Internet and the connection service of a telephone line may be provided for it in a broad sense.<br />When a broadcasting station transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals with a plurality of (it is the same time at the same frequency band) antennas, a problem may occur in this cable-TV-industry company. The problem is explained below.<br />Transmit frequency for a broadcasting station to transmit each broadcast wave is defined beforehand, and let it be a thing. In Drawing 154, it is horizontal-axis frequency, and as shown in Drawing 154, suppose that a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals were transmitted with a plurality of (it is the same time at the same frequency band) antennas in a channel (it is CH_K when it is Drawing 154) with a broadcasting station. In stream 1 (Stream1) and stream 2 (Stream2) of CH_K, different data is included and a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals will be generated from stream 1 (Stream1) and stream 2 (Stream2).<br />At this time, a broadcasting station is radio and a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals of channel K (CH_K) will transmit it to a cable-TV-industry company using a plurality of (it is the same time at the same frequency band) antennas. Therefore, as shown in the embodiment indicated on these specifications, to the frequency band of channel K (CH_K), a broadcasting station will receive the signal simultaneously transmitted using a plurality of antennas, and will restore to him and decode a cable-TV-industry company.<br />However, as shown in Drawing 154, it is at channel K (CH_K), Since a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals (in the case of Drawing 154 two) are transmitted, when these are distributed to a cable (one cable) by a path through method as they were, the receiving quality of the data of the data contained in channel K (CH_K) deteriorates greatly at each home of the point of a cable.

1917Although transmitting the signal which the cable-TV-industry company performed frequency conversion to a plurality of received signals of channel K (CH_K), respectively, changed into two or more different frequency bands, and was compounded there as shown in the above-mentioned embodiment M is also considered, Other frequency bands may be occupied by another channel, the satellite broadcasting channel, etc., and may be difficult to use.<br />Then, in this embodiment, even if it is when frequency conversion is difficult, the technique of re-distributing with a cable a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals transmitted to the same time by the same frequency band that the broadcasting station transmitted is indicated.<br />The composition of the relay device in a cable-TV-industry company is shown in Drawing 155. Here, in the case of the communications system of 2x2MIMO (i.e., a broadcasting station), two abnormal-conditions signals are transmitted to the same time by the same frequency band, and the case where a relay device receives using two antennas is shown.<br />A cable-TV-industry company's relay device is provided with receiving part 15502 and data generating part 15504 for distribution.<br />The received signal (15500_1, 15500_2) received with antenna 15500_1 and antenna 15500_2, As this specification indicated, in receiving part 15502, it is [ inverse transform processing of Precoding, and ] /. Or processing etc. which return a phase are performed, and receiving part 15502 obtains data signal rs1 (15403_1) and data signal rs2 (15403_2), and outputs them to data generating part 15404 for distribution. Receiving part 15502 outputs the information about the transmission method used for the information and broadcasting station about the signal processing method used for a recovery and decoding of the received signal transmitting an abnormal-conditions signal to data generating part 15504 for distribution as information 15503_3 about a signal processing method.<br />Although receiving part 15502 shows the case where data is outputted by two lines, data signal rs1 (15403_1) and data signal rs2 (15403_2), in Drawing 155, it is not what was restricted to this (here an example), for example, may output data by one line.

1918Wireless section 703_X specifically shown in Drawing 7 which receiving part 15502 indicated on these specifications, 703_Y, It has the composition which consists of channel change estimating part 705_1 of abnormal-conditions signal z1, channel change estimating part 705_2 of abnormal-conditions signal z2, channel change estimating part 707_1 of abnormal-conditions signal Z1, channel change estimating part 707_2 of abnormal-conditions signal Z2, control information decoding part 709, and signal processing part 711. Antenna 15500_1 shown in Drawing 155 and 15500_2 correspond to antenna 701_X and 701_Y which are shown in Drawing 7, respectively. However, unlike the signal processing part shown in Drawing 8 of Embodiment 1, signal processing part 711 is provided with the composition shown in Drawing 156 in this embodiment.<br />As shown in Drawing 156, a signal processing part with which receiving part 15502 concerning this embodiment is provided comprises the following: INNER MIMO, Detection section 803 Storage part 815, Logarithm likelihood calculation part 15602A, Logarithm likelihood calculation part 15602B, Hard decision part 15604A, hard decision part 15604B, and coefficient generation part 15601.<br />In Drawing 156, about the portion which is common in Drawing 8, the same numerals are attached and the explanation is omitted here.<br />Logarithm likelihood calculation part 15602A computes a logarithm likelihood like logarithm likelihood calculation part 805A shown in Drawing 8, and outputs logarithm likelihood signal 15603A to hard decision part 15604A.<br />Similarly, logarithm likelihood calculation part 15602B computes a logarithm likelihood like logarithm likelihood calculation part 805B shown in Drawing 8, and outputs logarithm likelihood signal 15603B to hard decision part 15604B.<br />Hard decision part 15604A performs a hard decision to logarithm likelihood signal 15603A, acquires the bit value, sets this to data signal rs1 (15503_1), and outputs it to data generating part 15504 for distribution.

1919Similarly, hard decision part 15604B performs a hard decision to logarithm likelihood signal 15603B, acquires the bit value, sets this to data signal rs2 (15503_2), and outputs it to data generating part 15504 for distribution.<br />And also [ like coefficient generation part 819, coefficient generation part 15601 generates a coefficient and outputs it to INNER MIMO detection section 803 ], From signal 818 about the information, including information, a modulation method, etc. for specifying the change pattern of a Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly, on the transmission method which the broadcasting station (sending set) notified, The information which was used for two signals and which starts a modulation method at least is extracted, and signal 15503_3 about the information on a signal processing method including the information concerning this modulation method is outputted to data generating part 15504 for distribution.<br />Although receiving part 15502 performs the recovery by a place which performs a hard decision in quest of a logarithm likelihood, it is not performing an error correction with the example here, so that the above explanation may show.<br />Although the composition possessing a logarithm likelihood calculation part and a hard decision part is taken in Drawing 156, INNER MIMO detection section 803 does not need to perform a soft decision, but may perform a hard decision, and does not need to possess a logarithm likelihood calculation part and a hard decision part in this case. It is not necessary to set the result of a hard decision to rs1 and rs2, and is good also considering the result of the soft decision of each bit as rs1 and rs2.<br />Data generating part 15504 for distribution of Drawing 155 considers information 15503_3 about data signal rs1 (15503_1), data signal rs2 (15503_2), and a signal processing method as an input, generates distribution signal 15505, and distributes it to each home of a contract place.<br />From here, how data generating part 15504 for distribution of Drawing 155 generates distribution signal 15505 is explained in detail using Drawing 157 - Drawing 159.

1920Drawing 157 is a block diagram showing the composition of data generating part 15504 for distribution. As shown in Drawing 157, data generating part 15504 for distribution comprises bonding link 15701, modulation part 15703, and distribution part 15705.<br />Bonding link 15701 considers the information (15503_3) about the transmission method used for the information and broadcasting station about data signal rs1 (15503_1), data signal rs2 (15503_2), and a signal processing method transmitting an abnormal-conditions signal as an input, Data signal rs1 and data signal rs2 which are defined for the information about the transmission method used for the information and broadcasting station about a signal processing method transmitting an abnormal-conditions signal are summarized, and data coupling signal 15702 is outputted to modulation part 15703. In Drawing 157, although data signal rs1 (15503_1) and data signal rs2 (15503_2) are indicated, as Above described, in Drawing 156, the composition which bundles rs1 and rs2 and outputs data by one line can be considered. In this case, bonding link 15701 in Drawing 157 can be deleted.<br />Modulation part 15703 considers information 15503_3 about the transmission method used for the information and broadcasting station about data coupling signal 15702 and a signal processing method transmitting an abnormal-conditions signal as an input, performs mapping according to the set-up modulation method, and generates and outputs abnormal-conditions signal 15704. The details of the setting method of a modulation method are mentioned below.<br />Distribution part 15705 considers as an input transmission method 15503_3 used for the information and broadcasting station about abnormal-conditions signal 15704 and a signal processing method transmitting an abnormal-conditions signal, As the control information for abnormal-conditions signal 15704, and the recovery and decoding in the television receiver of each home, etc., Distribution signal 15505 include the control information which shows the information on an error correcting code, including the information on numerals, the code rate of an error correcting code, etc., besides the information on the modulation method used for abnormal-conditions signal 15704 is distributed to each home of a contract place via a cable (cable).<br />The details of the processing in bonding link 15701 and modulation part 15703 of Drawing 157 are explained using Drawing 158 and Drawing 159.

1921Drawing 158 is a key map of data signal rs1 and data signal rs2 which are the inputs to data generating part 15504 for distribution. In Drawing 158, a time-axis is taken along a horizontal axis and each square of Drawing 158 shows the data block which must be distributed at once in each time. As an error correcting code, organization numerals may be used and non-organizing numerals may be used. The data block concerned shall comprise data after error-correcting-code-izing.<br />Both the modulation methods used for transmitting data signal rs1 and data signal rs2 here presuppose that it was 16QAM. In other words, let the modulation method which uses the modulation method used in order to transmit stream 1 (Stream1) of channel K of Drawing 154 (CH_K) in order to transmit 16QAM and stream 2 (Stream2) be 16QAM.<br />Since the number of bits which the number of bits which constitutes one symbol of data signal rs1 in this case is 4 bits, and constitutes one symbol of data signal rs2 will be 4 bits, Each data block (rs1_1, rs1_2, rs1_3, rs1_4, rs2_1, rs2_2, rs2_3, rs2_4) shown in Drawing 158 will call it 4-bit data, respectively.<br />As shown in Drawing 158, it restores to data rs1_1 and data rs2_1 at time t1, It restores to data rs1_2 and data rs2_2 at time t2, and restores to data rs1_3 and data rs2_3 at time t3, and data rs1_4 and data rs2_4 presuppose that it is the data to which it restored at time t4.

1922There is an advantage that their delay until the data which the broadcasting station transmitted reaches television (terminal) is small if both data rs1_1 shown in Drawing 158 and rs1_2 are distributed to each home to the same timing. Similarly, as for distributing data rs1_4 and rs2_4 to the same timing by the same timing, data rs1_2 and rs2_2 are [ data rs1_3 and rs2_3 ] good to the same timing.<br />Therefore, data generating part 15504 for distribution of Drawing 155 bundles to one the data (symbol) transmitted from data signal rs1 and data signal rs2 which were received from receiving part 15502 to the same timing, and it performs processing so that it can transmit as one symbol.<br />That is, as shown in Drawing 159, one data symbol consists of data with which one symbol of rs1_1 and one symbol of rs2_1 were combined. When it specifically judges that rs1_1 is the 4-bit data "0000" by a hard decision temporarily and judges that rs1_2 is the 4-bit data "1111", rs1_1+rs2_1 shown in Drawing 158 becomes the data "00001111." Let this 8-bit data be one data symbol. Similarly, let data rs1_2+rs2_2 which combined one symbol of rs1_2, and one symbol of rs2_2 be one data symbol, Let data rs1_3+rs2_3 which combined one symbol of rs1_3, and one symbol of rs2_3 be one data symbol, and let data rs1_4+rs2_4 which combined one symbol of rs1_4, and one symbol of rs2_4 be one data symbol. Drawing 159 takes a time-axis along a horizontal axis, and one square shows the data symbol which should be transmitted at once. It is the sign "+" for convenience, and although expressed, "+" in Drawing 159 as used in Drawing 159 does not mean addition. "+" as used in Drawing 159 means using the data of the form where two data was put in order simply.

1923By the way, data rs1_1+rs2_1, rs1_2+rs2_2, rs1_3+rs2_3, and rs1_4+rs2_4 are 8-bit data, respectively, and they are data which must be simultaneously distributed to each home. However, although the modulation method used for data signal rs1 and rs2 transmitting, respectively is 16QAM, in 16QAM, 8-bit data cannot be gathered simultaneously and cannot be sent.<br />Then, modulation part 15703 modulates inputted data coupling signal 15702 by the modulation method which can transmit 8-bit data at once, i.e., 256QAM. That is, modulation part 15703 acquires the information on the modulation method used for transmission of two data signals from information 15503_3 about signal processing, The value acquired by multiplying the number of Consta ration points of each of two obtained modulation methods is modulated with the modulation method made into the number of Consta ration points. And modulation part 15703 outputs abnormal-conditions signal 15704 acquired by modulating with a new modulation method (explanation here 256QAM) to distribution part 15705.<br />When the number of the abnormal-conditions signals transmitted from the broadcasting station is one, receiving part 15502 and data generating part 15504 for distribution distribute the signal received by the path through method as it was to a cable (cable) as it is. (Here, although a hard decision is performed and being explained by how to modulate again, it is not what was restricted to this, and for example, the received signal itself may be amplified and it may transmit.)<br />In Drawing 155, distribution signal 15505 distributed by the cable (cable) is received by television receiver 16000 shown in Drawing 160. receiver 8500 which shows television receiver 16000 shown in Drawing 160 in Drawing 85 -- abbreviated -- about what is provided with equivalent composition and provided with the same function, the same numerals are attached and explanation is omitted.

1924Tuner 8501 which received distribution signal 15505 from cable 16001 extracts the signal of the channel specified, and outputs it to demodulation section 16002.<br />In addition to the function of demodulation section 8500 shown in Drawing 85, demodulation section 16002 is provided with the following functions. If the signal transmitted from tuner 8501 detects that two or more abnormal-conditions signals were transmitted to the same frequency band in same time from a broadcasting station according to the control information by which demodulation section 16002 is contained in distribution signal 15505, One inputted signal is divided into two or more signals according to the control information concerned. That is, the signal acquired by performing processing which returns the signal of the state of Drawing 159 to the state of Drawing 158 will be outputted to stream I/O part 8503. Demodulation section 16002 asks for the logarithm likelihood of the received signal, divides the data produced by performing a hard decision according to the ratio with which a plurality of signals are mixed, processes an error correction etc. to the data after division, and obtains data.<br />Thus, the channel into which transmission of a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals was made by the same frequency band in same time from the broadcasting station to the cable-TV-industry company in the broadcast distributed by the cable (cable) can also restore to them and decode television receivers 16000, such as each home.

1925By the way, both the modulation methods used for two transmission, data signal rs1 and rs2, in this embodiment are although it is 16QAM, The combination of the modulation method which is used for each abnormal-conditions signal in transmitting a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals is not restricted to the combination of 16QAM and 16QAM. Combination as shown in the following table 8 as an example can be considered.<br /><tables num="8"><img file="WO2012144202A1_D0714.tif" /></tables><br /><br />Combination of the modulation method used for Table 8 generating the number of two streams which a broadcasting station generates (the number of transmitting abnormal-conditions signals of Table 8), and two streams (eight table#1) It is the table which matched the second change tone method which is a modulation method of stream 1 and is a modulation method used when carrying out a second change tone to #2 becoming a modulation method of stream 2 by modulation part 15703 to each combination.

1926In Drawing 157, The information and broadcasting station about the signal processing method which modulation part 15703 considers as an input transmit an abnormal-conditions signal. The second change tone method corresponding to what is in agreement with the combination of the modulation method shown using information 15503_3 about the used transmission method will call it the modulation method used by modulation part 15703. The combination shown here is the number of Consta ration points of a second change tone method, as been an example and shown in Table 8, It is equivalent to the value which multiplied the number of the signal points in the multiplication value of the number of Consta ration points of the set of the modulation method of two streams, i.e., the I(the phase)-Q (rectangular cross) plane of the modulation method used by #1, and the number of the signal points in the I(the phase)-Q (rectangular cross) plane of the modulation method used by #2. As long as the number of Consta ration points of the second change tone method (the number of the signal points of the second change tone method in an I(the phase)-Q (rectangular cross) plane) has exceeded this multiplication value, it may use modulation methods other than the second change tone method shown in Table 8.<br />Even if it is a case where the number of streams which a broadcasting station transmits is three or more, the modulation method used by modulation part 15703 from the multiplication value of the number of Consta ration points of a modulation method used by each stream is determined.<br />In this embodiment, in a relay device, although the hard decision was performed and the case where data was combined was shown, this may be a soft decision. When a soft decision is used, based on the value of a soft value, it is necessary to amend the baseband signal which the second change tone method mapped.<br />As Above indicated, in Drawing 155, it has the composition that rs1 and rs2 exist, but these may be bundled to one and receiving part 15502 may output. Although a data line is set to one at this time, when the number of bits which the number of bits transmitted as one symbol of stream 1 transmits as 4 and one symbol of stream 2 is 4, by the data line tied to above one, receiving part 15502 will output 8 bits as one symbol. At this time, the modulation method which modulation part 15703 of Drawing 157 uses for a second change tone becomes being the same as that of above-mentioned explanation, for example, serves as 256QAM. That is, Table 8 can be used.<br />The example of another composition of the relay device in the cable-TV-industry company who showed in Drawing 155 is shown in Drawing 161. Unlike what was shown in Drawing 155, receiving part 16102 and data generating part 16104 for distribution of the relay device shown in Drawing 161 perform processing only about the signal with which a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals were transmitted to the same time by the same frequency band at the broadcasting station. And as Above explained a plurality of signals, it joins together, and data generating part 16104 for distribution generates and outputs signal 16105 which put the signal which modulated the modulation method with a different modulation method from the time of the transmission from a broadcasting station on the frequency band.

1927On the other hand, received signal 15501_1 received with antenna 15500_1 is supplied also to filter 16106 in addition to receiving part 16102.<br />From received signal 15501_1, when a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals are transmitted by the same frequency band in same time at a broadcasting station, filter 16106 omits only the signal of the frequency band, and outputs signal 16107 after filtering to synchronizer 16108.<br />And synchronizer 16108 compounds signal 16107 after filtering, and signal 16105 outputted from data generating part 16104 for distribution, generates distribution signal 15505, and distributes it to each home by a cable (cable).<br />By having such composition, a cable-TV-industry company's relay device does not need to process the signal of frequency bands other than the frequency band to which a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals were transmitted at the same time.<br />In this embodiment, although the relay device in a cable-TV-industry company was explained, it is not limited to this. Although it corresponds to the form shown in Drawing 153 (c), the relay device shown in this embodiment can be used as the relay device for collective housing, or a relay device for each homes, as shown not only in this but in Drawing 153 (a) and (b).

1928In this embodiment, although frequency conversion is not performed to the frequency band to which a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals were transmitted, frequency conversion as shown in embodiment M to the frequency band to which a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals were transmitted may be performed.<br /><br />(Embodiment O)

1929Although other embodiments described the case where the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly was used for a broadcast system, this embodiment explains the case where it uses for a communication system. When using for a communication system, as shown in Drawing 162, the following three communication forms can be considered.<br />(1) In multicasting communication, like an embodiment besides ..., if the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is used for a base station, it will become possible to many terminals to transmit data.<br />For example, it can use for the multicasting communication which carries out simultaneous distribution of the contents from base station 16201 to personal digital assistants 16202a-16202c (Drawing 162 (a)).<br />(2) In unicast communication and the case of closed-loop (when there is feedback information from a communication terminal (the information on CSI (Channel*State*Information) is fed back)) Or the Precoding procession I want you to use for a base station is specified by the terminal side... Base station, Information on CSI which the terminal transmitted from the Precoding procession currently prepared, and/ Or a Precoding procession is chosen based on the information on the Precoding procession I want you to use for a base station, Precoding is given to a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals using it, and a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals are transmitted using the same time and the same frequency band from a plurality of antennas. An example is shown in Drawing 162 (b).<br />(3) In unicast communication and the case of open-loop (a Precoding procession is not changed based on the information from a communication terminal) ... The Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly is used for a base station. An example is shown in Drawing 162 (c).

1930In Drawing 162, although the example of communication between a base station and a communication terminal is illustrated, it may be communication of base stations or communication terminals.<br />Hereinafter, the composition of the base station (transmitter) for realizing these communication forms and a personal digital assistant (receiver) is explained.<br />Drawing 163 shows the example of composition of the transceiver machine of the base station concerning this embodiment. The transceiver machine of the base station shown in Drawing 163 attaches the same numerals about what has a function equivalent to the composition of the transmitter shown in Drawing 4, and omits explanation, and it explains different composition.<br />As shown in Drawing 163, a transceiver machine of a base station comprises the following: It adds to composition shown in Drawing 4, and is antenna 16301 further. Wireless section 16303, Feedback information analyzing parts 16305. It replaces with dignity attachment composition information generating part 314, and has dignity attachment composition information generating part 16314.<br />Antenna 16301 is an antenna for receiving the data which the communication partner of the transceiver machine of a base station transmitted. At this time, the feedback information which the communication partner transmitted will be acquired in the portion of the receiver of the base station shown in Drawing 163.<br />Wireless section 16303 outputs data signal 16304 acquired by getting over and decoding received signal 16302 received with antenna 16301 to feedback information analyzing parts 16305.<br />The feedback information to which the communication partner transmitted feedback information analyzing parts 16305 from data signal 16304, for example, the information on CSI,/ Or information on the Precoding procession I want you to use for a base station, a correspondence procedure required of a base station (demand information on whether it is multicasting communication and whether it is unicast communication) And the demand information on whether it is open-loop and whether it is closed-loop is acquired, and it outputs as feedback information 16306.

1931Dignity attachment composition information generating part 16314 considers frame composition signal 16313 and feedback information 16306 as an input, It is based on both frame composition signal 16313 and feedback information 16306 (priority may be given to the demand of a terminal). Priority may be given to the hope of a base station. Control information 16315 which determines whether to consider it as the transmission method of (1) or (2) or, and (3) of this embodiment, and includes the information on the determined correspondence procedure is outputted. Information about the change pattern of a Precoding procession used with the Puri coding method which changes a Precoding procession regularly when the transmission method of (1) and (3) of this embodiment was chosen, When the transmission method of (2) of this embodiment is chosen, the information on the Precoding procession to be used will be included in control signal 16315.<br />Dignity attachment synchronizers 308A and 308B consider control information 16315 including the information on the determined correspondence procedure as an input, process Precoding based on the specified Precoding procession, and output signal 309B after processing.<br />By carrying out like this, transmission corresponding to the three above-mentioned cases can be performed with a transmitter. In order that the base station might choose either of the transmission methods of (1) or (2) or, and (3) of this embodiment or may notify the information on the transmission method of etc to the terminal which is a communication partner, wireless section 310A is considering control information 16315 including the information on the determined correspondence procedure as the input. Wireless section 310A generates the symbol for transmitting the information on the determined correspondence procedure, and inserts it in a transmitting frame, and transmitted signal 311A containing this symbol is sent out as an electric wave from antenna 312A.

1932Drawing 164 is a figure showing the example of composition of the receiver of the terminal concerning this embodiment. As shown in Drawing 164, a receiver comprises the following: Receiving part 16403, CSI generation part 16405, Feedback information generating section 16407, Transmission section 16409.<br />Receiving part 16403 is provided with composition equivalent to the composition shown in Drawing 7 of the above-mentioned Embodiment 1, and Drawing 8, and obtains the data transmitted with the transmitter by considering as an input received signal 16402A received with antenna 16401A, and received signal 16402B received with antenna 16401B.<br />At this time, receiving part 16403 outputs signal 16404 of the channel estimation information acquired in the process in which data is obtained to CSI generation part 16405. Signal 16404 of channel estimation information shall be outputted from each channel change estimating part (705_1, 705_2, 707_1, 707_2) shown in Drawing 7, for example.

1933CQI which becomes the origin of the feedback information (CSI:Channel*State*Information) which feeds back CSI generation part 16405 to a transmitter based on inputted signal 16404 of channel estimation information (ChannelQuality)<br />Information, RI (Rank*Indication), and PMI (Precoding*Matrix*Indicator) are generated and it outputs to feedback information generating section 16407. CQI, RI, and PMI are generated by a technique as usual. It is the information which specifies the Precoding procession for Precoding I want you to perform with the transmitter which PMI wishes to have in a receiver especially.<br />Feedback information generating section 16407 generates CQI, RI, and PMI to CSI generated by CSI generation part 16405. The example of frame composition of feedback information (CSI) is shown in Drawing 165.<br />Transmission section 16409 modulates the feedback information (CSI) transmitted from feedback information generating section 16407, and transmits abnormal-conditions signal 16410 to a transmitter from antenna 16411.

1934A terminal may feed back all the information on Drawing 165 to a base station, and may feed back a part of Drawing 165 to a base station. The information to feed back is not what was restricted to the information on Drawing 165. Although a base station will make feedback information from a terminal one standard and the transmission method of (1) or (2) or, and (3) of this embodiment will be chosen, The base station does not necessarily need to choose the transmission method which transmits a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals using a plurality of antennas, and may choose other transmission methods, for example, the transmission method which transmits one abnormal-conditions signal from one or more antennas, based on the feedback information from a terminal.<br />By making it above, a suitable transmission method can be chosen to the communication form indicated to (1) of this embodiment, (2), and (3), and this becomes possible to obtain the receiving quality of data good [ a terminal ] in [ any ] a communication form.<br />

1935The present invention can be widely applied to the radio system which transmits an abnormal-conditions signal which is different from a plurality of antennas, respectively, for example, is applied to an OFDM-MIMO communications system, and is preferred. A cable-communications system with a plurality of transmitting parts (for example, PLC (Power Line Communication) system) In an optical fiber communications system and a DSL (Digital Subscriber Line: digital subscriber line) system, It can apply also to the case where MIMO transmission is performed, and a plurality of abnormal-conditions signals which were explained by the present invention will be transmitted using a plurality of transmitting parts at this time. An abnormal-conditions signal may be transmitted from a plurality of transmitting parts.

1936302A and 302B Coding machine<br />304A and 304B Inta Riva<br />306A and 306B Mapping part<br />314 Dignity Attachment Composition Information Generating Part<br />308A and 308B Dignity attachment synchronizer<br />310A and 310B Wireless section<br />312A and 312B Antenna<br />402 Coding Machine<br />404 Distribution Part<br />504#1,504#2 Transmitting antenna<br />505#1,505#2 Receiving antenna<br />600 Dignity Attachment Synchronizer<br />703_X Wireless section<br />701_X Antenna<br />705_1 Channel change estimating part<br />705_2 Channel change estimating part<br />707_1 Channel change estimating part<br />707_2 Channel change estimating part<br />709 Control Information Decoding Part<br />711 Signal Processing Part<br />803 INNER MIMO Detection Section<br />805A and 805B Logarithm likelihood calculation part<br />807A and 807B Deinterleaver<br />809A and 809B Logarithm likelihood ratio calculation part<br />811A, an 811 B Soft-in/soft-out decoder<br />813A and 813B Inta Riva<br />815 Storage Part<br />819 Dignity Attachment Coefficient Generation Part<br />901 Soft-in/soft-out Decoder<br />903 Distribution Machine<br />1301 A-1301B OFDM method related treating part<br />1402A-1402A Serial-parallel-conversion part<br />1404A-1404B Rearranging part<br />1406A-1406B Reverse fast Fourier transform section<br />1408A-1408B Wireless section<br />2200 Precoding weight Generation Part<br />2300 Rearrangement Part<br />4002 Coding Machine Group